Machines Installations Industrial Communications

Automation & Control Machines & Installations with industrial communications
Select the winning network

Catalogue January
07 7
page blanche
Flexibility
b
Ingenuity
Auto-adapts to its environment, "plug & play" b Application functions, control, communication and diagnostics embedded in the products b User-friendly operation either directly on the product or remotely
b
Simplicity
b Cost effective optimum offers that make selection easy for most typical applications b Products that are easy to understand for users, electricians and automation specialists b User-friendly intuitive programming
This international site allows you to access all the Telemecanique products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b Complete library: technical documents, catalogs, certificates, FAQs, brochures... b Selection guides from the e-catalog. b Product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, a discussion forum, the list of country contacts... To live automation solutions every day!
Interchangeable modular functions, to better meet the requirements for extensions b Software and accessories common to multiple product families
Compactness
b
High functionality in a minimum of space b Freedom in implementation
Openness
b Compliance with field bus, connection, and software standards b Enabling decentralised or remote surveillance via the web with Transparent Ready products
Telemecanique, catalogues for

p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Detection
Automatisation
Automatisation
Operator dialog
Motion and Drives
!
Global Detection Electronic and electromechanical sensors n 821410 MKTED206101EN Photo-electric sensors Proximity sensors Capacitive proximity sensors Ultrasonic sensors Limit switches Pressure switches Rotary encoders Radio frequency identification Machine cabling accessories
!
Modicon Momentum distributed I/O and control n 807861 MKTED205061EN
!
Automation and relay functions n 70455 MKTED204011EN Plug-in relays Electronic timers Control relays Counters Smart relays Software PLCs and safety controllers programming software
!
Control and signalling components n 805911 MKTED205021EN Control and signalling units Cam switches Beacons and indicator banks Control and pendant stations Controllers Front panels, Mounting kits Emergency stops Foot switches
!
Motion control Lexium 05 n 808610 DIA7ED2050910 EN
!
Automation platform Modicon Quantum and Unity - Concept Proworx software n 802621 MKTED204071EN
!
Motion control Lexium 15 n 816811 DIA2ED2060506EN Servodrives and Servomotors Motion control modules Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum
!
Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software n 802625 MKTED204072EN
!
Human-Machine interfaces n 821230 MKTED206071EN Operator interface terminals Industrial PCs Web servers HMI and SCADA PC-based software Software Operator terminal software
!
Soft starters and variable speed drives n 960142 MKTED206111EN Soft starters and variable speed drives Software Software for drives and motors Motor control programming software
!
Automation platform Modicon TSX Micro and PL7 software n 70984 MKTED204012EN PLCs, PC based control Distributed I/O Communication
Not all products shown in this catalogue are available in every country. Check individual countrys web site or Sales Office for product availability. See on: www.schneider-electric.com
Simply Smart !
p p p p p p p p p p p p
all Automation & Control functions
Motor control
Machine safety
This catalogue contains Automation and Control function products relating to Safety
Interfaces & I/O
Power supplies
Networks & communication

This catalogue contains Automation and Control function products relating Communication
!
Motor starter solutions Control and protection components n 814711 MKTED205103EN Contactors Circuit-breakers, fuse carriers Thermal relays Combinations, motor controllers Mounting solutions Motor starter mounting kits
!
Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes n 70263 MKTED203113EN Plug-in relays Analog converters Discrete interfaces Pre-wired interfaces IP67 Splitter boxes Connectors Cable ends, terminal blocks
!
Power supplies and transformers Phaseo n 822591 DIA3ED2061209EN Switch mode power supplies Filtered rectified power supplies Transformers
!
Safety solutions using Preventa n 816630 MKTED206051EN Safety PLCs Safety controllers Safety monitors Safety solutions on AS-Interface cabling system Safety switches Safety light curtains Safety mats Emergency stops, control stations Enabling switches Foot switches, Beacons & indicator banks Switch disconnectors Thermal-magnetic motor Circuit breakers Enclosed D.O.L. starters Software XPSMFWIN configuration software XPSMCWIN configuration software
!
Machines & Installations with industrial communications n xxxxxx MKTED207011EN Prefferred implementations Ethernet TCP/IP, the universel communication standard CANopen for machines and installations AS-Interface, simple and safe Produts: Human-Machine interface Controllers and PLCs Field devices Infrastructure and wiring Gateways Software and tools Collaborative Automation Partner Proram & Partners
!
IP 20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB n 820670 MKTED206061EN Modules for automation island Network interface, power distribution Digital I/O, analogs and application-specific Software STB configuration software
General contents
Machines & Installations with industrial communications
1 Networks in Machines and Installations

Introduction networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2 Implementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6
2 Implementations
Ethernet in Machines and Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2 CANopen in Machines and Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8 AS-Interface in Machines and Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/26
3 Ethernet in Machines and Installations

Services classes offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 Human-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6 Controllers and PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/18 Field devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34 Infrastructure and wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/44 Ethernet gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/64 Diagnostic software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/68
4 CANopen in Machines and Installations

Conformance classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 Controllers and PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/6 Field devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14 Infrastructure and wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/48 CANopen gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/54
5 AS-Interface in Machines and Installations

Controllers and PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2 Field devices for generic products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6 Field devices for control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/18 Dedicated components for dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/42 Safety solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/48 Infrastructure and wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/56 AS-Interface gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/72 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/76
6 Collaborative Automation Partner Program

Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2 Partner data sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/6
7 Technical information
Ethernet, system approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 CANopen technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22 AS-Interface technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/26 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/34
Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/42
1/0
Contents
1 - Networks in Machines and Installations
Introduction networks
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2 b Ethernet TCP/IP - the universal communication standard. . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/3 b CANopen - for machines and installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4 b AS-Interface - simple and safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/5
Implementations
b Preferred implementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6 b System User Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/8
1/1
Introduction Networks
Networks in Machines and Installations

Presentation
Introduction
Company environments are continuously changing due to the pressure of competition and the need for profitability. It is vital to take advantage of opportunities quickly. The challenge of today's world is finding the appropriate solution for the customer's needs. Schneider Electric's core network products, based on common international standards, meet this requirements for industrial automation systems.
Internet
FIREWALL
Firewall
Corporate Level Router

ROUTER
UPS
Develop Diagnosis
SCADA Plant Level
ROUTER
Machine Level
Control Level
3 rd PARTY
Sensor Level
The rigid systems built in the past were restricted when it became necessary to adapt - e.g. new functions required or due to a changing environment. To overcome the restrictions of a closed system the use of networks is becoming more and more popular. The Schneider Electric core networks are such networks - open and designed to an international standard. With this network architecture, your automation system will be flexible and future proof so that it can be adapted to a changing environment as well as to new functionality. On top of this versatility, this architecture also provides the right technical performance based on a combination of cost effectiveness and network power.
1/2

Presentation
Ethernet TCP/IP - the universal communication standard

The recognition of Ethernet TCP/IP, both in organizations and on the internet, has made it the communication standard of today. Its wide use is leading to a reduction in connection costs, increased performance and the addition of new functions, which all combine to ensure its durability. With its high speed, the network no longer limits the performance of the application. The architecture can evolve without any difficulty. The products or devices remain compatible, ensuring the long-term durability of the system. Schneider Electric has selected Ethernet as the universal standard for process and control systems.
1/3

Presentation
CANopen - for machines and installations
Automation architectures are implemented according to the requirements of the end user and the constructor of the automation system. The selection of the network, the controller, and the other components are conform to these requirements. CANopen has proven its versatility and reliability for more than 10 years in several application domains such as: medical equipment, trains, lifts and a variety of machines and installations. Schneider Electric has selected CANopen for machines and installations due to its technical features and the resulting benefit of this to the automation world. The broad acceptance of CANopen has pushed this decision as more and more CANopen products are used in automation architectures. The significant growth of CANopen in 2005 with more than 20% is, once more, a confirmation of Schneider Electric's choice (1).
Altivar Premium, Modicon M340, Twido
Preventa Osicoder
Lexium
TeSysU
Advantys
Twin Line
(1) Source: CAN in Automation survey 2004.
1/4

Presentation
AS-Interface - simple and safe

Today's machines and installations have many actuators and sensors, must be extensible, and have often safety integrated. AS-Interface is the network at the actuator/sensor level that meets the needs of industrial automation system integration. It allows fast connection of sensors and actuators to the network. The AS-Interface network cable transports data and power on two wires to the sensors. Safety sensors integrate smoothly into the AS-Interface network on the same cable as the standard sensors. AS-Interface devices are easy to replace during maintenance with devices of the same type. The new slave automatically receives the address of the replaced one. AS-Interface is a cost-effective alternative to parallel wiring between the PLC and the sensors/actuators. AS-Interface is an open system and guarantees interchangeability and interoperability between the various products in the market. Your machine and installation will be easy to install and to maintain with AS-Interface.
AS-Interface in automation architectures

Automation architectures are implemented according to the requirements of the end user and the constructor of the automation system. The selection of the network, the controller and the other components conform to these requirements. AS-Interface is a mature network protocol. It has proven its ease of use and reliability for more than 10 years in several application domains as: conveying, assembly, mechanical handling, and a variety of machines and installations. AS-Interface is Schneider Electric's network of choice for the actuator/sensor level due to its technical features and its benefits for the automation world. AS-Interface has a broad acceptance in a growing market.
1 2
IP20 interface IP67 interface
1 2 1 2 3
Safety monitor Safety interface
1 2
Dedicated control components Dedicated dialogue components
Power supply units and earth fault detection AS-Interface master Tap-off
1 1 1 3
2 1
1/5

Implementations
Preferred implementations
From the synthesis of customers applications in the different domains like industry, building and infrastructure, Schneider Electric has defined 12 generic Automation Control Architectures with the existing product offer, so called "Preferred Implementations": b 7 for compact machines and installations. Compact means, all automation products are in one cabinet. b 5 for distributed or modular machines and installations. Distributed means, there are several cabinets needed around the machine or installation. 8 of the 12 Preferred Implementations include the Schneider Electric Network policy - based on Ethernet, CANopen and AS - Interface. The others are hardwired. A Preferred Implementation has been selected for its generic characteristics. Each Preferred Implementation: v answers to a set of customers values and automation requirements. v is tested, validated, documented and supported. The generic characteristics (PICCS) describe the relevant information about a machine or an installation. PICCS is the acronym of: b Performance (number and type of drives and motion units, type and functions of the controller, number of I/O, type and functions of HMI) b Installation (stand alone or networked, centralized or distributed, type of cabling) b Constraint (specific standards, rules, regulations, environmental constraints) b Cost (cost of the machine, ratio between automation/mechanic/electrical part) b Size (size of the machine, size of the cabling) With the PICCS it's easy to identify the best Preferred Implementations for the machine and installation .
Twido TWD NCO1M HMI
CANopen
Analysis with PICCS leads to Preferred implementation
Machine with a set of requirements
ATV 31
ATV 31
For each Preferred Implementation, a manual so called System User Guide with code examples and wiring diagrams is available.
1/6

Implementations
Preferred implementations (continued)

These generic implementations are the basis to select the right automation architecture for a machine or installation. It is a first answer to customer needs and can be seen as a "kick starter" for up to 80% of the customers' requirements.
One set of machines and installations: one set of requirements and one implementation
From simple to higher complex requirements
Machines and Installations with industrial communication are segmented into the four types: b Evolution b Modularity b Flexibility b Transparency Advanced Implementations To cover more specific requests, Advanced Implementations are available in addition. These more specific implementations fit more to one type of machine or installation. Thus this architecture is closer to one customer solution. An Advanced Implementation example: A Solution based on ATV71 controller inside without traditional PLC.
1/7
Presentation, User Guides

System User Guides
Presentation
Each Implementation is documented with a System User Guide explaining step by step the full implementation of the chosen system. It describes all required steps to initialize, parameterize, program and to start up the system. The System User Guides helps and advise you all along the life cycle and contain Information about the installation of hardware, software and communication with the core networks of Schneider Electric: Ethernet, CANopen or AS-Interface - based on the system view. The Hardware chapter explains all technical details of the considered components and provides the complete list of needed references. For the main components you get an overview of its features. The Software chapter provides all information related to the required software and its use. It includes hints on how to optimize the setup time of the individual products or how to create a program. A special chapter is dedicated to the communication to obtain the information about provided interfaces or protocols. How to select the master in the bus view, how to change the transmission rate or how to display information such as the I/O addresses.
Set of products
Twido TWD NCO1M HMI
Test, validation and documentation
CANopen
Customers confidence to finalize the solution
ATV 31
ATV 31
Set the confidence
Thus, the System User Guide is a kind of "Quick start system manual" for the described system. It is not intended to replace the product documentation.
1/8
Presentation, User Guides

System User Guides
Available System User Guides

Schneider Electric is permanently extending and updating the number of System User Guides. To obtain a System User Guide or the actual list of available System User Guides please contact your local Schneider Electric distributor or sales agency, or visit www.telemecanique.com.
1/9
2/0
Contents
2 - Implementations
Ethernet in Machines and Installations

b Benefits of Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2 b Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b Distributed Ethernet High Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5
CANopen in Machines and Installations

b Benefits of CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8 b Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/11 b Compact Evolutive Optimized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12 b Compact Evolutive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/14 b Compact Evolutive High Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/16 b Distributed CANopen Optimized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18 b Distributed CANopen Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20 b Distributed CANopen High Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/22 b ATV71 Controller inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24
AS-Interface in Machines and Installations

b Benefits of AS-Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/26 b Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/27 b Distributed AS-Interface Optimized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/28 b Distributed AS-Interface High Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/30
2/1
Benefits of Ethernet

Implementations
What are the benefits Ethernet provides ?

Ethernet TCP/IP is a universal communication standard The recognition of Ethernet TCP/IP, both in organizations and on the internet, has made it the communication standard of today. Its wide use is leading to a reduction in connection costs, increased performance and the addition of new functions, which all combine to ensure its durability. Ethernet TCP/IP meets the connection requirements of every application: b Twisted pair copper cables for simplicity and low costs b Optical fiber for immunity to interference and for long distances b Communication redundancy, inherent in the IP (internet protocol) b Remote point-to-point access via the telephone network or the Internet for the cost of a local call Ethernet TCP/IP, a truly open technology, supports all type of communication: b Web pages b File transfer b Industrial messaging, etc. With its high speed, the network no longer limits the performance of the application. The architecture can evolve without any difficulty. The products or devices remain compatible, ensuring the long-term durability of the system. Modbus messaging: a standard technology adapted for the world of automation Modbus is a de facto standard for serial link protocols in industry since 1979. It is used for the communication of millions of automation devices. As a result of this success, the Internet community has reserved the TCP 502 port for Modbus. Modbus is recognized by international standard IEC 61158 and is e.g a "Chinese National Standard". Modbus messaging can thus be used for exchanging automation data on both Ethernet TCP/IP and the Internet, as well as for all other applications (file exchange, Web pages, E-mail, etc.) The simple structure of Modbus is bringing it ever-increasing success. Users can download the specifications and the source code for numerous devices that use the Modbus TCP/IP protocol, free of charge from the IDA website: www.modbus-ida.org Building on its industrial expertise, Schneider Electric now has a complete offer of highly user-friendly services on Ethernet TCP/IP that are dedicated to the world of automation: Modbus TCP/IP messaging, optimized I/O scanning, publication and subscription of variables between controller and PLCs (Global Data), automatic device reconfiguration (Faulty Device Replacement), bandwidth monitoring, system diagnostics per Web diagnostic, SOAP/XML Web services, etc. The single network, requiring no interfaces between the world of information technology and automation, is now a reality.
2/2
Benefits of Ethernet
(continued)

Implementations
Presentation
Free navigation on the Web Automation In 1998, Schneider Electric broke new ground with the first on market web servers embedded in Telemecanique PLCs. With continuous innovations, Schneider Electric is spreading the use of Web technologies in industrial equipment by implementing Web servers inside new Telemecanique and Merlin Gerin devices such as PLCs and controllers, distributed I/Os, variable speed drives, power meters, etc. These web servers represent the easiest solution to get remote and transparent access to equipment informations and device diagnostics, simply using an Internet browser. With FactoryCast HMI, Schneider Electric is taking an important step further, by making the Web Servers Active, thus holding your HMI application as a Web server. Not only does these actice server provide Web pages displaying system and process information, but they also execute HMI functions at source in the PLC and controller device, totally autonomously, without making use of the controller processor: management of a real-time HMI database with data processing, E-mail transmission, direct connectivity with relational databases, etc. With its functions embedded in a controller, the FactoryCast HMI active Web server: b Simplifies or removes the need for conventional HMI/SCADA (Supervision Control And Data Acquisition) solutions, reducing communication via polling to update HMI/SCADA databases b Provides multiclient remote control, without any special software on the client stations b Provides a direct link to company information systems, without the need for any intermediary interface.
Transparent Ready for a world without restrictions Schneider Electric has a wide range of Transparent Ready products: Controllers and PLCs, industrial PCs, HMI devices, variable speed drives, I/O modules, safety PLCs, gateways, servers, switches, SCADA software, inductive identification systems, etc. These products provide different levels of Web services and communication services on Ethernet TCP/IP, according to users requirements. In order to simplify choice and ensure their interoperability within a system, each Transparent Ready product is now identified by the class of services it provides.
WithTransparent Ready, you have ... b Ingenuity of collaboration improving agility v Transparency of information throughout the enterprise, make authorized people and tools, better share data. b v v v Openess of universal standards Ethernet TCP/IP with Modbus Vendor independent and well known, so future proof and open Only one communication technology to maintain Seamless vertical & remote connections, enabling collaboration.
b Simplicity of Web technologies optimizing your Human Machine Interface v Easy and inexpensive local & remote access from a web browser (e.g. for maintenance) v Distribute Web servers on automation devices and remove bottlenecks v Combine Web technologies and traditional SCADA, to refocus SCADA on the control of the process.
2/3
Introduction

Implementations
Introduction
Schneider Electric has laid out several implementations allowing to address a common set of customer requirements. In the case of machines and installations with Ethernet Schneider Electric has defined one Preferred Implementation: b Distributed Ethernet High Performance
This implementation covers distributed Machines and Installations. Distributed Ethernet High Performance addresses a set of customer values and a set of automation requirements to meet the customers needs. Distributed Ethernet High Performance is described in this catalog with possible applications, the set of requirements and some examples. A product finder will help to simplify the product choice for each implementation. Therefore, this implementation has a specific pictogram that is reported in the product section. Icon analogy
Icon Name of the associated implementation Distributed Ethernet High Performance
2/4
Presentation, value, applications

Implementations
Distributed Ethernet High Performance
Presentation
2
Main cabinet
Ethernet TCP/IP
Remote cabinet
Remote cabinet
Distributed Ethernet High Performance is dedicated to large and complex machines and installations requiring modularity and transparency with high features. This implementation combines in a distributed architecture based on Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP, a Premium PLC, Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives, Magelis XBTG and iPC displays and Advantys STB distributed I/Os. Transparency Web services and IT features are imbedded in devices.
Value
Easy diagnostic and remote services
Faulty device replacement, Web services, e-mail and Web server imbedded in device allow a complete transparency for maintenance and remote services.
Distribution of HMI
Web services and Factory Cast HMI allow to distribute several HMI with a complete transparency and a high level of access control
High modularity and flexibility
The combination of Advantys STB, modular I/O, a local HMI and motor controllers (drives), allows distribution of the automation functions with a high level modularity and flexibility.
Applications
Typical applications for Distributed Ethernet High Performance can be found in Industry, Infrastructure and Building/Services, such as: b Industry: Large packaging machines, complex machines, small warehouse sorting systems, modular machines b Infrastructure: Airport gateway, airport energy management, airport baggage handling, tunnel control b Building/Services: Electrical distribution, sorting systems, intelligent building automation systems.
2/5
Requirements

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation, the typical performance requirements are: b b b b b b b b Controller: Premium I/O: Up to 800 (IP 20 - IP 67) Motor control: variable speed drive (up to 20 ATV31/71) Motion: up to 8 axes Motion control: on Sercos bus HMI: push-buttons and lights, graphic display, Factory Cast HMI, Vijeo Look Typical cycle time: 50 - 100 ms Safety: Preventa modular controller
Installation b b b b b b b Machine type: stand alone or networked Cabling: Ethernet and CANopen Software: Libraries and function blocks to ease programming Web automation tools Very easy modularity Remote diagnostic via the Web Easy to duplicate and to save your application by using EEPROM
Cost Distributed Ethernet High Performance reduces engineering costs. Constraints I/O devices and drives are IP 20. Cabinets or enclosures are required to achieve a higher IP level (e.g. IP 50 or IP 66). Size Network length: Unlimited length for the application.
2/6
Product finder, examples

Implementations
Product finder
The product finder helps to find the product description of the devices used in this implementation quickly. In addition, the pictogram can be found as well in the product description to show the link between the product and the implementation.
Devices Magelis IPC Magelis XBT GT Premium + FactoryCast module Switch/HUB Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Advantys FTB Advantys STB Inductel XGK S Page 3/56 3/54 3/72 3/54 4/24 3/38 4/17 3/36 3/41
Examples
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Distributed Ethernet High Performance implementation.
Ventilation in a tunnel
Storage
2/7
Benefits of CANopen

Implementations
What are the benefits CANopen provides ?

CANopen is an open standard CANopen is an open network that is supported by over 400 companies world wide and promoted by CAN in Automation. CANopen is standardized in the EN50325-4 and in ISO15745-2 for its device description. Schneider Electric works close with CAN in Automation. This collaboration allows Schneider Electric to offer a really open network using the existing standards defined by all the members of CAN in Automation. Being an active member, Schneider Electric brings the customer and system requirements into the standards so that other companies also implement the same behavior and the same functions. This is the best guarantee for the openness and interoperability of our systems and products. Schneider Electric is strongly involved in the working groups that are relevant for machine and installation architectures, systems and products. Schneider Electric holds the chair position for: b Motion & Drives profile b Conformance testing.
CANopen gives you the transparency to Ethernet

Client Application CANopen General Reference Server Interface Backend CANopen General Reference Server Interface Modbus MEI Transport (FC 43.13)
CANopen General Reference Client Interface Modbus MEI Transport (FC 43.13)
CAN in Automation and Modbus-IDA have worked closely together to issue a standard that allows transparency between CANopen and Modbus TCP/IP. This collaboration resulted in the specification CiA DSP309-2, providing a standard definition for communication between a Modbus TCP/IP and a CANopen network. The specification defines mapping services so that CANopen devices can communicate over a Modbus TCP/IP network via a gateway device. Access to the informations of a CANopen device is supported on both a read and write basis, along with a variety of device control functions. This specification is the first standard allowing the implementation of an open communication standard between Modbus TCP/IP and CANopen. It will guide the Schneider Electric network solution towards a better integration, diagnostic and configuration in distributed applications. It enables machines and installations to be seamlessly connected to an Ethernet plant floor combining the advantages of each network in its own specific area.
Network Interface Network
Network Interface
CANopen allows you to select a smaller cabinet This is not because of the smaller size of the products. It is because of CANopen's very robust EMI capabilities. This allows a machine or installation to perform accurately even when the interference is high. The short frames of CANopen and the CAN ground connection that provides the same potential for any device connected to the network, protect against EMI.
CANopen provides you a reliable transmission The network access on CANopen is non destructive. Should any one CANopen device transmit its data, the system automatically generates, and takes into account, the priority of the message. A telegram loss by means of a collision is impossible and wasting time until the next idle state of the network is avoided. CANopen provides an absolutely reliable transmission of data. This is one of the reasons why CANopen networks are used in medical equipment and as a basis for safety networks .
S O F CANopen device 1 CANopen device 63 Resulting CAN frame 0 0 0 Identifier 10 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 8 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 6 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 R T R 0 Control Field Data Field
Listing only 0 0 0 1 0
2/8
Benefits of CANopen
(continued)

Implementations
CANopen increases the uptime of the machine Breakdowns are always time consuming and costly. CANopen is well suited to increase the uptime as much as possible. With its Hamming Distance of 6 CANopen has a very good error detection and correction mechanism. With a probability of one undetected error in 1.000 years (1) the network is the most reliable network for machines and installations. In the case that the network has an error condition, the watchdog is the first possibility to monitor the device status. Furthermore CANopen provides clear diagnostic information. Each diagnostic message contains the source and the reason for the fault, which allows a fast reaction and a reduction in the shutdown time. Additional diagnostic information is implemented to improve the diagnosis of complex CANopen devices and to support those responsible for maintaining the network. In addition, to aid in detecting random faults, an error history is also available. CANopen gives you all: Performance and Flexibility The main reason for using a network is the performance and the flexibility to adapt the network exactly to the requirements of the application. CANopen provides a unique feature for the adaptation of the data transmission. Based on the producer/consumer model, CANopen allows for a data transmission broadcast, peer-to-peer, change-of-state and cyclic communication. This means it transmits data only when required or on a specified time base. Process data objects can be individually configured. Parameters can be changed at runtime. What about the performance? Although CANopen is very flexible, the response of the network is fast. Within less than 1 ms 256 digital I/O points can be serviced at 1 Mbps (2). A Profibus DP typically needs around 2 ms at 12 Mbps for the same amount of data. In addition to the fast response, the prioritization of the messages can be easily changed. So CANopen provides the capabilities to adapt the data transmission to the application requirements. CANopen provides best cost relation CANopen combines ease of installation with inexpensive devices. CANopen provides an integrated equipotential bounding in the cable. Therefor, an additional cable or stranded copper ribbon to achieve the same potential on all network devices is not necessary. Installation costs are heavily reduced. Furthermore, the chips and components for CANopen are produced in very high quantity. This leads to price optimized chips and components. Schneider Electric gives this cost advantage to its customers. A cost advantage of 10 to 20 % can be expected compared to other fieldbusses in the machine.
CANopen
(1) 1 bit error each 0.7 s at 500 kbps; 8 h a day; 365 days a year. (2) Source: Grid Control.
2/9
Benefits of CANopen
(continued)

Implementations
Performance
CANopen: The best choice

Tools
Effectiveness
In machines and installations other networks, besides CANopen, are available on the market. The two best known are Profibus DP and DeviceNet. For an application however the technical fit is more important than the popularity of the network.
EMI
Diagnosis
Error detection Flexibility CANopen DeviceNet Performance
Costs
CANopen and DeviceNet CANopen and DeviceNet are both based on CAN. This is the reason why there are only a few, but important, differences when talking about machines and installations. DeviceNet is designed for sensors and actuators with a limited versatility. The advantages of CANopen are clearly the: b Performance, due to its higher bit-rate, b Flexibility, due to its unique network adaptation features, b Diagnostics, due to detailed error messages, b Costs, due to being the natural interface for drives. CANopen and Profibus DP CANopen and Profibus DP are based on different physical characteristics and have a different history. CANopen was, from the beginning, developed for machines and installations where as Profibus DP was developed as a general purpose fieldbus. These two different approaches give CANopen the advantage for: b Effectiveness, due to the data rate and message overhead, b EMI behavior, due to its physical implementation, b Flexibility, due to its unique network adaptation features, b Error detection, due to its better detection and correction capabilities, b Costs, due to being the natural interface of drives and the integrated equipotential bounding in the CANopen cable. This all makes CANopen The best choice for machines and installations. CANopen provides the right technical performance and flexibility for machines and installations. It is a real vendor independent network solution that guaranties the best for openness and interoperability of systems and products.
Effectiveness
Tools
Diagnosis
EMI
Error detection Flexibility CANopen Profibus DP
Costs
SCADA IT system
Ethernet TCP/IP
HMI
Premium CANopen
HMI Advantys STB TeSys U ATV 31 ATV 71 Advantys FTB IcLA IcLA
2/10
Introduction

Implementations
Introduction
Schneider Electric has laid out several implementations allowing to address a common set of customer requirements. In the case of machines and installations Schneider Electric has defined 7 implementations using CANopen that are described in this catalog. b Compact Evolutive Optimized b Compact Evolutive Performance b Compact Evolutive High Performance b Distributed CANopen Optimized b Distributed CANopen Performance b Distributed CANopen High Performance b ATV71 Controller inside These implementations defined for CANopen cover two types of machines and installations: b Compact b Distributed For the "Compact machines and installations" three implementations have been selected for CANopen: b Compact Evolutive Optimized b Compact Evolutive Performance b Compact Evolutive High Performance Each implementation addresses a set of customer values and a set of automation requirements with different product combinations to meet exactly the customer's requirements. For "Modular and Distributed Machines & Installations" three implementations have been selected for CANopen: b Distributed CANopen Optimized b Distributed CANopen Performance b Distributed CANopen High Performance For specific Machines & Installations, one Advanced Implementation has been defined: b ATV71 controller inside All these implementations are described in this catalog with possible applications, the set of requirements and some examples. A product finder should help to simplify the product choice for each implementation. Therefore, each implementation has a specific pictogram that is reported in the product section. Icon analogy
Icon Name of the associated implementation Compact Evolutive Optimized
Compact Evolutive Performance
Compact Evolutive High Performance
Distributed CANopen Optimized
Distributed CANopen Performance
Distributed CANopen High Performance
2/11
Presentation, value, applications,

Implementations
Compact Evolutive Optimized
Presentation
Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation is dedicated to compact machines and installations. The CANopen network is designed as a machine bus to increase the flexibility and the attractiveness of the machine or installation.
Value
Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation provides a communication system that is simple to design and used as a traditional cabling system. However, it provides new features to improve time to market, the attractiveness and the flexibity of your machine or installation. Schneider Electric delivers a standard and consistent offer. The interoperability of the components has been checked and proven by Schneider Electric. This reduces costs during commissioning of the machine or installation. The cabling costs are reduced due to the use of CANopen. This implementation is based on an integrated software offer that is easy to understand and use. The diagnostic functions are excellent in making maintenance as simple as possible and in case of a device fault, it can be easily exchanged without changing the application program. A back-up function is provided using memory modules. Easy configuration and communication with drives: A single Twidosoft tool for PLC programming and ATV31 CANopen variable speed drive configuration using "Drive" function blocks makes it easy to add drives to your installation.
CANopen
Applications
Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation has in its main focus the industry sector. Some examples of typical application segments for the Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation are: b Assembling: labeling, filling, etc b Material handling: palletizer,conveying, etc b Packaging: labeling, blistering, filling, dosing, etc b Textile: winding, unwinding, etc b Refuse Collection Vehicles b Pumping stations b Water treatment (closed system).
2/12
Requirements, product finder, examples

Implementations
Compact Evolutive Optimized
Set of requirements
Performance The performance is determined by the number of I/Os, the cycle time of the controller and the number of drives. For this implementation the performance requirements are: b 40...80 I/O points b Controller cycle time: 50...100 ms b Motor control (up to 4): v Variable speed drive ATV 31 v Optional servo drive Lexium 05 (instead of 2 variable speed drives) b Graphic HMI directly connected on PLC and push buttons. Installation CANopen is used to achieve the flexibility and to keep the easyness of the machine or installation. The configuration of the network and the programming is part of one tool that can be used with a minimum system knowledge. The configuration is following a logical approach. The HMI device can be directly connected to the PLC. Costs The costs are an addition of several aspects. Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation influences at least one of the axes that is the reduction of the cabling costs. Constraints This implementation is restricted to IP 20 products that are placed in a cabinet or integrated into the equipment. A safety function is typically required which depends on the safety level requirement of the machine or installation. Size The size of a compact machine or installation is a few square meters. Automation products are located in a cabinet or in the body of a machine.
Product finder
Devices Twido + TWD NCO1M Altivar 31 Altivar 71 (for high power drive) Page 4/6 4/24 4/32
Examples
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation. Textile: winding
Material handling: palletizer
2/13

Implementations
Presentation
Ethernet TCP/IP
CANopen
Compact Evolutive Performance is dedicated to compact and complex installations requiring performance and robustness, but also flexibility and modularity to ease adaptations for variant machines. It combines a Modicon M340 programmable controller, with Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives, Lexium 05/15 servo drives on CANopen and a Magelis XBT GT display unit with an Ethernet MB/TCP communication. The programming and the configuration tools in this implementation combine all the features and facilities required from the design to the maintenance. They allow to the experts in automation to perform their knowledge to get the level of performance required.
Value
Flexibility of the solution
The cabling system ready to use and the graphical configuration of CANopen in Unity give a high capacity of adaptation to the machines needs with a significant cost cabling reduction.
Motion can be so simple !
The control of non synchronized axis doesn't need additional modules inside the Modicon M340. A set of standardized PLC Open function blocks manages easily Altivar and Lexium on CANopen.
Productivity from the design to the maintenance
With the tools provided for this implementation, Unity Vijeo designer, Powersuite, You can reach a mastered productivity at the different steps of the life cycle
Centralized display of diagnostic
With the Magelis XBT GT display unit, the operator visualizes the hardware and process diagnostic from the Modicon M340 and drives without programming in addition.
Remote maintenance
The remote access to this implementation is easy thanks to the embedded Ethernet port and predefined Web pages in the controller
Applications
Typical applications for Compact Evolutive Performance can be found in Industry and Building, such as: b Industry: Meat press, trimmer, mixer, bending machines, boxing machines, cartooning machines, palletizers, blister machine b Building: Chiller, sorting system, cooling tower.
2/14
Requirements product finder, examples

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance The performance is determined by the number of I/Os, the cycle time of the controller and the number of drives. For this implementation the performance requirements are: b Controller: Modicon M340 b I/Os: up to 150 I/Os b Motor control: direct motor starter, up to 6 inverters (ATV 31/71) and/or 8 servo drives (Lexium 05/15) b HMI: Push-buttons and light, graphic display b Typical cycle time: 10-50 ms b Safety: Preventa module or controller b Option: Ethernet connection to upper level Installation b Machine type: stand alone machine or networked b Cabling: CANopen b Software: libraries and function blocks to ease programming b Easy to duplicate and to save your application by using flash memory. Costs A competitive ratio performance / cost. Constraints I/O devices and drives are IP20. Cabinets or enclosures are required to achieve a higher IP level (e.g. IP50 or IP66). Size Compact machine or equipment < 20 m2.
Product finder
Devices Magelis XBT GT Modicon M340 with Ethernet and CANopen interface Preventa XPS MC Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Lexium 05 Lexium 15 Page 4/7 4/12 4/24 4/32 4/38 4/40
Examples
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Compact Evolutive Performance implementation.
Packaging machine
Botteling machine
2/15

Implementations
Ethernet TCP/IP
Presentation
Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation is dedicated to compact machines and installations. The CANopen network is designed as a machine bus to increase the performance and flexibility of the machine or installation.
Value
Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation provides a communication system that is as simple to design and used as a traditional cabling system. However, it provides new features to improve time to market, the performance and the flexibity of your machine or installation. Schneider Electric delivers a standard and consistent offer. The interoperability of the components has been checked and proven by Schneider Electric. This reduces costs during commissioning of the machine or installation. The cabling costs are reduced due to the use of CANopen. This implementation is based on an integrated software offer that is easy to understand and use. The diagnostic functions are excellent in making maintenance as simple as possible and in case of a device fault, it can be easily exchanged without changing the application program.
CANopen
Applications
Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation has in its name focus in the industry sector. Again, independent of the pre-selection made in this catalog, the implementation may fit to other applications that have not been considered so far. Typical application segments for Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation are: b b b b b b Assembling: testing, etc Automotive Packaging: bagging Printing Wood Water treatment
2/16
Requirements, product finder, examples

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation, the typical performance requirements are: b b b b b b b Controller: Premium Up to 400 I/O points Typical cycle time: 10...50 ms Servo Drives: Lexium 05/15 Motion control: up to 8 axis on sercos HMI: push-buttons and lights , graphic display. Options: Ethernet connection to upper level.
Installation CANopen is used to achieve the flexibility of the machine or installation. However, the software package is allowing a higher performance level and a fine tuning of network and device configuration. The HMI device can be directly connected to the PLC. Costs Compact Evolutive High performance implementation optimizes at least the cabling and its related costs. Constraint The constraints for this implementation are IP20 products that are either mounted in a cabinet or integrated in the body of the equipment. A safety function is typically required and depends on the safety level requirements of the machine or installation. Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation optimizes implementation is designed with the safety module or controller integrated in the PLC. Size The size of a compact machine or installation is few square meters. Automation products are located in a cabinet or in the body of a machine.
Product Finder
Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation provides an easy evolution and adaptation of the machine or installation as well as the possibility to use a memory module to duplicate applications on several machines or installations in a fast and easy way. It also provides libraries and functions blocks that handle complex programming functions to simplify the application programming. It is proposed to use the CANopen network for frequency converters and a hard wired solution for I/Os. The programming environment provides the right combination for programming with function blocks to improve the system performance.
Devices Premium + TSX CPP 110 Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Lexium 05 Lexium 17D Page 4/8 4/24 4/32 4/38 4/42
Examples
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation. Assembling line
Bread machine
2/17

Implementations
Presentation
The implementation Distributed CANopen Optimized is dedicated to modular machines and installations. The performance requirement is not very high. The CANopen network supports an easy extension to meet the requirements of the modularity.
2
CANopen
Value
Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation requires only minimum experience in the use of automation equipment combined with easy implementation of the system. The CANopen capabilities make it easier and cheaper than a conventional system. Schneider Electric delivers products at reasonable cost. The openness of the implementation allows for a non-propietary system. The interoperability of the components is achieved through the standardization of CANopen as a network. The use of CANopen also reduces the cabling and the related costs. With the easy and simple to use configuration and programming tools the implementation is done quickly. What about the operation and maintenance of the machine or installation? Multi-language human machine interfaces offer operation on an international level and maintenance can be carried out by people with limited automation experience. Easy configuration and communication with drives: A single Twidosoft tool for PLC programming and ATV31 CANopen variable speed drive configuration using "Drive" function blocks makes it easy to add drives to your installation.
CANopen
Applications
Although dedicated to a certain set of applications, some of the applications mentioned could just as easily fit the set of requirements of another implementation. Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation focuses on the industry and the building sector. Independent of the pre-selection made in this catalog, the implementation may also fit other applications that have not been considered so far. Typical applications or sub-applications for Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation are in the following market sectors: b Industry: Lift high speed and more than 20 floors, machinery automation systems, with low complexity, refuse handling high level Building/services: Lighting, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, maritime electronics as a sub system, access, control and surveillance management.
2/18
Requirements product finder, example

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation the typical performance requirements are: b Up to 80 I/O points. b Controller cycle time: 50...100 ms b Motor control (up to 4): v Variable speed drive ATV 31 v Optional servo drive Lexium 05 (instead of 2 variable speed drives) b HMI: Graphic directly connected on the PLC and push buttons b Sensors simple to integrate. Installation The configuration of the network and the programming is part of one tool that can be used with a minimum system knowledge. The configuration is following a logical approach. It is proposed to use the CANopen network to interconnect the modules of the machine or installation. I/Os and other products, such as frequency converters, can be connected on the same network. The HMI device can be directly connected to the PLC. Costs The costs are an addition of several aspects. Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation reduces the cabling costs. Constraints In this implementation typically only one human machine interface is used. Size The size of a modular machine or installation depends on the number of modules and the type. For Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation, the network length is a limitation for the overall size of the machine or installation and depends on the performance required. The network length should not exceed 250 m at 250 kbps bit rate (see page 7/25). The cabinets used for the automation equipment are as small as possible. Also products with a higher protection class than IP 20 could be directly mounted on the machine or installation
Product Finder
Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation provides a quick connection of products with pre-manufactured cables. Products with a high protection implementation are used and are mounted directly on the machine.
Devices Twido + TWD NCO 1M Advantys OTB Advantys FTB Altivar 31 Altivar 71 (for higher power drive) Page 4/6 4/14 4/17 4/24 4/32
Example
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation. Wood planning
Injectioning
2/19

Implementations
Presentation
Ethernet TCP/IP
CANopen
2
CANopen
For large machines and installations where performance, modularity are very important and where the distribution of equipment and device is required, this implementation provides the best response. It combines a CANopen network, Modicon M340 programmable controller, Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives, Lexium 05/15 servo drives, Advantys distributed I/Os and a Magelis XBT GT display unit with an Ethernet . High level features for devices configuration and PLC programming allow the experts in automation to perform their knowledge to get the level of performance required.
Value
High Modularity and flexibility
Automation Island and IP67 I/Os allow a high modularity and flexibility in the design of the solution.
Productivity from the design to the maintenance
The productivity is mastered along the different steps of the project life cycle with UnityPro, Vijeo Designer, Powersuite, Unilink.
Motion can be so simple
The control of non synchronized axis doesn't need additional modules inside the Modicon M340. A set of standardized PLC Open functions blocks manages easily Altivar and Lexium on CANopen.
With the Magelis XBT GT display unit, you can visualize the defaults of the configuration of the controller and devices on CANopen without programming in addition.
Remote maintenance
The remote access to this implementation is easy thanks to the embedded Ethernet port and the web services in the controller.
Applications
Typical applications for Distributed CANopen Performance can be found in: b b b b b Food & beverage: Bottling line Material handling transport: Conveying, storage, mobile shelving Metal working: Bending machines Packaging: Boxing machines, cartooning machines, palletizers Other machines: Assembly line, printing machines.
2/20
Requirements, product finder, example

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance b Controller: Modicon M340 b I/Os: up to 200 I/Os b Motor control: direct motor starter, up to 6 inverters (ATV 31/71) and/or 8 servo drives (Lexium 05/15) b HMI: Push-buttons and light, graphic display b Typical cycle time: 10-50 ms b Safety: Preventa module or controller b Option: Ethernet connection to upper level Installation b b b b Machine type: stand alone machine or networked Cabling: CANopen Software: libraries and function blocks to ease programming Easy to duplicate and to save your application by using EEPROM.
Costs A competitive ratio performance / cost. Constraint I/O devices and drives are IP20. Cabinets or enclosures are required to achieve a higher IP level (e.g. IP50 or IP66). Size Compact Machines and Installations < 20 m2.
Product finder
Devices Modicon M340 with CANopen interface Advantys STB Advantys FTB Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Page 4/7 4/15 4/17 4/24 4/32
Example
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Distributed CANopen Performance implementation. Conveyor
2/21

Implementations
Ethernet TCP/IP
Presentation
The Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation is dedicated to distributed machines and installations. The integration in an Ethernet based plant environment and the optional remote access to the machine or installation is part of the implementation definition. CANopen is used as the network to connect the required devices and to provide flexibility for adaptations.
CANopen
Value
The Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation provides simpler design and commissioning with high features by the integration of transparency and standard IT hardware. This functionality leads to a maximized productivity during engineering and installation. Schneider Electric supports the manufacturer of the machine or installation in reducing his engineering costs due to integrated, standardized interfaces at the plant level. The large device catalog and the partner program support new solutions. Schneider Electric vouches for the interoperability of its products but the manufacturer is responsible for the data access from the plant level. Versatile software tools allow for programming in an easy way and due to its subsidiaries and a global support network, Schneider Electric is able to react quickly on customer requests. CANopen is the best guarantee for a simple installation and adaptations during the commissioning phase. Furthermore the network allows distributed human machine interfaces as well as secured remote access and transparency to the machine or installation. Remote diagnostic, as well as direct diagnostic at the machine or installation, is detailed and enables even people with the most basic education in automation equipment to reduce the number of shutdowns. The memory back-up functionality, in many cases, avoids PC equipment and allows efficient maintenance.
CANopen
CANopen
Applications
Each implementation is dedicated to a set of possible applications. However, some of the applications listed may well fit the set of requirements for another implementation. Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation has two focuses, the industry and the building sector. The list of applications given here is not exhaustive and there are many other applications which may fit into this implementation. Typical applications or sub-applications for Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation are in the following market sectors: b Industry: Modular machines or installations (wood, packaging,), conveying b Building/Services: Hotel automation access, heating and air conditioning management.
2/22
Requirements

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation the typical performance requirements are: b 100...400 I/O points b Controller cycle time: 10...50 ms b Up to 8 frequency converters/drives and up to 8 axis b Web interface for maintenance b HMI (directly connected to PLC or to distributed I/O). Installation Several small cabinets are used in combination with products directly mounted on the machine body or onto the installation. Costs The costs are an addition of several aspects. Distributed CANopen High performance implementation reduces the cabling costs. Constraints The network length limits the overall size of the machine or installation and depends on the performance required. Size The size of a distributed machine or installation is variable. For Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation, the maximum network length 250 m is recommended. Longer distances are possible, but a reduction in performance has to be accepted (see page 7/25).
Product finder
The Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation takes the requirements of the customers for installation and commissioning into account. The installation is based on modules or cabinets connected to CANopen and therefore distributed over the machine or installation. CANopen as a standardized network is easy to use and to configure. All products with a CANopen interface can be directly used to improve the machine functionality.
Devices Premium + TSX CPP 110 Advantys OTB Advantys STB Advantys FTB Advantys FTM Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Lexium 05 Lexium 17D Page 48343/5 and 48343/5 4/14 4/15 4/17 48340/7 4/24 4/32 4/38 4/42
Examples
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation. Assembly line
Huge conveying line
2/23

Implementations
ATV71 Controller inside
Presentation
Dedicated to complex machines and installations requiring specific functions and performances. This implementation combines in a compact architecture with Controler inside the Altivar 71, the Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives, Lexium 05 connected with CANopen and the Magelis XBT GT connected with Modbus to the CI.
2
CANopen
The machine needs a high developed operator interface and an easy to program special function. This architecture is related to special machine builder with high valuable know-how. This implementation constitutes speed as well as faultless of operation. Safety is often needed in this machine type.
Value
Optimized productivity
Reliability, easy to restart and flexibility by the Operator interface Magelis XBT-GT. Manual Control, reset machine to home position and maintain/operate your process becomes simple.
Coordinate Axis - Speed, Position and Diagnostic
Lexium + Premium and Sercos Bus gives you exact control of your motion. Easy to modify parameter from the PLC, like reduced speed of movement.
Motion can be so simple!
It is so easy to control motion, just with some I/O points. The easy integration to the PLC and Altivar allows you to control the drive (forward/reverse) and several speeds.
Flexible, Adaptable and easy to Diagnose Systems
The traditional architecture - hardwired gives you zero fault tolerance and less downtime of your machine or installation. Typical applications for ATV71 Controller Inside can be found in special-purpose machines, infrastructure and material handling, such as: b Special-purpose machines: Assembly, processing, cutting operations b Infrastructure: Pumping station Material handling: Storage of products, lifting, shuttling operations.
2/24
Requirements product finder, examples

Implementations
ATV71 Controller inside
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation the typical performance requirements are: b Controller : ATV71 Controller Inside b I/O: up to 100 I/Os b Motor control: up to 7 Drives (ATV 11/31/71...) b Motion: up to 5 axis b HMI: Push-buttons + Text / Graphic HMI b Typical cycle time : 30 - 70 ms. Installation b Machine type stand alone machine or networked b Software: CoDeSys, PowerSuite, Advantys, Vijeo designer; high featured services to configure the devices with device emulation on the computer. b I/Os hardwired, motion on CANopen. Costs Minimize the programming and commissioning cost with complete set of tools. Constraints Safety : module or controller independent or embedded in the PLC. Size Compact machine or equipment < 20 m2.
Product finder
Devices Display unit Magelis XBT GT Safety modules & controllers Preventa XPS ATV 71 Controller Inside Variable speed drive Altivar ATV 31 Variable speed drive Altivar ATV 71 Servo drive Lexium 05 Advantys STB Page 3/6 4/12 4/10 4/24 4/32 4/38 4/15
Example
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with ATV71 Controller Inside implementation. Crane application
Car washing machine
2/25
Benefits of AS-Interface

Implementations
What are the benefits AS-Interface provides ?

AS-Interface is an open standard AS-Interface is an open network standardized in IEC 62026-2 and promoted by AS-International Association. AS-International has over 260 members worldwide. Schneider Electric works close with AS-International. This collaboration allows Schneider Electric to offer a really open network using the existing standards defined by all the members of AS-International. Schneider Electric participates as an active member in the discussion in AS-International to integrate the customer's and system requirements. This discussion guarantees that other companies also implement the same behavior and the same functions as Schneider Electric. This is the best guarantee for the openness and interoperability of our systems and products. AS-Interface is easy to use The AS-Interface network is easy to use. The configuration of the devices is simple. The address of the slave is easily set with an addressing terminal, which is as easy to use as a multimeter. Further configuration of a slave is often not needed and as easy as the addressing. The AS-Interface cable is easily identified and connected. The shape of the cable prevents interchanged connection of the ASI+ and ASI- wires in the cable. The AS-Interface connection is the simplest and easiest IP67 connection to install due to the piercing technology. AS-Interface reduces costs AS-Interface reduces the design, installation, set-up, and implementation time compared to parallel wiring. AS-Interface devices are often more compact and available in IP67. This majority of devices can be mounted directly on the machine. This saves space in enclosures. AS-Interface transports power and data on the same cable. This eliminates additional control cables and reduces the amount of cable ducting required. AS-Interface provides maximum safety AS-Interface helps to improve machine reliability, operational availability and safety: b Wiring errors are no longer possible. b No risk of electrical connection failure. b High immunity to electromagnetic interference (EMC). b The safety function of the machine can be totally integrated with AS-Interface Safety at work. AS-Interface integrates standard and safety sensors and actuators on one cable. Schneider Electric has chosen AS-Interface as basis and safety network for this reason. AS-Interface improves maintainability AS-Interface installations are easy to extend. You do not have to splice the cable and insert a daisy-chain connector or worse install a hub to add an additional slave to your installation. You simply mount your slave connector on the AS-Interface cable. AS-Interface needs no line termination. The auto-addressing feature enables the replacement of a slave with a new one of the same type. Replacing a slave by a new slave of the same type is as simple as removing the old and mounting the new slave. AS-Interface supports any network topology AS-Interface supports any topology like bus, bus with taps, tree, mesh, ring, or star. The only restriction is the total length of the cable. The total length of the cable in one segment must be less that 100 m without additional measures. Up to three segments can be connected with repeaters. The length of one segment may also be enlarged with a line extender. AS-Interface is the optimal protocol for its domain AS-Interface is optimized for the connection of actuators and sensors. It is very robust and very well suited for rough environments.
2/26
Introduction

Implementations
Introduction
Schneider Electric has laid out several implementations allowing to address a common set of customer requirements. In the case of machines and installations Schneider Electric has defined two implementations using AS-Interface that are described in this catalog. b Distributed AS-Interface Optimized b Distributed AS-Interface High Performance These implementations cover the flexibility type of Machines and Installations. Each implementation addresses a set of customer value and a set of automation requirement with different product combinations to meet exactly the customer's requirements The implementations are described in this catalogue with posiible applications, the set of requirements and some examples. A product finder should help to simplify the product choice for each implementation. Therefore, each implementation has a specific pictogram that is reported in the product section. Icon analogy
Icon Name of the associated implementation Distributed AS-Interface Optimized
Distributed AS-Interface High Performance
2/27

Implementations
Distributed AS-Interface Optimized
Presentation
AS-Interface is a quick and upgradable cabling system, a single cable connects all the components in an automation system. It contributes significantly to improve the reliability and the availability by reducing cabling errors and offering high-level electromagnetic interference immunity (EMC).
Value
Simplified installation without risk for HMI
A single cable for power supply and communication (Modbus link). Twidosoft and XBTN use the same symbol table.
Quick and reliable connection
AS-Interface cabling system offer quick and easy connection with M12 connectors and/or Vampire connecting system.
Safety integrated
AS-Interface Safety at Work integrates safety inputs on the same network as standard input/output devices.
AS-Interface Easy configuration
Thanks to the Telemechanique AS-Interface product catalog which is embedded in Twidosoft.
Applications
Typical applications for Distributed AS-Interface Optimized can be found in material handling, transport, building and environment, such as: b Material handling/transport: Conveyors (baggage handling, production parts, food processing, etc.), production line, material handling, transfer and storage systems b Building and environment: Building access control systems (automatic doors, car park barriers, doorways etc.), building access control systems, escalator, lift Other machines: Packaging and packing machines, palletizers.
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation, the typical performance requirements are: b b b b b Controller : Twido I/O: Up to 80, up to 2 AS-Interfacemaster modules Motor control: direct motor starter TeSys U HMI: push-buttons and lights, graphic display Typical cycle time: 50 - 100 ms.
Installation b b b b b b b Machine type: stand alone Cabling: AS-Interface Software: Libraries and function blocks to ease programming Configuration tool including design & product selection Large choice of IP20 & IP67 interfaces Easy to duplicate and to save your application by EEPROM Cable for 30V VDC supply and information.
Cost b Easy engineering b Optimized cabling with AS-Interface enables cost reduction (up to 20%). Constraints b Cable for corrosive environment is available as option. Size Network length up to 100 m without repeater.
2/28
Product finder, examples

Implementations
Distributed AS-Interface Optimized
Product finder
Devices Switch mode power supply Phaseo ABL 7 Twido Controller and AS-Interface master module TWD NOI 10N3 IP20 distributed I/Os Advantys interface ASI 20M Illuminated indicator bank XVB C Control station Harmony XALS TeSys U starter controller ASI LUF IP67 distributed I/Os Advantys interface ASI 67F Page 5/66 5/2 5/6 5/10 5/44 5/42 5/18 5/12
Examples
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Distributed AS-Interface Optimized implementation.
Conveyor or Transfert line
Lift
2/29

Implementations
Presentation
Distributed AS-Interface High Performance is dedicated to distributed machines and installations. AS-Interface is used as a quick and upgradeable industrial network: A single cable connects all the components in the automation system.
Value
With the Magelis XBT GT display unit, you can visualize the defaults of the configuration of the controller and I/Os on AS-Interface without programming in addition.
Quick and reliable connection
AS-Interface cabling system offers a quick and easy connection with M12 connectors and/or Vampire connecting system.
AS-Interface Safety integrated
AS-Interface Safety at Work integrates safety inputs on the same network as standard input/output devices.
Powerful software offer
Distributed AS-Interface High Performance is based on a powerful software offer with excellent diagnostic functions.
Applications
Distributed AS-Interface High Performance can be used in AS-Interface applications with high performance requirements such as: b Industry: Material handling and transport, transfer and storage systems, conveyors. b Building/Services: Hotel automation access, heating and air controlling management. Other machines: Packaging and packing machines.
2/30
Requirements

Implementations
Set of requirements
Performance For this implementation, the typical performance requirements are: b b b b b b Controller : Premium I/O: 100400 I/O points Up to 8 AS-Interface master modules supported (depending on CPU) Controller cycle time: 10 .. 50 ms Web interface supported HMI (direct connection to PLC).
Installation Several cabinets are used in combination with products directly mounted on the machine body or onto the installation. Cost Easy engineering and optimized cabling with AS-Interface allow a cost reduction up to 20%. Constraints b Cable for corrosive environment is available as option. b AS-interface does not support a full feature drive integration. To achieve this, a second network (e.g. CANopen or Modbus) becomes necessary. Size The size of a distributed machine or installation is variable. AS-Interface supports an overall network length up to 100m. Longer distances are possible with repeaters, and/or passive or active line termination.
Product finder
Devices Switch mode power supply Phaseo ABL 7 Premium PLC and TSX SAY master module IP20 distributed I/Os Advantys interface ASI 20M Illuminated indicator bank XVB C Control station Harmony XALS TeSys U starter controller ASI LUF IP67 distributed I/Os Advantys interface ASI 67F Page 5/66 5/4 5/6 5/10 5/44 5/42 5/18 5/12
Example
The following pictures show some applications that have been realized with Distributed AS-Interface High Performance implementation.
Transfert and storage system
2/31
Contents
3 - Ethernet in Machines and Installations
3.1 Service classes offered

b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 b Choice of Transparent Ready devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/3 b Web service classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4 b Ethernet communication service classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/5
3.2 Human-Machine Interface

b Magelis graphic terminals v XBT GT touch sensitive graphic terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6 v XBT F graphic terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/7 b Magelis iPC industrial PCs v Smart and Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8 v Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/10 v iDisplay flat screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/12 b HMI software v FactoryCast HMI software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/13 v Vijeo Look control software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14 v Vijeo Citect supervisory software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/15 v Monitor Pro SCADA software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/16 v OPC Factory Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/17
3.3 Controllers and PLCs

b Modicon Momentum M1E processor adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/18 b Twido compact base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/19 b TwidoPort interface for Twido controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/20 b Modicon M340 platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/21 b Modicon Premium platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/23 b Modicon Quantum platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/26 b Preventa compact safety PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/28 b W@de information servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/30
3.4 Field devices

b Modicon Momentum distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34 b Advantys OTB distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/35 b Advantys STB distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/36 b ATV 61 and ATV 71 variable speed drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/37 b Lexium 15 and Lexium 17D servo drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/39 b Inductel identification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/41 b Ositrack identification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/42
3/0
3.5 Infrastructure and wiring system

b Infrastructure v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/44 v Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/45 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/47 v Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/48 v Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/49 b Wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/50 b References of ConneXium connection componants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52 b ConneXium product data sheets v Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/54 v Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/55 v Unmanaged switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/56 v Managed switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/58 v IP 67 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/63
3.6 Ethernet gateways

b Ethernet / Modbus gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/64 b Web FactoryCast gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/65 b Ethernet / Modbus Plus gateway/router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/66 b Ethernet / AS-Interface gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/67
3.6 Diagnostic software

b ConneXview Ethernet network diagnostic software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/68
3/1
Description

Service classes offered
Presentation
Transparent Ready
Ethernet TCP/IP technologies and services Web technologies and services
The Transparent Ready service classes make it possible to identify the services provided by each device: b Diagnostic, display and control services via Web technologies b Ethernet communication services. The Transparent Ready service classes thus simplify the choice of devices and ensure their interoperability within an architecture.
3
3.1
3/2
Description (continued)

Choice of Transparent Ready devices

The services provided by a Transparent Ready device are identified by a letter defining the level of Web service, followed by a number defining the level of Ethernet communication service. For example: b A class A10 product is a device with no Web service and standard Ethernet services b A class C30 product is a device with a configurable Web server and advanced Ethernet communication services. The services provided by a higher class include all the services supported by a lower class. Transparent Ready devices are chosen from 4 main families: b Sensor and preactuator type field devices (simple or intelligent) b Controllers and PLCs b Human Machine Interface (HMI) applications b Dedicated gateways and servers. The selection table on the following pages can be used for choosing Transparent Ready devices according to the required service classes.
Web services
3
3.1
Class D
Active
Ethernet communication services

Advanced service
Class A
No service
Class B
Standard
Class C
Configurable
Class 30
B30
Communication management services
Controllers and PLCs
Class 20
B20
Simple and intelligent devices
C20
Class 10
Standard services
A10
B10
D10
3/3

Web service classes

The Web services are defined by 4 classes identified by a letter: b Class A: No Web service b Class B: Standard Web services b Class C: Configurable Web services b Class D: Active Web services. Transparent Ready devices with an embedded Web server can provide 4 types of Web service: b Maintenance Web services b Control Web services b Diagnostic Web services b Optional Web services such as documentation or configuration. The following table specifies the services provided by each Web service class (A, B, C or D).
3
Web server class Maintenance
Web services Monitoring and IT link Diagnostics Optional
3.1
- User website update D Active Web server - Autonomous execution of specific services (e.g. alarm notification by E-mail, exchange with databases, calculations, ...) - SOAP/XML (client/server) PLC variables editor Remote commands User Web pages SOAP/XML (server) - User-defined states - User documentation
Configurable Web server
- Communication service diagnostics - State of internal device resources
Standard Web server
- Remote device software update - Remote auto-tests
- Device description - Data viewer
- Device status - Device diagnostic
- Configuration of network parameters and Ethernet communication services - Device documentation
- No Web service A No Web server
3/4

Ethernet communication service classes

The Ethernet communication services provided by a device are defined by 3 classes, identified by a number: b Class 10: standard Ethernet communication services b Class 20: Ethernet communication management services (network level and device level) b Class 30: advanced Ethernet communication services. Transparent Ready devices can provide eight types of Ethernet communication service: b Modbus TCP/IP messaging service b I/O Scanning service b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service b SNMP network management service b Global Data service b Bandwidth management service b NTP time synchronization service b SMTP event notification service (E-mail). The following table specifies the services provided for each Ethernet communication service class.
3
3.1
Ethernet communication service classes
Ethernet communication services Modbus messaging I/O Scanning FDR Network management SNMP Global Data E-mail SMTP Bandwidth management Time synchronization NTP
- Direct reading/writing of I/O
- Periodic reading/writing of I/O - Configuration of the list of devices scanned
30
Advanced services
- Automatic control and updating of the device parameters configuration
- Use of the MIB library by an SNMP manager
- Publication and subscription of network variables
- Notification of events by E-mail
- Monitoring of load level
-Synchronization of device clocks
20
Communication management services
- Automatic assignment of the IP address and network parameters - Control and updating of the configuration and device parameters by the user
- Detection of devices by an SNMP manager
10
Standard services
- Reading/ writing of data words
- Local assignment of the IP address Verification of duplicate IP addresses
3/5
Product data sheet

Human-Machine Interface products
Magelis XBT GT touch-sensitive graphic terminals
Presentation
Magelis XBT GT (with 3.8 to 15 LCD touch screen) graphic terminals provide simple access to communication solutions via their direct connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP network.
Characteristics and references
Touch screen graphic terminals Display LCD screen size Memory capacity Application Extension Representation of variables Curves Alarm log Communication Integrated Ethernet (RJ45) Downloadable protocols Compatibility with PLCs Configuration software Operating systems Compact Flash card slot Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Functions Supply voltage References
3.2
Back-lit monochrome STN screen 64-color STN screen 256-color TFT screen 256-color TFT screen with video input
Magelis XBT GT 3.8" 5.7 7.5 10.4 12.1 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB Flash EPROM Flash EPROM Flash EPROM By Compact Flash card 128, 256, 512 MB or 1 GB Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, curve, polygon, button, light Yes, with log Yes 10BASE-T 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Uni-TE, Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP and third-party protocols Twido, Modicon M340, Modicon Premium, Modicon Quantum Vijeo Designer VJD ppD TGS V44M (on Windows 2000 and XP) Magelis Yes 130 x 104 x 41 167.5 x 135 x 215 x 170 x 60 313 x 239 x 55 313 x 239 x 56 59.5 (2) c 24 V XBT GT1130 XBT GT2130 (1) XBT GT4230 XBT GT5230 XBT GT2330 XBT GT4330 XBT GT5330 XBT GT6330 XBT GT4340 XBT GT5340 XBT GT6340
15"
395 x 294 x 60
XBT GT7340
Separate parts Magelis XBT GT terminals References
Compact Flash memory cards
128 MB XBT ZGM128
256 MB XBT ZGM256
512 MB MPC YN0 0CFE 00N
1 Gb MPC YN0 0CF1 00N
(1) With 6 function keys R1...R6. (2) For XBT GT5330/GT5340 : 270.5 x 212.5 x 57. For further information, please consult our Human-Machine Interface catalog.
3/6
Product data sheet

Magelis XBT F graphic terminals
Presentation
Magelis XBT F 10.4 (with keypad or touch screen) graphic terminals provide simple access to communication solutions via their direct connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP network.
Graphic terminals Display LCD screen size Memory capacity Application Extension Data entry keypad Soft function keys with LED Static function keys with LED Service keys Alphanumeric keys
Touch-sensitive keys Touchscreen data entry Functions Representation of variables Recipes Curves Alarm log Communication Integrated Ethernet Buses and networks Downloadable protocols Compatibility with PLCs Configuration software Operating systems Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Supply voltage References 256-color TFT screen
Magelis XBT F 10.4 16 MB Flash EPROM (via PCMCIA type II card) 10 12 + legends 12 12 + 3 alphanumeric access 8 in 1 row 16 in 2 rows Yes Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, potentiometer, selector 125 records maximum with 5000 values 16 real-time curves Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) Fipio, Fipway, Modbus Plus Uni-TE, Uni-TE TCP, Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP and third-party protocols Twido, Modicon M340, Modicon Premium, Modicon Quantum XBT L1003M (on Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis 296 x 91 x 332 296 x 91 x 222 296 x 95 x 222 c 24 V XBT F024610 XBT F034610 XBT FC044610 XBT FC084610
12 in 2 columns
3.2
XBT FC064610
Separate parts Magelis XBT F Graphic terminals References
PCMCIA memory card PCMCIA card for connection to
16 MB XBT MEM16
Fipio bus TSX FPP 10
Fipway network TSX FPP 20
Modbus Plus network TSX MBP 100
3/7
Product data sheet

Magelis Smart iPC industrial PCs
Presentation
Magelis Smart iPC industrial PCs are "hardened" PCs, which do not feature vulnerable components: hard disk, CD-ROM drive, etc. They are equipped with a 12" or 15" active-matrix backlit color TFT LCD touch screen b 12 models (MPC ST2 1NAJ 10T/R ) have a 100240 V power supply and feature in particular two Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports (RJ45 connectors) and a total of 5 USB ports, one of which is located on the front panel. b 15 models (MPC ST5 2NDJ 10T/R ) have a c 24 V power supply, 1 Ethernet port and 2 USB ports. Magelis Smart iPC industrial PCs feature a Windows XPe SP2 operating system and are supplied ready-to-use in two configurations: b Web edition: MPC STp pNpJ 10T, with application software pre-installed on a 1-GB Flash memory card: v Internet Explorer for browsing the Web (Internet/Intranet) v Windows Terminal Services client for client/server architectures v Software (readers) for reading Word (.doc), Excel (.xls), PowerPoint (.ppt), and Acrobat (.pdf) files b HMI edition - Vijeo Designer RT: MPC STp pNpJ 10R, with the software components listed above pre-installed on a Flash card, plus: v Vijeo Designer Run Time software
3.2
Compact industrials PCs Display Size Format Data entry Processor Format Frequency Ethernet TCP/IP Network Storage RAM CD-ROM drive Expansion slots PCMCIA cards PCI port Compact Flash card Operating system I/O ports
On front panel Mounting Dimensions Power supply Edition W x H x D (mm) Web HMI Vijeo Designer Run- Time
Smart iPC 12" XGA (800 x 600) 15 XGA (1024 x 768) TFT active matrix back-lit color LCD (262,144 colors) Via touchscreen Intel Celeron M VIA 600 MHz 667 MHz 2 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 1 GB Compact Flash 256...1024 MB 256...512 MB 1 slot (taking a maximum of 1 x type III card or 1 slot (taking a maximum of 1 x type III card or 1 x type I card) 2 x type I cards) 1 slot reserved for 1-GB card containing OS and software Windows Xpe integrated Windows 2000 preinstalled 4 x USB 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x parallel 1 x PS2 keyboard 1 x USB On panel or cabinet door (8 fixing bolts supplied) 313 x 239 x 65 mm 395 x 294 x 65 mm a 100...240 V c 24 V MPC ST2 1NAJ 10T MPC ST5 2NDJ 10T MPC ST2 1NAJ 10R MPC ST5 2NDJ 10R 12" MPC ST2 NAJ 10p MPC YK0 5RAM 512 MPC YK2 2RA1 024 MPC YN0 0CF1 00N MPC YN2 1CF1 00T MPC YN2 1CF1 00R MPC YN0 0CF1 52T MPC YN0 0CF1 52R 15" MPC ST5 2NDJ 10p MPC YK0 2RAM 512
Separate parts RAM expension kit Compact Flash memory
512 MB 1024 MB 1 GB blank 1 GB, Web edition software pre-installed 1 GB HMI edition Vijeo Designer RT software pre-installed
3/8
Product data sheet

Magelis Compact iPC industrial PCs
Presentation
Magelis Compact iPC industrial PCs are hardened PCs adapted to the restrictions of industrial environments, and combining compact dimensions with advanced performance and openness to applications under Windows 2000 or Windows XPpro. Powered by a a 100240 V supply, they are equipped with a 12 or 15 active-matrix backlit color TFT LCD touch screen, a USB port on the front panel (in addition to the standard USB ports), a u 20 GB hard disk, a slot for a PCI card, and a slot for a PCMCIA card. Compact iPC - Hardware b 12 models MPC KT2 2NAp 00N (Intel Celeron M 1.3 GHz processor) feature in particular two Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports (RJ45 connectors) and a total of 5 USB ports, one of which is located on the front panel. b 15 models MPC KT5 2NAp 00N (VIA 667 MHz processor) and MPC KT5 5NAp 00N (Intel Pentium 4M 1.7 GHz processor) feature 1 Ethernet port and 2 USB ports. Compact iPC - Software packages Magelis Compact iPC hardware is also available in the form of packages, which are supplied together with the application software listed below and are compatible with the relevant processor power: Vijeo Designer RT:References MPC KTp pNAp 00R
3.2
Compact industrials PCs Display Size Format Data entry Processor Format Frequency Ethernet TCP/IP Network Storage RAM CD-ROM drive Floppy disk drive Expansion slots
PCMCIA cards PCI port
Operating system I/O ports
On front panel Mounting Dimensions Software package W x H x D (mm) Vijeo Designer Run Time Vijeo Look Run Time Vijeo Look Built Time
Compact iPC 12" XGA (1024 x 768) 15 XGA (1024 x 768) TFT active matrix back-lit color LCD (262,144 colors) Via touchscreen Intel Celeron M VIA Pentium 4 Mobile 1.3 GHz 667 MHz 1.7 GHz 2 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) (RJ45) Hard disk u 20 GB 512...1024 MB 512 MB Yes, 24x Yes, 3.5", 1.44 MB 1 slot (taking a maximum of 1 x 1 slot (taking a maximum of 1 x type III card or 2 x type I cards) type III card or 1 x type I card) 1 PCI bus slot Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pro 4 x USB 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x RS232 1 x parallel 2 x PS2 1 x USB On panel or cabinet door (8 fixing bolts supplied) 313 x 239 x 108 mm 395 x 294 x 108 mm MPC KT2 2NAp 00N MPC KT5 2NAp 00N MPC KT5 5NAp 00N MPC KT2 2NAX 00R MPC KT5 2NAX 00R MPC KT5 5NAX 00R MPC KT5 2NAp 00A MPC KT5 5NAp 00B 12" models MPC KT2 2NAp 00N 15" models MPC KT5 2NAp 00N MPC YK0 2RAM 512
Separate parts RAM expansion Kit 512 MB 1024 MB
MPC YK0 5RAM 512
MPC YK2 2RA1 024
MPC KT5 5NAp 00N MPC YK0 5RAM 512
3/9
Product data sheet

Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs
Presentation
The main features of the Magelis Modular iPC range of industrial PCs are: b Modularity in respect of power ratings and expansion options for Control box 102 and Control box 402. b Integration of diagnostic tools designed to facilitate operation and maintenance. The Magelis Modular iPC offer comprises: b Three front panels with 15 color TFT LCD screen. b Control box 102 and Control box 402. Magelis iPC front panel screens for mounting on a Control box 102/402 comprise: b A 15 TFT active matrix backlit color LCD screen, with or without touch-screen capability, depending on the model b An infrared IrDA-compatible port b A connector for the PS/2 keyboard or mouse port, protected by a plug
3
With the keyboard model: b A standard IBM 70-key keyboard b 2 x 10 user-configurable keys b A pointing device with tactile feedback
3.2
Screens for Modular iPC industrial PCs (any screen can be used with any type of Control box) 15" XGA (1024 x 768) Display LCD screen size Format TFT active matrix back-lit (262,144 colors) Data entry By Keyboard Keyboard and touchscreen 70 standard IBM keys Alphanumeric keys User function keys 2 x 10 keys Analog resistive, 35 million cycles Touch panel I/O ports 1 PS/2 port for keyboard/mouse and pointing device 1 IrDA compliant infrared port Mounting On any Control box MPC EN0/DN0 listed below Power supply Via Control box 480 x 370 x 53 mm 480 x 370 x 53 mm Dimensions (W x H x D) References MPC NA5 0NNN 20N MPC NB5 0NNN 20N
Touchscreen
460 x 340 x 53 mm MPC NT5 0NNN 20N
3/10
Product data sheet

(continued)

Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs
Presentation
Modular iPC Control boxes will feature one of the 15 MPC Np5 front panels and are equipped with: b An Intel Celeron M 1.3 GHz or Intel Pentium M 1.6 GHz processor b A 40 MB hard disk, minimum b 512 MB of RAM as standard, expandable to 4 GB b A floppy disk drive b A removable CD-ROM drive (1) b A TCP/IP, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port (RJ45 connector) b Two 12 Mbps USB ports b Two serial COM ports (RS 232) b One parallel port b Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pro operating system pre-installed
3.2
Control boxes Processor Storage RAM CD-ROM drive Floppy disk drive Expansion slots Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port I/O ports Mounting Format Frequency Control box 102 Control box 402 Intel Celeron M Intel Pentium M Intel Celeron M Intel Pentium M 1.3 GHz 1.6 GHz 1.3 GHz 1.6 GHz Hard disk u 40 GB, removable SDRAM 256 MB, expandable to 512 MB (2 memory slots maximum) Yes, removable, 24x or combined DVD-R/CD-RW drive (available as an option) 3.5", 1.44 MB 1 x PCI bus slot and 4 x PCI bus slots and 2 x type 1/2 (or 1 x type III) PCMCIA slots 2 x type 1/2 (or 1 x type III) PCMCIA slots 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM4, and 1 x parallel, 1 x VGA external video port, 2 x PS/2 port (1) b With front panel screen: on panel or cabinet door (fixing bolts supplied with each unit). On 19" rack with 15" front panel screen, requires mounting accessory MPC YNO 0RMK 00N. b Without front panel screen: on panel or cabinet door, requires mounting panel MPC NP0 0NNN 00N. Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 operating system pre-installed 310 x 310 x 155 310 x 310 x 245 MPC EN0 2NAp 00N MPC EN0 5NAp 00N MPC DN0 2NAp 00N MPC DN0 5NAp 00N MPC EN0 2NDp 00N MPC EN0 5NDp 00N MPC DN0 5NDp 00N MPC DN0 5NDp 00N
Operating system Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Power supply a 100240 V c 24 V
(1) Port not operational when the Control box is fitted with the front panel screen. Nota : Operating system: Replace p with X to order the model with Windows XP Pro installed or with A to order the model with Windows 2000 pre-installed. Modular Magelis iPC-Vijeo Look software combined offers Processor Expansion card slots Vijeo Look supervisory software (see page 3/14) Power supply a 115230 V Control box 102 Intel Celeron, 1.3 GHz 1 x PCI slot 2 x PCMCIA slots Run Time (RT) monitoring MPC EN0 2NAX 00A Control box 402 Intel Pentium, 1.6 GHz 4 x PCI slots 2 x PCMCIA slots Run Time (RT) monitoring MPC DN0 5NAX 00A
Build Time/Run Time (BT/RT) monitoring MPC DN0 5NAX 00B
Separate parts RAM expension kit (2) 512 MB 1 GB Power supply a 115230 V MPC YDE RAM0 512 MPC YDE RAM1 024 (2) Control box 102 and 402 units have 2 slots for RAM cards (one of wich has a 512 MB RAM card installed as standard).
3/11
Product data sheet

Magelis iDisplay flat screens
Presentation
Magelis iDisplay screens are monitors with industrial flat screens designed for use in conjunction with PCs. The screen is availables in size 15. Featuring the latest TFT LCD technology, they offer top-class visualization and extended service life. Their touch screen interface makes for easy setup of user-friendly and high-performance HMI interfaces. Certified in accordance with PLC product standards, designed for use in harsh industrial environments and offering an excellent screen size/dimensions ratio, they can be installed easily on any machine and in any device, and are suitable for use in any type of environment. With identical dimensions to and a screen the same size as Magelis Smart iPC and Compact iPC industrial PCs, Magelis iDisplay screens can be used to visualize the development of installations with optimum ease and simplicity.
3.2
Type Screen 15" XGA 1024 x 768 Active-matrix color TFT LCD 16 777 216 u 200 cd/m2 adjustable 50,00 hours UL 508, CSA, IEC 61131-2 0 to +50C, compliant with EN 61131-2, UL -10 to +60C, compliant with IEC 68-2-2 tests Bb and Ab, IEC 68-2-14 test Na, and EN 61131-2 IP 65 UL 508, CSA, IEC 61131-2 Analog resistive, 35 million cycles VGA or DVI-D port USB or RS 232C port a 100 to 240 V (threshold values 98 to 264 V), EN 61131-2-compliant 50/60 Hz (threshold values 47/63 Hz), EN 61131-2-compliant y 20 ms 120 VA 395 x 294 x 65 Magelis iDisplay flat screens MPC YT5 can be mounted on a panel or cabinet door (fixing parts supplied). 3 meters included MPC YT5 0NAN 00N MPC YT9 0NAN 00N
Resolution Type Number of colors Brightness Backlighting (service life) Product certification Temperature in operation in storage IP level Product certification Touch panel Inputs Image Outputs Touch panel Power supply Voltage ratings I Frequencies Micro-breaks Power consumption Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Mounting Cable Power supply
a 100240 V
3/12
Product data sheet

FactoryCast HMI software
Web application development, FactoryCast HMI software

FactoryCast HMI application development software, referenced TLX CD FCHMI V1M, provides multiproject management and complete control of FactoryCast HMI applications, during both the development and the debugging phases, thanks to the online mode and simulation mode (operational when the system is offline) options. This software enables the intuitive and user-friendly setup of HMI functions by simply setting parameters using a tree structure of the application and can be used for complete management of the Web site: b Setting parameters for HMI functions: v Configuration of PLC interfaces: Import symbol databases and set parameters for the acquisition period v Configuration of spreadsheets v Configuration of E-mail v Configuration of connections to databases v SOAP/XML client /server interface (see page 7/5) v Recipe management b Management of the Web site: v Management of the Web site tree structure (creation/deletion of HTML folders and files) v Management of default Web site pages v Management of user Web site pages (1) v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages v Launch of the system editor for HTML pages (FrontPage or similar) v Up/downloading/comparison of Web pages in online mode v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including animations and Java beans) b Simulation mode The application and the Web site (including animations and Java beans) can be debugged in either online or simulation mode, which enables operation to be tested without a FactoryCast HMI module and without a physical connection to a PLC, thus simplifying debugging. An integrated graphics editor in the FactoryCast HMI software can be used to easily customize the following graphic objects: bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc. User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage or similar, not supplied). FactoryCast HMI includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up animations, which enable PLC variables to be accessed in realtime in the HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects (FactoryCast Java beans).
(1) Creation of user Web pages: User Web pages created in the FactoryCast HMI environment are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on HMI Web technology, they enable realtime access to PLC variables thanks to the FactoryCast graphic objects library (FactoryCast Java beans).
3.2
References
FactoryCast HMI modules
Active Web server FactoryCast HMI Module for Data rate automation platform Modicon Premium 10/100 Mbps Modicon Quantum 100 Mbps Reference TSX WMY 100 140 NWM 100 00 Weight kg 0.340 -
FactoryCast HMI installation software (to be ordered separately)

Name and Use description Multilingual Development and FactoryCast HMI (1) debugging of the HMI application Operating system Windows 2000, Windows XP Reference Weight kg TLX CD FCHMI V1M 0.340
TSX WMY 100
(1) Includes documentation in electronic format. 140 NWM 100 00
3/13
Product data sheet

Vijeo Look control software
Presentation
Vijeo Look version 2.5 is a SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) software package designed for standalone stations. It is based on open, standardized technologies, similar to Transparent Ready products. For example, it provides the ability to display pages in Modicon PLC embedded Web servers. It is easy to implement and offers all the standard functions of a graphic supervision tool. Vijeo Look is supplied with a pre-configured OFS (OPC Factory Server, see page 3/17) data server. It is compatible with PCs running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, and is used for creating applications based on Telemecanique Twido, Modicon TSX Micro, Modicon Premium/Atrium/Momentum/Quantum PLCs. The functions of Vijeo Look supervisory software can be used for: b Acquisition of PLC tags b Visualization of these tags b Process supervision and control b Recording the values of PLC tags or internal process tags in a database b Embedded software processing PLC tags are acquired exclusively by connecting to the PLCs via the OPC server, supplied with the OFS data server software included with Vijeo Look. In the case of discrete and analog I/O tags from TSX Micro/Premium/Quantum PLCs (and Advantys STB/Momentum/TBX remote I/O), the acquisition process in the Vijeo Look database takes place in an implicit, transparent manner. As an OPC server, Vijeo Look enables you to create and enhance tags, as well as make them available.
3.2
Logging
Visualization
Processing
Communication
Structure of the offer

The Vijeo Look offer includes 2 types of software license: b Build Time/Run Time license (BT/RT) allowing the application to be built and run b Run Time license (RT) allowing the application built with the RT/BT license to run There are four I/O sizes offered for each license type: Small (128 I/O), Medium (512 I/O), Large (1024 I/O) and Extra Large (2048 I/O).
References
Vijeo Look software Compatibility Operating system Type of license References Build Time/Run Time (BT/RT) Run Time (RT) Twido, Modicon TSX Micro/Momentum/Premium/Atrium/Quantum PLCs Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Small, 128 I/O Medium, 512 I/O Large, 1024 I/O Extra Large, 2048 I/O VJL SMD BTS V26M VJL SMD BTM V26M VJL SMD BTL V26M VJL SMD BTX V26M VJL SMD RTS V26M VJL SMD RTM V26M VJL SMD RTL V26M VJL SMD RTX V26M
3/14
Product data sheet

Vijeo Citect supervisory software
Presentation
The Vijeo Citect supervisory software offer is characterized by its flexibility, allowing customers to build the supervision solution that corresponds to their needs. Vijeo Citect features and power makes it suitable for any application in any market, in most demanding fields: v Energy and Infrastructure: Airports, Roads & tunnels, Water, Oil & Gas. v Industry: Mining, Metal, Minerals. The very flexible architecture in vijeo Citect software and applications make the investments are always scalable, and durable. From small stand-alone system, to large distributed redundant multiple network systems, only one single development tool needs to be used: this dramatically reduces training and knowledge management costs, optimizing the investments. As Vijeo Citect is perfectly aligned with Schneider Electrics control/HMI/SCADA offer development strategy, designers and users take full benefit from single accountability with Schneider Electric for system integration and performance.
Server licenses
Single server architecture with 2 Web Clients
Vijeo Citect exists: v in a Client-Server architecture, ranging from 150 Points to an unlimited number of Points v in a stand-alone version called Vijeo Citect Lite that can manage up to 500 Points Each Server license includes a Server Client and OFS. OFS allows a Vijeo Citect SCADA application, as a client, to access any data in any Schneider Electric control system and electrical distriblicenseution device connected to networks or fieldbuses, in real time. It also allows communication with third-party devices supporting Modbus and Modbus TCP protocols.
3.2
Client Server
Client licenses
Four types of Clients are available v Control Clients, used by operators accessing the Vijeo Citect Server thru a local connection. v View Clients, for user who do not need to perform any control, but who need to get a display of the Vijeo Citect application thru local connection. v Web Control Clients: Control Clients, thru a Web connection. v Web View Clients: View Clients, thru the Web. .
Floating licenses
Static license
Static, Floating and Redondancy Client licenses

Single server architecture with 3 Client licenses: 2 floating and 1 static
v Static Client license: For operators who need to have access to the control system at any time, whatever the number of Clients currently connected to the Server is. Resides in a physical key plugged into the operatorss Client PC. v Floating Client license: For users who do not need to use the Client all the time. Connections is allowed until the number of floating licenses purchased has been reached. Stored on the Server key. v Redundancy Client license: For a Standby Server in a Redundant configuration.
Characteristics
Compatibility Operating system Sizes License types Client types All Modicon PLCs and all automation systems using the OPC standard (OFS) Windows XP Pro, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 150, 500, 1500, 5000, 15000, unlimited number of Points v Server, Client, Redundant v Vijeo Citect Lite: Stand-alone system, 500 Points v Control v Web Control v View v Web View Delivers components: CD including Vijeo Citect, OFS, Schneider Electric drivers pack, hardware key(s), installation guide USB or parallel Runs in stand-alone mode Includes technical support and upgrades. (1 year included at purchase) Please contact your Regional Sales Office
Development workshop Hardware keys Evaluation license Support References
3/15
Product data sheet

Monitor Pro SCADA software
Description
Monitor Pro V7.6 is a SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) software solution. Its high-performance real-time server offers excellent processing capability, mainly due to the application objects. In addition, its client-server architecture on Ethernet TCP/IP enables it to be easily integrated in architectures based on Transparent Ready products: multi-server for sharing processing, multi-user for wide distribution of information, or in redundancy mode for your high availability applications. b The graphic interface offers a library of graphic objects. Based on Windows technology, the interface is easy to customize. b Configuration Explorer: an intuitive environment for configuring the real-time data server and for object-oriented configuration. b The relational database access interface, supplied with SQL Server 2000. Monitor Pro V7.6 makes it easy to record production data or access stored information. Monitor Pro V7.6 also operates with Oracle, Sybase, Dbase IV and all other databases that support the ODBC standard. b Improved availability: Monitor Pro incorporates redundancy services ensuring a high level of architecture availability. b Integrated traceability functions, for real-time monitoring of the quality of your production as well as logging all the actions of the operators. Monitor Pro V7.6 is the supervisory software package that adapts to your needs. It offers you real-time production monitoring and enables you to optimize the use of your equipment.
3.2
Multi-level architecture
Monitor Pro Build Time/Run client stations
Monitor Pro Build Time server stations
Redundancy
Data/ information
Characteristics
Format Compatibility Operating system Input/Output size Version PC CD-ROM references Control software All Telemecanique PLCs and all automation systems on the market via communication drivers or using the OPC standard Windows 2000 service Pack 3, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 11 sizes, from 300 I/O to an unlimited number of I/O (from 4800 tags to an unlimited number) Build Time/Run Time (BT/RT) or Run Time (RT) Please contact your Regional Sales Office
3/16
Product data sheet

OPC Factory Server
Description
Based on the OLE for Process Control (OPC) standard, Telemecanique's OPC Factory Server (OFS) software allows client software applications, such as supervisors/SCADA and customized interfaces, to access the data of Schneider Electric control system and electrical distribution devices connected to networks or fieldbuses in real time. It also allows communication with third-party devices supporting Modbus and Modbus TCP protocols. In version V3.3, the OFS data server integrates the most recent specifications of the OPC Foundation: b OPC-DA (OPC Data Access) b .NET API interface b OPC XML-DA V1.0 (OPC XML Data Access) OFS software can be integrated in control system architectures as shown below:
Ethernet TCP/IP
3
OFS server (V3.0)
1
Database
OPC client
Symbols.xvm (Unity Pro) Symbols.prj (Concept) Symbols.scy (PL7) Unity Pro project station
3.2
Premium Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum
Momentum
Modicon M340
The OFS server 1 is at the center of the data exchanges. The direct and dynamic link 2 between the OFS server and the Unity Pro project station results in productivity gains for designers and users of the devices. OFS has direct access to the items in the Unity Pro project. In addition, it performs a consistency check between these items and those of the Premium and Quantum PLCs.
Structure of the offer

The OFS V3.3 offer comprises: b OPC server software b OPC server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present) b OFS server configuration software b An example of OPC client for setting up applications b The setup documentation on CD-ROM Supplied on CD-ROM, the software operates independently on a PC. It interfaces with the variable export files generated by PL7, ProWORX, Concept, and Unity Pro software. It also provides a direct and dynamic link to the Unity Pro and Concept applications (1). The OFS V3.3 offer is available in two levels: b OFS Small: data server for 1000 items (2) that does not support the OPC XML-DA protocol b OFS Large: complete data server
References
OFS data server software Operating system Type of license References OPC Factory Server V3.3 Small software OPC Factory Server V3.3 Large software Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Single station 10 stations TLX CD SUOFS 33 TLX CD STOFS 33 TLX CD LUOFS 33 TLX CD LTOFS 33 200 stations TLX CD LFOFS 33
(1) Requires Concept version > 2.0 software to be installed on the same station. (2) item: variable, structure, table etc. in the Unity Pro application.
3/17
Product data sheet

Modicon Momentum M1E processor adapter
Presentation
M1 processor adapters with embedded Web server are based on the Modicon Momentum distributed I/O family of products. They are designed to be stand alone for mounting on any discrete, analog or application-specific I/O base. Depending on the type, they take one of the following: b Remote I/O via the I/O bus port b Connection of a Modbus Fmaster/slave bus. An optional module inserted between the M1 processor and the I/O base enables these units for network connection. The Flash memory can also be used to back up the applications, creating a local copy of the program to be loaded in the RAM.
M1E processor adapter on Momentum I/O base
Either ProWORX 32 software (LL984 programming) or Concept software (5 IEC languages) is required for programming M1 processor adapters, depending on the model.
3
3 1 2
Description
M1E 171 CCC 960 20/30 and 171 CCC 980 20/30 processor adapters have the following on the front panel: 1 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T interface. 2 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for Modbus or I/O bus connection (depending on the model). 3 Three LED indicators.
Characteristics
3.3
Type of module Transparent Ready Class services Web services
Structure
Network module
Ethernet TCP/IP communication management services Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Processor scan time RAM/Flash memory User memory/data memory Programming software Other communication ports Communication extension ports Conformity to standards LED indicators
171 CCC 980 20 171 CCC 980 30 171 CCC 960 20 171 CCC 960 30 B10 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status, and to the island diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables Web page loader software tool for loading user Web pages Modbus Messaging (read/write data words) I/O Scanning 10BASE-T 10 Mbps Twisted pair 0+60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Supplied by the 170 App I/O base on which the processor is mounted 0.3 ms per Kinstruction 512 K/512 K 544 K/1 M 512 K/512 K 544 K/1 M 18 K/24 K ProWORX 32 Concept, ProWORX 32 Concept, ProWORX 32 ProWORX 32 1 RS 485 Modbus port 1 I/O bus (derived from INTERBUS) Via optional modules (1 Modbus Plus port, 1 redundant Modbus Plus port, 1 serial link) UL, cUL, FM Class 1 Division 2, NEMA type 250, e Adapter operating (RUN) Ethernet network status (LAN Act), Ethernet network activity (LAN STS) Communication Programming ports M1E processors 1 Ethernet, ProWORX 32 1 Modbus Concept, Class B10 ProWORX 32 1 Ethernet, 1 I/O bus ProWORX 32 Concept, ProWORX 32 Description Reference 171 CCC 980 20 171 CCC 980 30 Weight kg 0.042 0.042
References
171 CCC 980/960 p0
171 CCC 960 20 171 CCC 960 30
0.042 0.042
Accessories and separate parts: Please consult the Modicon Momentum automation platform catalog.
3/18
Product data sheet

Twido compact base
Presentation
The Twido range of PLCs provides a compact base with integrated Ethernet port. The TWD LCAE 40DRF base is a compact-sized (95 x 90 x 70 mm), all-in-one solution. It uses a 100240 Va power supply and has the following discrete I/O: b 24 x 24 Vc inputs b 14 relay outputs b 2 x 24 Vc transistor outputs. This base can take: b Up to 7 I/O expansion modules, thus increasing the I/O capacity to 152 (with screw terminal version) or 264 (with HE 10 connector version) b All Twido range separate parts (memory cartridge or real-time clock, serial link adapters, digital display).
Twido compact base with display
Description
The TWD LCAE 40DRF Twido compact PLC base with integrated Ethernet port consists of: 1 An RS 485 serial link port mini-DIN connector (for connecting the programming terminal). 2 A slot for diagnostics/maintenance digital display unit. 3 Screw terminals for the 24 Vc sensor power supply and for connecting the input sensors (protected by hinged terminal covers). 4 A connector for expansion modules (7 modules max: discrete I/O, analog I/O, AS-Interface bus). 5 An LED display block. 6 Screw terminals for connecting the output preactuators (protected by hinged terminal covers). 7 Two analog adjustment points. 8 A connector for the extension of the 2nd RS 232C/RS 485 serial link port. 9 Screw terminals for connecting the 100...240 Va power supply. Accessible from beneath the controller: 10 A connector for memory cartridge or real-time clock. 11 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface.
3 4 5 6
10 11 9 8 7
3.3
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Web services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Drive Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply 24 Vc sensor power supply Inputs Outputs Counter Programming Application memory Conformity to standards LED indicators A10 No Web server Modbus messaging (read/write data words) BOOTP client for allocation of IP addresses via FDR server RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair -0+55 C 30...90% non condensing IP 20 100240 Va, 50/60 Hz (limits 85264 Va, 4763 Hz) 250 mA 24 x 24 Vc, 11 and 7 mA, type 1 inputs (positive or negative logic) 14 x 230 Va or 30 Vc, 2 A relay outputs 2 x 24 Vc, 1 A (positive logic) transistor outputs 2 x 24 Vc 5 kHz channels, 2 x 24 Vc 20 kHz channels TwidoSoft (Ladder language, Instruction List), 3000 instructions (6000 with memory cartridge) 3000 instructions (6000 with memory extension cartridge) IEC 61131-2, UL 508, UL 1604/CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Class 1 Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D), e et TuV Controller status (PWR, RUN, ERR and STAT), I/O (INp/OUTp) Ethernet network status (LAN ST), 10 or 100 Mbps data rate (L ACT) Description Compact base with integrated Ethernet port 100240 Va power supply Class A10 Separate parts, I/O expansion modules, extension modules, prewired system and TwidoSoft programming software: Please consult our Automation and relay functions catalog. TWD LCAE 40DRF No. of discrete I/O 24 x 24 Va inputs 14 relay outputs 2 solid state outputs 24 Vc Reference TWD LCAE 40DRF Weight kg
References
3/19
Product data sheet

TwidoPort, Ethernet Interface for Twido controllers
Modbus
Presentation
TwidoPort module 499 TWD 01100 is an Ethernet interface that is easy to use and dedicated to a compact or modular Twido programmable controller version 3.0. It allows incorporation of the Twido controller into an Ethernet network as a passive device (slave). With version 3.0 of TwidoSoft software and of the Twido operating system, the TwidoPort module is ready for use. When connected to the RS 485 port of the Twido programmable controller, the TwidoPort module acts as a gateway between the Ethernet network and the Modbus serial link. The connecting cable is supplied with the module.
Twido modular base controller
Ethernet TCP/IP
The main characteristics of the TwidoPort module are as follows: b Connects to the RS 485 port of the Twido controller; no external auxiliary supply is necessary. b Ethernet configuration: v takes the Ethernet configuration from the Twido application configuration (normal mode), v supports manual configuration using Telnet. b Provides Ethernet statistics via a Telnet session An optional type RS 485 link allow to have a second Modbus serial link to connect, for example, a Magelis XBT terminal for operator dialogue. This option is the TWD NAC 485D/485T serial interface adapter.
Description
3.3
4 3
TwidoPort 499 TWD 01100 interface module comprises: 1 Five LEDs (SER ACT, STATUS, LINK, 100 MB, ETH ACT) indicating performances associated with the TwidoPort module. 2 An RJ45 connector for connection of the power supply and communications to the RS 485 on the Twido controller, cable TWD XCA RJP03P supplied. 3 An RJ45 connector (accessed through the bottom of the module) for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP network. 4 An earthing screw (accessed through the bottom of the module).
Characteristics
Twidoport module Transparent Ready services Class Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services 499 TWD 01100 A10 None Modbus messaging (read/write data words) BOOTP function auto MDI/MDX (no need cross over cable) Telnet for manual configuration and Ethernet statistics RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 0...55 C 1095 % (without condensation) IP 20 180 mA 5 0.5 supplied by compact or modular Twido programmable controller UL 508, CSA 1010, FCC Class A, EN 61131-2, e Modbus serial link activity (SER ACT), STATUS, Ethernet link status (LINK), 100 Mbps data rate (100 MB), Ethernet network activity (ETH ACT)
Structure
TwidoPort interface
Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Max. consumption at c 5 V Supply voltage Conformity to standards LED indicators
Reference
Description TwidoPort interface module for all base controllers version 3.0 Class A10 Characteristics 10/100 Mbps. Auto MDIX function. RJ45 connector. TWD XCA RJP03P cable supplied. Reference 499 TWD 01100 Weight kg 0.200
Separate parts, base controllers, I/O expansion modules, extension modules, prewired system and TwidoSoft programming software: Please consult our Automation and relay functions catalog. 499 TWD 01100
3/20
Product data sheet

(continued)

Modicon M340 processors with integrated Ethernet port
Presentation
Robust, powerful and compact, the new Modicon M340 PLC is the ideal solution for machine manufacturers in applications such as secondary packaging, materials handling, textiles, printing, food processing, woodworking machines, ceramics, etc. The integration of Altivar and Lexium variable speed drives, Magelis display units and Preventa safety modules has been boosted in order to simplify the setup and use of Telemecanique solutions.
Description
1 2 3 4 5 BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030 Modicon M340 processors with integrated Ethernet port have the following on the front panel: 1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display unit including at minimum 3 LEDs relating to the Ethernet port. 3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT operator interface) (1) 4 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for saving the application and activating the standard Web server, Transparent Ready class B10 . 5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP network Also included, depending on the model: 6 BMX P 34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated) 7 BMX P 34 2030 processor: A 9-way SUB-D connector for the master CANopen machine and installation bus On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address.
Characteristics
Module type Unity Pro software Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR Client services SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator Bandwidth management Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of discrete I/O No. of analog I/O No. of application-specific channels Max. no. of Ethernet TCP/IP connections Other integrated communication ports Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 B10 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data Editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 1024 256 36 2 (integrated port and BMX NOE 0100 network module) Modbus serial link or character mode CANopen bus 0+ 60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n142, CSA 22.2 n213 Class 1 Division 2 , e Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green) Status of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green) Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red) 4 LEDs specific to processor operation (RUN, ERR, I/O, CARD ERR) 1 or 2 LEDs specific to the other communication ports (SER COM or CAN RUN and CAN ERR) (2) I/O capacity Memory capacity Processors with 1024 discrete I/O integrated 256 analog I/O Ethernet link 36 app-sp. channels Class B10 4096 Kb integrated Description Other integrated Reference communication ports Modbus serial link or BMX P34 2020 character mode CANopen bus BMX P34 2030 Weight kg 0,205 0,215
3.3
Structure
Modicon M340 processor
References
BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 2030
(1) The Magelis XBT GT graphic terminal requires Vijeo Designer configuration software version 4.5. Available 1st quarter 2007. (2) SER COM for serial link or CAN RUN and CAN ERR for CANopen bus.
3/21
Product data sheet

Modicon M340 Ethernet network modules
Presentation
The BMX NOE 0100 module is a standard module occupying a single slot in the rack of the Modicon M340 platform equipped with a Standard processor or associated Performance processor (maximum of 1 module per configuration). Depending on the memory card it is equipped with, the Web server is Transparent Ready class B30 or C30
1 2
Description
3 4 LThe BMX NOE 0100 module has the following on the front panel: 1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display unit consisting of 6 LEDs 3 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for activating the standard Web server, Transparent Ready class B30. This card can be replaced by the BMX RWS C016M card, Transparent Ready class C30 4 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP network 5 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the module On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes: v Address set by the position of the two switches v Address set by the application parameters Address set by the Ethernet TCP/IP network BOOTP server.
Characteristics
Module type Unity Pro software Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0100 + BMX RWS C016M B30 C30 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data Editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Yes Yes Yes (16 Mb) Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) Yes Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 0+ 60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n142, CSA 22.2 n213 Class 1 Division 2 , e Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green) State of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green) Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red) 3 LEDs specific to module operation (RUN, ERR, CARD ERR)
3.3
Structure
Network module
Configurable Web server User Web pages (available size) Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR server services SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator Bandwidth management Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators
References
Description Data rate Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps network module Memory cards (1) (2) Transparent Ready Reference class B30 BMX NOE 0100 C30 B30 BMX RWS C016M BMX RWS B000M Weight kg 0,200 0,002 0,002
BMX NOE 0100
BMX RWS
0ppM
(1) Memory card to be ordered separately, replace the BMX RWS B000M memory card supplied as standard with the BMX NOE 0100 module. (2) Card as spare part, supplied as standard with the BMX NOE 0100 module.
3/22
Product data sheet

Modicon Premium Processors with integrated Ethernet port
Presentation
Modicon Premium is the optimized automation platform for complex machines, manufacturing applications and infrastructures. These processors are open to the latest technologies, with integrated universal Ethernet TCP/IP connections. Premium also has numerous advanced automation functions (counting, electronic cam, position control, weighing, process control, data storage and machine safety).
Description
TSX P57 1634M, TSX P 26pp/2823/36pp/4634/4823/5634M double format processors (1) with integrated Ethernet port include the following on the front panel: 1 A display block with 5 LEDs relating to the processor. 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port. 3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. 4 A USB connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. 5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting an RS 485 peripheral device. 6 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface. 7 A slot for a PCMCIA memory extension card. 8 A slot for a PCMCIA communication or data storage memory extension card. 9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823/4823AM models) for Fipio bus manager link.
7 1
12
3 5 4 6 8 9
Characteristics
Type of module Unity Pro software PL7 Pro software Transparent Class Ready Standard Web services services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced communication Global Data services FDR server SMTP e-mail notification SNMP network administrator Bandwidth management Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of discrete I/O No. of analog I/O No. of application-specific channels Max. no. of network connections (including integrated link) Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP communication X-Way services Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 5634M TSX P57 2p23M TSX P57 3623AM TSX P57 4823AM B30 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) Yes (between 64 stations) Yes (128 stations) Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes, via Unity Pro function blocks Yes Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 512 1024 2048 24 80 128 256 512 8 24 32 64 1 3 4 5 Client/server requests: 128 bytes in synchronous mode and 1 Kb in asynchronous mode Yes 0+60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX) Collision detection (COL), Ethernet link diagnostics (STS), Ethernet port fault (ERR) 5 LEDs specific to the operation of the processor (RUN, ERR, I/O, TER and FIP) Discrete I/O Reference Analog I/O App-sp. chann. Unity Pro Processors with 512 / 24 / 8 TSX P57 1634M integrated 1024 / 80 / 24 TSX P57 2634M Ethernet link 1024 / 128 / 32 TSX P57 3634M Class B30 2048 / 256 / 64 TSX P57 4634M 2048 / 512 / 64 TSX P57 5634M (1) Except TSX P57 1634M processor, single format. (2) Also has an integrated Fipio bus manager link. TSX P57 4634/5634M TSX P57 26/28/36/48ppM Description Weight kg PL7 Junior/Pro TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 2823M TSX P57 3623AM TSX P57 4823AM 0.042 0.042 (2) (2) 0.042 0.042
3.3
Structure
Premium processor
References
3/23
Product data sheet

Modicon Premium Ethernet network modules
Presentation
TSX ETY ppp modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot on Modicon Premium PLC stations or Modicon Atrium coprocessors. A configuration can take from 1 to 4 network modules, depending on the type of processor. TSX ETY 110/110 WS/4103/5103 Ethernet modules route X-Way and Uni-TE messages transparently from a TCP/IP network to an X-Way network and vice versa.
1 2
Description
The front panel of TSX ETY ppp modules comprises: 1 A display block indicating the state of the module. 2 A standard (RJ45) connector for 100BASE-TX and/or 100BASE-T interface depending on the model. 3 A standard connector for 10BASE5 interface (AUI) with TSX ETY 100 WS. 4 Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and network number, with TSX ETY 100 WS.
3 4
3
Characteristics
Type of module Transparent Ready services Class Standard Web services FactoryCast configurable Web services User Web pages (available size) FactoryCast HMI active Web services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR server services NTP time synchronization SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator SOAP XML Web service TCP Open Bandwidth management Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP communication services Ethway/X-Way Conformity to standards LED indicators
TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100 FactoryCast FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI C10 B30 C30 D10 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables Yes Yes Yes (1.4 Mb) Yes (8 Mb) Yes (1) Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) Yes (between 64 stations) Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes Yes, via Unity Pro function blocks Yes (active Web server)
3.3
Network module
SNMP Agent Server Client/server Option Option Yes 10BASE-T (RJ45) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10BASE5 (AUI) 10 Mbps 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair Twisted pair 0+60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor Client/server requests: 128 bytes in synchronous mode and 1 Kb in asynchronous mode Uni-TE, common words IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX) Collision detection (COL), Ethernet port fault (ERR) Transparent Ready class Ethernet TCP/IP 10 Mbps C10 modules 10/100 Mbps B30 C30 D10 FactoryCast FactoryCast server configuration software HMI application development TCP Open TCP Open function block library software Unity applications SDKC, C language PL7 applications development Description Data rate Weight kg TSX ETY 110 WS 0.370 TSX ETY 4103 0.340 TSX ETY 5103 0.340 TSX WMY 100 0.340 Supplied with TSX ETY 110WS/5103 TLX CD FCHMI V1M TLX CD TCP50M UNY SPU ZU CD20E TLX LSDKC PL741M Reference
References
TSX ETY 110 WS
TSX ETY p103/WMY 100
(1) Database management, arithmetic and logic calculations, automatic e-mail transmission on process event, connection to relational databases. For further information: Please consult our Modicon Premium and Unity & PL7 software automation platform catalog.
3/24
Product data sheet

Modicon Atrium Coprocessors and TCP/IP gateway
Presentation
The Atrium coprocessor (PCI bus card), combined with a Magelis iPC industrial PC, provides a PC with a built-in PLC and supervisory software. This type of configuration is designed for installations that require a high level of interaction between the automation functions and the HMI applications. The software gateway enables Atrium PLCs to communicate using Modbus (or Uni-TE) Ethernet TCP/IP via the integrated Ethernet port in the industrial PC.
Description of the Atrium coprocessor

TSX PCI 57 204/354M coprocessors occupy two consecutive slots on the PC PCI bus but only use one electrically. They comprise: b On the faceplate: 1 A slot for a PCMCIA communication or data storage memory extension card. 2 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for connecting Bus X to the first Premium rack supporting the I/O modules and application-specific modules. 3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal. 4 An ERR LED (coprocessor or embedded equipment fault). 5 A 9-way male SUB-D connector (on TSX PCI 57 354M model) for Fipio bus manager communication. b On the card, component side: v 4 or 5 LEDs indicating the operating status v A slot for the coprocessor internal RAM backup battery v A slot for a PCMCIA memory extension card.
2 3 4 5
SCADA OFS server
Ethernet TCP/IP
Description of the TCP/IP gateway

Modbus
Uni-TE
1 3
Premium PC
1 Atrium coprocessor. 2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port. 3 TCP/X-Way software gateway.
Quantum
The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium coprocessors: b Communication using the Modbus (or Uni-TE) TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet TCP/IP card integrated in the PC b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in the PC. This software interfaces with the Atrium coprocessor PCIway driver and automatically routes messages. The most common configurations are: v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC TSX ETY 4103 Ethernet module. The Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported. v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function).
3.3
Characteristics
Type of module Unity Pro software Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Structure Atrium coprocessor See characteristics of the Premium processor TSX PCI 57 204M TSX PCI 57 454M A10 No Web server Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) That of the Ethernet link integrated in the host PC TSX P57 2pppM, page 3/23 TSX P57 3pppM, page 3/23
References
Description Discrete I/O Type of license Analog I/O App-sp. chann. 1024 / 80 / 24 2048 / 256 / 64 Reference Weight kg 0.310 0.340
Coprocessors Class A10 TCP/IP gateway software
TSX PCI 57 204M TSX PCI 57 454M
Single (1 station) Team (10 stations) Site (200 stations)
TLX CD GTW 10M TLX CD10 GTW 10M TLX CDUN GTW 10M
TSX PCI 57 204M
TSX PCI 57 454M
3/25
Product data sheet

Modicon Quantum Processors with integrated Ethernet port
Presentation
Equipped with a high performance processor, Modicon Quantum is optimized for the control of semi-continuous processes and for high availability requirements. The Quantum platform meets the requirements of the agribusiness, pharmaceutical, metallurgy, chemical-petrochemical and energy-infrastructure sectors. The new Quantum processors use the latest technologies with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port, data storage and display unit with keys for local management.
Description
The 140 CPU 651 50 and 140 CPU 651 60 processors have the following on the front panel: 1 An LCD display cover, providing access to: v A key switch for locking system operations that may be requested and all the permitted parameters that may be modified via the LCD display (2) and 5-button keypad (3) v A slot for the backup battery v A Restart push button. 2 An LCD display (2 lines of 16 characters) with brightness and contrast controls. 3 A keypad with 5 buttons (ESC, ENTER, MOD, I, =>) and 2 LEDs. 4 An RJ45 connector for connecting to the Modbus bus. 5 A female USB B type connector for connecting the programming PC. 6 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for connection to the Modbus Plus network. 7 Two slots for PCMCIA memory extension cards. 8 Two LEDS marked COM and ERR. 9 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network.
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.3
Characteristics
Type of module Unity Pro software Transparent Class Ready Standard Web services services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR server services SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator Bandwidth management Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of discrete I/O No. of analog I/O Max. no. of communication modules Max. memory Program capacities Localized/non-localized data Data storage Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 B30 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) Yes (between 128 stations) Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes, via Unity Pro function blocks Yes Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair Local: 26 slots, decentralized: 31744 I/31744 Q, distributed: 8000 I/8000 Q/network Local: 26 slots, decentralized: 1984 I/31984 Q, distributed: 500 I/500 Q/network 6 in local rack 7168 Kb 512 Kb 1024 Kb (768 Kb with no PCMCIA card) 8192 Kb 0+60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor UL 508, cUL, CSA 22.2-142, FM Class 1 Division 2, e Activity on the Ethernet port (COM), collision detection (ERR)
Structure
Quantum processor
References
Processor clock frequency Processors with 166 MHz integrated 266 MHz Ethernet link Class B30 (1) With PCMCIA card. 140 CPU 651 50/60 For further information: Please consult our Modicon Quantum and Unity, Concept & ProWORX 32 software automation platform catalog. Description Program/data capacity (1) 7168 Kb/512 Kb 7168 Kb/1024 Kb Reference Weight kg
140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60
3/26
Product data sheet

Modicon Quantum Ethernet network modules
Presentation
Ethernet 140 NOE 771 p1/NWM 100 00 Ethernet network modules are single format modules for installing in the local rack slots of a Modicon Quantum PLC configuration. A configuration can take from 2 to 6 application-specific modules, including network modules, depending on the type of processor.
Description
The front panel of TCP/IP 140 NOE 771 01/771 11 and 140 NWM10000 Ethernet modules comprises:
2 3
1 A display block, which indicates the module status and the transmission status on the network. A hinged cover for access to: 2 A (MT-RJ) connector for 100BASE-FX optical interface. 3 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface.
Characteristics
Type of module Transparent Class Ready services Standard Web services FactoryCast configurable Web services User Web pages (available size) FactoryCast HMI active Web services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR server services NTP time synchronization SMTP e-mail notification SNMP network administrator SOAP XML Web service Bandwidth management Redundancy service Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Network Operating temperature module Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 140 NWM 100 00 FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI B30 C30 D10 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables Yes Yes (8 Mb) Yes (1) Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) Yes (between 128 stations) Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes Yes, via Unity Pro function blocks Yes (active Web server) Yes SNMP Agent Server Client/server Yes Compatible with Hot Standby redundant architecture (2) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) or 100BASE-FX (MT/RJ) 10/100 Mbps Twisted pair/optical fiber 0+60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor UL 508, cUL, CSA 22.2-142, FM Class 1 Division 2, e Rack operational (Active), module ready (Ready), network active (Link) Ethernet network status (Run), download mode (Kernel), Full-duplex mode (Fduplex) Transmission/reception activity (TxAct/RxAct), 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data rate (10MB/100MB) Collision detection (Coll), Ethernet module fault (Fault) (1) Database management, arithmetic and logic calculations, automatic e-mail transmission on process event, connection to relational databases. (2) See System approach, section 2.5.
3.3
References
Description Data rate Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps modules Transparent Ready class B30 C30 D10 Reference 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 140 NWM 100 00 Weight kg 0.345 0.345 0.345
FactoryCast software
FactoryCast server configuration HMI application development
Supplied with 140 NOE 771 11 TLX CD FCHMI V1M
For further information: Please consult our Modicon Quantum and Unity, Concept & ProWORX 32 software automation platform catalog. 140 NOE 771 p1/NWM 100 00
3/27
Product data sheet

Preventa compact safety PLCs
Presentation
Preventa XPS MF compact safety PLCs provide a control solution for automated production lines combined with monitoring of the safety functions necessary for the protection of personnel and the safety of machines.They have been developed to meet the requirements of standard SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 and category 4 according to EN 954-1. The range of XPS MF compact safety PLCs is based on 6 small sized PLCs XPS MF 40pp, with differing characteristics (number and type of discrete inputs/outputs, communication ports). These Safety PLCs communicate over SafeEthernet with the remote safety I/O modules XPS MF1/2/3 and various other devices such as graphic terminal.
1 3
Description
XPS MF 40pp Preventa compact safety PLCs have the following on the front panel of their metal casing: 1 A terminal for c 24 V power supply 2 Two RJ45 type connectors for Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 3 A display block system diagnostic 4 Reset button 5 6 terminals for discrete inputs/outputs 6 2 terminals for pulsed outputs (only use with line control) 7 An RJ45 type connector for the TER Modbus interface with two status LEDs (for XPS MF4020/4022 models). The XPSMF40 versions XPSMF4040 and XPSMF4042 are equipped with a Profibus DP communication interface for non-safety-related data transfer (a 9-way female SUB-D connector is situated on the front plate of the device). The XPSMF40 Safety PLC versions XPSMF4020 and XPSMF4022 are equipped with a Modbus serial line slave interface for non-safety-related data transfer (a shielded RJ45 connector for RS 485 (Modbus slave) is situated on the front plate of the device).
4 2 5
6 7 XPS MF 402p
3.3
Characteristics
Type of Preventa PLC Transparent Class Ready Web services services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of 24 Vc I/O No. of Ethernet, SafeEthernet protocol connections Bus Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Max. operating category for product Conformity to standards LED indicators
Preventa compact PLC
XPS MF 4000 XPS MF 4020 XPS MF 4040 XPS MF 4002 XPS MF 4022 XPS MF 4042 A10 No Web server Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10 Mbps full duplex, 100 Mbps half duplex, with auto-negotiation Twisted pair category 5D or better, filter optic cable 24 configurable I/O 2 Modbus serial Profibus DP Modbus serial Profibus DP link Slave Slave link Slave Slave 0+ 60 C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 24 Vc (- 15%...+ 20%) Category 4 according to EN 954-1, SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 IEC 61205, IEC 61131, EN 50156 pending, DIN V 19250, NFPA PLC status (24 VDC, RUN, ERROR, PROG, FORCE, FAULT, OSL, BL) Discrete I/O (INp/OUTp), SafeEthernet status (RJ45) Description Compact safety PLCs Class A10 Inputs & Communication Outputs 24 SafeEthernet configurable I/O SafeEthernet, Modbus serial link SafeEthernet, Profibus DP Reference XPS MF 4000 XPS MF 4002 XPS MF 4020 XPS MF 4022 XPS MF 4040 XPS MF 4042 Reference XPS MFWIN SSV XPS MFWINUP Weight kg Weight kg 0.200
References
Description Software XPS MF 4000/4002 XPS MF 4020/4022 Update Software
Use Development of Preventa safety PLC applications Update of Preventa safety PLC software
For further information: Please consult our Preventa safety solutions catalog.
3/28
Product data sheet

Preventa modular safety PLCs
2 3
Presentation
The Preventa safety PLC XPS MF60 provides a modular solution for controlling automated lines combined with monitoring of the safety functions necessary for the protection of personnel and machines. The XPS MF60 safety PLC has been developed to meet the SIL 3 requirements of standard IEC 61508 and category 4 in accordance with standard EN 954-1. The XPS MF60 modular PLC incorporates 4 Ethernet TCP/IP ports as standard and has 6 slots available to take the 7 types of discrete, analog and counter I/O modules. These PLCs use the SafeEthernet protocol for communication with XPS MF30/31/35 compact PLCs and XPS MF1/2/3 remote safety I/O modules and various other devices such as graphic terminal.
Description
The Preventa modular safety PLC XPS MF60 consists of a metal rack with the following: 1 A c 24 V power supply module with Lithium backup battery. 2 A CPU. 3 Up to six input/output modules. 4 A metal plate for mounting the shielded connecting cables of the analog inputs (EMC) with a grounding screw. 5 A grounding screw (on a metal plate). 6 Two cooling fans (under the rack). 7 Four 14 mm oblong holes for mounting the rack on a vertical support.
5 7 6
Characteristics
Type of Preventa PLC Services Class Transparent Web services Ready Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Preventa c 24 V discrete I/O modules modular PLC Analog I/O modules Counter module No. of Ethernet TCP/IP with Modbus and connections Safe Ethernet Bus Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions (W x H x D) mm Power supply Max. operating category for product Conformity to standards LED indicators XPS MF60 A10 No Web server Modbus TCP/IP messaging (read/write data words) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 100 Mbps full duplex, 10 Mbps half duplex, with auto-negotiation Twisted pair category 5D or better, filter optic cable 24 I (c 24 V isolated, configurables), 32 E (c 24 V isolated), 8 S relay (a 230 V/c 110 V) 24 E (c 24 V isolated) /16 S (c 24 V isolated, 2 A ) 8 I single-pole ( 10 V, 0...20 mA) or 4 I double-pole ( 10 V) , 8 O ( 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...20 mA) 2 counter inputs (100 kHz, c 5/24 V) and 4 discrete outputs (c 24 V isolated, 0,5 A) 4 Modbus Serial line slave (RS 485, 122 slaves max.) 0+ 60 C 10...95 % non condensing during operation IP 20 with covering plate on unused in rack I/O module slots IP 54 mounted in enclosure 257 x 310 x 239 c 24 V (- 15...+ 20 %) Category 4 according to EN 954-1, SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 IEC 61131-2, EN 50156 pending, DIN V 19250, NFPA PLC status (RUN, STOP, ERROR, PROG, FORCE, FAULT, OSL, BL, FB2) SafeEthernet status (RJ45) Description Modular CPU Class A10 Rack Use 4 Ethernet/SafeEthernet integrated 1 Modbus slave integrated 1 slot for power supply 1 slot for modular CPU 6 slots for I/O modules c 24 V with Fault contact function 24 discrete inputs (c 110 V / a 127 V) 32 discrete inputs 8 relay outputs (a 0230 V/c 110 V) 24 discrete inputs 16 discrete outputs 8 or 4 analog inputs (sing.or double-pole) 8 analog outputs 2 counter inputs/4 discrete outputs Use Reference XPS MFCPU22 XPS MFGEH01 Weight kg 0,280
3.3
References
Power supply Input/output modules
XPS MFGEH01, XPS MFPS01, XPS MFCPU22, XPS MFDI2401, XPS MFDI3201, XPS MFAI801, XPS MFAO801, XPS MFDO801 and XPS MFDIO241601
Description Software
XPS MFPS01 XPS MFDI2401 XPS MFDI3201 XPS MFDO801 XPS MFDIO241601 XPS MFAI801 XPS MFAO801 XPS MFCIO2401 Reference
Development of Preventa PLC XPS MFWIN applications in Windows For further information: Please consult our Preventa safety solutions catalog.
0,820 0,260 0,260 0,600 0,260 0,240 0,280 0,260 Weight kg 0.200
3/29
Product data sheet

Ethernet information servers
W315/320E W@de RTU information servers
Internet E-mail
Presentation
SMS SCADA
PSTN/LL
Radio/GSM/GPRS TCP/IP
Pumps protection
W@de RTU information servers are designed principally for remote sites in the water sector or generally for infrastructures. They are standalone conformally coated modules. They can be inserted in slots of a Modicon Premium PLC or connected to a Twido controller, a Modicon M340 PLC or Modicon Quantum. They can be interfaced to all SCADA or HMI software (compatible with Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 870-5-101/104) and exchange commands between themselves. The server: b Detects application process errors by interrogating the PLC. b Saves and timestamp events and measures. b Generates alarms and periodic reports via Modem or Ethernet (SMS, ...). b Is easy to configure throught a embedded web interface. b Can be delivered with specialized PLC application examples (water, ...). b Allows remote programming and remote configuration of the connected PLC . b Charges and monitors a backup battery (optional or integrated). For more information, please visit us at: http://www.wade-rtu.com (1).
Premium + W@de
RS 232/485/422 Ethernet TCP/IP
Access control
Regulator
Modicon M340
Altivar
Pumps
3
1 2 3 4 7 5 10 TSX HEW 315G1C / G2C 9
Description
The front panel of the W315/320E servers comprises: 1 Display block indicating the module status. 2 USB connector for link to configuring PC. 3 RJ45 normalized connector for 10BASE T/100BASE-TX interface (Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP/IP and XIP). 4 RJ45 connector for Modbus link to local PLC (RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422). 5 RJ11 connector for PSTN/ISDN. 6 RJ45 connector for RS 232/RS 485 port (no integrated modem). 7 MMCX connector for GSM/GPRS antenna. 8 SMA connector for GPS antenna. 9 SIM card slot. 10 Removable (2) screw terminals for connecting the c or a power supply (depending on model). 11 Removable screw terminals for connecting the optional c 12 V battery. 12 Removable screw terminals for connecting the discrete inputs/outputs.
3.3
7 4
1 8 2 3 12 4 11 5 12 11 6
10 9 TSX HEW 320G1P1C
TSX HEW 320T1S1C
(1) For users manuals, password is gammewade. For product online demonstrations, login and password are guest". For all other information access is free. (2) Only with TSX HEW 320ppp.
Characteristics
Type of module Transparent Class Ready Standard Web services services Active Web services Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services TSX HEW 315ppC TSX HEW 320ppC/320ppppC B10 Access to PLC variables, alarms, file transfers and configuration functions Sending SMS messages. Log archiving: 50,000 time-stamped data items in Flash memory (4 Mb). Alarm management: alarms sending by SMS, acknowledgment of alarms, depends on the protocol on modem link Read/write data: Modbus TCP/IP messaging. PLC programming: Transparent access (PPP) by telephone (PSTN/ISDN), GSM/GPRS, 1200bds radio or external modem with Unity Pro, TwidoSuite, PL7, ProWORX 32 and Concept software. Transparent gateway: Modbus TCP/IP <-> Modbus Automation protocols: Modbus TCP/IP (messaging and I/O Scanning), CEI 870-5-104 Modbus Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus, CEI 870-5-101, CEI 870-5-104, DNP3.0 By protocol By protocol or by GPS (instead of 2nd Modem location ) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) (AUI) - 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition - 25+ 70 C (without fan) 95 % IP 20 c 24 V (limits c 9...30 V) a 110/230 V and/or c 12 V battery CISPR/EN 55024, CISPR/EN 55022, IEC 60068-2-1,2,52,78, IEC 60068-2-6-27 UL508 and CSA142 in project Integrated modem standards: PSTN/ISDN R&TTE, FCCpart68, CS03, GSM R&TTE, GCF Power supply (ON), Fault , PLC activity (PLC), modem , Discrete inputs/ouputs (D1...D6), discrete inputs/outputs (DI1DI5/DO1 and DO2)
Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication services Other Via serial port communication Via Modem services Time synchro via Modem Structure Physical interface - data rate Other Operating temperature characteristics Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards
LED indicators
3/30
Product data sheet

(continued)

W315/320E W@de RTU information servers
References
W315 W@de RTU information servers Module Nb of Type of integrated modem width discrete I/O Simple PSTN/ISDN GSM/GPRS 900-1800 MHz GSM/GPRS 850-1900 MHz 1200 bds radio modem (without radio) RS 232/485 port (no integrated modem) TSX HEW 315T1C W320E W@de RTU information servers with one integrated modem Double - 6 I or 2 I/4 O PSTN/ISDN (depending on GSM/GPRS 900-1800 MHz configuration), GSM/GPRS 850-1900 MHz - 5 I/2O) 1200 bds radio modem (without radio) RS 232/485 port (no integrated modem) Reference TSX HEW 315T1C TSX HEW 315G1C TSX HEW 315G2C TSX HEW 315R1C TSX HEW 315S1C Weight kg
TSX HEW 320T1C TSX HEW 320G1C TSX HEW 320G2C TSX HEW 320R1C TSX HEW 320S1C
TSX HEW 315G1C / G2C
W320E W@de RTU information servers with one integrated modem and one GPS receiver Module Nb of Type of integrated modem GPS receiver Reference width discrete I/O Double - 6 I or 2 I/4 O PSTN/ISDN Yes TSX HEW 320T1P1C (depending on GSM/GPRS 900-1800 MHz Yes TSX HEW 320G1P1C configuration), GSM/GPRS 850-1900 MHz Yes TSX HEW 320G2P1C - 5 I/2O) 1200 bds radio modem (without Yes TSX HEW 320R1P1C radio) RS 232/485 port (no integrated Yes TSX HEW 320S1P1C modem) W320E W@de RTU information servers with 2 integrated modems (1) Module Nb of Type of first integrated Type of second width discrete I/O modem integrated modem Double - 6 I or 2 I/4 O PSTN/ISDN GSM/GPRS (depending on 900-1800 MHz configuration), GSM/GPRS - 5 I/2O) 850-1900 MHz 1200 bds radio modem (without radio) RS 232/485 port (no integrated modem) GSM/GPRS 900-1800 MHz 1200 bds radio modem (without radio) RS 232/485 port (no integrated modem) GSM/GPRS 850-1900 MHz RS 232/485 port (no integrated modem) 1200 bds radio modem (without RS 232/485 port (no radio) integrated modem) RS 232/485 port (no integrated RS 232/485 port (no modem) integrated modem) Accessories Description GSM whip antenna GSM pach antenne Antenna extension cable Power supply and battery charger Battery c 12 V, 7 Ah
Weight kg
Reference TSX HEW 320T1G1C TSX HEW 320T1G2C TSX HEW 320T1R1C TSX HEW 320T1S1C TSX HEW 320G1R1C TSX HEW 320G1S1C TSX HEW 320G2S1C TSX HEW 320R1S1C TSX HEW 320S1S1C
Weight kg
3.3
TSX HEW 320G1P1C
TSX HEW 320T1S1C Details With 5 m cable With 4 m cable 5 m cable for TSX HAW GANT1 a 110-220 V / c 24 V, 20W, conformally coated For TSX HEW 315ppC For TSX HEW 320ppC/320ppppC For TSX HEW ACPW2C power supply Reference TSX HAW GANT1 TSX HAW GANT2 TSX HAW GEXT1 TSX HEW ACPW2C TSX HAW AR7 Weight kg
PLC application software For PLC (1) and Description controllers Twido controllers Water sector related application software
Reference TSX SEW 3SFU20
Weight kg
W@de RTU supervisory software For W@de RTU Description Reference information servers W@de RTU supervisory software TSX SBW 502V20 TSX HEW 315ppC TSX HEW 320ppC TSX HEW 320ppppC (1) For non listed combinations of modems, please consult our Regional Sales Office.
Weight kg
3/31
Product data sheet

W330 W@de RTU information servers
Internet E-mail
Presentation
SMS SCADA
PSTN/LL
Radio/GSM/GPRS TCP/IP Twido
Pumps protection
W@de RTU information servers are designed principally for remote sites in the water sector or generally for infrastructures. The W330 is a single format standalone module. It can be inserted in a slot of a Modicon Premium PLC or connected to a Twido controller, a Modicon M340 PLC or a Modicon Quantum. They can be interfaced to all SCADA or HMI software (compatible with Modbus TCP/IP) and exchange commands between themselves. The server: b Detects application process errors by interrogating the PLC. b Saves and timestamps events and measures. b Generates alarms and periodic reports via Modem or Ethernet (SMS, ...). b Is easy to configure throught an embedded web interface. b Can be delivered with specialized PLC application examples (water, ...). b Allows remote programming and remote configuration of the connected PLC. b Charges and monitors a backup battery (optional). For more information, please visit us at: http://www.wade-rtu.com (1).
W@de
Serial link Ethernet TCP/IP
Access control
Modicon M340
Premium
Altivar
Pumps
Description
1 2 3 4 5 6
3.3
The front panel of TSX HEW 330pp modules comprises: 1 Display block indicating the module status. 2 RJ45 normalized connector for 10BASE T/100BASE-TX interface (Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP/IP and XIP). 3 RJ45 connector for link to local PLC (RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422, Modbus and Uni-Telway). 4 Connector type: - RJ11 for PSTN/ISDN/LL link (with TSX HEW 330T1), - MMCX for GSM antenna (below the module with TSX HEW 330G1/G2), - SUB-D for RS 232/RS 485 port, no integrated modem (with TSX HEW 330S1). 5 Removable screw terminals for connecting the discrete inputs/outputs. 6 Removable screw terminals for connecting the c power supply.
(1) For users manuals, password is gammewade. For product online demonstrations, login and password are guest". For all other information access is free.
3/32
Product data sheet

(continued)

W330 W@de RTU information servers
Characteristics
Type of module Transparent Class Ready Standard Web services services Configurable Web services Active Web services TSX HEW 330pp D10 Access to PLC variables, alarms, logs and trend curves, file transfers and configuration functions Creation of dynamic pages with any HTML Editor (3 Mb available) Sending SMS messages. SMTP E-mail notification. Log archiving: 140,000 time-stamped data items in battery-backed Flash memory (4 Mb). Alarm management: alarm sending by SMS, E-mail, put-FTP or SNMP-trap, acknowledgment of alarms, pager. Programmable scripts: Alarm summaries, report management (Java script and Visual Basic) Read/write data: Modbus TCP/IP and XIP messaging. PLC programming: Transparent access (PPP) by telephone (PSTN/ISDN), Leased Line (LL), GSM/GPRS or external modem with Unity Pro, TwidoSuite, PL7, ProWORX 32 and Concept software. Transparent gateway: Modbus TCP/IP <-> Modbus and XIP <-> Uni-Telway. FTP Client/Server: file transmission on a server. NTP time synchronization. Automation protocols: Modbus TCP/IP (messaging and I/O scanning), XIP. SNMP network administration. VPN server compatibility. Security for remote accesses : firewall, IP filtering. Modbus, Uni-Telway, NetMPI, DF1. Modbus TCP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, NTP, SNMP NAT routing function and Call Back function 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) (AUI) - 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition - 25+ 55 C (without fan) 95 % IP 20 c 24 V (limits c 9...30 V) CISPR/EN 55024, CISPR/EN 55022, IEC 60068-2-1,2,52,78, IEC 60068-2-6-27 UL508 and CSA142 in project Integrated modem standards: PSTN/ISDN R&TTE, FCC Part 68, CS03, GSM R&TTE, GCF Power supply (ON), Fault , PLC activity (PLC), modem , Ethernet (LINK), Ethernet activity (ACT), discrete input status (DI), discrete output status (DO)
Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services
Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication services Via serial port Via Modem RAS (remote access server) Structure Physical interface - data rate Other Operating temperature characteristics Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards Other communication services
LED indicators
3.3
Weight kg
References
Description W330 W@de RTU information servers Details Type of integrated modem 1 input, PSTN/ISDN/LL 1 transistor output GSM/GPRS 900-1800 MHz GSM/GPRS 850-1900 MHz RS 232/485 port (no integrated modem) Reference TSX HEW 330T1 TSX HEW 330G1 TSX HEW 330G2 TSX HEW 330S1
TSX HEW 330T1 Accessories Description GSM whip antenna GSM pach antenne Antenna extension cable Power supply and battery charger Battery c 12 V, 7 Ah Details 5 m cable 4 m cable 5 m cable for TSX HAW GANT1 a 110-220 V / c 24 V, 20W, conformally coated For TSX HEW ACPW2C Reference TSX HAW GANT1 TSX HAW GANT2 TSX HAW GEXT1 TSX HEW ACPW2C TSX HAW AR7 Weight kg
PLC application software For PLC (1) and Description controllers Twido controllers Water sector related application software
Reference TSX SEW 3SFU20
Weight kg
(1) For Modicon Unity PLC application software, please consult our Regional Sales Office. (1) For Modicon PLC application software, please consult our Regional Sales Office or see http://www.wade-rtu.com (login: "guest", password: "guest").
3/33
Product data sheet

Field devices
Modicon Momentum distributed I/O, communication adapters
Presentation
Momentum I/O bases equipped with 170 ENT 110 0p Ethernet communication adapters create a distributed I/O system on an Ethernet TCP/IP network. Each I/O base and communicator assembly constitutes a device on the network. Types of base available: b Discrete: inputs or outputs (32 channels max.), mixed I/O (20 or 32 channels max.). b Analog: current or voltage inputs or outputs, Pt/Ni thermocouple, temperature probe or mV inputs. b Mixed, up to 16 discrete I/O and 10 analog I/O. b Application-specific: 200 kHz 2-channel counter, Modbus port with 9 discrete I/O. Sensors and preactuators are connected on removable screw or spring terminals.
3 2 1
Description
Ethernet TCP/IP 170 ENT 110 02/01 communication adapters comprise: 1 Standard connector for 10BASE-T or 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface depending on model (RJ45). 2 Area for identification label (supplied with each I/O base). 3 LED status indicators. All the communication adapters can be fitted on any type of I/O base (discrete, analog or application-specific).
Characteristics
Type of communicator Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server 170 ENT 110 02 A10 170 ENT 110 01 B20 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to base unit diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables FDR client for automatic assignment of the IP address and network parameters SNMP agent, detection of the product by an SNMP manager RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition
Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services
3.4
Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply I/O bases Discrete inputs Discrete solid state outputs Discrete solid state mixed I/O Relay mixed I/O Analog inputs Analog outputs Mixed discrete and analog I/O Application-specific Conformity to standards LED indicators
Modbus Messaging (read/write data words)
RJ45 standard 10BASE-T connector
Ethernet communication adapter
10 Mbps Twisted pair 0+ 60C 5...95% non condensing IP 20 Via I/O base c 24 V (16 or 32 channels), a 120 V and 230 V (16 channels) c 24 V/0.5 A (16 or 32 channels), a 120 and 230 V/0.5 or 2A (8 or 16 channels)
Inputs c 24 V (16 channels) and Outputs c 24 V/0.5 or 2 A (8, 12 or 16 channels) Inputs a 120 V (10 channels) and Outputs a 120 V/0.5 A (8 channels) Inputs c 24 V (10 channels) and Relay outputs c 20115 V or Outputs a 24230 V/2 A (8 N/O channels) Voltage/current (8 or 16 channels), thermocouple/temperature probe (4 channels) - 10 V+ 10 V, 020 mA or - 10 V+ 10 V, 420 mA (4 channels) 4I/2Q analog voltage/current and 4I/2Q c 24V 6I/4Q analog 010 V and 8I/8Q c 24 V, 6I/4Q analog. - 10+ 10 V and 8I/8Q c 24 V 200 kHz 2 channel counter, module 6I/3Q a 120 V with 1 RS 485 Modbus port UL, CSA, e, FM Class 1 Division 2 UL, CSA, e Ethernet network status (LAN Active) Ethernet network status (ST), data rate (10T, Module status (RUN) 100T) Module status (RUN) Description Ethernet communication adapters Transparent Ready Data rate class A10 10 Mbps B20 10/100 Mbps Reference 170 ENT 110 02 170 ENT 110 01 Weight kg 0.070 0.070
References
170 ENT 110 02/01
(1) I/O bases and separate parts: Please consult our Modicon Momentum automation platform catalog.
3/34
Product data sheet

Field devices
Advantys OTB distributed I/O
Presentation
The Advantys OTB distributed I/O solution, which complements the Advantys STB offer, consists of a compact system (network interface and integrated I/O) with the addition of Twido I/O expansion modules. Each island has, on a DIN rail: b A network interface module (including Ethernet TCP/IP) with 12 c 24 V inputs, 6 relay outputs and 2 solid state outputs c 24 V 0.3 A. b As an extension, up to 7 discrete or analog I/O expansion modules. This structure, created using IP 20 modules, can thus be used to manage 20 to 244 I/O per island over a maximum length of 328.7 mm (height 94.5 mm).
Description
2 1 3 4 5
The OTB 1E0 DM9LP Ethernet TCP/IP network interface module with integrated I/O has the following on the front panel: 1 A pivoting door for accessing a standard to rotary switches for Ethernet address assignment (IP by default, by DHCP server or by BOTTP server. 2 An LED display block. 3 Screw terminals for the c 24 V sensor power supply and for connecting the input sensors (with 1 common). 4 Screw terminals for connecting the output preactuators (with 4 commons). 5 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX physical interface (RJ45). On the right-hand side panel: A connector for TWD Dpp/App I/O expansion modules (7 modules max.).
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Ethernet Operating temperature communication Relative humidity adapter Degree of protection Power supply Inputs Outputs A10 None Modbus messaging (read/write data words) RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 0+ 55C 3095% non condensing IP 20 c 24 V (limits c 20.426.4 V) 12 inputs c 24 V, 5 and 7.7 mA, 1 common point (positive or negative logic) Connection via removable screw terminals 6 a 230 V or c 30 V, 2 A relay outputs, 3 common points (1 x 3, 1 x 2 and 1 x 1) 2 c 24 V, 0.3 A transistor outputs, 1 common point (positive logic) Connection via removable screw terminals IEC 61131-2, UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Class 1 Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D), e Controller status (PWR and STAT), I/O (Ip/Qp) Ethernet network status/10 or 100 Mbps data rate (10 T and 100T) Description No. of discrete I/O Reference OTB 1E0 DM9LP Weight kg 0.205
3.4
Conformity to standards LED indicators
References
Ethernet network interface module 12 a 24 V inputs c 24 V power supply 6 relay outputs 2 c 24 V solid state Class A10 outputs
OTB 1E0 DM9LP
Discrete I/O expansion modules

Number of channels a 120 V inputs c 24 V inputs 2 A relay outputs c 24 V 0.3 A transistor outputs 8 TWD DAI 8DT TWD DDI 8DT TWD DRA 8RT TWD DDO 8TT 16 TWD DDI 16DT TWD DRA 16RT 4 I/4 Q 16 I/8 Q TWD DMM 8DRT TWD DMM 24DRF 8 TWD AMI 8HT TWD ARI 8HT 2 I/1Q TWD ALM 3LT TWD AMM 3HT
Analog I/O expansion module

Number of channels 1 2 4 010 V, 020 mA inputs TWD AMI 4LT Thermocouple/Pt temp. probe inputs 010 V, 420 mA outputs TWD AMO 1HT 010 V, 420 mA inputs TWD AMI 2HT +/- 010 V outputs TWD AVO 2HT For further information, please consult our Automation and control, automation and relay functions catalog.
3/35
Product data sheet

Field devices
Advantys STB distributed I/O
Presentation
The Advantys STB distributed I/O solution is an open, modular I/O system. It can be used to design industrial automation islands managed by a master controller connected to various buses and networks, including Ethernet TCP/IP. Each island comprises a set of modules mounted on a DIN rail to make up one or more segments in which the power supplies (logic c 5 V, sensors and preactuators c 24 V or a 115/230 V) are distributed automatically. The Advantys STB I/O family can be divided into 2 groups of modules: b Standard range: comprehensive offer with configurable parameters. b Basic range: just enough offer but (without parameting) with fewer functions and non-configurable modules. Sensors and preactuators are connected on removable screw or spring terminals. The Advantys configuration software is used to set the parameters of the numerous I/O module functions (logic of each channel, behavior in the event of a short-circuit or overload, fallback position, reflex functions, etc).
3
1 4
Description
The STB NIP 2212 Ethernet TCP/IP network interface module has the following on the front panel: 1 A standard connector for 10BASE-T interface (RJ45). 2 Two rotary selector switches for addressing nodes on the bus or the network. 3 A c 24 V external power supply connector for the removable screw-type (STB XTS 1120) or spring-type (STB XTS 2120) terminals. 4 An LED display block. 5 A screw for unlocking the module from the DIN rail. 6 A slot for an STB XMP 4440 removable memory card. 7 Cover for access to: a port for connecting the island setup and configuration PC or an HMI terminal (read/write data), and the Reset button. On the right-hand side panel: A bus connector for connecting (via base units) to the power distribution module and to the I/O modules (max. 32 modules on 7 segments).
B20 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the island diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables Modbus messaging (read/write data words) FDR client for automatic assignment of the IP address and network parameters SNMP agent, detection of the product by an SNMP manager RJ45 standard 10BASE-T connector 10 Mbps Twisted pair 0+ 60C without derating 95% non condensing at 60C IP 20 c 24 V (limits c 19.230 V), 750 mA maxi 32 per island 1 primary and 6 extensions (on 15 m maxi) c 24 V (2, 4, 6 or 16 channels), a 115 V and 230 V (2 channels) c 24 V/0.5 A (2, 4, 6 or 16 channels), c 24 V/2 A (2 channels), a 115230 V/2 A (2 channels) c 24 V or a 115230 V 2 C/O/2 A, 2 N/C + N/O/7A - 10 V+ 10 V, 020 mA, multi-range (2 channels) - 10 V+ 10 V, 020 mA (2 channels) Tego Power 8 motor starters (16 inputs), TeSys model U 4 controller-starters (12 inputs) 40 kHz 1 channel counter IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2, e Marine classification: ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR and RINA Ethernet network status (10T ACT, LAN ST) Module and island status (POWER, RUN, ERROR and TEST)
5 6
Characteristics
3.4
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server Ethernet TCP/IP communication management service Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Max. number of I/O modules Number of segments I/O modules Discrete inputs (standard et basic) Discrete solid state outputs Relay outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Application-specific Conformity to standards LED indicators
Ethernet communication adapter
References
Description Ethernet NIM network interface modules Class B20 Removable power supply terminals (pack of 10) Use c 24 V power supply Reference STB NIP 2212 Weight kg 0.130
Screw STB XTS 1120 Spring STB XTS 2120 32 Kb removable memory card Application memory backup STX XMP 4440
0.003 0.003
STB NIP 2212
(1) Power distribution modules, I/O modules, bases, configuration software and separate parts: Please consult our Advantys STB I/O, the open solution catalog.
3/36
Product data sheet

Field devices
ATV 61 variable speed drives (pump and fan applications)
Presentation
Dedicated to pump and fan applications in building and industrial segments, the Altivar 61 variable speed drives adapt effortlessly to simple catalogue machines. Its performance levels and ease of parameter setting make it the reference product. Open to all building and industrial communication networks, it can be connected to Ethernet Transparent Ready by an optional card.
ATV 61 without graphic terminal
The Altivar 61 range of variable speed drives extends across a range of motor power ratings up to 630 kW with two types of power supply: b 200_240 V 3-phase, up to 90 kW b 380_480 V 3-phase, up to 630 kW. The Altivar 61 integrates the numerous functions : PID regulator, automatic motor adaptation, automatic restart, sleep and wake up mode, flying mode, ... The Altivar 61 can be inserted in an installations safety system. It integrates the Power Removal safety function which prohibits any accidental starting of the motor. This function complies with machine standard EN 954-1 category 3, the standard governing electrical installations IEC/EN 61508 SIL2 and the power drive systems standard IEC/EN 61800-5-2.
ATV 61 with graphic terminal
Description
1
The Altivar 61 variable speed drive can integrate a maximum of three option cards simultaneously, of which the Ethernet TCP/IP communication card. All the drive functions can be accessed via Modbus services: controlling, monitoring, adjustment and configuration. 1 An optionnal Ethernet TCP/IP communication card. 2 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface (RJ45).
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web services (1) C20 Altivar Viewer drive diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration, adjustment and signaling functions Altivar chart simplified ocsilloscope function Security configuration of passwords to access viewing and modification "Ethernet statistics drive identification and transmission statistics Configurable Web service Downloading user defined Web pages by FTP Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication Modbus TCP/IP messaging(read/write registers, read device identification, diagnostics) services BOOTP, DHCP (8 simultaneous Modbus TCP/IP connections), TFTP Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication I/O Scanning, 10 control variables and 10 monitoring variables freely configurable (2) FDR client, automatic assignment of the IP address and network parameters services SNMP agent, detection of the product by an SNMP manager RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector Physical interface Data rate 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair Medium Operating temperature - 10+ 50C or - 10+ 60C with derating and with the cpntrol card fan kit VW3 A9 4pp Relative humidity 5...95 % without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 IP 21 or IP00 (depending on model) and IP 41 on upper part (with cover plate) Degree of protection Output frequency range 1...1000 Hz or 1...500 Hz depending on model Speed range 1...100 in open loop mode Flux vector control without sensor, voltage/freqency ration (2 or 5 pulses), ENA system Motor control profile with asynch. motor Conformity to standards IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2 categories C1 to C3, e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM 117 and GOST 5 LEDs on the card: RX (reception), TX (transmission), FLT (collosion detection), LED indicators STS (IP address) and 10/100 Mbps (speed) Description Communication card Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps Class C20 (1) The standard Web server can be adapted or replaced by a customized Web server depending on the requirements of the application. Knowledge of HTTP protocol and Java technology is required to make modifications. (2) The periodic variables of I/O Scanning may be freely assigned according to the needs of the application. For drive ATV 71, ATV 61 Reference VW3 A3 310 Weight kg 0.300
3.4
Structure
Drive
Reference
VW3 A3 310
3/37
Product data sheet

Field devices
ATV 71 variable speed drives
Presentation
The Altivar 71 range of variable speed drives extends across a range of motor power ratings from 0.37 kW to 500 kW with three types of power supply: b 200_240 V single-phase, from 0.37 kW to 5.5 kW b 200_240 V 3-phase, from 0.37 kW to 75 kW b 380_480 V 3-phase, from 0.75 kW to 500 kW.
Open to all industrial communication networks and featuring numerous automation system options, the Altivar 71 adapts effortlessly to complex sophisticated machines. Its performance levels and ease of parameter setting make it the reference product up to 500 kW. It can be connected to Ethernet Transparent Ready by an optional card. The Altivar 71 can be inserted in an installations safety system. It integrates the Power Removal safety function which prohibits any accidental starting of the motor. This function complies with machine standard EN 954-1 category 3, the standard governing electrical installations IEC/EN 61508 SIL2 and the power drive systems standard IEC/EN 61800-5-2. The functionality of the Altivar 71 drive boosts performance and increases a machines flexibility of use across multiple applications (handling, hoisting, process machines, textile machines, packaging, ...).
Description
The Altivar 71 variable speed drive can integrate a maximum of three option cards simultaneously, of which the Ethernet TCP/IP communication card. All the drive functions can be accessed via Modbus services: controlling, monitoring, adjustment and configuration. 1 An optionnal Ethernet TCP/IP communication card. 2 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface (RJ45).
3.4
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web services (1) C20 Altivar Viewer drive diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration, adjustment and signaling functions Altivar chart simplified oscilloscope function Security configuration of passwords to access viewing and modification "Ethernet statistics drive identification and transmission statistics Downloading user defined Web pages via FTP Configurable Web service Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication Modbus TCP/IP messaging(read/write registers, read device identification, diagnostics) services BOOTP, DHCP (8 simultaneous Modbus TCP/IP connections), TFTP Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication I/O Scanning, 10 control variables and 10 monitoring variables freely configurable (2) FDR client, automatic assignment of the IP address and network parameters services SNMP agent, detection of the product by an SNMP manager RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector Physical interface Data rate 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair Medium Operating temperature - 10+ 50C ou - 10+ 60C with derating and with the control card fan kit VW3 A9 4pp Relative humidity 5...95 % without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 IP 21 or IP00 (depending on model) and IP 41 on upper part (with cover plate) Degree of protection Output frequency range 1...1000 Hz or 1...500 Hz depending on model Speed range 1...100 in open loop mode Flux vector control with or without sensor, voltage/frequency ration (2 or 5 pulses), ENA system Motor control profile with Asynchronous motor Synchronous Vector control without speed feedback Conformity to standards IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2 categories C1 to C3, e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM 117 and GOST 5 LEDs on the card: RX (reception), TX (transmission), FLT (collision detection), LED indicators STS (IP address) and 10/100 Mbps (speed) Description Communication card Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps Class C20 (1) The standard Web server can be adapted or replaced by a customized Web server depending on the requirements of the application. Knowledge of HTTP protocol and Java technology is required to make modifications. (2) The periodic variables of I/O Scanning may be freely assigned according to the needs of the application. For drive ATV 71, ATV 61 Reference VW3 A3 310 Weight kg 0.300
Ethernet structure
Variable speed drive
Reference
VW3 A3 310
3/38
Product data sheet

Field devices
Lexium 15 servodrives for brushless motors
Premium
Presentation.
The Lexium 15 servo drive is connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via the AM0 ETH 001V000 communication card. This Transparent Ready A10 class card allows access to Modbus messaging, I/O scanning and faulty device replacement services (FDR "Faulty Device Replacement"). The cost of installing servo drives on the Internet TCP/IP network is reduced by the AM0 ETH 001V000 cards internal switch, which allows a "Daisy Chain" topology to be used. Unlike the star topology, daisy chaining does not require the use of a hub or external industrial switch. Other devices can be connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network such as Premium PLCs (1), Magelis XBT terminals (2), Altivar variable speed drives (3), Advantys STB I/O (4), etc. In offline mode with integrated position indexer (simple applications that do not require a PLC position control module), Lexium 15 drives have a slot that can take an Ethernet TCP/IP network card. As well as the standard Ethernet connections via switches or hubs (for example, from the ConneXium range), this Ethernet card which has 2 Ethernet ports enables daisy chain connection of up to 32 Lexium 15 drives. Switches or hubs can be used to create a topology with a number of daisy chains. The Unilink software is used for local configuration of the Ethernet parameters and Ethernet, Modbus and drive diagnostics. Modbus messaging is used to access all this information on Ethernet.
Ethernet TCP/IP Daisy Chain wiring
Lexium 15
Description
Lexium 15 drives are connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via the AM0 ETH 001V000 communication card. The card has the following on the front panel: 1 LED indicators. 2 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface (RJ45). 3 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface (RJ45) for daisy chain connection.
1 2 3
3.4
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Servo motor output Conformity to standards LED indicators A10 No Web server Modbus messaging (read/write drive parameters (240 bytes max), identification and diagnostics Save and restore drive parameters and Motion Tasks in blocks via dedicated registers FDR client for local assignment of the IP address I/O Scanning service (13 control words and 18 status words) 2 x RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connectors (ETH1, ETH2) for daisy chain connection 10/100 Mbps half duplex and full duplex Twisted pair 0+ 45C, + 45+ 55C with derating, see our Lexium 15 motion control catalog 85% non condensing IP 21 200...480 Va 3-phase Continuous/maximum current: 1.5 A/3 A to 70 A depending on the model EN 50178, EN 60139-1, EN 60204, UL 508C, UL 840, CSA 22-2 Machine safety NF EN 292-1, EN954-1 Transmission/reception activity (ACT for ETH1, ACT for ETH2), communication status (STS)
Lexium 15 drives
References
Description Communication cards Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps Class A10 For Lexium Number of Reference drive discrete inputs MHDA AM0 ETH 001 V000 1pppN00/A00 Weight kg 0.180
AM0 ETH 001V000
(1) See pages 3/23 and 3/24. (2) See pages 3/6 and 3/7. (3) See pages 3/37 and 3/38. (4) See page 3/36.
3/39
Product data sheet

Field devices
Lexium 17D servodrives for brushless motors
Premium
Presentation.
Lexium 17D digital drives provide static switching, current (or torque) regulation, speed regulation and position control for BPH, BPL or SER brushless motors. They are available in 7 current ratings (1.5, 3, 6, 10, 20, 40 and 70 A rms continuous).
Ethernet TCP/IP Daisy Chain wiring
In offline mode with integrated position indexer (simple applications that do not require a PLC position control module), Lexium 17D drives have a slot that can take an Ethernet TCP/IP network card. As well as the standard Ethernet connections via switches or hubs (for example, from the ConneXium range), this Ethernet card which has 2 Ethernet ports enables daisy chain connection of up to 32 Lexium 17D drives. Switches or hubs can be used to create a topology with a number of daisy chains. The Unilink software is used for local configuration of the Ethernet parameters and Ethernet, Modbus and drive diagnostics. Modbus messaging is used to access all this information on Ethernet.
Lexium 17D
3
1 2 3 4
Description
Lexium 17D drives are connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via the AM0 ETH 001V000 communication card. The cards have the following on the front panel: 1 A 10-way Phnix removable connector for connecting 8 configurable discrete inputs (with AM0 ETH 002V000 card). 2 LED indicators. 3 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface (RJ45). 4 A standard connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface (RJ45) for daisy chain connection.
Characteristics
3.4
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Lexium 17D drives Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Brushless motor output Conformity to standards LED indicators
A10 No Web server Modbus messaging (read/write drive parameters (240 bytes max), identification and diagnostics Save and restore drive parameters and Motion Tasks in blocks via dedicated registers FDR client for local assignment of the IP address I/O Scanning service (22 control words and 19 status words) 2 x RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connectors (ETH1, ETH2) for daisy chain connection 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 0+ 45C, + 45+ 55C with derating, see our Lexium 17D motion control catalog 85% non condensing IP 21 208...480 Va 3-phase Continuous/maximum current: 1.5 A/3 A to 70 A/140 A depending on the model EN 50178, EN 60139-1, EN 60204, UL 508C, UL 840, CSA 22-2 Machine safety NF EN 292-1, EN954-1 Transmission/reception activity (ACT for ETH1, ACT for ETH2), communication status (STS)
References
Description Communication cards Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps Class A10 For Lexium Number of Reference drive discrete inputs MHDA AM0 ETH 001 V000 1pppN00/A00 Weight kg 0.180
AM0 ETH 001V000
3/40
Product data sheet

Field devices
Inductel identification system : Ethernet read/write station
Presentation
DA DATA D DATA AT D A DATA AT D A DATA AT DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA TA DA A DATA TA
Inductive technology is based on the use of a medium frequency electromagnetic signal (carrier), for contactless transmission between two electronic devices. It is used for identifying products during manufacture and improving the management of product-related data flows. The system consists of: b Updatable code badges, with decentralized memory (ferroelectric memory or EEPROM), accessible in read and write mode for use with the product to be identified. b The read/write station with remote antenna, a bidirectional communication device that manages the data transmitted between the badge and the processor via the Ethernet TCP/IP network.
Read/write station with antenna and updatable code badge
1 2
Description
The XGKS 1715503 read/write station is in the form of a dust and damp proof metal box comprising: 1 A 5-way female M12 connector for connection to the antenna (XGLA... or XGPA). 2 A display block consisting of 5 LEDs indicating the station status. 3 A removable cover for accessing the station configuration switches. 4 A 20UNF 3 1/2" 3-pin male connector for connecting the c 24 V station power supply (female connector to be ordered separately). 5 An IP 65 shielded base for connection to the Ethernet network. The special connector supplied with the station is used to form a dust and damp proof connection using any standard RJ45 cable. This station (210 x 60 x 235), is fixed onto a frame or panel using 4 screws (4 x 8 holes).
4 5
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply External antenna Communication Requests Data rate Conformity to standards LED indicators B10 Inductel Viewer access to the product description, status and diagnostics Data editor access to the configuration functions and variables Modbus messaging (read/write I/O words) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, standard RJ45 connector with IP 65 shielded base 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Double twisted pair 0+ 50C 3095% non condensing IP 65 c 24 V (limits c 2129 V) 5-way female M12 connector (antenna/station link 2 m max.) Modbus TCP/IP 124 words max. 500 words/s max. depending on antenna used UL, e Electromagnetic interference, level 3 according to IEC 61000-4-2/4-3/4-3 On (green), badge present (yellow), badge and communication port faults (red) Ethernet network activity (RUN, green), collision detection (COL, red), diagnostics (STS, yellow) and fault (ERR, red) Description Read/write station c 24 V power supply Class B10 Integrated Ethernet port 10/100 Mbps Reference XGK S1715503 Weight kg 1.120
3.4
Structure
Network interface module controller
References
Antennae, updatable code badges, connection accessories: please consult our Inductive identification system catalog.
XGK S1715503
3/41
Product data sheet

Field devices
Ositrack identification system
Presentation
RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) is a term generally used for radio frequency identification systems. These frequencies range between 50 kHz and 2.5 GHz. The most widely used is 13.56 MHz. The Ositrack RFID identification system enables object traceability, identification (tracking) functions to be performed and access control. The information is stored in an accessible memory using a simple radio frequency link. This memoryis in the form of an electronic tag, which contains an antenna and an integrated circuit. The tag contains the information associated with the object to which it is fixed. When a tag passes through the field generated by the reader/station, it detects the signal and exchanges the data (read or write) between its memory and the reader/station. Ositrack is open to the majority of ISO 18000-3, ISO 15693 and ISO 14443 electronic tags. Ositrack integrates Modbus RTU, Uni-Telway (1), Modbus TCP/IP and CANopen (1) protocols.
3
1 3 2
Description
The Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH is fitted with M12 connectors. It is used to connect the supply, the Ethernet network and 1 to 3 stations XGC S. It comprises a sealed metal enclosure fitted with: 1 Ethernet network signalling LEDs. 2 One Ethernet M12 type, D coding, socket. 3 One green LED indicator for connecting the 24 Vc power supply. 4 One power supply M12 type 4-pinmale socket. 5 3 x M12 type female, A coding, sockets for connecting 1 to 3 compact stations XGC S.
3.4
3/42
Product data sheet

(continued)

Field devices
Ositrack identification system
Characteristics
Transparent Ready Class services Standard Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium XGS cable Operating temperature connector Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Connecting XGC S stations Communication Requests Speed Conformity to standards LED indicators A10 No Web server Modbus messaging (read/write I/O words) 10BASE-T/100BASE-T X 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Ethernet cable with M12 connection (TCS ECL1M1pS2 : Telemecanique ConneXium range) 0+ 50C 3095% non condensing IP 65 c 24 V (limits c 19.229 V) 5-way female M12 connector Modbus TCP/IP 124 words max. 2 Kbytes/s max. depending on associated tags UL, e Electromagnetic interference, level 3 according to IEC 61000 and EN 55022 Ethernet network activity (RUN, green), collision detection (COL, red), diagnostics (STS, yellow), fault (ERR, red) and 24 Vc power supply (green) Description Ethernet cable connector (for 3 XGC S compact stations) 24 Vc power supply Class A10 Integrated Ethernet port 10/100 Mbps Reference XGS Z33ETH Weight kg 1.060
Reference
Stations, updatable code badges, connection accessories: please consult our Inductive identification system catalog. XGS Z33ETH (1) Available later for Uni-Telway and CANopen protocols.
3.4
3/43
Presentation

Infrastructure
Presentation
The ConneXium Industrial Ethernet Offer is comprised of a complete family of products and tools required to build the infrastructure of an Industrial Ethernet network. In the following chapter summary information for the proper design of a network and the selections of its components is offered.
Office Ethernet versus Industrial Ethernet

There are three main areas of differentiation between Ethernet applications in an office environment and Ethernet applications in an Industrial environment, they are: b Environment b Layout (not physical layer specification) b Performance Contrary to the office environment and even though ISO/IEC is working on it, there are not yet clearly defined specifications for Ethernet devices targeted to Industrial applications. The specifications of what it is called Industrial Ethernet are defined by different agencies or entities based upon its nature and based upon what the automation market has traditionally used. The environmental specifications of Industrial Ethernet devices are today defined by the traditional agencies that define the environmental specifications for standard industrial devices (UL, CSA, e, ...). The IEEE 802.3 defines the physical layer specifications of the Ethernet network (types of connectors, distance between devices, number of devices, ...) while the 11801 (similarly to the TIAEIA 568B, and CENELEC EN 50173) provide installers the layout guidelines; therefore when designing and Industrial Ethernet network and selecting its infrastructure components the IEEE 802.3 rules for quantities of devices and lengths. The performance specifications are actually being worked on by ISO/IEC.
Ethernet 802.3 principles

The Ethernet 802.3 Link Layer is based on a collision detection mechanism (CSMA CD): every node whose information has collided on the network realizes the collision and re-sends the information. The process of re-sending information causes delays in its propagation and could affect the application. A collision domain is a group of Ethernet end devices interconnected by hubs or repeaters (devices that receive information and send it out to all their other ports, no matter where the destination device is connected): it means that all devices will be affected by collisions. With the availability of full duplex switches (devices that receive information and send it out just through the port to which the destination device is connected) the collision domains have disappeared. Therefore, for industrial automation applications it is strongly recommended to use in every case full duplex switches to interconnect devices. In this way the collision domains will be eliminated completely.
3.5
3/44
Topologies

Infrastructure
Different network topologies

Next there is a description of some of the available network topologies. Star topology
DTE DTE
In a star topology, all devices are connected though an intermediate device. Ethernet Star In an Ethernet star the intermediate device may be a hub or a switch. Star is the commonly used topology in corporate networks and as of today is adopted in almost every automation application. As mentioned previously, for industrial Ethernet applications the use of full duplex switches as central device rather than hubs is strongly recommended. Deploying Star topologies with ConneXium With any of the hubs and switches offered by the ConneXium offer, star topologies can be implemented. Bus topology
DTE
DTE
DTE
The bus is one of the most adopted topologies in traditional industrial automation networks. A single trunk cable connects all the devices on the network usually via passive or active T-connectors, or directly chained (daisy chain). Devices usually can be installed anywhere along the bus.
DTE
DTE
Ethernet Bus An Ethernet bus can be deployed by interconnecting hubs and/or switches in line and considering every one of them as the connection for a drop device. A limited number of hubs and an unlimited number of switches can be interconnected to achieve this purpose. Deploying Bus topologies with ConneXium With any of the hubs and switches offered by the ConneXium offer bus topologies can be implemented. Specially suitable for this purpose are the switches with 1 or 2 fiber optic ports. The 2 fiber optic ports switches could be for connection of inline devices while the single fiber optic port switches could be used for the connection of end line devices. Daisy chain topology Daisy chain -along bus- is the other most adopted topology in traditional industrial automation networks. Cable segments interconnect multiple devices, being the devices part of the network cable.
3.5
DTE
DTE
DTE
Ethernet daisy chain Daisy chain is not today a very common Ethernet topology, but it will soon become one of the most popular ones when enough quantity of devices is made available. In Ethernet daisy chain the devices have 2 Ethernet ports and an embedded switch. Schneider Electric is releasing to the Industrial market Industrial Ethernet devices to be connected in daisy chain architectures. Deploying daisy chain topologies To deploy daisy chain topologies, no hubs or switches are required. All devices have an embedded switch. Dual port Ethernet at the device level is an absolute integral component for daisy chain topologies. Each device in the network has at least two Ethernet ports. One port of the device connects to one port of the neighboring device on either side of the device. These neighboring connections make up the daisy chain. Ethernet switches can be employed in a daisy chain topology when multiple scan chains are in use by the controlling device. It is expected that the Ethernet switch will be located near the controlling device with the different scan chains emanating from the switch.
3/45
Topologies (continued),

Infrastructure
Daisy chain topology (continued) Limitations of daisy chain: Limitations of daisy chain to insure the operational integrity of the network and meet performance metrics, are: b Dual port Ethernet devices only support 10 Mbit/s and/or 100 Mbit/s operational speeds and must use one or the other. b The network will operate only as fast as the slowest device that is connected to the network b In order to improve network traffic latency the numbers of devices in a single scan chain, has been limited to 32 devices. b Limiting a single scan chain to 32 devices the time for a round trip of a packet through the daisy Chain is expected less than 5 milliseconds (with 32 devices plugged on a scan daisy chain. The maximum packet latency of a packet passing through any device in a scan chain is no more than 10 s.
The first Schneider Electric device with Ethernet daisy chain capabilities is the Lexium 15/17D servodrive, see pages 3/39 and 3/40.
Ring topology In a ring topology, all devices or network infrastructure components are connected in a loop with no beginning or end. Through these types of topologies a type of network redundancy is achieved. Ethernet Ring Ethernet rings are usually the backbones of applications in which high availability is required. If ring topology is required then switches that support this feature should be ordered. Deploying Ring topologies using ConneXium. The ConneXium line offers hubs and switches that allow the deployment of single and coupled self-healing rings. There is additional information about this topic in the redundancy segment.
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
3.5
3/46
Characteristics

Infrastructure
Distance limitations and number of devices per segment

Based upon the 802.3, the distance limits and the numbers of devices in cascade are the following: Type Maximum segment length (1) 100 m 100 m 100 m 2000 m 412 m/2000 m Maximum segment length (offered by ConneXium devices) 100 m 100 m 100 m 3100 m (2) 4000 m with multimode, 32.500 m with monomode (3) Maximum number of hubs in cascade 4 2 11 (fiber ring) Maximum number of switches in cascade Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
10BASE-T 100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T 10BASE-FL 100BASE-FX
1000BASE-SX
275 m
Unlimited
(1) Based on 802.3, full duplex/half duplex. (2) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation. (3) Depends on the optical fiber budget and fiber attenuation, typical specification is 2 km for multimode and 15 km from monomode.
Physical Media
The Ethernet 802.3 defines the Physical Layer. A summary of the most common ones are shown below Type Data rate Cable type Connector type Defined by 802.3 Recommended by Defined by 802.3 Recommended by Schneider Electric Schneider Electric CAT 3 - UTP CAT 5E - STP RJ45 RJ45 10BASE-T 10 Mbit/s 100BASE-TX 100 Mbit/s CAT 5 - UTP CAT 5E - STP RJ45 RJ45 CAT 5 - UTP CAT 5E - STP RJ45 RJ45 1000BASE-T 1 Gbit/s 10BASE-FL 10 Mbit/s Two multimode fiber optic Two multimode fiber optic ST ST cables typically cables typically 62.5/125 m fiber, 62.5/125 m fiber, 850 nm light wavelength 850 nm light wavelength 100BASE-FX 100 Mbit/s Two multimode optical Two multimode optical ST SC fibers typically fibers 62.5/125 m multimode typically 62.5/125 m fiber, multimode fiber, 1300 nm light wavelength 1300 nm light wavelength Two monomode optical SC fibers typically 9/125 m multimode fiber, 1300 nm light wavelength 1000BASE-SX 1 Gbit/s Two 62.5/125 or 50/125 Two 62.5/125 m or SC LC multimode optical fibers, 50/125 m multimode 770 to 860 nm light optical fibers , wavelength 1300 nm light wavelength 1000BASE-LX 1 Gbit/s Two 9/125 m LC monomode optical fibers, 1300 nm light wavelength Nota : The above are the specifications defined by IEEE 802.3. However some of the cables are no longer being developed. For instance, for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, a CAT-5e cable is used.
3.5
3/47
Management

Infrastructure
Management
The Ethernet devices in general (end devices and the cabling devices) devices may be divided in two categories: unmanaged and managed devices: b The unmanaged devices are those which there is no possibility to configure or control any of the parameters of the device. b The managed devices are those which there is possibility to configure or control the parameters of the device (manage them) and to access to its internal information. The ConneXium product line offers both types of devices. There is also a third category of devices not specifically defined but is important to understand the difference. These devices only allow access to its information but can not be controlled and/or configured. Usually these devices are considered in the category of managed devices.
3.5
The managed devices offer the following features: b Traffic optimization and filtering, goal is to increase the bandwidth, or the traffic capacity in a network (some of the features in this area are message and port priority, flow control, multicast filtering, broadcast limiting, IGMP snooping, Vlan, etc.). b VLAN, a virtual LAN (VLAN) consists of a group of network participants in one or more network segments who can communicate with each other as if they belonged to the same LAN. VLANs are based on logical (instead of physical) links. The biggest advantage of VLANs is their possibility of forming user groups based on the participant function and not on their physical location or medium. Since broad/multicast data packets are transmitted exclusively within a virtual LAN, the remaining data network is unaffected. VLAN can also serve as a security mechanism to block unwanted Unicast messages. b Security, feature that helps the user protect the switch from unauthorized access that could result in changes in its configuration and impact the traffic going through the switch (some of the features in this area are port security, read/write community name, etc.). User can also set up the switch so that it blocks messages coming from unauthorized devices source addresses connected to the switch. b Time Synchronization, feature that allows all the devices in the network to be synchronized on time. b Network Redundancy, to develop high availability applications. b
3/48
Redundancy

Infrastructure
Redundancy
To develop high availability applications, redundancy in the networking infrastructure is the answer. By implementing a single ring architecture, or a coupled ring one, can protect themselves against losses of network segments. Single Ring
DTE DTE
The first level of redundancy is achieved by implementing a single ring. The ConneXium switches allow the set up of backbone ring configurations. The ring is constructed using the HIPER-Ring ports. If a section of the line fails, a ring structure of up to 50 Switches transforms back to a line-type configuration within 0.5 seconds.
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
3
Dual Ring
DTE
DTE
The second level of redundancy is achieved by implementing a dual ring. The control intelligence built into the ConneXium switches allows the redundant coupling of HIPER-Rings and network segments. These configurations would double the redundancy obtained by using a single ring.
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
3.5
Mesh topology using the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol
DTE DTE
A third level of redundancy can be achieved by implementing a mesh topology. In simple terms spaning tree is a protocol that ensures a single path for the signal, when multiple paths exist, and if the active path is broken, the spanning tree protocol enables one of the alternatives paths.
DTE
DTE
The ConneXium switches offer the possibility.
DTE
DTE
3/49
Wiring system

Infrastructure
Presentation
The Schneider Electric Ethernet cable provides all cable options to wire IP20 and IP67 devices in copper as well as in fiber optic.
Examples
Combined IP20 and IP67 wiring, copper
1, 3 1, 3
8 2, 4 2, 4 1, 3 8
1, 3
3.5
1, 3
1, 3
For key: 1, 3: Straight cables, 2, 4: Crossed cord cables, 8: Cables with IP 67 connector, see pages 3/52 and 3/53.
3/50
Wiring system

Infrastructure
Examples (continued)
Combined Copper and Fiber wiring
MES Client
Internet
Server
Firewall
Copper link Router Fiber link
3
5, 6, 7
Copper link Magelis
2, 4
2, 4 2, 4
1, 3
1, 3 1, 3
2, 4
2, 4
1, 3 2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
2, 4 2, 4
Altivar 71 Twido
Preventa safety PLC
3.5
Advantys STB
1, 3 1, 3
1, 3 1, 3 1, 3
Quantum
Magelis
1, 3 1, 3
Premium Quantum FactoryCast gateway Ositrack
Altivar 71
Managed switch
Hub or unmanaged switch
Modbus
For key: 1, 3: Straight cables, 2, 4: Crossed cord cables, 5, 6, 7: Fiber optic cables, 8: Cables with IP 67 connector, see pages 3/52 and 3/53.
3/51
Wiring system (continued)

Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready
Cabling system: Connexium connection components
Shielded copper connection cables

ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet the various current standards and approvals: b EIA/TIA 568 standard shielded twisted pair cables These cables conform to: v EIA/TIA-568 standard, category CAT 5E, v IEC 11801/EN 50173 standard, class D. Their fire resistance conforms to: v NFC 32070# C2 classification v IEC 322/1 standards v Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH). b UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables These cables conform to: v UL and CSA 22.1 standards Their fire resistance conforms to NFPA 70.
3
490 NTp 000 pp
EIA/TIA 568 standard shielded twisted pair cables

Description Preformed at both ends Rep. Length m (ft) 2 (6.6) 5 (16.4) 12 (39.4) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) 5 (16.4) 15 (49.2) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) Reference 490 NTW 000 02 490 NTW 000 05 490 NTW 000 12 490 NTW 000 40 490 NTW 000 80 490 NTC 000 05 490 NTC 000 15 490 NTC 000 40 490 NTC 000 80 Weight kg
Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors 1 For connection to terminal devices (DTE)
Crossed cord cables
2 RJ45 connectors 2 For connections between hubs, switches and transceivers
UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables

Description Preformed at both ends Rep Length 2 (6.6) 5 (16.4) 12 (39.4) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) 5 (16.4) 15 (49.2) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) Reference 490 NTW 000 02U 490 NTW 000 05U 490 NTW 000 12U 490 NTW 000 40U 490 NTW 000 80U 490 NTC 000 05U 490 NTC 000 15U 490 NTC 000 40U 490 NTC 000 80U Weight kg
Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors 3 For connection to terminal devices (DTE)
3.5
Crossed cord cabless 2 RJ45 connectors 4 For connections between hubs, switches and transceivers
Glass fiber optic cables

MT-RJ SC 490 NOC 000 05 These glass fiber optics are for making connections: b To a terminal device (DTE) b Between hubs, transceivers and switches Description Preformed at both ends Rep. 5 Length 5 (16.4) Reference 490 NOC 000 05 Weight kg
Glass fiber optic 1 SC connector cables 1 MT-RJ connector MT-RJ ST 490 NOT 000 05 2 MT-RJ connectors 1 ST connector (BFOC) 1 MT-RJ connector
5 (16.4)
490 NOT 000 05
3 (9.8) 490 NOR 000 03 5 (16.4) 490 NOR 000 05 15 (49.2) 490 NOR 000 15
MT-RJ MT-RJ 490 NOR 000 05
3/52

Cabling system: Connexium connection components
Separate parts for TCS ESM switches

Description Optical fiber Type Reference Multimode 50/125m Fiber optic modules for or 62.5/125m Gigabit ports with Single mode 9/125m LC connector (1) Multimode 50/125m or 62.5/125m Single mode 62.5/125m Configuration backup key 1000BASE-SX TCS EAA F1LFU00 1000BASE-LH TCS EAA F1LFH00 1000BASE-LX TCS EAA F1LFS00 Weight kg 0.040 0.040 0.040
TCS EAA F1LFp 00
Via the USB port on the front of the switch, used to: - save and retrieve the switch configuration - update the internal software
TCS EAM 0100
(1) Dimensions W x H X D = 20 x 18 x 50 mm.
3
Rep. Length m (ft) 8 1 (3.3) 1.5 (4.9) 3 (9,8) 5 (16.4) 10 (32.8) 25 (82) 40 (131.2) Weight kg TCS ECL 1M3M 1S2 TCS ECL 1M3M 1X5S2 TCS ECL 1M3M 3S2 TCS ECL 1M3M 5S2 TCS ECL 1M3M 10S2 TCS ECL 1M3M 25S2 TCS ECL 1M3M 40S2 1 (3.3) TCS ECL 1M1M 1S2 1.5 (4.9) TCS ECL 1M1M 1X5S2 3 (9,8) TCS ECL 1M1M 3S2 5 (16.4) TCS ECL 1M1M 5S2 10 (32.8) TCS ECL 1M1M 10S2 25 (82) TCS ECL 1M1M 25S2 40 (131.2) TCS ECL 1M1M 40S2 TCS EAA F11F13F00 Reference
Connection components for IP 67 switch

Description Copper cables Preformed at both ends 1 IP 67 4-way M12 connector and 1 RJ45 connector
2 IP 67 4-way M12 connectors
3.5
M12/RJ45 adaptor
IP 67 female 4-way M12 connector and female RJ45 connector
Power cables
Female M12 straight connector Female M12 elbowed connector
2 (6.6) 5 (16.4) 2.5 (8.2) 5 (16.4)
XZC P1164L2 XZC P1164L5 XZC P1264L2 XZC P1264L5 XZC C12 FDM 50B XZC C12 FCM 50B
Power connectors
Female M12 straight connector Female M12 elbowed connector
3/53

Cabling system: ConneXium hub
Presentation
Hubs (concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media (ports). Hubs are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration. The use of hubs makes it possible to create the following topologies: b Star topology using hubs b Tree topology using hubs Consult our catalogue Ethernet TCP/IP and Web technologies, Transparent Ready.
Hub
DTE DTE
Hub
Hub
Hub
DTE
3
Characteristics and reference
DTE
DTE
DTE
Star topology
Tree topology
Hubs Interfaces
3.5
Topology
Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Fiber optic ports Number and type Number of cascaded hubs Number of hubs in a ring
4 x 10BASE-T ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m max. 4 P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector
24 V (1832) c, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 80 mA (130 max. at 24 V c) 5-way 0+ 60 C 1095% non condensing IP 30 40 x 125 x 80 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.530 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2 Power supply, activity, link Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NEH 104 10
Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay
WxHxD
Reference
3/54
Product data sheet

Cabling system: ConneXium transceivers
Presentation
The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following: b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies, for products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection. b Interfacing products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with a fiber optic cable. Transceivers are plug and play devices that do not need any configuration. Consult our catalogue Ethernet TCP/IP and Web technologies, Transparent Ready. ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long distance communications.
DTE
3
DTE
DTE
Linear topology on optical fiber
Characteristics and reference
Transceivers Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Fiber optic ports
Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber
1 x 100BASE-TX port RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX port SC Multimode optical fiber 3000 m (1) 3000 m (1) 8 dB: 11 dB: P1 and P2 redundant power supplies 24 V (1832) c, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 160 mA (190 max. at 24 V c) 5-way 0+ 60 C 1095% non condensing IP 20 47 x 135 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.230 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NTR 101 00 (1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical value: 2000 m).
3.5
Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference
3/55
Product data sheet

Cabling system: ConneXium unmanaged switches
Presentation
Switches are used to increase the limits of architectures based on hubs or transceivers, by separating collision domains. Higher layer communication is provided between the ports, and collisions at link layer are not propagated (filtering). They therefore improve performance by better allocation of the pass band due to the reduction of collisions and the network load. Certain Connexium switch models also enable redundant architectures to be created on twisted pair copper ring or fiber optic. Switches are plug & play devices that do not need any configuration. They can also be managed remotely via the SNMP or HTTP protocols for monitoring and diagnostics purposes.
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
Collision domain 1
Collision domain 2
100 Mbps optical ring
DTE
Collision domain 3
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
DTE
Characteristics and references: twisted pair
Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Cascaded Redundant in a ring
3.5
Fiber optic ports
Optimized, copper twisted Copper twisted pair, unmanaged pair, unmanaged 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 8 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m Unlimited 24 V c (19.230) 120 3-way 0+ 60 C 1095% non condensing IP 20 75.2 x 143 x 43 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.190 kg UL 508, CSA 1010, EN 61131-2 Power supply, link status, data rate
Topology Redundancy
Number of switches
P1 and P2 redundant power supplies 24 V c (1832) safety extra low voltage (SELV) 125 (290 max.) 5-way
Voltage Power consumption mA max. Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay
Power supply
47 x 135 x 111 mm 0.230 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NES 181 00
Reference
499 NES 251 00
3/56
Product data sheet

(continued)

Cabling system: ConneXium unmanaged switches
Characteristics and references: 5 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic
Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Cascaded Redundant in a ring
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, unmanaged 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports SC Multimode optical fiber 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) 8 dB 11 dB Unlimited P1 and P2 redundant power supplies 4 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 3 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports
3
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports Single mode optical fiber 32,500 m (2) 16 dB
Fiber optic ports
Topology Redundancy Power supply
Number of switches
Voltage Power consumption mA max. Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay
24 V c (1832), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 200 240 200 5-way -40...+70 C 1095% non condensing IP 20 47 x 135 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.330 kg 0.335 kg 0.330 kg
240
3.5
0.335 kg
cUL 60950, cUL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity Activity, power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02 (1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m). (2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 15,000 m).
Reference
3/57
Product data sheet

Cabling system: ConneXium managed switches
Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed 3 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 3 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
3
Fiber optic ports
Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber
RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports Duplex SC Multimode optical fiber Single mode optical fiber 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) 32,500 m (2)
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Cascaded Redundant in a ring
3.5
Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Operation
8 dB 11 dB 16 db FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 6-way 0+ 60 C 1090% non condensing IP 20 47 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.400 kg
7.3 W
WxHxD
IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA C22.2 14 (cUL), CSA C22.2 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper port status and copper port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault, communication port fault, redundancy fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) TCS ESM TCS ESM TCS ESM TCS ESM 043F1CU0 043F2CU0 043F1CS0 043F2CS0 (1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m). (2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 15,000 m).
Reference
3/58
Product data sheet

(continued)

Characteristics and references: 4 and 8 ports, twisted pair
Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber
Copper twisted pair, managed 4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
Fiber optic ports
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 5.3 W 5.3 W 6-way 0+ 60 C 1090% non condensing IP 20 47 x 131 x 111 mm 74 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.400 kg 0.410 kg IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA C22.2 14 (cUL), CSA C22.2 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, redundancy, redundancy management, copper port status and copper port activity fiber port status and fiber port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) TCS ESM 043F23F0 TCS ESM 083F23F0
Ethernet services
Topology Redundancy
Number of switches
Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators
Operation
3.5
WxHxD
Alarm relay
Reference
3/59
Product data sheet

(continued)

Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed 7x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6x 10/100BASE-TX ports 7x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-T ports
3
Fiber optic ports Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type
Connectors Medium
RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX 2 x 100BASE-FX 1 x 100BASE-FX 2x 100BASE-FX 1 + 1 x port ports port ports 100BASE-FX port Duplex SC Multimode optical fiber Single mode optical fiber Single mode optical fiber and multimode optical fiber 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) 32,500 m (2) 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) 32,500 m (2)
Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber
3.5
Topology Redundancy
Ethernet services
Number of switches
8 dB 8 dB 11 dB 11 dB 16 dB 16 dB FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 7.3 W 6-way 0+ 60 C 10 90% non condensing IP 20 74 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.410 kg IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA C22.2 14 (cUL), CSA C22.2 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber port status and fiber port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) TCSESM TCSESM TCSESM TCSESM TCSESM 083F1CU0 083F2CU0 083F1CS0 083F2CS0 083F2CX0 (1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m). (2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 15,000 m).
Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference
Operation
WxHxD
3/60
Product data sheet

(continued)

Characteristics and references: 16 and 24 ports, twisted pair, fiber optic
Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber
Fiber optic ports
Copper twisted pair and Copper twisted pair, fiber optic, managed managed 16 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 2 x 100BASE-FX ports Duplex SC Multimode optical fiber 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1)
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed 22 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
Ethernet services
Topology Redundancy
Number of switches
8 dB 11 dB FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 9.4 W 11.8 W 6-way 0+ 60 C 10 90% non condensing IP 20 111 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.600 kg
Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference
Operation
3.5
15.5 W
WxHxD
0.650 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL Redundant power supplies, Redundant power supplies, single ring, double ring single ring Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) TCSESM 163F2CU0 TCSESM 163F23F0 TCSESM 243F2CU0 (1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m).
3/61
Product data sheet

(continued)

Characteristics and references: 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports, twiwted pair, fiber optic
Switches Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type
Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 2x 2x 2x 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LH 1000BASE-LX ports (1) ports (2) ports (3) LC Multimode Single mode Single mode optical fiber optical fiber and multimode optical fiber 550 m 275 m 8 -72,000 m 550 m 550 m 20,000 m
Copper twisted pair, managed 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports and 2 x 10/100/1000BASE-TX ports (Gigabit)
Gigabit ports fiber optic (with SFP fiber module to be mounted on SFP Connectors connector) Medium
Length of optical fiber 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fiber 62.2/125 m fiber 9/125 m fiber Ethernet services
3.5
Topology Redundancy
Number of switches
7.5 dB 11 dB 7.5 dB 11 dB 6 - 22 dB 11 dB FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/1830 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 8.9 W + 1 W per SFP fiber module 8.3 W 6-way 0+ 60 C 10 90% non condensing IP 20 111 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.410 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber port status and fiber port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. volt-free contact at 24 V c) TCS ESM 103F2LG0 TCS ESM 103F23G0
Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay
Operation
WxHxD
Reference
(1) With TCS EAA F1LFU00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately, see page 3/53. (2) With TCS EAA F1LFH00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately, see page 3/53. (3) With TCS EAA F1LFS00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately, see page 3/53.
3/62
Product data sheet

Cabling system: ConneXium IP 67 switch
Characteristics and references: IP 67 unmanaged switch
IP 67 switch Interfaces
Copper cable ports
Fiber optic ports
Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber Attenuation analysis
Ethernet services
Topology
Number of switches
Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference IP 67 cordsets Ethernet cordsets Power supply cables Length Reference Spare power connectors Reference
Twisted pair, unmanaged 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports M12 (type D) Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m Storage and re-routing of received data, auto MDI/MDX (automatic switching depending on whether cables are straight or crossed), automatic negotiation of 10/100 Mbps and duplex mode (on all ports), automatic change of polarity Unlimited 24 V c (1832 V c), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 100 mA 5-way M12 (type A, male) 0+ 60C IP 67 60 x 126 x 31 mm 0.210 kg cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 14 Power supply, line status, line activity TCS ESU 051 F0
3.5
Preformed at each end, see page 3/53 Preformed at each end with M12 female straight connectors 2m 5m XZC P1164L2 XZC P1164L5 Preformed at each end with female M12 angled connectors 2.5 m 5m XZC P1264L2 XZC P1264L5
Female M12 straight connector XZC C12 FDM 50B
Female M12 angled connector XZC C12 FCM 50B
3/63
Product data sheet

Ethernet gateways
Ethernet/Modbus gateway
1 2
Presentation
TSX ETG 100 gateway provides a simple and low-cost means of integrating any existing Modbus serial RTU device, installation or automation island in an Ethernet TCP/IP network infrastructure. The gateway is able to make the serial Modbus devices directly accessible to high level application in real time (management, SCADA). Modbus serial devices can be Twido controller, Compact/Momentum/ Premium/Quantum PLCs, Altivar variable speed drives, Altistart starters, Magelis terminals or any other products compatible withe the Modbus standards.
3 4
Description
TSX ETG 100 gateway is an IP 30 box, mounted on DIN rail. 1 A screw terminal for connecting the c 24 V power supply. 2 A standard RJ45 connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface. 3 Seven LED indicators for Ethernet communication (LK, RX, TX, 100), and serial link communication (RS485, RX, TX). 4 A LED indicator for c 24 V power supply and Reset button. 5 A RJ45 connector for Modbus RS 232 srial link. 6 A micro switches for 2 or 4-wire RS 485 serial link configuration. 7 A 5-way removable terminal block for Modbus RS 485 serial link .
3
5 6 7
Characteristics
Type of gateway Transparent Ready services Class Standard Web services Ethernet TCP/IP communication management services Ethernet connectivity Configuration Read/Write Diagnostic Modbus messaging SNMP BOOTP protocol Security TSX ETG 100 B10 Predefined Web pages Acces to connected products list, reading of Modbus devices registers Via predefined Web pages : diagnostic on Ethernet and Modbus links Read/Write Modbus registers of connected devices SNMP Agent, device administration with a SNMP manager FDR Client (replacement of defective product) Miniature firewall on-board (IP address filtering) and password protection 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair RS 485 (2 or 4-wire) or RS 232 Modbus (RTU and ASCII) 38,4 Kbps (RS 485), 57,6 Kbps (RS 232) 32 max. 0...+ 60 C 595% non condensing at 40 C IP 30 72 x 81 x 76 mm, mounting on symmetrical DIN rail c 24 V, 4 W or by power supply device PoE (Power Over Ethernet - IEEE 802.3af) UL, cUL (conforming to CSA C22-2 no. 14-M91), UL508, e EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8, EN 55022/FCC class A
3.6
Physical interface Data rate Medium Modbus connectivity Type of port Protocol Maxi transmission speed Number of devices Other characteristics Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions (L x H x P) Power supply Conformity to standards Environmental resistance
References
Description Modbus Ethernet gateway/router Class B 10 Fonctions References TSX ETG 100 Twido, Compact, Momentum, TSX Micro, Altivar, Altistart, Magelis, ... All products compatible with Modbus standard Weight kg
Kit for configuration
TSX ETG 100
TCS EAQ 0100
PoE power supply (conform to IEEE 802.3af)
Allows gateway configuration through TCS EAK 0100 Ethernet or RS 232 port. Comprises RJ45/9-way SUB-D adaptator and a CAT5 twisted pair cable, 3 m length Allows gateway power supply through TCS EAQ 0100 Ethernet CAT5 cable. Daisy chain power supply connection. Include power supply cable (Australia, Europa, UK and USA)
3/64
Product data sheet

Ethernet gateways
Web FactoryCast Gateway
Presentation
FactoryCast Gateway is a new offer of all in one intelligent Web gateways integrating, in a standalone compact unit: b All the TCP/IP network communication and serial link (Modbus or Uni-Telway) interfaces. b An RAS remote access (1)/IP Router function. b A customizable Web server . TSX ETG 1000/1010 gateways are a low-cost response to the need to integrate serial link installations in an existing Ethernet TCP/IP infrastructure as well as requirements for remote access services including remote diagnostics, remote maintenance, remote monitoring and remote control.
8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Description
TSX ETG 1000/1010 FactoryCast Gateways feature, on the front panel: 1 Three LEDs indicating the gateway status (RUN, ERR, Ethernet) 2 The module MAC address (default factory-set address) 3 A mini-DIN connector for connection to the terminal port (marked TER) 4 An RJ45 connector for the serial link (Modbus or Uni-Telway) (marked RS 485) 5 A standard RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP network (marked ETHERNET) 6 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for the RS 232 serial link (marked Modem RS 232) 7 A screw terminal for connecting the 24 Vc external power supply 8 A support plate for fixing the module to a DIN rail or an AM1-PA pre-slotted plate
TSX ETG 1000
TSX ETG 1010
Characteristics
Web gateway module FactoryCast Gateway Transparent Gateway/router function Ready services Class C20 Protocols Standard Web services Serial TCP/IP Configuration Diagnostic TSX ETG 1000 TSX ETG 1010 Ethernet TCP/IP gateway to Modbus, modem Ethernet TCP/IP gateway to Uni-Telway, to Modbus and modem to Ethernet TCP/IP with modem to Uni-Telway and modem to Ethernet IP routing TCP/IP with IP routing Routing of the I/O Scanning service Modbus master Uni-Telway slave Modbus TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP and/or Modbus TCP/IP Via predefined Web pages Via predefined Web pages: Diagnostics on Ethernet link, serial link, modem link; and diagnostics on e-mail and FDR services Data editor, ready-to-use Web pages: Access to connected device registers HTTP server (8 MB of Flash memory available) Hosting of animated Web pages created by the user and all documents (doc, pdf, etc.) Library of graphic objects (Java applet) with Wizard utility for FrontPage File upload/download via FTP Alarm notification by e-mail (via remote SMTP server) Automatic assignment of IP address, FDR client (replacement of defective product) SNMP agent, administration of the device by an SNMP manager Miniature firewall on-board (IP address filtering) and password protection RJ45 standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pairs RS 232C link, half- or full-duplex, 57 kbps, 9-way SUB-D connector PPP protocol (incoming and outgoing calls), PAP authentication protocol Remote access via RAS compatible with RTC, GSM, VPN modem Modbus RS 485 link, max. 115 kbps, standard Uni-Telway RS 485 link, max. 19.2 kbps, RJ45 connector standard RJ45 connector 32 max. 0 to + 60C 10 to 95% non condensing during operation IP 20 c 24 V (limits c 19.2 to 30 V), 100 mA ISO/IEC 8802-3, ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 Class A, IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142, CSA C22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 Pending: Marine Marchande certifications Modbus activity (RUN Modbus) Uni-Telway activity (RUN/UTW) Ethernet activity (ETHERNET), gateway error (ERR)
Read/write Configurable Web services
Connectivity
E-mail service Ethernet TCP/IP advanced communication services Ethernet TCP/IP
3.6
BootP/DHCP protocol SNMP Security Physical interface Data rate Medium Physical interface Services Physical interface
Modem
Serial link
No. of devices Characteristics Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards
LED indicators
References
Designation Web FactoryCast Gateway gateways/routers Class C20 TSX ETG 1000 TSX ETG 1010 Routing Ethernet / Modbus RTU Ethernet / Uni-Telway Reference TSX ETG 1000 TSX ETG 1010 Weight kg 0,280 0,280
3/65
Product data sheet

Ethernet gateways
Ethernet/Modbus Plus gateway/router
Presentation
The 174 CEV ConneXium communication gateways are used for interconnecting the following: b Modbus/Ethernet TCP/IP for 174 CEV 300 20 b Modbus Plus/Ethernet TCP/IP for 174 CEV 200 40 by providing multiple ports to adapt to the different architecture.
Characteristics
3
Type of gateway Transparent Class Ready Standard Web services services Configuration Read/Write Diagnostic Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Communication gateway Interface for programming Modbus SL (RS 232/RS 485 serial link) Modbus Plus (RS 485 network) Configuration Ethernet TCP/IP port 174 CEV 200 40 B10 Predefined Web pages Acces to connected products list, reading of Modbus Plus devices registers Via predefined Web pages : diagnostic on Ethernet and Modbus Plus links Modbus TCP messaging SNMP Agent Ethernet/Modbus Plus (many-to-many Modbus Plus) Ethernet/Modbus Plus Token bus, HDLC synchronous mode Data rate 1 Mbps Local or remote (1) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ45 Shielded twisted pair 100 m (327 ft) 1 x Modbus Plus 9-way SUB-D connector Shielded twisted pair (single or double) a 110/220 V (a 93.5 V242 V), 4763 Hz 1A 0+ 50C 1095% non condensing IP 20 122 x 229 x 248 (4.80 x 9.0 x 9.80) 4.260 (9.40) UL 508, CSA 142, e Power (1) Local with additional keyboard and monitor, via a dedicated screen for basic diagnostic and configuration. Remote, via intuitive Web pages for full configuration and diagnostic.
Functions
Interfaces
Serial port
Type Shielded connectors Medium Max. distances Type Shielded connectors Medium
3.6
Power supply Voltage Power consumption Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight Conformity to standards LED indicator
mm (in) kg (lbs)
References
Description Ethernet/Modbus Plus gateway/router Transparent Ready class B10 Functions - 1 Ethernet port, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX - 1 Modbus Plus port Weight kg 174 CEV 200 40 4,260 Reference
174 CEV 200 40
3/66
Product data sheet

Ethernet / AS-Interface gateway
Presentation
The TCS AGEA1SF13F Modbus/TCP to AS-Interface gateway provides access to AS-Interface slave devices on an Ethernet based industrial network. The gateway implements an AS-Interface master with a master profile M4 according to the AS-Interface Complete Specification version 3.0. The M4 master profile allows access to all slave profiles defined in this specification.
Description
The digital analog input/output slaves are available with Modbus read and write register requests, so it is possible to configure an I/O scanner in a PLC to include all digital and analog I/O on the AS-Interface network. The gateway needs no additional configuration software. The little configuration needed can be done directly at the devices with a menu driven user interface.
3
TCS AGEA1SF13F
Characteristics
Modbus / TCP AS-Interface gateway
TransparentReady features Conformance class Standard Bit rates Connector Master profile Standard
TCS AGEA1SF13F
A10 IEEE 802.3, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Mbps 10/100 RJ45 M4 V3.0 Approx. 200 mA out of AS-Interface circuit AS-Interface voltage V > 500 EN 50082, EN 50081 C O...+ 55 C - 25...+ 85 Stainless steel mm 120 x 100 x 83 IP20 According to EN 61 131-2 g 550 Displaying slave addresses and error messages Power on Ethernet network active Configuration error AS-Interface voltage OK AS-Interface normal operation active Automatic address programming enabled Gateway is in configuration mode 4
AS-Interface features Operating current Operating voltage Voltage of insulation EMC directions Ambient air temperature
Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3 Operation Storage
Housing Dimensions (L x W x H) Degree of protection Conforming to DIN 40 050 Tolerable loading reffering to impacts and vibrations Weight HMI LCD LED green (POWER) LED green (SER ACT) LED red (CNF ERR) LED green (ASI PWR) LED green (ASI ACT) LED green (PRG EN) LED yellow (PRJ MODE) Buttons
3.6
References
Transparent Functions Reference Weight Ready class kg TCS AGEA1SF13F AS-Interface/Ethernet A10 - 1 AS-Interface port gateway - 1 Ethernet port, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Description
TCS AGEA1SF13F
3/67
Product data sheet

Diagnostic software
ConneXview : Ethernet Network Diagnostic Software
Presentation
ConneXview is a user friendly software tool used to diagnose industrial Ethernet networks. It provides a very easy and intuitive interface for network operators and maintenance personnel, plus a set of features and advanced functions that are of great value to system integrators and controls engineers.
Automatic discovery of connected devices
3.6
ConneXview performs an automatic discovery of IP devices connected on an Ethernet network. As a default, the tool will discover the subnet of the host computer (the computer that is running the tool). A user can manually add additional subnets for discovery. ConneXview will discover the additional subnets as long as they are reachable via layer 3 switches or routers. ConneXview then automatically maps the network topology and devices, providing a green/ yellow/ red color coding of links and devices to enable users to quickly evaluate the status of the network. ConneXview also offers multiple layout options for viewing the network. In addition a user can layout the network manually.
Support of SNMP and Modbus TCP/IP

Most network management applications are not designed for the industrial automation environment, and even those that are do not support both of the critical protocols necessary for discovering and mapping networks. b SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol ConneXview can read information from managed end devices and infrastructure devices (switches, routers, etc.) to automatically construct a topological map of the physical layout of the network. It is also used to gather diagnostic information from managed devices. b Modbus TCP/IP ConneXview also uses Modbus TCP/IP commands to read binary and word registers from PLC's and I/O devices, and can therefore generate warnings and alarms based upon register changes, user defined monitors, or limit values that IT-based tools are unable to.
3/68
Product data sheet

(continued)

Diagnostic software
ConneXview : Ethernet Network Diagnostic Software
Network Assistant
The Network Assistant is a context-sensitive help file containing topics describing every network alarm and warning reported by ConneXview. Selecting an alarm and clicking on the help button will launch the Network Assistant where you will find: v the alarm text message, v a definition of the alarm, v a list of the possible causes of the alarm, v a series of recommended actions to clear the alarm. It also includes references to other resources and materials that can be consulted to help resolve the situation.
Device Type Editor

Out-of-the-box ConneXview has a device-type library that enables it to identify a large number of Schneider devices. The DTE can also be used to add 3rd party devices that are not already in the library.
Network Assistant
Setting thresholds for alarming per instance

ConneXview monitors each device in the network map using default thresholds. Although not needed in a majority of network environments, a user can separately change the default thresholds for any device in the network map to adjust for specific requirements.
Associate URL links and/or local actions with a device type

Within the Device Type Editor a user can associate end devices and infrastructure devices with: v a URL that opens a web page, for example in a managed switch that offers additional data and diagnostic information, v a local application, for example Unity or Concept programming software, v a local document, for example technical manuals. By right-clicking on a device type instance within ConneXview a user can invoke the associated action.
Device Type Editor
3.6
References
ConneXview Ethernet Diagnostic Software
System Requirements (minimum): - Processor: Intel 800 MHz Pentium 3 CPU or higher - RAM Memory: 512 MB or higher - Hard Drive: 250 MB of free space or more - Operating System: Windows 2000, XP Professional
Description Device Property Editor ConneXium software
User Single user license Group license (3-user) Team license (10-user)
Reference TCS EAZ 01P SFE10 TCS EAZ 01P GFE10 TCS EAZ 01P TFE10
Weight kg
Site license (Facility license) TCS EAZ 01P FFE10
TCS EAZ 01P SFE10
3/69
Contents
4 - CANopen in Machines and Installations
4.1 Conformance classes

b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Conformance classes associations, examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4

b Master module for Twido controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/6 b Modicon M340 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/7 b Master module for Modicon Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8 b Modicon Premium configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9 b Controller Inside programmable card for Altivar 61/71 variable speed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/10 b Preventa XPS MC safety controllers monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12
4.3 Field devices

b Advantys OTB distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14 b Advantys STB distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/15 b Advantys FTB IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/17 b Advantys FTM IP 67 modular I/O splitter boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/19 b TeSys T management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/21 b TeSys U starters-controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22 b Altivar 31 variable speed drive for asynchronous motors . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24 b Altivar 61 variable speed drive for asynchronous motors . . . . . . . . . . page 4/27 b Altivar 71 variable speed drive for asynchronous motors . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32 b PowerSuite motor control software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/36 b Lexium 05 servo drive for AC servo motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/38 b Lexium 15 servo drive for AC servo motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/40 b Lexium 17D servo drive for AC servo motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/42 b Twin Line servo drive for AC servo motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/44 b Osicoder 58 mm encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/46
4/0

b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/48 b Wiring system, implementation examples v Compact Evolutive Optimized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/49 v Compact Evolutive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/49 v Compact Evolutive High Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/50 v Distributed CANopen Optimized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/50 v Distributed CANopen High Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/51 v ATV 71 Conroller Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/51 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/52
4.4 CANopen gateway

b CANopen / AS-Interface gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/54
4/1
Description

Conformance classes
Schneider Electric has defined conformance classes for slave and master devices. The conformance classes define, which features a device supports.
CANopen services M10 Conformance classes
M20
M30
Layer Settings
Slave ID Data rate (kbps) LSS
1-16 125, 250, 500 16 NMT master, according to DS301 According to DSP302
1-63 50, 125, 250, 500, 1000
1-127 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 Master
Devices supported NMT (1)

NMT master CANopen manager Boot-up procedure Time stamp Auto configuration
63
126 NMT master, according to DS301. Configuration Manager according to DSP302.
4
4.1
SDO (2)
Producer Support
SDO Client SDO Server SDO Manager SDO data transfert
1 Expedited, segment transfer 1
1 Expedited, segment block transfer
PDO (3)
COB-ID PDO TT PDO Inhibit Time PDO Event Timer
ReadOnly 254, 255 consumer
Read/Write M10 + 0, 1-240 TPDOs (Read/Write) TPDOs (Read/Write) Producer RPDOs & TPDOs (Read/Write) Producer/consumer Producer Producer/consumer 63 consumers 1 producer Yes Yes 126 consumers 1 producer
SYNC
SYNC TRIGGER
EMCY HEALTH
Hearthbeat Node guarding
16 consumers 1 producer No
Parameters Store
parameters
No
(1) Network Management Object. (2) Service Data Object. (3) Process Data Object. Nota : M00 are for products not 100% compliant to the conformance class.
4/2

Conformance classes
CANopen services S10
Conformance classes
S20
S30
Layer Settings
Slave ID Data rate (kbps) LSS
1-63 125, 250, 500
1-127 50, 125, 250, 500, 1000 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 Slave
Diagnostic Diagnostic local devices NMT (1)

NMT slave Time stamp
LED or display
Start remote node, Stop remote node, Enter pre-Operational, Reset node, Reset communication Consumer
SDO (2)
SDO Client SDO Server SDO data transfert
1 Expedited, segment transfer ReadOnly 254, 255 FIX (Read) Predefined connection set Producer Free TPDOs (Read/Write) TPDOs (Read/Write) Consumer Read/Write S10 + 0, 1-240
1 2 Expedited, segment, block transfer
4
4.
PDO (3)
COB-ID PDO TT PDO Mapping parameters Connection set PDO Inhibit Time PDO Event Timer
RPDOs & TPDOs (Read/Write) Producer/consumer Consumer Consumer/producer
SYNC
SYNC TRIGGER
EMCY HEALTH
Hearthbeat Node guarding
1 consumer 1 producer No No Yes
Parameters Store
parameters
(1) Network Management Object. (2) Service Data Object. (3) Process Data Object. Nota : S00 are for products not 100% compliant to the conformance class.
4/3

Conformance classes
Conformance classes associations

The table below shows the best possible products associations, depend on conformance classes.
Conformance classes M10 M20 M30 S10 S20 S30
Possible association Restritive use
It is also possible to use a slave device with a lower level master (e.g. S20 with M10) or to use master device with a higher level slave (e.g. M10 with S20) when using only the features supported by the lowest conformance class.
4
4.1
4/4

Conformance classes
Examples
Ethernet modules TWD NCO1M Twido Controller BMX P34 20p0 Modicon M340 platform TSX CPP110 Premium platform
Preventa Advantys OTB Advantys STB Advantys FTB Advantys FTM TeSys T TeSys U Altivar 31 Altivar 61 Altivar 71 Lexium 05 Lexium 15 Lexium 17D Twin Line Osicoder Possible association Restrictive use Not supported
4
4.
4/5
Product data sheet

Twido CANopen master module
Presentation
Master module TWD NCO1M for the CANopen bus allows Twido programmable controllers version 3.0 - compact controller models TWD LCpA 24DRF or TWD LCAp 40DRF and all modular controllers - to act as CANopen master. The bus consists of a master station, the Twido controller and slave stations. The master is in charge of configuration, exchanges and diagnostics on the slaves. The CANopen bus is a communication type bus and allows management of various slaves such as: b Discrete slaves, b Analogue slaves, b Variable speed drives, b Motor starters, b . The Twido CANopen master controls up to 16 slaves, each with an input PDO (Process Data Object) and an output PDO. If a slave has more than one PDO, the maximum number of slaves managed is reduced by that number.
532659
5 2 1
Description
3 4
CANopen bus master module TWD NCO1M comprises: 1 An earthed, 3-way, c 24 V supply connector. 2 A PWR LED, indicating module power ON or OFF. 3 A 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to the CANopen bus. 4 An earth screw. 5 A connector for connection to the Twido controller or to another I/O expansion module.
4.2
Characteristics
Twido CANopen features Conformance class Standard Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Degree of protection Relative humidity LED indicators Product certification Number of modules per base controller Max. number of Slaves Channels TWD NCO1M M10 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 9-way male SUB-D 125, 250 and 500 Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...+ 55 IP 20 30...95% (without condensation) Power 1 16 slaves max. 16 TPDO (Transmit PDO) et 16 RPDO (Receive PDO)
Structure
kbps C
CANopen communication
References
Designation External supply Reference TWD NCO1M Twido CANopen bus master c 24 V module Weight kg 0.100
TWD NCO1M
4/6
Product data sheet

Modicon M340 processors
Presentation
The Modicon M340 automation platform, via its BMX P34 2010/2030 processors with integrated CANopen link, performs the role of master on the machine bus.
Description
1 2 3 4 5 The Performance processors on the Modicon M340 platform, BMX P34 2010 and BMX P34 2030, have the following on the front panel: 1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display block comprising at least: v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus faulty 3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal 4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application 5 An RJ45 connector for serial link (with BMX P34 2010 model) or Ethernet TCP/IP port (with BMX P34 2030 model) 6 A 9-way SUB-D connector for the CANopen Master machine and installation bus.
BMX P34 2010
BMX P34 2030
Characteritics (1)
Type of bus CANopen features Conformity class Standard Device profile Special Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of racks Maximum no. of slots Maximum no. in Discrete I/O rack Analog I/O Process control Counting Motion Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP connections CANopen bus Serial link USB port Communication Ethernet TCP/IP module Internal RAM capacity CANopen M20 DS 301 V 04.02, 303-2 DS 405 9-way male SUB-D 20 Kbps1 Mbps depending on bus length Double shielded twisted pair BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 2030 1 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots) 12 for processor and modules (excluding power supply module) 1024, 704 in single-rack configuration (64 I/O x 11) 256, 66 in single-rack configuration (4I/2Q x 11) Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library) 36 channels Independent axes on CANopen bus (via MFB library) 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps 1 master (9-way SUB-D) 1 RJ45 port, Modbus master/slave or character mode 1 port, 12 Mbps 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps, with Transparent Ready class B30 standard eeb server or Transparent Ready class C30 configurable web server (with BMX RWS 016MC card) 4,096 including 3,584 for the program, constants and symbols and 256 for data (1) For more information, please refer to the Modicon M340 catalogue.
Structure
CPU Features
4.2
Kb
References
Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP Flash memory card. This card performs the following actions transparently: - Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the processor internal RAM that is not backed up
- Activation of the Transparent Ready class B10 standard web server (with BMX P34 2030 processor)
This card can be replaced by another card featuring a file storage option. I/O capacity (1) Memory capacity 4,096 Kb integrated Max. no. of network Integrated modules communication ports 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network CANopen bus Modbus serial link CANopen bus Ethernet TCP/IP network Reference (3) BMX P34 2010 Weight kg 0.210
Performance BMX P340 20, 1 rack

1,024 discrete I/O 256 analog I/O 36 app-sp. channels BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 2030
BMX P34 2030
0.215
(1) For I/O capacity in single-rack configuration, please see characteristics on catalog Modicon M340.
4/7
Product data sheet

Master module for Modicon Premium
Presentation
The TSX CPP 110 module adds support for CANopen communication to the Modicon Premium platform. This module is compatible with : b Any device Modicon Premium TSX P57 (except TSX P57 153M/154M) b Any device Atrium TSX PCI or T PCX b Any CANopen device which conforms to the CANopen standard profile. The TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card supports the V4.02 CANopen standard and in particular the heartbeat network management.
1 2
Description
The Modicon Premium platform connect to the CANopen bus by means of the TSX CPP 110 type III PCMCIA card inserted in the processor or co-processor communication port slot.
4
Characteristics
CANopen master V4.02 PCMCIA card (1) CANopen Conformance class features Standard Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Communication Operating temperature module Degree of protection LED indicators Product certification Services Structure
The TSX CPP 110 master module CANopen set comprises : 1 A PCMCIA card, type III with fixing screws. 2 A TAP junction equipped with one 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting the CANopen bus. 3 A connection cable length 0.5 m, interdependent of the PCMCIA card and the TAP junction.
4.2
kbps C
No. of module per PLC/PC
Premium TSX P57 (2)
TSX CPP 110 M00 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 Integration of CANdevices possible 9-way male SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...+ 55 IP 20 ERR, RUN UL, CSA, e PDO cyclic exchanges Message handling (SDO) Management of bus operating modes 1
References
CANopen PCMCIA card Description CANopen bus master PCMCIA card Description PCMCIA card type III, TAP with SUB-D 9 pts connector, male, length 0.5 m Reference TSX CPP 110 Weight kg 0.230
Network configuration tool for Unity Pro and PL7 Description Type SyCon V2.9 configuration software licenses TSX CPP 110 Simple (1 station) Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (up to 10 stations) Simple (1 station)
Reference SYC SPU LFU CD29M SYC SPU LFG CD29M SYC SPU LFT CD29M SYC SPU LFF CD29M SYC SPU LRU CD29M
Weight kg
SyCon V2.9 configuration software update SyCon V2.9 configuration software upgrade for previous version
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (up to 10 stations)
SYC SPU LUG CD29M SYC SPU LUT CD29M SYC SPU LUF CD29M
(1) Provided with derivation box and cable. (2) Unauthorized on Modicon Premium TSX P57 153M/154M processor.
4/8
Product data sheet

Modicon Premium configurations
Presentation
Modicon Premium TSX P57 Cp 0244M configurations are constitued by essential elements for the management of a set of PLC station. These configurations are supplied already mounted and their component parts cannot be detached.
3 4 5
Description
The TSX P57 Cp 0244M configurations (built around the TSX P57 0244M processor) feature all or some of the following components: 1 A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY 6 rack 2 A standard-format c 24 V non-isolated TSX PSY 1610M or a 100240 V TSX PSY 2600M power supply. 3 A TSX P57 C024M processor with slot no. 1 for the PCMCIA CANopen master V4.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction. 4 A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card 5 A 2-channel 40 kHz TSX CTY 2A counter module. This module uses 2 of the 4 application-specific channels provided by the processor. 6 Three single-format slots for any I/O module.
Characteristics
Configurations CANopen features Conformance class Standard Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Degree of protection LED indicators Product certification Premium processor I/O capacity TOR Analog Application-specific channels Capacity memory Integrated On PCMCIA Number of module Bus Network TSX P57 Cp 0244M M00 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 9-way male SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 et 1000. Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...+ 55 IP 20 ERR, RUN 192 12 4 96 128 1 CANopen, 1 AS-Interface 1
kbps C
4.2
Kb Kb
References
Designation Ready-assembled TSX P57 02 processor configurations with integrated CANopen port Power supply a 100...240 V c 24V Reference TSX P57 CA 0244M TSX P57 CD 0244M Weight kg 2.900 2.940
TSX P57 Cp 0244M
4/9
Product data sheet

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
Altivar 61/71 Controller Inside programmable card
Presentation
The Controller Inside programmable card is used to adapt the variable speed drive to specific applications by integrating control system functions. Dedicated to pump and fan applications in building and industrial segments, the Altivar 61 variable speed drives adapt effortlessly to simple catalogue machines. Open to all industrial communication networks and featuring numerous automation system options, the Altivar 71 adapts effortlessly to complex sophisticated machines. Various predefined configurable applications are sold by Schneider Electric and its partners. The PS 1131 software workshop for PC is used for programming and debugging new applications, quickly and in an open-ended manner. It is not possible to transfer the program from the card to the PC, which enables us to protect our know-how. A single Controller Inside programmable card can be fitted in the Altivar 71 drive. It can be combined with another option card (I/O extension or communication). The Controller Inside programmable card has: b 10 logic inputs, 2 of which can be used for 2 counters or 4 of which can be used for 2 incremental encoders b 2 analog inputs b 6 logic outputs b 2 analog outputs b A master port for the CANopen bus b A PC port for programming with the PS 1131 software workshop The Controller Inside programmable card can also use: b The drive I/O b The I/O extension card I/O b The encoder interface card points counter b The drive parameters (speed, current, torque, ) 5
532835
4.2
Description
1 RJ45 connector for connecting the PS 1131 software workshop via an RS 485 serial link. Connection to the PC is via a cable and an RS 232/RS 485 converter included in the PowerSuite for PC connection kit, VW3 A8 106. 2 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the CANopen bus. 3 Connector with removable screw terminals, 6 contacts at intervals of 3.81 for the 24 V c power supply and 4 logic inputs. 4 3 connectors with removable screw terminals, 6 contacts at intervals of 3.81 for 6 logic inputs, 6 logic outputs, 2 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs and 2 commons. 1 2 3 5 b b b b 5 LEDs, comprising: 1 to indicate the presence of the 24 V c power supply 1 to indicate a program execution fault 2 to indicate the CANopen bus communication status 1 controlled by the application program
4/10
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 61/71 Controller Inside programmable card
Characteristics of the CANopen communication port

Structure Connector Network management Transmission speed Address (Node ID) CANopen application layer Profile PDO SDO Error check Other services Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Output frequency range Speed range Motor control profile with Asynchronous motor Synchronous Conformity to standards LED indicators Diagnostics Using LEDs One 9-way male SUB-D connector Master Configurable via the program: 50 Kbps, 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps, 500 Kbps or 1 Mbps 32 slaves maximum DS 301 V4.02 DSP 405 10 receive and transmit PDOs in total for each slave 2 client SDOs per slave (1 read and 1 write). Block transfer. Node Guarding, producer and consumer Heartbeat Emergency, Boot-up, Sync - 10+ 50C ou - 10+ 60C with derating and with the control card fan kit VW3 A9 4pp 5...95 % without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 IP 21 or IP00 (depending on model) and IP 41 on upper part (with cover plate) 1...1000 Hz or 1...500 Hz depending on model 1...100 in open loop mode Flux vector control with or without sensor, voltage/frequency ration (2 or 5 pulses), ENA system Vector control without speed feedback IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2 categories C1 to C3, e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM 117 and GOST 5 LEDs on the card: RX (reception), TX (transmission), FLT (collision detection), STS (IP address) and 10/100 Mbps (speed) 2 LEDs: RUN and ERROR, conforming to CIA DR303 version 1.0 (1) Otherwise, an external 24 V c power supply must be used. (2) This common point is also the drive 0 V.
Services
Variable speed drive
PS 1131 software workshop

The PS 1131 software workshop conforms to international standard IEC 61131-3 and includes all the functions for programming and setting up the Controller Inside programmable card. It includes the configurator for CANopen. It is designed for Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Microsoft Windows Millennium, Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional and Microsoft Windows XP operating systems. It benefits from the user-friendly interface associated with these operating systems: b Pop-up menus b Function blocks b Online help The PS 1131 software workshop is available in both English and German. The programming and debugging tools can be accessed via the application browser. This provides the user with an overview of the program and quick access to all application components: b Program editor. 6 programming languages are available: Ladder language (LD), Structured Text language (ST), Grafcet language (SFC), Instruction List language (IL), Function Block Diagram (FBD), Continuous Flow Chart (CFC). b Function blocks editor b Variables editor b Animation tables editor b Runtime screens editor
4.2
Modular structured programming

The PS 1131 software workshop is used to structure an application into function modules consisting of sections (program code), animation tables and runtime screens. Each program section has a name and is programmed in one of the six available languages. To protect know-how or prevent any accidental modification, each section can be write-protected or read/write-protected.
References
Card
Description Controller Inside programmable card (1) equipped with one 9-way male SUB-D connector For drive ATV 61, ATV 71 Reference VW3 A3 501 Weight kg 0.320
4/11
Product data sheet
CANopen in Machines and Installation

Preventa safety controllers
Type XPS MC
Presentation
Application The XPS MC device is an electronic safety controller for monitoring safety functions up to safety category 4 according to EN 954-1. It has 10 safety outputs and either 16 or 32 inputs. The functions are configured from an integrated library of various industrial safety functions, such as emergency stop, safety door locking, enabling device, ESPE connection (with muting) etc. A TER Modbus interface is used for configuration and diagnostic purposes by means of a PC, or for transmission of data to another Modbus module (PLC, Terminals, ...). The device includes: b 6 independent semiconductor safety outputs b Two independent relais groups of dual channel positively driven voltage-free contact safety outputs. Each of the four channels has two contacts in series. The XPS MCpp ZC models of the XPS MC device are equipped with a CANopen communication port. Safety functions The configuration of the safety functions is carried out using software XPS MCWIN which is available on the Safety Suite CD-ROM. 30 certified safety functions are available with this software and they are easily assignable to the safety outputs. The safety functions have multiple combination possibilities and various starting conditions. The safety functions are certified in accordance with category 4 of standard EN 954-1. Functions These CANopen parameters (Baudrate, Node-ID) can be adjusted with the XPS MCWIN software.
4.2
The EDS-file describes the object directory. The PDOs are statically mapped. For all parameters of the XPS MC, there are four PDOs.
XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC 16 32 6 transistor outputs and 4 relay outputs c 24 V 20 %, including ripple 16 A gG (gL) y 12 W 8 A including peripherals
Digital inputs Digital outputs Supply UE as per IEC 38 Max. fuse protection Consumption Max. current consumption
9 1 2 3 4 6 5
Description
The controllers XPS MCppZC have the following on the front face: 1 A display block system diagnostic 2 Two LEDs indicating the CANopen status 3 A 9-way SUB-D connector for CANopen bus 4 A terminal for solid-state safety output and muting indicator light terminals 5 A terminal for c 24 V power supply and relay safety output 6 One or two terminal(s) for control output for power supply to safety inputs and safety inputs (depends on model) 7 An RJ45 type connector for the TER Modbus interface (diagnostic using a Magelis operator dialogue terminal or a Premium automation platform) 8 RESET button 9 A support plate for fixing the module to a DIN or an AM1 PA plate.In the case the controller is mounted in the TSX RKYpp rack of Premium platform, this support plate must be removed. To be ordered sparately: Removable screw or spring terminals XPS MCTSpp/Cpp.
8 7
4/12
Characteristics, references
CANopen in Machines and Installation

Preventa safety controllers
Type XPS MC
Characteristics
Preventa safety controllers CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Degree of protection LED indicators XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC S20 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-3 V1.2.0 DS 401 V2.1 9-way male SUB-D 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs -40...+ 55 IP 20 PWR (green, power ON), CNF (yellow, configuration), E In and E Ex (red, internal/external error), COM (green, controller communicating via TER connection) R1and R2 (green, relay outputs) ERR (red, CANopen communication status) RUN (green, service mode) 16 inputs, 8 outputs (green) 32 inputs, 8 outputs (green) EN 954-1, IEC 61508, UL 508, CSA 22.2
kbps C
Product certification
References
Safety controllers (connector not included)
Number of inputs 16 32 Number of outputs Relay Solid state 4 (2 x 2) 6 4 (2 x 2) 6 Communication on bus Modbus, CANopen Modbus, CANopen Reference XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC Weight kg 0.820 0.840
Connectors for safety controllers

Description XPS MC16ZC Screw connectors (1) XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC XPS MCTS16 XPS MCTS32 Use with Reference Weight kg 0.080 0.110
4.2
Spring connectors (1)
XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC
XPS MCTC16 XPS MCTC32
0.080 0.110
Preassembled cordsets
For use From Preassembled cordsets XPS MCppZC length 2.5 m Description Reference To Magelis graphic terminal XBT G/GT Serial RS 232D port on a PC terminal XBT Z968 TSX PCX 1031 Weight kg 0.180 0.170
XPS MC32ZC
TSX PCX 1031
Accessories
Description Adaptator For use - Link between XPS MCppZC and PC - Link between XPS MCppZC and Magelis graphic terminal Safety Suite software pack Compatibility with Windows XP Reference XPS MCCPC Weight kg 0.011
XPS MCCPC
Configuration software for XPS MCppZC controllers
XPS MCWIN
0.520
(1) To be ordered separately.
4/13
Product data sheet

IP20 modular field devices
Advantys OTB distributed I/O
Presentation
The Advantys OTB distributed I/O solution, which complements the Advantys STB offer, consists of a compact system (network interface and integrated I/O) with the addition of Twido I/O expansion modules. Each base incorporates 20 I/O: b A network interface module (including CANopen) with 12 inputs c 24 V, 6 relay outputs and 2 solid state outputs c 24 V-0.3 A b As an extension, up to 7 discrete or analog I/O expansion modules can be added. This structure, created using IP 20 modules, can thus be used to manage 20 to 244 I/Os per island over a maximum length of 328.7 mm (height 94.5 mm). Twido extension modules allow the addition of further discrete and analog I/Os. For further information, consult our catalogue Twido controller programmable.
Description
2 The OTB 1C0 DM9LP CANopen network interface module with integrated I/O has the following on the front panel: 1 A standard connector for the CANopen physical interface. 2 An LED display block. 3 Screw terminals for the c 24 V sensor power supply and for connecting the input sensors (with 1 common). 4 Screw terminals for connecting the output pre-actuators (with 4 commons). On the right-hand side panel: A connector for TWD Dpp/App I/O expansion modules (7 modules max.).
3 1 4
Characteristics
4.3
I/O distribued module CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Degree of protection device LED indicators Product certification Conformity to standards Supply voltage Number and type
kbps C
cV Inputs Solid-state outputs Relay outputs
Connection by
OTB 1C0 DM9LP S20 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 DS 401 V2.1 9-way male SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pair 0...+ 55 IP 20 Controller status (PWR, RUN, and ERR), I/O (Ip/Qp) cULus, e IEC 61131-2, UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Class 1 Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D), e 24 12 E, c 24 V, IEC type 1 2 S, c 24 V, 0,3 A 6 S, c 30 V / a 240 V, 2A Removable screw terminal block
References
Description Advantys OTB interface module with digital I/O Usage 12 a 24 V inputs 6 relay outputs 2 c 24 V solid state outputs Configuration files, technical manuals and operating instruction Reference OTB 1C0 DM9LP Masse kg 0,195
Advantys Lite (1) OTB 1C0 DM9LP
FTX ES 00
(1) See also STB SPU 1010 Advantys configuration software page 4/16.
4/14
Product data sheet

Presentation
The Advantys STB distributed I/O solution is an open, modular I/O system. It can be used to design industrial automation islands managed by a master controller connected to various buses and networks, including CANopen. Each island comprises a set of modules mounted on a DIN rail (32 for standard, 12 for basic) to make up one or more segments in which the power supplies (logic c 5 V, sensors and actuators c 24 V or a 115/230 V) are distributed automatically. This structure created using IP 20 modules thus can be used to manage: b 2 to 512 inputs/outputs per standard island b 2 to 192 inputs/outputs per basic island. Sensors and actuators are connected with removable screw or spring terminals. The Advantys STB configuration software is used to configure the parameters of the numerous I/O module functions (logic of each channel, behavior in the event of a short-circuit or overload, fallback position, reflex functions, etc)
Description
1 4 The front panel of CANopen network interface module (STB NCO 2212, standard or STB NCO 1010, basic) features the following: 1 A 9-way SUB-D connector used to connect the island to the CANopen bus. 2 Two rotary node addressing selectors on the bus or the network. 3 An external c 24 V power connector for the removable screw-type (STB XTS 1120) or spring-type (STB XTS 2120) connector. 4 A display block with LEDs for the various island states on the bus: power, communication, send/receive data, errors, etc. 5 Locking screw securing the STB Npp module to the DIN rail. 6 A slot for an STB XMP 4440 removable memory card (excluding basic module) 7 - Standard module: cover accessing the port used to connect a PC (for island setup and configuration, can also be used to update the firmware) or an HMI terminal (read/write data), and the Reset button (1). - Basic module: cover accessing the port used to connect a PC (for updating the firmware for the network interface module only) and the Reset button (1).
5 2 6
4.3
Characteristics
Network interface modules CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials STB NCO 2212 (standard) STB NCO 1010 (basic) S20 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 Supports CAN bus extension module (for external CANopen products). Allows hot swapping of Advantys STB I/O modules 9-way male SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000. Shielded twisted pair 0...+ 60 IP 20 Network state (CAN Error, CAN Run) Network state (CAN Error, CAN Run) Module and islands states (POWER, Module and islands states (POWER, RUN RUN, ERROR and TEST) and ERROR) CEI/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Classe 1 Division 2, e 24 32 12 1 6 c 24 V (2, 4, 6 or 16 channels), a 115 V and 230 V (2 channels) c 24 V/0.5 A (2, 4, 6 or 16 channels), c 24 V/2 A (2 channels), a 115230 V/2 A (2 channels) c 24 V or a 115230 V 2 C/O/2 A, 2 N/C + N/O/7A - 10 V+ 10 V, 020 mA, multi-range (2 channels) - 10 V+ 10 V, 020 mA (2 channels) Tego Power motor starter 16 inputs, TeSys model U controller-starter 12 inputs 40 kHz 1 channel counter
Structure
CANopen communication device
Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Degree of protection LED indicators
kbps C
Product certification Power supply Max. number of I/O modules per island Number of segments Principal Extension I/O module Discrete inputs Discrete solid state outputs Relay outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Application-specific
cV
4/15
Product data sheet

(continued)

Accessories
The Advantys STB XBE modules allow extending an island. The STB XBE 1000 and STB XBE 1200 are used in pairs. b The STB XBE 1000 ends a segment and provides the link to the next segment. b The STB XBE 1200 starts a new segment with the link to the STB XBE 1000. b The STB XBE 2100 allows connection of standard CANopen devices to the segment (for example the ATV 31 drive, FTB IP 67 monobloc I/O and Festo valve). The Advantys STB configuration software is used to set the parameters of the numerous I/O module functions (logic of each channel, behavior in the event of a short-circuit or overload, fallback position, reflex functions, etc). The multilingual Advantys STB configuration software is compatible with the following operating systems: Windows 98 (second edition SE), Windows NT 4.0 (service pack u 6), Windows 2000 (service pack u 1) and Windows XP. It includes online help and is provided with an STB XCA 4002 cable to connect the NIM to the PC (length 2 m). The software could be used to set the parametres as well for Advantys OTB, Advantys FTB and Advantys FTM.
References
Description Use Power supply c 24 V Reference
CANopen Standard network interface module CANopen Basic network interface module "EOS" bus extension module (1) "BOS" bus extension module (1) CAN bus extension module (1)
Weight kg STB NCO 2212 0.135
Power supply c 24 V
STB NCO 1010
0.130
Installed at the end of the segment STB XBE 1000 (except for the last segment on the island) Installed at the beginning of each STB XBE 1200 extension segment Optionally installed at the end of STB XBE 2100 the last segment to connect CANopen devices as part of the device configuration tool database Single workstation 3 Users pack 10 Users pack Unlimited site 1 workstation 3 stations 10 stations 10 workstationss on one site. Unlimited registration capacity. Multilingual on CD-ROM STB SPU 1000 STB SPU 1003 STB SPU 1011 STB SPU 1100 STB BBS 1000 STB BBS 1003 STB BBS 1011 STB BBS 1100
4.3
STB XBE 1000 STB XBE 1200
Advantys configuration software (2)
Subscription to Advantys configuration and debugging software Duration: 1 year
User documentation (3) Preassembled cordset (replacement part) STB SPU 1000
STB SUS 8800
To connect the PC to the network STB XCA 4002 interface module (NIM) Lenght 2 m
Catalog numbers, Alliance SI program

Description Advantys configuration and debugging software Subscription to Advantys configuration and debugging software. Duration: 1 year Use Reference STB SPU 1010 10 workstations on one site for a member of the Alliance SI program, Includes 10 cables and 10 CD-ROMs 10 workstations on one site for a STB BBS 1010 member of the Alliance SI program, Weight kg
STB XBE 2100
(1) With standard rage only. (2) Cordset with SUB-D connector (PS side). For PC with USB port, order in more SR2 CBL06 adaptor. (3) 2 lots of documentation are available on the CD-ROM STB SUS 8800 and on our website www.telemecanique.com: - "Advantys configuration and debugging software. Quick start-up guide". - "Advantys configuration and debugging software. User manual".
4/16
Product data sheet

IP 67 monobloc field devices
Advantys FTB
Presentation
To meet the needs of machine manufacturers and users, automation system architectures are becoming decentralised, while offering performances comparable to those obtained with a centralised structure. Advantys FTB IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes enable sensors and actuators to be connected in distributed automation systems using pre-assembled cables, thus reducing wiring time and costs, whilst at the same time increasing the operational availability of the installation. These IP 67 protected splitter boxes can also be used within processes or machines in harsh environments (splashing water, oil, dust, etc.). For difficult environments (welding shops etc.), a range of Advantys FTB splitter boxes with a metal housing is available. Advantys FTB splitter boxes allow distributed connection of sensors and actuators on machines via a CANopen bus. Sensors and actuators are connected by means of standard M12 connectors. Configuration and parametering of the Advantys FTB splitter boxes is carried out using configuration files (e.g., .eds files for CANopen): b either directly within the software workshop of the PLC used b or by using a SyCon type configurator (consult our Modicon Premium automation platform catalogue).
1 2 3
Description
7 8 4 CANopen monobloc I/O splitter boxes FTB 1CN has the following on the front face: 1 Eight M12 female connectors for connection of sensors and actuators (2 channels per connector). 2 Eight channel status indicator lights (00 to 07). 3 Eight channel status indicator lights (10 to 17) or channel diagnostic indicator lights (00 to 07) depending on the splitter box configuration. 4 Two 7/8 connectors for connecting the c 24 V sensor and actuator power supplies: male for PWR IN, female for PWR OUT. 5 One M12 male connector (bus IN) and one M12 female connector (bus OUT) for connection of the CANopen and DeviceNet buses. 6 Access to coding and speed selection wheels. 7 Two bus diagnostic LEDs. 8 Two c 24 V sensor and actuator supply status LEDs. 9 Eight channel marker labels. 10 Two splitter box marker labels. 11 Splitter box functional earth connection (beneath the label).
6 5
4.3
10 11
Characteristics
Advantys CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Degree of protection LED indicators FTB 1CN S20 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 DS 401 V2.1 M12 50, 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pair 0...+55 IP 67 2 bus diagnostic LEDs, 2 24 V sensor and actuator supply status LEDs, 8 channel status indicator LEDs, 8 channel status indicator LEDs or channel diagnostic indicator LEDs depending on the splitter box configuration. cULus
Structure
kbps C
Device type
Product certification
4/17
Product data sheet

(continued)

IP 67 monobloc field devices
Advantys FTB
Advantys FTB splitter boxes general characteristics

Splitter box type Number of inputs/outputs FTB 1pp16Epp 1pp08E08SPp 16 I 16 I/O (8 I + (8 O + 8 I diagnostic) 8 I diagnostic) 120 24 8 < 18 < 100, automatic tripping > 100, reset 16 I Type 2 Yes 24 200 1830 Positive 1 Yes 8I 1pp12E04SPp 16 I/O (4 I + 4 O + 8 I diagnostic) 1pp16Cpp 16 I/O (8 I/O + 8 I/O diagnostic) 1pp08E08CM0 8 I + 8 I/O (8 I + 8 I/O diagnostic)
Internal consumption of splitter box Operating voltage Splitter box max. supply current Bus and I/O undervoltage detection Built-in short-circuit protection
mA cV A V mA mA
Advantys FTB Input characteristics

Number of inputs Conformity to IEC 1131-2 Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire proximity sensors Input values Nominal voltage Maximum current Sensor power supply Logic Input filtering Protection against reversed polarity 12 I 0...16 I 8 I + 0...8 I
cV mA V ms
Advantys FTB Output characteristics
Number of outputs Output type Nominal output values
Voltage Current
V A Hz W mm2
Overvoltage protection Maximum switching cycles Maximum lamp load Output connection/cable lengths
8S 4S Transistors c 24 1.6 Yes (suppressor diode) 20 10 0.75/10 m maximum 0.34/5 m maximum
0...16 S
0...8 S
References
108733 521940
4.3
Monobloc splitter boxes for CANopen bus

Number of I/O Number, Number, type of type of inputs outputs (1) (2) 8 8, transistor 12 4, transistor 16 Connection by Housing Reference type Weight kg 8 x M12 female connectors 8 x M12 female connectors 8 x M12 female connectors Plastic Plastic Plastic Metal FTB 1CN08E08SP0 FTB 1CN12E04SP0 FTB 1CN16EP0 FTB 1CN16EM0 FTB 1CN16CP0 FTB 1CN16CM0 FTB 1CN08E08CM0 0.430 0.450 0.440 0.820 0.450 0.820 0.820
16
16 0...16 configurable
0...16, transistor
8 x M12 female Plastic connectors Metal 8 x M12 female Metal connectors
FTB 1CNpppP0
16 of which 8 8 + 0...8 0...8, configurable transistor FTB 1CNpppM0
Software (3)
Designation Description Advantys Lite Configuration files, technical manuals and operating instructions Reference FTX ES00 Weight kg
(1) c 24 V IEC type 2. (2) c 24 V/1.6 A. (3) See also STB SPU 1010 Advantys configuration software page 4/16.
4/18
Product data sheet

IP 67 modular field devices
Advantys FTM
Presentation
5 m max. (1) Segment 1
Segment 2
4 splitter boxes max.
To meet the needs of machine manufacturers and users, automation system architectures are becoming decentralised, while offering performances comparable to those obtained with a centralised structure. Advantys FTM IP 67 modular I/O splitter boxes enable sensors and actuators to be connected in distributed automation systems using pre-assembled cables, thus reducing wiring time and costs, whilst at the same time increasing the operational availability of the installation. These IP 67 protected splitter boxes can also be used within processes or machines in harsh environments (splashing water, oil, dust, etc.). Advantys FTM splitter boxes allow distributed connection of sensors and actuators on machines via a fieldbus. They communicate on different buses such as: CANopen, DeviceNet and Profibus DP. Sensors and actuators are connected by means of standard M12 and M8 connectors. This modularity makes installation of the splitter boxes within the machine even easier. The configurable I/O splitter boxes also enable the mixing of inputs and outputs and, as a result, reduce the number of product variants. This provides savings in space as well as increasing the flexibility of the installation. The topology of the system is a star/line architecture. Each bus module is fitted with four M12 connectors for the connection of Advantys FTM splitter boxes (star architecture). On each run, called a segment, it is possible to connect up to 4 splitter boxes on the chaining principle (line architecture). The maximum length of a segment, between the bus module and the last splitter box, must not exceed 5 metres.
Segment 4
Segment 3
(1) Maximum distance of 5 m between the bus module and the last splitter box on the same segment.
For one bus module, the maximum number of splitter boxes is: b 4 per segment, i.e. 64 I/O. b 16 for the group of 4 possible segments of the bus module, i.e. 256 digital I/O.
4.3
1 12 2
Description
Modular bus module FTM 1CN10 have the following on the front face: 1 One M12 male connector (CANopen bus IN) for connection of the bus. 2 One M12 female connector (CANopen bus OUT) for connection of the bus. 3 One 7/8 male connector for connection of the c 24 V power supplies. 4 Four M12 female connectors for connection of the splitter box inputs/outputs via the internal bus. 5 Four channel marker labels. 6 Two bus module marker labels. 7 Speed selection and bus address switches. 8 One bus power supply status LED. 9 One bus diagnostics LED. 10 One sensor power supply diagnostics LED. 11 One sensor power supply diagnostics and communication status LED. 12 Bus module functional earth connection.
6 3
8 9
4 5
10 11
FTM splitter box with cover FTM splitter box without cover
4/19
Product data sheet

(continued)

IP 67 modular field devices
Advantys FTM
Characteristics
Bus module CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Physical interface Data rate Mdium Operating temperature Degree of protection LED indicators FTM 1CN10 S10 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 DS 401 V2.1 M12 125, 250, 500 Shielded dual twisted pair 0...+55 IP 67 1 bus power supply status LED 1 bus diagnostics LED 4 or 8 sensor power supply diagnostics LEDs 4 or 8 sensor power supply diagnostics and communication status LEDs UL/CSA 4 4
Structure
Kbps C
CANopen communication module
Product certifications Maximum segments number for the bus module Maximum splitter boxes number for 1 segment
108745
108739
References
Bus module for modular splitter boxes
Maximum splitter boxes number Connection by 16 M12 connectors Reference FTM 1CN10 Weight kg 0,420
Modular digital I/O splitter boxes for all bus types

Number of I/O 8 FTM 1CN
109017
FTM 1Dp08C08
Number, Number, type of type of inputs outputs 8, c 24 V IEC type 2
Connection by
Type
Reference
Weight kg 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220
4.3
8 x M8 female Compact FTM 1DE08C08 connectors Expandable FTM 1DE08C08E 4 x M12 female Compact FTM 1DE08C12 connectors Expandable FTM 1DE08C12E 8 x M8 female Compact FTM 1DD08C08 connectors Expandable FTM 1DD08C08E 4 x M12 female Compact FTM 1DD08C12 connectors Expandable FTM 1DD08C12E 8 x M12 female Compact FTM 1DE16C12 connectors Expandable FTM 1DE16C12E 8 x M12 female Compact FTM 1DD16C12 connectors Expandable FTM 1DD16C12E
0...8, 0...8, c 24 V transistor IEC type 2 c 24 V/ 0.5 A
108768
16
16, c 24 V IEC type 2 0...16, 0...16, c 24 V transistor IEC type 2 c 24 V/ 0.5 A
FTM 1Dp08C08E
109018
FTM 1Dp08C12 FTM 1Ap04C12p
Modular analogue I/O splitter boxes for all bus types

4 4, 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 4, c 10 V c 0...10 V 4, 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 4, c 10 V c 0...10 V 4 x M12 female Compact connectors 4 x M12 female Compact connectors 4 x M12 female Compact connectors 4 x M12 female Compact connectors FTM 1AE04C12C 0.130
FTM 1AE04C12T
0.130
108741
FTM 1AS04C12C
0.130
FTM 1AS04C12T
0.130
Software (1)
FTM 1Dp08C12E Designation FTM 1DD16C12 Advantys Lite Configuration files, technical manuals and operating instructions FTX ES 00 Description Reference Weight kg
(1) See also STB SPU 1010 Advantys configuration software page 4/16.
4/20
Product data sheet

Field devices
TeSys T Motor Management System
Presentation
The TeSys T motor management system is used for motor control and protection in harsh industrial applications, in which downtime must be avoided because it is very costly: Oil & Gas, chemical industry, water treatment, metal, minerals and mining, pharmaceutical industry, microelectronics, tunnels, airports, etc. With TeSys T, untimely stoppages of a process or manufacturing, associated with a motor, are anticipated via predictive analysis of fault situations. Fault tripping is therefore reduced to a minimum. Its use in motor control panels makes it possible to: b increase the operational availability of installations, b improve flexibility from project design through to implementation, increase productivity by making available all information needed to run the system. 3
Description
4 5 6 7 LTM RppCBD/CFM controllers feature the following on their front panel: 1 Controller power supply. 2 Input connections. 3 Fault outputs (N/O+N/C). 4 HMI port for connection to the HMI terminal, a PC or an extension module (RJ45). 5 Controller status LEDs. 6 CANopen port. 7 Test/Reset button. 8 Connection to network by terminal block. 9 Connection for an earth fault toroid and temperature probes. 10 Outputs for motor control mode function.
8 9 10
Characteristics
TeSys T controllers CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Protection and monitoring functions communication device Operating temperature Degree of protection Dimensions (W x H x D) LED indicators Product certifications Conformity to standards Supply voltage Number and type Logic inputs Relay outputs Connection by LTM RppCBD LTM RppCFM S20 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 9-way male SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pair Thermal overload, motor temperature monitoring, phase imbalance and phase failure, locked rotor, long starting times, phase reversal, earth fault - 20...+ 60 IP 20 91 x 61 x 112.5 Power, Alarm, HMI Comm, Fallback and Status (CANopen) UL, CSA, BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos, NOM, CCC, C-TICK, ATEX, GOST, KERI IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No.14, e c 24 a 100...240 6 I positive logic, c 24 V, 7 mA 6 I a 100...240 V, 7 mA 3 O, c 30 V / a 250 V, 5 A Screw terminal block (AWG 24...AWG14)
4.3
kbps
C mm
References
105838
Setting range 8A
Control voltage Current ranges c 24 V a 100240 V c 24 V a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V 0.48 A 0.48 A 1.3527 A 1.3527 A 5100 A 5100 A
Reference LTM R08CBD LTM R08CFM LTM R27CBD LTM R27CFM LTM R100CBD LTM R100CFM
Weight kg 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
27 A
100 A
LTM R08CBD
4/21
Product data sheet

Field devices
TeSys U starters-controllers
Presentation
The TeSys U starter controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following functions: b protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors: v breaking function, v overload and short-circuit protection, v thermal overload protection and power switching, b control of the application: v protection function alarms, application monitoring (running time, number of faults, motor current values, ...), v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values). These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which simply clip into the power base. The product can therefore be customised at the last moment. Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components. The TeSys U basic starter-controller consist of a: 1 Power base, is independent of the control voltage and of the motor power. It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400 V, total coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function. - 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A. - Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B). 2 Control units, must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to be protected and the type of protection required (Standard LUCA, Advanced LUCB, LUCC or LUCD or Multifunction LUCM. 3 CANopen communication module LUL C08. 4 Add-on contact blocks, indicate the following status of power base: ready, fault and pole status. 5 Reverser block, allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation. 6 Limiter-disconnector LUA LB, this unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be increased up to 130 kA at 400 V. 7 Plug-in terminal blocks, for the replacement of products without rewiring. 8 Control circuit pre wiring system, numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections (e.g. connection of reverser control terminals, ...
1 3
4
4 5 8
4.3
Description
1 2 3
CANopen communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U starter-controllers and controllers on a CANopen bus. Module LUL C08 is of the slave type. When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller. For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c 24 V, 0.5 A discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.
8 7 6
The front panel of CANopen communication LUL C08 module comprises: 1 LED indicating module status. 2 Fault signalling LED. 3 LED indicating _ 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1. 4 9-way male SUB-D connector for CANopen link. 5 c 24 V supply connection. 6 Discrete input. 7 Discrete input. 8 Discrete output. 9 Outputs for starter commands.
4/22
Product data sheet

(continued)

Field devices
TeSys U starters-controllers
Characteristics
Communication module for TeSys starters-controllers CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium Control unit CANopen Functions communication Starter status device Alarms Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Start and Stop commands Data exchanges, type objects Operating temperature LUL C08 S20 DS 301 V4.02, DR 303-2 9-way male SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pair Standard Advanced Performed Performed Performed Performed Performed Performed
kbps
Multifunction Performed Performed Performed Performed Performed Performed Performed
Degree of protection Dimensions (W x H x D) LED indicators Product certifications Conformity to standards Supply voltage Number and type Connection by
mm
Performed Performed Performed Performed Performed PDO (Process Data Objects), SDO (Service Data Objects) and PKW (Periodically Kept in Acyclic Words) - 25...+ 70 (+ 60...+ 70, for Ie 32 A, gap between products - 25...+ 60 u 9 mm) (+ 45...+ 55: gap between products u 9 mm, + 55...+ 60: gap between products u 20 mm) IP 20 45 x H x 126, H = 154: non-reversing, 224: reversing, + 93 with limiter-disconnector ERR, Status (CANopen), c 24 V (for outputs UL, CSA, Pending: BV, LROS, DNV, GL, PTB IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508 type E, CSA 22-2 No.14, c 24 2 I, 1 O, 2 O for starter commands Screw terminal block (AWG 24...AWG12)
4.3
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L
References
Description Communication module (1) Item Reference LUL C08
Weight kg 0.108
Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link: b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection. The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended. Description For use with Item Reference Weight power base kg LU9B N11L 0.050 Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp 8a LU2B pp
8b
LU9M RL
0.450
8a
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9M RL
8b
(1) The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) and user manuals are available on the website www.telemecanique.com.
4/23
Product data sheet

Altivar 31
Presentation
The Altivar 31 drive is a variable speed drive for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors. The Altivar 31 is robust, compact, easy to use and conforms to EN 50178, IEC/EN 61800-2, IEC/EN 61800-3 standards, UL/CSA certification and to e marking. It incorporates functions that are suitable for the most common applications, including: b Materials handling (small conveyors, hoists, etc) b Packing and packaging machines b Specialist machines (mixers, kneaders, textile machines, etc.) b Pumps, compressors, fans. Altivar 31 drives communicate on Modbus and CANopen industrial buses. These two protocols are integrated as standard into the drive. Altivar 31 drives are supplied with a heatsink for normal environments and ventilated enclosures. Multiple units can be mounted side by side to save space. Drives are available for motor ratings between 0.18 kW and 15 kW, with four types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW b 200 V to 240 V 3-phase, 0.18 kW to 15 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase, 0.37 kW to 15 kW b 525 V to 600 V 3-phase, 0.75 kW to 15 kW.
4
Characteristics
Drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection LED indicators Product certification Number of Logic inputs Analog inputs Logic/Analog outputs Relay outputs
Structure
kbps C
4.3
ATV 31 S10 DS 301 V4.02 DS 402 V2.0 RJ45 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs -10...+ 60 depends on the model 5...95% non condensing or dripping water IP 31 and IP 41 on upper part and IP 21 on connection terminals IP 55 for models State display UL, CSA, NOM 117 and C-Tick 6 2 1 2
4/24
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 31
Drives with heatsink (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Motor Line supply Power Line current indicated on (2) rating plate (1) at U1 at U2 (3) kW HP A A
531248
Apparent Max. power prospective line Isc (4)
Altivar 31 Nominal Max. current transient current for 60 s 4 kHz A 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 A 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5
Power Reference (5) dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31H018M2 (6) ATV 31H037M2 (6) ATV 31H055M2 (6) ATV 31H075M2 (6) ATV 31HU11M2 (6) ATV 31HU15M2 (6) ATV 31HU22M2 (6)
Weight
kVA 0.6 1 1.4 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.4
kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
kg 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.800 1.800 3.100
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filters
0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 3.0 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4
ATV 31H037M2
3-phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz, without EMC filters (7)
0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 2.1 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.5 11.1 14.9 19.1 24.2 36.8 46.8 63.5 82.1 1.9 3.3 4.2 5.6 7.4 9.6 13 16.6 21.1 32 40.9 55.6 71.9 0.7 1.3 1.7 2.2 3 3.8 5.2 6.6 8.4 12.8 16.2 22 28.5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 13.7 17.5 27.5 33 54 66 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5 20.6 26.3 41.3 49.5 81 99 23 38 43 55 71 86 114 146 180 292 388 477 628 ATV 31H018M3X (6) ATV 31H037M3X (6) ATV 31H055M3X (6) ATV 31H075M3X (6) ATV 31HU11M3X (6) ATV 31HU15M3X (6) ATV 31HU22M3X (6) ATV 31HU30M3X (6) ATV 31HU40M3X (6) ATV 31HU55M3X (6) ATV 31HU75M3X (6) ATV 31HD11M3X (6) ATV 31HD15M3X (6) 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.700 1.700 1.700 2.900 2.900 6.400 6.400 10.500 10.500
531249
ATV 31HU40M3X
531250
3-phase supply voltage: 380500 V 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filters
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9 10.9 13.9 21.9 27.7 37.2 48.2 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7 8.3 10.6 16.5 21 28.4 36.8 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 15 18 25 32 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 14.3 17 27.7 33 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.5 6.2 8.3 10.7 14.3 21.5 25.5 41.6 49.5 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492 ATV 31H037N4 (6) ATV 31H055N4 (6) ATV 31H075N4 (6) ATV 31HU11N4 (6) ATV 31HU15N4 (6) ATV 31HU22N4 (6) ATV 31HU30N4 (6) ATV 31HU40N4 (6) ATV 31HU55N4 (6) ATV 31HU75N4 (6) ATV 31HD11N4 (6) ATV 31HD15N4 (6) 1.800 1.800 1.800 1.800 1.800 3.100 3.100 3.100 6.500 6.500 11.000 11.000
4.3
ATV 31HU75N4
531251
3-phase supply voltage: 525600 V 50/60 Hz, without EMC filters

0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 ATV 31HD15N4A 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 2.8 4.8 6.4 10.7 16.2 21.3 27.8 36.4 2.4 4.2 5.6 9.3 14.1 18.5 24.4 31.8 2.5 4.4 5.8 9.7 15 19 25 33 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 2.6 4.1 5.9 9.2 13.5 16.5 25.5 33 36 48 62 94 133 165 257 335 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22S6X ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X 1.700 1.700 2.900 2.900 6.200 6.200 10.000 10.000
(1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz, derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V; 525-600 V). (4) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes. (5) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference for the selected drive. Example: ATV 31H018M2T. (6) To order a drive with potentiometer, add an A to the end of the reference for the selected drive. Example: ATV 31H018M2A. (7) Optional EMC filter. Nota : For more precisions about customisable enclosed drives and Drive kits, refer to catalog "Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors".
4/25
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 31
Enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Motor Power indicated on rating plate (1) kW 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 Line supply Line current (2) at U1 at U2 A 3 5.3 6.8 8.9 A 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 Apparent Max. power prospective line Isc (3) KVA 0.6 1 1.4 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.4 kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Altivar 31 Nominal Max. current transient current for 4 kHz 60 s A A 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5 Power Reference (4) dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31C018M2 (6) ATV 31C037M2 (6) ATV 31C055M2 (6) ATV 31C075M2 (6) ATV 31CU11M2 (6) ATV 31CU15M2 (6) ATV 31CU22M2 (6) Weight
kg 6.300 6.300 6.300 6.300 8.800 8.800 10.700
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters
12.1 10.2 15.8 13.3 21.9 18.4
2.2 ATV 31CU22M2
3-phase supply voltage: 380500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters
0.37
534445
0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9
1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7
1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 15.0 18.0 25.0 32.0
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22
1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 14.3 17.0 27.7 33.0
2.3 2.9 3.5 4.5 6.2 8.3 10.7 14.3 21.5 25.5 41.6 49.5
32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492
ATV 31C037N4 (6) ATV 31C055N4 (6) ATV 31C075N4 (6) ATV 31CU11N4 (6) ATV 31CU15N4 (6) ATV 31CU22N4 (6) ATV 31CU30N4 (6) ATV 31CU40N4 (6) ATV 31CU55N4 ATV 31CU75N4 ATV 31CD11N4 ATV 31CD15N4
8.800 8.800 8.800 8.800 8.800 10.700 10.700 10.700 23.600 23.600 32.500 32.500
0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
4.3
3 4 5.5 ATV 31CU75N4 7.5 11 15
10.9 8.3 13.9 10.6 21.9 16.5 27.7 21.0 37.2 28.4 48.2 36.8
Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz, derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes. (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference for the selected drive. Example: ATV 31C018M2T. (5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V). (6) ATV 31C18M2 to ATV 31CU40N4 drives are supplied in customizable enclosures for ready-to-use motor starter applications.
4/26
Product data sheet

Altivar 61
Presentation
2 Dedicated to pump and fan applications in building and industrial segments, the Altivar 61 variable speed drives adapt effortlessly to simple catalogue machines. The Altivar 61 drive is a frequency inverter for 3-phase asynchronous motors rated between 0.75 kW and 630 kW. The Altivar 61 range of variable speed drives extends across a range of motor power ratings up to 630 kW with two types of power supply: b 200_240 V 3-phase, up to 90 kW b 380_480 V 3-phase, up to 630 kW. The Altivar 61 drive 1 is supplied with a remote graphic display terminal 2. The PowerSuite software workshop 3 can be used to configure, adjust and debug the Altivar 61 in just the same way as all other Telemecanique speed drives and starters. It can be used via a direct, Ethernet, modem or wireless Bluetooth connection. 3 The Altivar 61 variable speed drives is connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via a communication card. This card comes with a basic web server, which users can adapt completely according to the application (Java or FactoryCast development tool). The Altivar 61 drive incorporates all the application functions for managing your pumps: sleep, wake-up, zero flow detection, fluid absence detection, underload detection,overload detection, PID regulator with preset PID references,
The Altivar 61 can be inserted in an installations safety system. It integrates the Power Removal safety function which prohibits any accidental starting of the motor. This function prevents the motor starting accidentally; it meets the requirements of machine safety standard EN 954-1, category 3 and those of operational safety standard IEC/EN 61508, SIL2 (safety control/signalling applied to processes and systems).
4.3
Characteristics
Drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Protection kbps C ATV 61 S10 DS 301 V4.02 DSP 402 Node guarding, Heartbeat 9-way male SUB-D connector on CANopen adapter. This connects to the Modbus RJ45 network port. 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs -10...+ 60 (depends on type of model) IP 00, IP 21 and IP 41 on upper part. IP 20 without cover plate on upper part of cover. IP 30 on the front panel and side parts. IP 31 with accessory. The protection depends on the model type and the accessories: refer to catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61. RUN et ERROR on integrated 7-segment display terminal UL, CSA, DNV, NOM 117 C-Tick,GOST and e
Structure
Degree of protection LED indicators
4/27
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 61
UL Type 1/IP 20 drives

Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent power Maximum prospective line Isc Altivar 61 Max. continuous current (1) 230 V A 3 4,8 8 11 13,7 17,5 27,5
DF534520
Max. transient current for 60 s A 3,6 5,7 9,6 13,2 16,4 21 33
Reference (3)
Weight
kW ATV 61H075M3 0,37 0,75 1,5 2,2 3 4 5,5
HP 0,5 1 2 3 5 7,5
200 V 240 V A A 6,9 12 18,2 25,9 25,9 34,9 47,3 5,8 9,9 15,7 22,1 22 29,9 40,1
240 V kVA 1,4 2,4 3,7 5,3 5,3 7 9,5
kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 22
kg ATV 61H075M3 (4) ATV 61HU15M3 (4) ATV 61HU22M3 (4) ATV 61HU30M3 (4) ATV 61HU40M3 (4) (5) ATV 61HU55M3 (4) (5) ATV 61HU75M3 (4) (5) 3,000 3,000 3,000 4,000 4,000 5,500 5,500
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz
DF534521
Three phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz

0,75 1,5 2,2 3 4 5,5 7,5 11 15 18,5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 1 2 3 5 7,5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 6,1 11,3 15 19,3 25,8 35 45 53,3 71,7 77 88 124 141 167 200 271 336 5,3 9,6 12,8 16,4 22,9 30,8 39,4 45,8 61,6 69 80 110 127 147 173 232 288 2,2 4 5,3 6,8 9,5 12,8 16,4 19 25,6 28,7 33,3 45,7 52,8 61,1 71,9 96,4 119,7 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 4,8 8 11 13,7 17,5 27,5 33 54 66 75 88 120 144 176 221 285 359 5,7 9,6 13,2 16,4 21 33 39,6 64,8 79,2 90 105,6 144 172,8 211,2 265,2 342 431 ATV 61H075M3 (4) ATV 61HU15M3 (4) ATV 61HU22M3 (4) ATV 61HU30M3 (4) ATV 61HU40M3 (4) ATV 61HU55M3 (4) ATV 61HU75M3 (4) ATV 61HD11M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD15M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD18M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD22M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD30M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD37M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD45M3X (4) (6) ATV 61HD55M3X (6) (7) (8) ATV 61HD75M3X (6) (7) (8) ATV 61HD90M3X (6) (7) (8) 3,000 3,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 5,500 7,000 16,000 16,000 30,000 30,000 37,000 37,000 37,000 59,000 72,000 72,000
ATV 61HU22M3Z
4
DF534522
4.3
ATV 61HD37M3X
(1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 2,5 or 12 kHz, depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) The ATV 61HD55M3XHD90M3X drives come in a reinforced version as standard, enabling them to operate in particular environmental conditions (see catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61). To order the reinforced version of of the ATV 61HpppM3 and ATV 61HD11M3X...HD45M3X drives, add at the end of the reference: - S337 for ATV 61HpppM3. Example : ATV 61H075M3 becomes ATV 61H075M3S337. - 337 for ATV 61HpppM3X. Example : ATV 61HD11M3X becomes ATV 61HD11M3X337. If a reinforced version of the drive is supplied, it must come with a remote graphic display terminal. (4) All drives come with a remote graphic display terminal as standard. The ATV 61HpppM3 and ATV 61HD11M3XATV 61HD45M3X drives can be ordered without a graphic display terminal. In this case, add a Z at the end of the reference. They will then come equipped with an integrated 7-segment display terminal. Example: ATV 61H075M3 without a graphic display terminal becomes ATV 61H075M3Z. (5) A line choke must be used, (see catalog "Variable speed drives: Altivar 61"). (6) Drive supplied without EMC filter. EMC filters are available as an option (see catalog "Variable speed drives: Altivar 61"). (7) Drive supplied as standard with a DC choke, which must be used when connecting the drive to the 3-phase supply. For connections to the DC bus, the drive can be ordered without a DC choke by adding D at the end of the reference. Example : ATV 61HD55M3X becomes ATV 61HD55M3XD. (8) Drive supplied without plate for EMC mounting. It is included in the UL Type 1 or IP 31 conformity kits, to be ordered separately, (see catalog "Variable speed drives: Altivar 61"). Nota : Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61.
4/28
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 61

Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 380 V kVA 2,4 3,8 5,4 7 9,3 13,4 17,8 24,1 31,6 29,9 32,9 43,4 55,3 68,5 79 109,9 109,3 133 157,3 190,2 235 260,6 292,2 325,1 365,3 419,3 466,6 576,6 643,6 718 Altivar 61 Max. continuous current (1) 380 V A 2,3 4,1 5,8 7,8 10,5 14,3 17,6 27,7 33 41 48 66 79 94 116 160 179 215 259 314 427 481 616 759 941 1188
DF534523
Max. transient current for 60 s
Reference (3)
Weight
kW ATV 61HU22N4 0,75 1,5 2,2 3 4 5,5 7,5 11 15 18,5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 500 560 630
HP 1 2 3 5 7,5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900
380 V 480 V A A 3,7 5,8 8,2 10,7 14,1 20,3 27 36,6 48 45,5 50 66 84 104 120 167 166 202 239 289 357 396 444 494 555 637 709 876 978 1091 3 5,3 7,1 9 11,5 17 22,2 30 39 37,5 42 56 69 85 101 137 143 168 224 275 331 383 435 494 544 597 644 760 858 964
kA 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
460 V A A 2,1 3,4 4,8 6,2 7,6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 179 215 259 314 427 481 616 759 941 1188 2,7 4,9 6,9 9,3 12,6 17,1 21,1 33,2 39,6 49,2 57,6 79,2 94,8 112,8 139,2 192 214,8 258 310,8 376,8 512,4 577,2 739,2 910,8 1129,2 1425,6 ATV 61H075N4 (4) ATV 61HU15N4 (4) ATV 61HU22N4 (4) ATV 61HU30N4 (4) ATV 61HU40N4 (4) ATV 61HU55N4 (4) ATV 61HU75N4 (4) ATV 61HD11N4 (4) ATV 61HD15N4 (4) ATV 61HD18N4 (4) ATV 61HD22N4 (4) ATV 61HD30N4 (4) ATV 61HD37N4 (4) ATV 61HD45N4 (4) ATV 61HD55N4 (4) ATV 61HD75N4 (4) ATV 61HD90N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC11N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC13N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC16N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC22N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC25N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC31N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC40N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC50N4 (5) (6) ATV 61HC63N4 (5) (6)
kg 3,000 3,000 3,000 4,000 4,000 5,500 5,500 7,000 16,000 16,000 30,000 37,000 37,000 44,000 44,000 44,000 60,000 68,000 74,000 80,000 110,000 140,000 140,000 215,000 225,000 300,000
DF534524
ATV 61HU40N4Z
DF534564
4.3
ATV 61HC31N4
(1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 2.5 or 4 or 12 kHz, depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) The ATV 61HD90N4HC63N4 drives come in a reinforced version as standard, enabling them to operate in particular environmental conditions (see catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61). To order the reinforced version of of the ATV 61H075N4ATV 61HD75N4 drives, add S337 at the end of the reference: Example : ATV 61H075N4 becomes ATV 61H075N4S337. If a reinforced version of the drive is supplied, it must come with a remote graphic display terminal. The ATV 61HD90N4HC63N4 drives come in the reinforced version as standard. (4) All drives come with a remote graphic display terminal as standard. The ATV 61H075N4ATV 61HD75N4 drives can be ordered without a graphic display terminal. In this case, add a Z at the end of the reference. They will then come equipped with an integrated 7-segment display terminal. Example: ATV 61H075N4 without a graphic display terminal becomes ATV 61H075N4Z. (5) Drive supplied as standard with a DC choke, which must be used when connecting the drive to the 3-phase supply (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 61"). For connections to the DC bus, the drive can be ordered without a DC choke by adding D at the end of the reference. Example: ATV 61HD90N4 becomes ATV 61HD90N4D. (6) Drive supplied without plate for EMC mounting. Depending on the rateing, the plate is included in the UL Type 1 conformity kit and/or in the IP 31 conformity kit, to be ordered separately (see catalog "Variable speed drives: Altivar 61"). Nota : Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61.
4/29
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 61
UL Type 12/IP 54 drives with an integrated class A EMC filter

DF534565
Motor Power indicated on plate (1)
Line supply Line current (2)
Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 380 V kVA
Altivar 61 Max. continuous current (1) 380 V A
Max. transient current for 60 s
Reference (3) (4) (5)
Weight
kW
HP
380 V 480 V A A
kA
460 V A A
kg

0,75 1 1,8 1,5 1,2 5 2,3 2,1 2,5 ATV 61W075N4 13,000 1,5 2 3,5 3 2,3 5 4,1 3,4 4,5 ATV 61WU15N4 13,000 2,2 3 5 4,1 3,3 5 5,1 4,8 5,6 ATV 61WU22N4 13,000 3 6,7 5,6 4,4 5 7,2 6,2 7,9 ATV 61WU30N4 14,000 4 5 8,8 7,4 5,8 5 9,1 7,6 10 ATV 61WU40N4 16,000 5,5 7,5 11,4 9,2 7,5 22 12 11 13,2 ATV 61WU55N4 16,000 7,5 10 15,8 13,3 10,4 22 16 14 17,6 ATV 61WU75N4 22,000 11 15 21,9 17,8 14,4 22 22,5 21 24,7 ATV 61WD11N4 22,000 15 20 30,5 25,8 20 22 30,5 27 33,5 ATV 61WD15N4 28,000 18,5 25 37,5 32,3 24,7 22 37 34 40,7 ATV 61WD18N4 36,000 22 30 43,6 36,6 28,7 22 43,5 40 47,8 ATV 61WD22N4 36,000 30 40 56,7 46,2 37,3 22 58,5 52 64,3 ATV 61WD30N4 51,000 37 50 69,5 56,8 45,7 22 71,5 65 78,6 ATV 61WD37N4 64,000 45 60 85,1 69,6 56 22 85 77 93,5 ATV 61WD45N4 65,000 55 75 104,8 87 69 35 103 96 113,3 ATV 61WD55N4 92,000 75 100 140,3 113,8 92,3 35 137 124 150,7 ATV 61WD75N4 92,000 90 125 171,8 140,9 113 35 163 156 179,3 ATV 61WD90N4 92,000 (1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 4 or 8 kHz, depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) ATV 61WpppN4 drives can be ordered with a c 24 V power supply, thus allowing an additional consumption of 250 mA. In this case, add A24 at the end of the reference. Example: ATV 61W075N4 becomes ATV 61W075N4A24. This ATV 61WpppN4A24 drives also have the reinforced version treatment, enabling them to operate in particular environmental conditions (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 61"). (4) Drives supplied with a European version EMC plate fitted, for IP 54 conformity. (5) To obtain UL Type 12 conformity, add U at the end of the reference. Example: ATV 61W075N4 becomes ATV 61W075N4U. Nota : Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61.
ATV 61W075N4
4.3
4/30
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 61
UL Type 12/IP 54 drives with an integrated class B EMC filter

Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 380 V kVA Altivar 61 Max. continuous current (1) 380 V A Max. transient current for 60 s Reference (3) (4) (5) Weight
kW
HP
380 V 480 V A A
kA
460 V A A
kg

0.75 1 1.8 1.5 1.2 5 2.3 2.1 2.5 ATV 61W075N4C 19.000 1.5 2 3.5 3 2.3 5 4.1 3.4 4.5 ATV 61WU15N4C 19.000 2.2 3 5 4.1 3.3 5 5.1 4.8 5.6 ATV 61WU22N4C 20.000 3 6.7 5.6 4.4 5 7.2 6.2 7.9 ATV 61WU30N4C 20.000 4 5 8.8 7.4 5.8 5 9.1 7.6 10 ATV 61WU40N4C 23.000 5.5 7.5 11.4 9.2 7.5 22 12 11 13.2 ATV 61WU55N4C 23.000 7.5 10 15.8 13.3 10.4 22 16 14 17.6 ATV 61WU75N4C 32.000 11 15 21.9 17.8 14.4 22 22.5 21 24.7 ATV 61WD11N4C 32.000 15 20 30.5 25.8 20 22 30.5 27 33.5 ATV 61WD15N4C 40.000 18.5 25 37.5 32.3 24.7 22 37 34 40.7 ATV 61WD18N4C 51.000 22 30 43.6 36.6 28.7 22 43.5 40 47.8 ATV 61WD22N4C 50.000 30 40 56.7 46.2 37.3 22 58.5 52 64.3 ATV 61WD30N4C 68.000 37 50 69.5 56.8 45.7 22 71.5 65 78.6 ATV 61WD37N4C 85.000 45 60 85.1 69.6 56 22 85 77 93.5 ATV 61WD45N4C 85.000 55 75 104.8 87 69 35 103 96 113.3 ATV 61WD55N4C 119.000 75 100 140.3 113.8 92.3 35 137 124 150.7 ATV 61WD75N4C 119.000 90 125 171.8 140.9 113 35 163 156 179.3 ATV 61WD90N4C 119.000 (1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 4 or 8 kHz, depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) Drives supplied with a European version EMC plate fitted, for IP 54 conformity. (4) To obtain UL Type 12 conformity, add U at the end of the reference. Example: ATV 61W075N4C becomes ATV 61W075N4CU. Nota : Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 61.
DF534566
ATV 61WD30N4C
4.3
4/31
Product data sheet

Altivar 71
533191
Presentation
The Altivar 71 drive is designed to suit all configurations found in communicating industrial installations. It includes Modbus and CANopen communication protocols as standard. The Modbus protocol can be accessed directly by means of 2 integrated communication ports: b One RJ45 Modbus terminal port 1, located on the drive front panel, for connecting: v the remote graphic display terminal v a Magelis industrial HMI terminal v the PowerSuite software workshop b One RJ45 Modbus network port 2, located on the drive control terminals. It is dedicated to control and signalling by a PLC or other type of controller. It can also be used to connect a terminal or the PowerSuite software workshop. The CANopen protocol can be accessed from the Modbus network port via the CANopen adaptor 3. In this case, terminal port 1 must be used to access the Modbus protocol. The Altivar 71 drive can also be connected to other industrial communication buses and networks using one of the communication option cards: b Ethernet TCP/IP b Modbus/Uni-Telway. This card can offer functions in addition to those of the integrated ports: Modbus ASCII and 4-wire RS 485 b Fipio b Modbus Plus b Profibus DP b DeviceNet b INTERBUS. The option of powering the control part separately enables communication to be maintained (monitoring, diagnostics) even if there is no power supply to the power part.
2 3
4.3
Characteristics
Drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Protection kbps C ATV 71 S10 DS 301 V4.02 DSP 402 Node guarding, Heartbeat 9-way male SUB-D connector on CANopen adapter. This connects to the Modbus RJ45 network port. 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs -10...+ 60 (depends on type of model) IP 00, IP 21 and IP 41 on upper part. IP 20 without cover plate on upper part of cover. IP 30 on the front panel and side parts. IP 31 with accessory. The protection depends on the model type and the accessories: refer to catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71. RUN et ERROR on integrated 7-segment display terminal UL, CSA, DNV, NOM 117 C-Tick,GOST and e
Structure
Degree of protection LED indicators
4/32
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 71

Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 240 V kVA kA 1.4 2.4 3.7 5.3 5.3 7 9.5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 Altivar 71 Maximum Max. transient continuous current for current (1) 230 V A 3 4.8 8 11 13.7 17.5 27.5 60 s A 4.5 7.2 12 16.5 20.6 26.3 41.3 2s A 4.9 7.9 13.2 18.1 22.6 28.8 45.3 ATV 71H075M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU15M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU22M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU30M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU40M3 (3) (4) (5) ATV 71HU55M3 (3) (4) (5) ATV 71HU75M3 (3) (4) (5) Reference Weight
kW
PF105779-16-M
HP 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5
200 V 240 V A A 6.9 12 18.2 25.9 25.9 34.9 47.3 5.8 9.9 15.7 22.1 22 29.9 40.1
kg 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 4.000 5.500 5.500
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz

0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
ATV 71HU22M3Z
3-phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz

0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 3.5 6.1 11.3 15 19.3 25.8 35 45 53.3 71.7 77 88 124 141 167 200 271 3.1 5.3 9.6 12.8 16.4 22.9 30.8 39.4 45.8 61.6 69 80 110 127 147 173 232 1.3 2.2 4 5.3 6.8 9.5 12.8 16.4 19 25.6 28.7 33.3 45.7 52.8 61.1 71.9 96.4 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 35 35 3 4.8 8 11 13.7 17.5 27.5 33 54 66 75 88 120 144 176 221 285 4.5 7.2 12 16.5 20.6 26.3 41.3 49.5 81 99 112 132 180 216 264 332 428 4.9 7.9 13.2 18.1 22.6 28.8 45.3 54.5 89.1 109 124 145 198 238 290 365 470 ATV 71H037M3 (3) (4) ATV 71H075M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU15M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU22M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU30M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU40M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU55M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HU75M3 (3) (4) ATV 71HD11M3X (3) (4) (6) ATV 71HD15M3X (3) (4) (6) ATV 71HD18M3X (3) (6) ATV 71HD22M3X (3) (6) ATV 71HD30M3X (3) (6) ATV 71HD37M3X (3) (6) ATV 71HD45M3X (3) (6) ATV 71HD55M3X (6) (7) (8) ATV 71HD75M3X (6) (7) (8) 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 5.500 7.000 9.000 9.000 19.000 19.000 39.000 39.000 39.000 59.000 72.000
PF105775-13-M
ATV 71H037M3
PF105776-17-M
ATV 71HD37M3X
(1) These values are given for a nominal switching frequency of 2.5 or 4 kHz depending on the rating, for use in continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) ATV 71HD55M3X and ATV HD75M3X are supplied as standard in a reinforced version for operation in specific environmental conditions (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). To order ATV 71HpppM3 and ATV 71HD11M3XATV 71HD45M3X drives in a reinforced version for specific environmental conditions, add the following at the end of the reference: S337 for ATV 71HpppM3. For example, ATV 71H037M3 becomes ATV 71H037M3S337, 337 for ATV 71HpppM3X. For example, ATV 71HD11M3X becomes ATV 71HD11M3X337. If a reinforced version of the drive is supplied for particular environmental conditions, it will feature a remote graphic display terminal. (4) All drives come with a remote graphic display terminal as standard. To order an ATV 71HpppM3, ATV 71HD11M3X or ATV 71HD15M3X drive without a graphic display terminal, add a Z at the end of the reference. The drive will then come equipped with an integrated 7-segment display terminal. For example, ATV 71H037M3 becomes ATV 71H037M3Z. (5) A line choke must be used, (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). (6) Drive supplied without EMC filter. EMC filters are available as an option, (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). (7) Drive supplied as standard with a DC choke, which must be used when connecting the drive to the 3-phase supply. For connections to the DC bus, the drive can be ordered without a DC choke by adding a D at the end of the reference. For example, ATV 71HD55M3X becomes ATV 71HD55M3XD. (8) Drive supplied without plate for EMC mounting. A choke appropriate for the drive rating is supplied in a UL Type 1, IP 21 or IP 31 kit, which must be ordered separately: - For ATV 71H037M3HD45M3X, order the kit for IP 21 conformity, (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"), - For ATV 71HD55M3X and HD75M3X, order the kit for UL Type 1 or IP 31 conformity, (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). Nota : Consult the summary tables of possible drives, option and accessory combinations, on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71.
4.3
4/33
Product data sheet

(continued))

Altivar 71

Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 380 V kVA kA 2.4 3.8 5.4 7 9.3 13.4 17.8 24.1 31.6 29.9 32.9 43.4 55.3 68.5 79 109.9 109.3 133 157.3 190.2 235 260.6 292.2 325.1 365.3 419.3 466.6 576.6 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Altivar 71 Maximum continuous current (1) 380 V 460 V A A 2.3 4.1 5.8 7.8 10.5 14.3 17.6 27.7 33 41 48 66 79 94 116 160 179 215 259 314 387 427 481 550 616 671 759 941 2.1 3.4 4.8 6.2 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 179 215 259 314 387 427 481 550 616 671 759 941 Max. transient current for Reference Weight
kW
PF121610-13-M
HP 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700
380 V 480 V A A 3.7 5.8 8.2 10.7 14.1 20.3 27 36.6 48 45.5 50 66 84 104 120 167 166 202 239 289 357 396 444 494 555 637 709 876 3 5.3 7.1 9 11.5 17 22.2 30 39 37.5 42 56 69 85 101 137 134 163 192 233 286 320 357 396 444 512 568 699
60 s A 3.5 6.2 8.7 11.7 15.8 21.5 26.4 41.6 49.5 61.5 72 99 118.5 141 174 240 269 323 388 471 580 640 721 825 924 1006 1138 1411
2s A 3.8 6.8 9.6 12.9 17.3 23.6 29 45.7 54.5 67.7 79.2 109 130 155 191 264 295 355 427 518 638 704 793 907 1016 1107 1252 1552 ATV 71H075N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HU15N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HU22N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HU30N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HU40N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HU55N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HU75N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD11N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD15N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD18N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD22N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD30N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD37N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD45N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD55N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD75N4 (3) (4) ATV 71HD90N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC11N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC13N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC16N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC20N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC25N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC28N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC31N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC40N4 (5) (6) ATV 71HC50N4 (5) (6)
kg 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 4.000 5.500 5.500 7.000 16.000 16.000 19.000 26.000 26.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 60.000 74.000 80.000 110.000 140.000 140.000 140.000 215.000 225.000 300.000

0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 500
ATV 71HU22N4
4
ATV 71HU40N4Z
PF105781-32-M
4.3
PF105773-15-M
ATV 71HC28N4
(1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 2.5 or 4 kHz, depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) ATV 71HD90N4HC50N4 drives are supplied as standard in a reinforced version for operation in specific environmental conditions (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). To order the ATV 71H075N4...HD75N4 drives in a reinforced version, add S337 at the end of the reference. For example, ATV 71H075N4 becomes ATV 71H075N4S337. If a reinforced version of the drive is supplied for specific environmental conditions, it will feature a remote graphic display terminal. (4) All drives come with a remote graphic display terminal. To order an ATV 71H075N4...ATV 71HD75N4 drive without a graphic display terminal, add a Z at the end of the reference. The drive will then come equipped with an integrated 7-segment display terminal. For example, ATV 71H075N4 without a graphic display terminal becomes ATV 71H075N4Z. (5) Drive supplied as standard with a DC choke, which must be used when connecting the drive to the 3-phase supply. For connections to the DC bus, the drive can be ordered without a DC choke by adding a D at the end of the reference. For example, ATV 71HD90N4 becomes ATV 71HD90N4D. (6) Drive supplied without plate for EMC mounting. A choke appropriate for the drive rating is supplied in a UL Type 1, IP 21 or IP 31 kit, which must be ordered separately: - For ATV 71H075N4HD75N4, order the kit for IP 21 conformity, (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). - For ATV 71HD90N4HC50N4, order the kit for UL Type 1 or IP 31 conformity, (see catalog "Variable speed drives : Altivar 71"). Note: Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71.
4/34
Product data sheet

(continued)

Altivar 71
UL Type 12/IP 54 drives with an integrated class A EMC filter

Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 380 V kVA kA Altivar 71 Maximum continuous current (1) Max. transient Reference (3) current for Weight
kW
PF105774-17-M
HP
380 V 480 V A A
380 V 460 V 60 s A A
2s kg

0.75 1 3.7 3 2.4 5 2.3 2.1 3.5 3.8 ATV 71W075N4 12.000 1.5 2 5.8 5.3 3.8 5 4.1 3.4 6.2 6.8 ATV 71WU15N4 12.000 2.2 3 8.2 7.1 5.4 5 5.8 4.8 8.7 9.6 ATV 71WU22N4 12.000 3 10.7 9 7 5 7.8 6.2 11.7 12.9 ATV 71WU30N4 13.000 4 5 14.1 11.5 9.3 5 10.5 7.6 15.8 17.3 ATV 71WU40N4 13.000 5.5 7.5 20.3 17 13.4 22 14.3 11 21.5 23.6 ATV 71WU55N4 16.000 7.5 10 27 22.2 17.8 22 17.6 14 26.4 29 ATV 71WU75N4 16.000 11 15 36.6 30 24.1 22 27.7 21 41.6 45.7 ATV 71WD11N4 21.000 15 20 48 39 31.6 22 33 27 49.5 54.5 ATV 71WD15N4 31.000 18.5 25 45.5 37.5 29.9 22 41 34 61.5 67.7 ATV 71WD18N4 31.000 22 30 50 42 32.9 22 48 40 72 79.2 ATV 71WD22N4 30.500 30 40 66 56 43.4 22 66 52 99 109 ATV 71WD30N4 38.500 37 50 84 69 55.3 22 79 65 118.5 130 ATV 71WD37N4 38.500 45 60 104 85 68.5 22 94 77 141 155 ATV 71WD45N4 61.500 55 75 120 101 79 22 116 96 174 191 ATV 71WD55N4 61.500 75 100 167 137 109.9 22 160 124 240 264 ATV 71WD75N4 61.500 (1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 2,5 or 4 kHz , depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) All drives are supplied with a plate for EMC mounting. Note: Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71.
ATV 71W075N4
UL Type 1/IP 20 drives on base plate with an integrated class A EMC filter
Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Apparent Maximum power prospective line Isc 380 V kVA 2.4 kA 5 Altivar 71 Maximum Max. transient continuous current for current (1) 380 V A 2.3 460 V 60 s A 2.1 A 3.5 2s A 3.8 ATV 71P075N4Z kg 2.700 Reference (3) (4) (5) Weight
4.3
380 V 480 V kW
PF105783-13-M
HP 1
A 3.7
A 3

0.75
ATV 71PU40N4Z
1.5 2 5.8 5.3 3.8 5 4.1 3.4 6.2 6.8 ATV 71PU15N4Z 2.700 2.2 3 8.2 7.1 5.4 5 5.8 4.8 8.7 9.6 ATV 71PU22N4Z 2.700 3 10.7 9 7 5 7.8 6.2 11.7 12.9 ATV 71PU30N4Z 3.600 4 5 14.1 11.5 9.3 5 10.5 7.6 15.8 17.3 ATV 71PU40N4Z 3.600 5.5 7.5 20.3 17 13.4 22 14.3 11 21.5 23.6 ATV 71PU55N4Z 5.000 7.5 10 27 22.2 17.8 22 17.6 14 26.4 29 ATV 71PU75N4Z 5.000 (1) These values are for a nominal switching frequency of 4 kHz , depending on the rating, for continuous operation. (2) Typical value for the indicated motor power and for the maximum prospective line Isc. (3) All ATV 71PpppN4Z drives are equipped with an integrated 7-segment display terminal. (4) A DC choke must be used, (see catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71). (5) All drives are supplied with a plate for EMC mounting and a thermal liner for mounting on the machine frame (see catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71). Note: Please refer to the compatibility tables summarizing the possible combinations for drives, options and accessories on catalog Variable speed drives: Altivar 71.
4/35
Product data sheet

Motor control software
PowerSuite
534513_1
Presentation
The PowerSuite software workshop is a user-friendly tool designed for setting up control devices for the following Telemecanique brand motors: b TeSys model U controller-starters b Altistart soft start/soft stop units b Altivar variable speed drives b Lexium 05 servo drives. It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as: b Preparing configurations b Start-up b Maintenance In order to simplify the start-up and maintenance phases, the PowerSuite software workshop can use the Bluetooth wireless link.
Equipment management
Functions
Preparing configurations The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device configuration. It can be saved, printed and exported to office automation software The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert: b An Altivar 28 drive configuration to an Altivar 31 drive configuration b An Altivar 58 or Altivar 58F drive configuration to an Altivar 71 drive configuration. Setup When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Transfer the generated configuration b Adjust b Monitor, this option has been enhanced with new functions such as: v the oscilloscope v the high speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms) v the FFT oscilloscope (Fast Fourier Transform) v display of communication parameters b Control b Save the final configuration.. Maintenance In order to simplify maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Compare the configuration of a device currently being used with a saved configuration b Manage the users installed base of equipment, in particular: v organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery, workshops, etc) v store maintenance messages v simplify Ethernet connection by storing the IP address.
572708
View of Simply Start menu
4.3
572706
Connections
Modbus communication bus
View of FTT oscilloscope function
The PowerSuite software workshop for PC can be connected directly to the device terminal port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC. Two types of connection are possible: b With a single device (point-to-point connection) via VW3 A8 106 connexion kit for PC serial port b With a number of devices (multidrop connection) via XGS Z24, RS 232/RS 485 interface. Ethernet TCP/IP communication network The PowerSuite software workshop for PC can be connected to an Ethernet network. In this case, the devices can be accessed: b Using a VW3 A3 310 communication card for the Altivar 71 drive b Using a TSX ETG 100 Ethernet/Modbus gateway. Bluetooth wireless link The PowerSuite software workshop for PC can communicate via a Bluetooth radio link with a device equipped with a Bluetooth /Modbus VW3 A8 114 adaptor. The adaptor plugs into the device terminal port or Modbus network port, and has a range of 10 m (class 2). If the PC does not have Bluetooth technology, use the VW3 A8 115 USB/Bluetooth adaptor.
572707
Monitoring control panel (baragraph)
4/36
Product data sheet

(continued)

Motor control software
PowerSuite
References
Description
533187
Composition
Reference
PowerSuite CD-ROM
VW3 A8 104 - 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish - Technical documentation of variables speed drives, starters and servo drives - 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian and VW3 A8 105 Spanish - Technical documentation of variables speed drives, starters and servo drives - 1 x 3 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 106 - 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with one 9-way female SUB-D connector and one RJ45 connector - 1 converter with 4-way male connector and one RJ45 connector for connecting ATV 11 drives - 1 RJ45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 38/58/58F drives - 1 RJ45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 68 drives - 1 converter for the ATV 11 drive, with one 4-way male connector and one RJ45 connector 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw terminals. XGS Z24 Requires a 24 V c (20...30 V), 20 mA power supply (2).
Weight kg 0.100
PowerSuite update CD-ROM (1) VW3 A8 104 Connection kit for PC serial port for Modbus point-to-point connection
0.100
0.350
RS 232/RS 485 interface for Modbus multipoint connection Modbus/Bluetooth adaptor (3)
533188
0.105
4
- 1 Bluetooth adaptor (10 m range, class 2) VW3 A8 114 with 1 RJ45 connector - 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors for PowerSuite - 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and 1 mini-DIN connector, for TwidoSoft - 1 RJ45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 38/58/58F drives This adaptor is required for a PC which is not equipped with Bluetooth technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC. Range of 10 m (class 2). VW3 A8 115 0.155
VW3 A8 114 USB-Bluetooth adaptor for PC
0.290
4.3
Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop for PC with the following devices (4)
Connection Controller- Soft starter start/soft stop unit TeSys ATS 48 modle U V1.30 V1.50 V2.2 Variable speed drives Servo drives ATV 61 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 ATV 71 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 Lexium 05 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2
ATV 11 V1.40
ATV 31 V2.0 V2.0 V2.2
Modbus Ethernet (device equipped with an Ethernet TCP/IP card) Ethernet via Modbus/Ethernet bridge Bluetooth Compatible devices and/or software versions Incompatible devices and/or software versions
V2.2
Hardware and software environments

The PowerSuite software workshop for PC can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: b Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 Mb available, 128 Mb RAM b SVGA or higher definition monitor.
(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-ROM, VW3 A8 104. (2) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop. (3) Please consult our specialist Interfaces, I/O splitter box and power supply catalogue. (4) Software version refer to the current version of commercialized drive.
4/37
Product data sheet

Servo drive for AC servo motors
Lexium 05
Presentation
The range of Lexium 05 servo drives that are compatible with BSH servo motors constitutes a compact and dynamic combination for machines across a wide power and power supply voltage range: b Lexium 05 servo drive: v 100120 V single phase, from 0.4 to 1.4 kW v 200240 V single phase, from 0.75 to 2.5 kW v 200240 V 3-phase, from 0.75 to 3.2 kW v 380480 V 3-phase, from 1.4 to 6 kW b BSH servo motor: v Nominal torque: from 0.5 to 36 Nm v Nominal speed: from 1500 to 8000 min-1 The Lexium 05 range is enhanced by GBX planetary reducers. Easy to mount, lubricated for life and available in 12 reduction ratios: 3:1 to 40:1. Economical, GBX reducers are designed for applications which do not require a very limited play. A complete equipment Lexium 05 integrates functions and components usually found externally, which are used to keep its compact design, making it easier to integrate the drive into control enclosures or machines.
Lexium 05 servo drive
BSH servo motor
The Lexium 05 servo drive is incorporated in the safety system of installations. It integrates the Power Removal safety function which prevents accidental starting of the motor. This function is compliant with machine standard EN 954-1 category 3, standard IEC/EN 61508 SIL2 for electrical installations and draft standard IEC/EN 61800-5-2 for power drives. Lexium 05 can control BSH motors in accordance with a large number of control modes: b Point-to-point positioning: v relative movement, v absolute movement. b Electronic gear control. b Speed control with position control. b Direct speed control. b Manual operation for easy setup. Control and interfaces Lexium 05 has three control interfaces as standard: b Interface for CANopen, Modbus, or Profibus DP communication network. b Two 10 V analog reference inputs to give the speed or current reference, and limit the speed or current. b One RS 422 (A/B) incremental encoder or pulses/direction input. This input can also be configured as an output to emulate an encoder (ESIM). b These interfaces are supplemented by logic inputs and outputs which can be used as source (positive logic) or sink (negative logic) in order to adapt to outputs of controllers that are available on the market. The PowerSuite software workshop is used to configure, set and debug the Lexium 05 axis in the same way as for all other Telemecanique variable speed drives and starters. It can be used with a direct connection or a Bluetooth wireless connection.
4.3
4/38
Product data sheet

(continued)

Lexium 05
Description
1 2 The Lexium 05 servo drive front side: 1 A hinged door for access to connections (spring terminals, screw terminals and Molex connectors) 1 An integrated 7-segment display terminal which is used to set the drive parameters, display errors and monitor the system. It is also used to control the drive in manual operation.
Characteristics
Lexium 05 servo drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Relative humidity Degree of protection DEL indicators Product certification LXM05 AD S20 DS 301 V4.02 DS 401 V2.1 RJ45 connector or screw terminal 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs - 10...+ 55 5 85% non condensing IP 20 Yes International standards EN 50178, CEI/EN 61800-3, homologations UL, cUL and e
kbps C
References (with CANopen bus integrated)

Output current Continuous (RMS) at 4 kHz at 8 kHz A A 4 8 15 3.2 7 13 Transient at 4 kHz at 8 kHz A A 10 17 28 8.5 15.5 28 Nominal power at 4 kHz kW 0.4 0.65 1.4 Line current at U1 A 7.6 11.5 15.7 at U2 A 7 10.5 14.4 Max. Reference prospective line Isc kA 1 1 1 LXM 05AD10F1 LXM 05AD17F1 LXM 05AD28F1 Weight
LXM 05AD10F1 LXM 05AD10M2 LXM 05AD10M3X
kg 1.100 1.400 2.000
Single phase supply voltage: a 110120 V (1) 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filter
4.3
Single phase supply voltage: a 200240 V (1) 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filter
LXM 05AD17F1 LXM 05AD17M2 LXM 05AD17M3X LXM 05AD14N4 4 8 15 3.2 7 13 10 17 28 8.5 15.5 28 0.75 1.2 2.5 8.1 12.7 23 6.7 10.5 19.2 1 1 1 LXM 05AD10M2 LXM 05AD17M2 LXM 05AD28M2 1.100 1.400 2.000
3-phase supply voltage: a 200240 V (1) 50/60 Hz, without integrated EMC filter
4 8 17 3.2 7 15 10 17 42 8.5 15.5 42 0.75 1.4 3.2 5.2 9 19 4.3 7.5 15.8 5 5 5 LXM 05AD10M3X LXM 05AD17M3X LXM 05AD42M3X 1.100 1.300 1.900
LXM 05AD28F1 LXM 05AD28M2 LXM 05AD42M3X LXM 05AD22N4 LXM 05AD34N4
3-phase supply voltage: a 380480 V (1) 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filter
6 9 15 25 5 7 11 20 14 22 34 57 10.6 19.8 25.5 42 1.4 2 3 6 4.2 6.3 9.7 17.7 3.3 5 7.7 14 5 5 5 22 LXM 05AD14N4 LXM 05AD22N4 LXM 05AD34N4 LXM 05AD57N4 1.400 2.000 2.000 6.500
(1) Nominal power supply voltage, min. U1, max. U2 (110120 V, 200240 V, 380480 V).
LXM 05AD57N4
4/39
Product data sheet

Lexium 15 Motion control
Presentation
The compact dimensions of the Lexium 15 servo drive combined with the wide range of power ratings and power supplies available make it the ideal solution to meet the application requirements of all kinds of machinery. This range is designed to control the torque, speed and/or position of BSH and BDH servo motors. These motor-drive units are designed for high-performance applications requiring highly precise and dynamic position monitoring algorithms. An offer tailored to your needs The Lexium 15 range of servo drives combined with BSH and BDH servo motors constitutes an offer that is perfectly tailored to the requirements of your applications. This offer covers a wide range of supply voltages and power ratings. In order to keep costs down and ensure ease of adaptation to different applications, the Lexium 15 range of servo drives comprises 3 models: b Lexium 15 LP servo drives: v 200240 V single phase, 0.9 kW to 1.2 kW (LXM 15LDppM3) v 200240 V 3-phase, 1 kW to 3.4 kW (LXM 15LDppM3) v 208480 V 3-phase, 1.1 kW to 4.3 kW (LXM 15LpppN4) b Lexium 15 MP servo drives: v 208480 V 3-phase, 5.7 kW to 11.4 kW (LXM 15MDppN4) b Lexium 15 HP servo drives: v 208480 V 3-phase, 22.3 kW to 42.5 kW (LXM 15HCppN4X) Lexium servo motors: b BSH servo motors: v Nominal torque: from 0.5 Nm to 90 Nm v Nominal speed: from 1500 to 8000 rpm b BDH servo motors: v Nominal torque: from 0.18 Nm to 53 Nm v Nominal speed: from 1000 to 8000 rpm The Lexium 15 motion control offer also includes GBX planetary gearboxes. Easy to mount and lubricated for life, these gearboxes are available in 12 reduction ratios, ranging from 3:1 to 40:1. GBX gearboxes are economical and are designed for high inertia applications. Lexium 15 servo drives comply with EN 50178, IEC/EN 61439-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 and IEC/EN 61800-3 international standards, and carry UL (USA) and cUL (Canada) approvals, and e marking.
Lexium 15 LP, 15 MP and 15 HP servo drives
BSH 0701 servo motor
BSH 1401 servo motor
4.3
BDH 0701 servo motor
BDH 1081 servo motor
Characteristics
Lexium 15 servo drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Relative humidity module Degree of protection Power supply AC servo motor outputs LED indicators Product certification LXM 15pppppp S10 DS 301 V3.x, DR 303-2 DS 401 V2.x Homing mode 9-way SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 333, 500, 666, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs 0.... 45, 45.. .55 with derating, consult our Lexium 15 motion control catalog 85 % non condensing IP 21 200...480 Va 3-phase Continuous/maximum current: 1.5 A/4,5 A to 70 A/140 A depending on the model State display 3 digits EN 50178, EN 60139-1, EN 60204, UL 508C, UL 840, CSA 22-2 Machine safety NF EN 292-1, EN954-1
kbps C
4/40
Product data sheet

(continued)

Lexium 15 Motion control
105808
Lexium 15 LP servo drives

Output currents (1) Permanent Transient (RMS) (RMS for 2 s) A A 3 LXM 15LD13M3 4 4 9 9 9 Transient (peak current) A 13 13 13 Nominal power (1) kW 0.9 1.2 1.2 Line currents at U1 (2) at U2 (2) Apparent power Reference Weight
A 7.7 10.1 10.4
A 7.6 9.9 10.1
kVA 1.1 2.4 4 LXM 15LD13M3 LXM 15LD21M3 LXM 15LD28M3
kg 2.600 2.600 2.600
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 Va (2) 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filter
105810
Three phase supply voltage: 200240 Va (2) 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filter
3 6 10 9 15 20 13 21 28 1 2.1 3.4 4.7 8.8 14 4.6 8.6 13.7 1.1 2.4 4 LXM 15LD13M3 LXM 15LD21M3 LXM 15LD28M3 2.600 2.600 2.600
1.5 LXM 15MD28N4 3 6 4.5 7.5 12 6 10 17 1.1 2.1 4.3 2.8 3.9 6.9 2.5 4.5 8.2 1.2 2.5 5 LXM 15LU60N4 LXM 15LD10N4 LXM 15LD17N4 2.700 2.700 2.700
Lexium 15 MP servo drives

105812
Output currents (1) Permanent Transient (RMS) (RMS for 2 s) A A 10 14 20 20 28 40
Transient (peak current) A 28 40 56
Nominal power (1) kW 5.7 7.9 11.4
Line currents at U1 (2) at U2 (2)
Apparent power
Reference
Weight
A 9.7 15.4 19.9
A 12.6 17.7 24.5
kVA 7 10 14 LXM 15MD28N4 LXM 15MD40N4 LXM 15MD56N4
kg 4.000 5.000 7.500
4.3
LXM 15MD56N4
105813
Lexium 15 HP servo drives

Output currents (1) Permanent Transient (RMS) (RMS for 2 s) A A 40 70 80 140 Transient (peak current) A 112 198 Nominal power (1) kW 22.3 42.5 Line currents (3) at U1 (2) at U2 (2) Apparent power Reference Weight
A 35 60.6
A 36.6 60.9
kVA 30 50 LXM 15HC11N4X LXM 15HC20N4X
kg 19.500 21.000
Three phase supply voltage: 208480 Va (2) 50/60 Hz, without integrated EMC filter (4) (5)
LXM 15HC20N4X
Accessories
Description CANopen bus adapter Fonctions Material interface for CANopen standard conformance (6). + connector for terminal PC or monitorig tool Reference Weight kg AM0 2CA 001V000 0,110
(1) These values are given for a nominal switching frequency of 8 kHz. (2) Nominal supply voltage, min. U1, max. U2: 200 (U1)240 V (U2) or 208 (U1)480 V (U2). (3) The line currents are given for a connection with line choke. For a connection without line choke. (4) EMC filters available as an option. (5) When the line supply has a TT or TN load system, a line choke MUST be used. (6) Line termination include.
AM0 2CA 001V000
4/41
Product data sheet

Lexium 17D
Presentation
The Lexium 17D servo drives are designed for the control of the torque, speed and/or position of the SER/BPH AC servo motors. These servo drive units are designed for high performance applications, which require strong dynamics and high precision positioning. The Lexium 17D servo drives have an integral position indexer, which can be used in cases where the simple applications do not require positioning modules. In this case, the numerous possibilities for connectivity (RS 232 serial link, CANopen bus, Fipio bus, Profibus DP bus, Modbus Plus network,) respond to the different automation structures.
Lexium 17D
Lexium 17D HP
Description
7 6
3 4 2 5
4.3
Lexium 17D servo drives are in RAL gray metal casings (degree of protection IP 20). 1 A 18-way male connector (1) (addr. X3) to connect: v two configurable analog setpoint inputs + 10 V, v two configurable analog outputs + 10 V v four configurable discrete inputs/two configurable discrete outputs c 24 V, v one servo drive validation input c 24 V, v one alarm relay contact. 2 A 4-way male connector (1) (addr. X4) terminal block for connection to the external c 24 V power supply. This connector distributes the power supply c 24 V to other Lexium servo drives. 3 A 3-digit display, which indicates the operating status of the servo drive, as well as error code messages. 4 Two control keys, which provide access to the various operating modes for the display. 5 A 4-way male connector (2) (addr. X10) for use with the anti-start function (AS function) Only available on MHDA 1pppA00 servo drives. 6 A 9-way SUB-D male connector (addr. X6) for connection to the CANopen field bus. (RS 232 integral serial link) This connector is also used to connect the PC compatible terminal, which supports the Unilink configuration software. 7 Slot for one of the following option cards: v SERCOS digital link control card, v Fipio bus, Modbus Plus network, or Profibus DP bus connection card, v CANopen bus adapter which allows link 6 to be conform with CANopen standards, v Discrete I/O card for Lexium servo drive control with integral position indexer function.
Characteristics
Lexium 17D servo drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Relative humidity module Degree of protection Power supply AC servo motor outputs LED indicators Product certification MHDA 1pppp00 S10 DS 301 V3.x, DR 303-2 DS 401 V2.x Homing mode 9-way SUB-D 10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 333, 500, 666, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs 0.... 45, 45.. .55 with derating, consult our Lexium 17D motion control catalog 85 % non condensing IP 21 208...480 Va 3-phase Continuous/maximum current: 1.5 A/3 A to 70 A/140 A depending on the model State display 3 digits EN 50178, EN 60139-1, EN 60204, UL 508C, UL 840, CSA 22-2 Machine safety NF EN 292-1, EN954-1
kbps C
4/42
Product data sheet

(continued)

Lexium 17D
References
Specific functions Output current Permanent Reference Discontinuous (5 s) Weight kg
Lexium 17D servo drives No anti-start safety function

Integral braking resistors, integral EMC filter 1.5 A rms 3 A rms 6 A rms 10 A rms 20 A rms 3 A rms 6 A rms 10 A rms 20 A rms 40 A rms MHDA 1004N00 MHDA 1008N00 MHDA 1017N00 MHDA 1028N00 MHDA 1056N00 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 7.500
Integral anti-start safety function

MHDA 10 ppN00A00 MHDA 10ppA00 Integral braking resistors, integral EMC filter 1.5 A rms 3 A rms 6 A rms 10 A rms 20 A rms 3 A rms 6 A rms 10 A rms 20 A rms 40 A rms MHDA 1004A00 MHDA 1008A00 MHDA 1017A00 MHDA 1028A00 MHDA 1056A00 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 7.500
Lexium 17D HP servo drives Integral anti-start safety function

No integral braking 40 A rms resistors, no integral EMC filter, obligatory input choke (1) (to be ordered 70 A rms separately) MHDA 1056N00/A00 80 A rms MHDA 1112A00 19.500
140 A rms
MHDA 1198A00
21.000
4.3
Accessories
Description CANopen bus adapter Fonctions Material interface for CANopen standard conformance (2). + connector for terminal PC or monitorig tool Weight kg AM0 2CA 001V000 0,110 Reference
(1) Input choke is obligatory when the servo drive is not powered by an isolation transformer. (2) Line termination include.
AM0 2CA 001V000
4/43
Product data sheet

Twin Line
Presentation
Twin Line TLC 43/53/63 servo drives integrate, in addition to power electronics for AC servo motors, a position system with 3 options, offering different levels of intelligent functions. The higher-level automation system accesses: b Drive parameters b The internal status b The indexer function via a discrete interface, serial link or field bus. The architectures supported by this type of servo drive: b Discharge the automation system from having to perform position and control functions for AC servo motors b Allow automation systems to be easily extended (flexible architectures). b Facilitate maintenance operations, by downloading of initial parameters from the automation device b Simplify wiring of installations. Twin Line TLC 43/53/63 servo drives are fitted with 2 fast capture inputs and 1 fast output, for the electronic cam function (2 x 64 switching points max.). A device for limiting vibrations during positioning protects its mechanical parts and prolongs the life of the machine. The principal characteristics of Twin Line TLC 43/53/63 servo drives are: b Power range: from 750 W to 8 kW b The servo drive is powered directly from the mains supply, without a transformer (TT and TN grounding systems only) b Built-in EMC power supply input filter, radiator and fan b Built-in brake power dissipation function b All electrical connections can be accessed via the front panel b Small and compact size b IP 20 or IP 54 degree of protection depending on the model.
TLC 432/532/632 (IP 20)
TLC 438/538/638 (IP 20)
4.3
TLC 434/534/634 (IP 54)
Caractristiques
Twin Line servo drive CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen Operating temperature communication Relative humidity Degree of protection DEL indicators Product certification TLC p3p pFp ppppp S00 DS 301 V4.02, DS 303-2 DS 402 V 9-way SUB-D 1 Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...+ 55 for IP 20, 0...+ 45 for IP 54 15 85% non condensing IP 20 or IP 54, depends on the model Yes UL 508C, EN 50178
Mbps C
4/44
Product data sheet

(continued)

Twin Line
References
Servo drive supply Degree of Power protection Power supply Reference (1) EMC input filter Integrated TLC 432 2F2 1p24p Weight kg
TLC 43
a 230 V single phase IP 20 50/60 Hz a 230480 V 3-phase IP 20 50/60 Hz 0.750 kW 2.700
1.5 kW 3 kW 8 kW
Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated
TLC 434 2F3 1p24p TLC 436 2F3 1p24p TLC 438 2F3 1p24p TLC 432 5F2 1p24p
3.700 6.600 10.800 8.500
a 230 V single phase IP 54 50/60 Hz a 230480 V 3-phase IP 54 50/60 Hz
0.750 kW
1.5 kW
Integrated
TLC 434 5F3 1p24p
11.000
Servo drive supply
Degree of Power protection
Power supply Reference (2) EMC input filter Integrated TLC 532 2F2 pp24p
Weight kg
TLC 53
1.5 kW 3 kW 8 kW
TLC 534 2F3 pp24p TLC 536 2F3 pp24p TLC 538 2F3 pp24p TLC 532 5F2 pp24p
3.700 6.600 10.800 8.500
0.750 kW
1.5 kW
Integrated
TLC 534 5F3 pp24p
11.000
4.3
Servo drive supply Degree of Power protection Power supply Reference (3) EMC input filter Integrated TLC 632 2F2 pp24p Weight kg
TLC 63
1.5 kW 3 kW 8 kW
TLC 634 2F3pp24p TLC 637 2F3 pp24p TLC 638 2F3 pp24p TLC 632 5F2 pp24p
3.700 6.600 10.800 8.500
0.750 kW
1.5 kW
Integrated
TLC 634 5F3 pp24p
11,000
(1) Fill out each reference by: p Position feedback 2: SinCos Hiperface, 3: resolver p Holding brake controller 1: without, 2: with. (2) Fill out each reference by: p Position setpoint 1: without module, 2: RS 422-C module, 3: PULSE-C module p Position feedback 2: SinCos Hiperface, 3: resolver p Holding brake controller 1: without, 2: with. (3) Fill out each reference by: p Position setpoint 1: without module, 2: RS 422-C module, 3: PULSE-C module p Position feedback 2: HIFA-C module, 3: resolver p Holding brake controller 1: without, 2: with.
4/45
Product data sheet

Encoders
Osicoder 58 mm
Presentation
Absolute rotary encoders identify every point in a movement through a unique digital signal. Due to their ability to assign an exact, unique position value to every linear and angular position, absolute rotary encoders have become one of the most important links between the mechanical system and the control system. The basic principle of an absolute rotary encoder is the optical sampling of a transparent code disc which is fixed with the driving shaft. The absolute rotary 58 mm encoder has a maximum resolution of 8192 points per revolution. This encoder can detect up to 4096 revolutions. Therefore the largest resulting resolution is 33.554.332 points (25 bits).. The integrated CAN-Bus interface of the absolute rotary encoder supports all the CANopen functions. The following modes can be programmed and enabled or disabled: b Polled Mode b Cyclic Mode b Sync Mode. The protocol supports the programming of the following additional functions: b Code sequence (Complement) b Resolution per revolution b Total revolutions b Preset value, two limit switches b Bit rate and Node number. The connection cap ensures a simple assembly and addressing. It fulfils the function of a T-coupler and proposes M12 connectors for incoming and outgoing bus signals. The rotary encoder can be powered through CAN bus or by using the dedicated PG9 connection comfortably connectable with screw terminals. The device address is adjusted with rotary switches. Additionally the connection cap offers direct diagnosis: Operating mode, bus errors or incorrect wiring are shown by 2 LEDs on the rear side of the cap and provide a fast and simple error recognition.
4.3
1 2 3 4
Description
The Osicoder absolute rotary 58 mm encoders comprise: 1 2 LED 2 One M12 male connector (bus IN) and one M12 female connector (bus IN) for connection of the CANopen bus 3 One PG9 connection for to power cord 4 One M12 female connector (bus IN) and one M12 female connector (bus OUT) for connection of the CANopen bus 5 Shaft of the encoder (full or blind, depending on the model).
5
XCC 3510PS84CB
1 2 3 4
5
XCC 3515CS84CB
4/46
Product data sheet

(continued)
CANopen in Machines and installations

Encoders
Osicoder 58 mm
Characteristics
Rotary encoders CANopen features Conformance class Standard Profile Specials Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Degree of protection LED indicators Product certification XCC 351pp S84CB S10 DS 301 V4.02, DSP 303-2, ISO 11898, DR 303-3 V1.2.0 DS 406 Classe C2 Power supply could be delivered by the bus M12 coding A 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs - 40...+ 85 IP 64 Run, Power, Error, CAN Error, CAN Run CiA, e
Structure
kbps C
References
Description Encoder with 10 mm full shaft Shaft diameter Radial, 2 M12 coding A connectors 1 PG9 Radial, 2 M12 coding A connectors 1 PG9 Power supply Reference c 24 V (11...30 V) XCC 3510PS84CB Weight kg 0,560
4
XCC 3515CS84CB 0,570
XCC-3510PS84CB
Encoder with 15 mm blind shaft (1)
c 24 V (11...30 V)
Description
Reducing
Reference XCC R358RDL06 XCC R358RDL08 XCC R358RDL10 XCC R358RDL12 XCC R358RDL14 Reference
XCC-3515CS84CB
Reducing bushing for 15 to 6 encoder with blind shaft 15 to 8 XCC 3515CS84CB 15 to 10 15 to 12 15 to 14 Description M12 connectors 5 screw terminals for TSX CAN CA/CB CANopen cable Other accessories Type
Weight kg 0,040 0,030 0,025 0,020 0,010
4.3
Weight kg Female Straight XZ CC12FDM50B 0,020 Angled XZ CC12FCM50B 0,020 Male Straight XZ CC12MDM50B 0,025 Angled XZ CC12MCM50B 0,025 CANopen preassembled cordsets with 2 elbowed M12 5-way : FTX CN 23pp.
(1) With anti-rotation device.
4/47
Wiring system

Infrastructure
Presentation
The Schneider Electric CANopen cable offer provides all necessary cable to wire IP 20 and IP67 devices. b Tap link
Premium + TSX CPP 110
6a
5 6a 6b 6a 7+2 6a
5 10 10
14
ATV 31, ATV71 or Lexium 05
Advantys STB
Lexium 17D or Lexium 15
Advantys ATV 31 OTB or c 24 V Lexium 05 Advantys FTM
ATV 71
Note: For key 1, 2, ..., 10, see pages 4/52 and 4/53.
This flexible solution is easy to install, requiring the use of junction boxes, a cable reel (trunk cable) and cordsets (equipped with SUB-D connectors) for the tap links. Once the taps have been installed (on a DIN rail or plate) and interconnected by means of the trunk cable (connection on screw terminals), the cordsets simply have to be connected between the taps and the various devices. b Daisy chain This low-cost solution requires the use of a cable reel and SUD-D connectors. SUB-D connectors should be fitted at the end of cables (connection on screw terminals) which have been cut to length. These three types of connector allows the simultaneous connection of 2 CANopen cables.
4.4
b Mixte This solution combines both the previous types while still taking account of the CANopen wiring rules.
Description
Different types of cable are offered, making it possible to create any type of application, including those for harsh environments (1). Various connectors are available to meet any requirement: straight or 90 elbowed connectors, with or without the option of connecting a PC or diagnostic pocket PC. Power can be supplied to the equipment by means of cables, cordsets and taps: one AWG24 pair for the CAN signals and one AWG22 pair for the power supply and the ground.
Note: It is not possible, however, to supply the bus with power from the taps
Taps or SUB-D connectors are equipped with a switch for switching the line terminators on or off (required at the end of the CANopen segments).
(1) Normal environment: - without special environmental restrictions, - operating temperature between + 5 C and + 60 C, - fixed installations. Harsh environment: - resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder chips, - up to 100% humidity, - saline environment, - extreme variations in temperature, - operating temperature between - 10 C and + 70 C, - mobile installations.
4/48
Wiring system

Infrastructure
Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation example

The Compact Evolutive Optimized implementation is dedicated to compact machines and installations, and provides an easy evolution and adaptation of the machine or installation. It has in its main focus in the industry sector.
HMI
Twido TWD NCO1M
10
10
10
10
ATV 31/Lexium 05
Compact Evolutive Performance implementation example

Compact Evolutive Performance is dedicated to compact and complex installations requiring performance and robustness, but also flexibility and modularity to ease adaptations for variant machines. It combines a Modicon M340 programmable controller, with Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives, Lexium 05/15 servo drives on CANopen and a Magelis XBT GT display unit with an Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP communication.
HMI
Modicon M340
4.4
4 9 1
5 10 10 6b 6a 6b
14
ATV 71
ATV 71
ATV 31
Lexium 15
Lexium 05
For key 3, 4, ..., 15, see pages 4/52 and 4/53.
4/49

Infrastructure
Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation example

The Compact Evolutive High Performance implementation is dedicated to compact machines and installations, and provides an easy evolution and adaptation of the machine or installation. It has in its main focus in the industry sector and may also fit other applications.
HMI
Premium +TSX CPP 110
4 9 5
10
10 3
15
14
ATV 31/Lexium 05
Lexium 17D
Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation example

The Distributed CANopen Optimized implementation is dedicated to modular machines and installations, and provides a quick connection of products with pre-manufactured cables. It focuses on the industry and the building sector and may also fit other applications.
HMI
4.4
PC or monitoring tool Twido TWD NCO1M
12
12
12
13
2 17 16 16 16
10
10
10
10
Advantys FTB 1CNpppp Advantys OTB 1C0 DM9LP c 24 V
ATV 31/Lexium 05
4/50

Infrastructure
Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation example

The Distributed CANopen High Performance implementation is dedicated to distributed machines and installations. It is based on modules or cabinets connected to CANopen and therefore distributed over the machine or installation. It has two focuses, the industry and the building sector and may also fit other applications.
Premium +TSX CPP 110 HMI Advantys STB
Advantys FTB
13
4
PC or monitoring tool
16
16
9
Advantys FTM c 24 V
16
10
11
17
18
IcLA ATV 31/Lexium 05
16
Advantys FTM
4.4
ATV71 Controller Inside implementation example
This implementation combines in a compact architecture with Controler inside the Altivar 71, the Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives, Lexium 05 connected with CANopen and the Magelis XBT GT connected with Modbus to the CI.
ATV 71
HMI
5+3 10 10
5 10 10
5 10 6b
5+2
Advantys STB
Lexium 05 ATV 71
Lexium 05
ATV 31
ATV 31 Advantys STB
4/51

Infrastructure
References
Standard TAP and connectors

No. (1) CANopen TAP 4 SUB-D 9-way ports. Allows the connection of 4 1 drops on the trunk cable, includes a switch to set the bus termination IP 20 connectors Bended at 90 2 CANopen SUB-D 9-way Right (2) 3 female connector. Bended at 90 + additional SUB-D 9-way 4 Integrates a micro connector to connect a pocket or a PC on the bus switch to set the bus termination. IP 67 connector M12, Male 5-way, A encoded Female CANopen junction box 2 RJ45 ports 9 for Altivar/Lexium 05 Description Composition Length m Reference TSX CAN TDM4 Weight kg 0,196
TSX CAN TDM4
TSX CAN KCDF 90T TSX CAN KCDF 180T TSX CAN KCDF 90TP
0,046 0,049 0,051
FTX CN 12M5 FTX CN 12F5 VW3 CAN TAP2
0,050 0,050
IP 20 standard cables and preassembled cordsets

VW3 CAN TAP2 Description CANopen cables (2 x AWG 22, 2 x AWG 24) Composition LSZH standard cable. CE certification. Low smoke, Halogen free and flame retardant (IEC 60332-1) UL/IEC332-2; UL certification. Non flame propagating (IEC 60332-2) No. (1) 5 Length m 50 m 100 m 300 m 50 m 100 m 300 m 50 m 100 m 300 m 0.3 m 1m 3m 5m 0.3 m 1m 3m 5m 0,5 m 1m 0.5 m 1m 0,5 m 1m 0.5 m 1m 0.5 m 1.5 m 3m 5m Reference TSX CAN CA50 TSX CAN CA100 TSX CAN CA300 TSX CAN CB50 TSX CAN CB100 TSX CAN CB300 TSX CAN CD50 TSX CAN CD100 TSX CAN CD300 TSX CAN CADD03 TSX CAN CADD1 TSX CAN CADD3 TSX CAN CADD5 TSX CAN CBDD03 TSX CAN CBDD1 TSX CAN CBDD3 TSX CAN CBDD5 TCS CCE 4F3 M05 TCS CCE 4F3 M1 TCS CCU 4F3 M05 TCS CCU 4F3 M1 TCS CCE 6F3 M05 TCS CCE 6F3 M1 TCS CCU 6F3 M05 TCS CCU 6F3 M1 TLA CD CBA 005 TLA CD CBA 015 TLA CD CBA 030 TLA CD CBA 050 Weight kg 4,930 8,800 24,560 3,580 7,840 21,870 3,510 7,770 21,700 0,091 0,143 0,295 0,440 0,086 0,131 0,268 0,400
4
TSX CAN KCD F90T
Cable flexible LSZH HD (3) for heavy duty or 5 mobile installation. Low smoke, Halogen free and flame retardant. Oil resistant. (IEC 60332-1) CANopen Standard cable. CE certification. Low smoke, 6a preassembled cordset Halogen free and flame retardant (IEC 60332-1) with moulded female SUB-D 9-way connectors at both end Standard, UL certification. Non flame 6a propagating (IEC 60332-2)
TSX CAN KCD F180T
4.4
CANopen preassembled cordset with moulded female SUB-D 9 way and RJ45 connectors CANopen preassembled cordset with open style / RJ45 connector
Standard cable, CE certification, Low smoke, 6b Halogen free and flame retardant (IEC 60332-1) Standard cable, UL certification, Non flame propagating (IEC 60332-2) Standard cable, CE certification, Low smoke, 6c Halogen free and flame retardant (IEC 60332-1) Standard cable, UL certification, Non flame propagating (IEC 60332-2) 15
TSX CAN KCD F90TP
CANopen CANopen standard cable preassembled cordset with moulded female and male SUB-D 9-way connectors
IP 67 standard preassembled cordsets

No. (1) CANopen CANopen preassembled cable with two elbowed 12 preassembled cordset M12, 5-way, A encoded connectors (one male and one female) Description Composition Length m 0.3 m 0.6 m 1m 2m 3m 5m 3m 5m Reference FTX CN 3203 FTX CN 3206 FTX CN 3210 FTX CN 3220 FTX CN 3230 FTX CN 3250 FTX CN 3130 FTX CN 3150 Weight kg 0.400 0.700 0.100 0.160 0.220 0.430
CANopen preassembled cable with one elbowed 7 female M12, 5-way , A encoded connector and other end free
(1) For key, see pages 4/48 to 4/51. (2) For connection on programmable board Controller Inside of ATV 71 drives.The VW3 CAN KCDF 180T connector can also be used. (3) Normal environment: Harsh environment: - without special environmental restrictions, - resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, - operating temperature between + 5 C and + 60 C, solder chips, - fixed installations. - up to 100% humidity, - saline environment, - extreme variations in temperature, - operating temperature between - 10 C and + 70 C, - mobile installations.
4/52

Infrastructure
References
IP 20 connection accessories
No. (1) CANopen connector for SUB-D 9-way female, switch to set the Altivar 71 (2) bus termination. End of cables Bended at 180 Adaptator for Altivar 71 CANopen adaptor SUB-D 9-way to 8 drives RJ45 CANopen preassembled 1 RJ45 connector at each end 10 cable CANopen bus adapter for Material interface for CANopen standard 14 Lexium 17D conformance included line termination. With connector for terminal PC or monitoring tool Y-connector CANopen/Modbus Description Composition Length m Reference Weight kg VW3 CAN KCDF 180T
VW3 CAN A71
0.3 m 1m
VW3 CAN A71 VW3 CAN CARR03 VW3 CAN CARR1 AM0 2CA 001V000
0.110
TCS CTN011M11F
AM0 2CA 001V000

108767-1
IP 67 connection accessories
For Advantys FTB monobloc/modular I/O splitter boxes
Description IP 67 line termination c 24 V power supply connection cables Composition With 1 M12 type connector (for end of bus) Fitted with two 7/8, 5-way connectors, one at each end No. (1) 13 16 Length m 0.6 1 2 5 1.5 3 5 Reference FTX CNTL12 FTX DP2206 FTX DP2210 FTX DP2220 FTX DP2250 FTX DP2115 FTX DP2130 FTX DP2150 FTX CNCT1 Weight kg 0.010 0.150 0.190 0.310 0.750 0.240 0.430 0.700 0.100
Fitted with one 7/8, 5-way connector, other end free T-connector for power supply Fitted with two 7/8, 5-way connectors
17
FTX DP21pp
Separate components
Description Connectors XZ CC12pDM50B Composition 7/8, 5-way M12 straight connector, 5 borders to screw M12 elbowed connector, 5 borders to screw Sealing plugs For M8 connector (lot of 10) For M12 connector (lot of 10) For 7/8 connector Male Female Male Female Male Female Reference FTX C78M5 FTX C78F5 XZ CC12MDM50B XZ CC12FDM50B XZ CC12MCM50B XZ CC12FCM50B FTX CM08B FTX CM12B FTX C78B FTX CY1208 FTX CY1212 FTX DG12 FTX BLA10 FTX MLA10 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0,020 0,020 0,020 0,020 0.100 0.100 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.020 0.010 0.010
4.4
108768
Y-connectors XZ CC12pCM50B
Diagnostics adaptor Marker labels
Connection of 2 x M8 connectors to M12 connector on splitter box Connection of 2 x M12 connectors to M12 connector on splitter box Fitted with two M12 connectors For plastic splitter boxes Lot of 10 For metal splitter boxes Lot of 10
FTX CY1208
(1) For key, see pages 4/48 to 4/51. (2) For drives ATV 71HpppM3, ATV 71HD11M3X, HD15M3X, ATV 71H075N4...HD18N4, this connector can be replace by the TSX CAN KCDF 180T.
4/53
Product data sheet

CANopen AS-Interface gateway
Presentation
The TCS AGCA1SF14M CANopen to AS-Interface gateway provides access to AS-Interface slave devices on an CANopen based industrial network. The gateway implements an AS-Interface master with a master profile M4 according to the AS-Interface Complete Specification version 3.0. The M4 master profile allows access to all slave profiles defined in this specification.
Description
The gateway implements the CAN in Automation profile 446 for CANopen to AS-Interface gateways. The digital inputs and outputs are mapped to PDOs and enabled by default. The analog channels are also mapped to PDOs, but they are disabled by default. So it is very easy to configure the gateway and a PLC to include all digital and analog I/O on the AS-Interface network. The gateway needs no additional configuration software. The little configuration needed can be done directly at the devices with a menu driven user interface.
TCS AGCA1SF14M
4.4
4/54
Product data sheet

(continued)

Characteristics
CANopen features Conformance class Standard Bit rates Connector Medium Master profile Standard
TCS AGCA1SF14M
S20 CiA 446 Kbps 10/1000 9-way male Sub-D Shielded dual twisted pairs M4 V3.0 Approx. 200 mA out of AS-Interface circuit AS-Interface voltage V > 500 EN 50295, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 C O...+ 55 C - 25...+ 85 Stainless steel mm 85 x 120 x 83 IP20 According to EN 61 131-2 g 520 Displaying slave addresses and error messages Power on Module/Network status (MNS) Configuration error AS-Interface voltage OK AS-Interface normal operation active Automatic address programming enabled Gateway is in configuration mode 4
Housing Dimensions WxHxD Degree of protection Conforming to DIN 40 050 Tolerable loading reffering to impacts and vibrations Weight HMI LCD LED green (POWER) LED green (MNS) LED red (CNF ERR) LED green (ASI PWR) LED green (ASI ACT) LED green (PRG EN) LED yellow (PRJ MODE) Buttons
References
Conformance Functions class CANopen/AS-Interface A10 - 1 CANopen port gateway - 1 AS-Interface port Description Weight kg TCS AGCA1SF14M Reference
4.4
TCS AGCA1SF14M
4/55
Contents
5 - AS-Interface in machines and installations

b Master module for Twido controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2 b Master module for Modicon Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/4
5.2 Field devices for generic products

b Advantys modular interfaces for discrete inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6 b Advantys modular interfaces for analogues inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10 b Advantys interfaces IP 67 inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12
5.3 Field devices for control

b Modules for TeSys U starter-controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/18 b Modules for D.O.L. starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/20 b Enclosed starters v Models LF1/LF2 and LF7/LF8: presentation, description, functions and characteristics . . . . . . . . . . page 5/24 v Models LF1/LF2 P, product data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/34 v Models LF1/LF2 M, product data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/35 v Models LF7 P, product data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/36
v Models LF8 P, product data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/37 v TeSys models LF1/LF2 AU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/38 v Accessories variant A74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/40
5.4 Dedicated components for dialogue

b Control stations and adapter for control and signalling units . . . . . . . . page 5/42 b Illuminated indicator banks, type XVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/44
5.5 Safety solutions

b AS-Interface Safety at work monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/50 b AS-Interface safety interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/54
5/0

b Infrastucture v Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/58 v Setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/58 b Wiring system v Flat cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/62 v Connection accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/63 v Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64 v Line extension and repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/65 v Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66 v Insulation control relay for AS-Interface line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/70
5.7 AS-Interface gateways

b Ethernet / AS-Interface gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/74 b CANopen / AS-Interface gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/75 b Profibus / AS-Interface gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/76
5.7 Tools
b AS-Interface Design installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/78 b AS-Interface line analyser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/79
5/1
Product data sheet

Master module for Twido
Presentation
Twido controller + master module TWD NOI 10M3 Power supply
Master module TWD NOI 10M3, for AS-Interface allows the Twido controller (version u 2.0) to perform the function of AS-Interface master.
Sensors
Indicator bank
AS-Interface
The cabling system consists of a master station (Twido controller) and slave stations. The master, which supports the AS-Interface profile, polls each of the devices connected to AS-Interface, in turn, and stores information gathered (sensor/actuator status, operating status of the devices) in the controller memory. Communication on AS-Interface is managed in a way that is totally transparent to the Twido application program. The TWD NOI 10M3 master module manages the following with the AS-Interface M3 profile: b Discrete slave modules (maximum of 62 slaves arranged in 2 banks, A and B, of 31 addresses each), b Analogue slaves (maximum of 7 slaves in bank A). The AS-Interface M3 profile supports analogue profile 7.3 (7 slaves), but does not support analogue profile S-7.4. The maximum number of TWD NOI 10M3 modules per Twido controller is 2. 7 discrete, analogue and AS-Interface I/O modules are controlled by TwidoSoft software (1). An AS-Interface power supply is essential to supply the various modules on the cabling system. It should preferably be located close to the stations with high power consumption.
Control station
Safety interface Safety monitor Motor starter
Description
6 5 Module TWD NOI 10M3 takes the form of a standard-size module. It is connected to a Twido base controller (compact or modular) in the same way as any I/O module. 2 It has the following on the front panel: 1 A display block comprising: b 6 pilot lights indicating the module operating modes: v green PWR pilot light: module powered up, v red FLT pilot light: error in the configuration loaded, v green LMO pilot light: module in local mode, v green CMO pilot light: module in connected mode, v red CNF pilot light: not used, v red OFF pilot light: module in protected, unconnected mode. b 6 green pilot lights, 3 for inputs, 3 for outputs. 2 A block for displaying the status of the addresses. 3 Two pushbuttons PB1 and PB2 for controlling the status of the slaves by selecting their address and changing the mode. 4 An extension connector for electrical connection to the previous module. 5 A connector (on the RH side) for I/O expansion modules TWD Dpp and TWD App (4 or 7 depending on version). 6 A latching mechanism for attachment to the previous module. 7 A power supply removable screw terminal block.
5
5.1
1 4
Diagnostics
The 30 pilot lights on the front panel of the module are used in conjunction with the two pushbuttons for diagnostics by the Twido controller. The display block on the front panel of master module TWD NOI 10M3 allows simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slaves present on AS-Interface. Software set-up AS-Interface is configured by the TwidoSoft software (1). The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity: b Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master, in a way that is transparent to the user. b Topological addressing of I/O: any AS-Interface slave defined on the cabling system has a topological address assigned to it, in a way that is transparent to the user. Each AS-Interface module sensor/actuator is seen by the Twido programmable controller in the same way as any In-rack" I/O.
(1) Please consult our catalogue Twido programmable controllers.
5/2
Product data sheet

(continued)
1

Master module for Twido
General characteristics
Module type AS-Interface profile Type of addressing Product certifications Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Altitude Temperature Relative humidity Degree of pollution Immunity to corrosion Vibration Mounted on 5 rail resistance Plate or panel mounted (using fixing kit TWD XMT5) Shock resistance As-Interface external power supply Internal current At c 5 V At c 24 V AS-Interface consumption at c 24 V TWD NOI 10M3 AS-Interface M3, V 2.11 (profile S-7.4 not supported) Standard and extended AS-Interface n 47801 IP 20 23,5 x 90 x 79,4 Operation: 02000. Transport: 03000 Operation: 0+ 55. Storage: - 25+ 70 30 to 95 % (without condensation) 2 conforming to IEC 60664 Free of corrosive gases 1057, amplitude 0.075 mm, 57150 (acceleration: 9.8 m/s2); for 2 hours on all 3 axes 225, amplitude 1.6 mm, 25100 (acceleration: 39.2 m/s2); for 90 minutes on all 3 axes 147 (15 gn) duration 11 ms, on all 3 axes 29.531.6 80 0 540
mm m C
Hz Hz m/s2 cV mA mA mW
Communication characteristics
As-Interface cycle time With 1 to 19 slaves With 20 to 62 slaves With 31 standard slaves or slaves in banks A and B With 62 slaves in banks A and B Max. no. Analogue modules (1) of modules Discrete modules (1) Max. no. of I/O Standard slaves Slaves in banks A and B Max. length of Without splitter block or extension AS-Interface cable With a total of 2 splitter blocks or extensions AS-Interface voltage ms ms ms ms 3 0.156 x (1 + N) where N = number of active slaves 5 10 7 62 248 = 124 inputs + 124 outputs 434 = 248 inputs + 186 outputs 100 300 30
5
5.
Reference TWD NOI 10M3 Weight kg 0.085
m m cV
References
Description AS-Interface master module for Twido programmable controllers V 2.0 Description Fixing kit Description Flat cable for AS-Interface (yellow) Number per controller 2 Protocol/profile Number of I/O (1) AS-Interface/M3 62 discrete modules max., 7 analogue modules max.
Description For plate or panel mounting of the module Sold in lots of 5 Power supply Length m For AS-Interface 20 50 100
Reference TWD XMT5 Reference XZ CB 10201 XZ CB 10501 XZ CB 11001
Weight kg Weight kg 1.400 3.500 7.000
TWD NOI 10M3
(1) When analogue and discrete modules are connected simultaneously to the system, the analogue modules use addresses 1 to 31 in bank A. When an analogue module uses a certain address, the module addresses having the same number in bank B cannot be occupied for slaves in banks A/B.
5/3
Product data sheet

TSX SAY master module for Premium
Presentation
TSX SAY 1000 master module for AS-Interface enables the Premium PLC or the Atrium slot-PLC to act as the AS-Interface master.
Sensors Premium + TSX SAY 1000
XVB indicator bank
AS-Interface line
T
XAL control station XAL control station Enclosed starte AS-Interface power supply
AS-Interface comprises a master station (Premium PLC or Atrium slot-PLC) and slave stations. The master that supports the AS-Interface profile successively interrogates the devices connected to AS-Interface and stores the data (status of sensor/actuators, operational status of devices) in the PLC memory. Communication management on the AS-Interface line is completely transparent with regard to the PLC application program.
5
5.1
TSX SAY 1000 master module with the AS-Interface M2E profile (AS-Interface V2) manages: b Discrete slave devices (a maximum of 62 devices organized in 2 banks, A/B, with 31 addresses each), b Analog devices (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A) b Safety interfaces (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A). The maximum number of TSX SAY 1000 modules per PLC station or slot-PLC is either 1, 2, 4 or 8, depending on the type of processor or slot-PLC installed. An AS-Interface power supply must be used for powering the various devices on the line. Ideally, this power supply should be situated nearest to the stations with the largest power demands.
Description
TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface master module is standard format modules. Modules of this format are designed to slot into any position on the Premium PLC rack like any Input/Output module or application-specific module. The modules feature, on the front panel: 1 A display unit comprising 4 indicator lamps showing the module operating modes: v RUN indicator lamp (green): module operating, v ERR indicator lamp (red): module fault, v A/B indicator lamp (green): display of group of 32 slaves, v I/O indicator lamp (red): AS-Interface line I/O fault. 2 A display unit comprising 32 indicator lamps for diagnostics of the AS-Interface line and of each slave connected to the line depending on the A/B pushbutton selected (1). 3 Two or three indicator lamps specific to the module, see diagnostics on page 5/5. 4 Two pushbuttons, see diagnostics on page 5/5. 5 One 3-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface cable (female screw connector supplied).
(1) Depending on the selection made with the A/B pushbutton, the first 31 slaves (standard address settings) or the last 31 slaves (extended address settings with AS-Interface V2) are displayed.
1 2 3 4 5
TSX SAY 1000
5/4
Product data sheet

(continued)

TSX SAY master module for Premium
Characteristics
Type of module AS-Interface profile Type of addressing Product certification Ambient air temperature TSX SAY 1000 M2E (AS-Interface V2) Standard and extended Pending 0+60 C. -25+70 C. IP 20 Conforming to IEC 68 2 6. Fc tests. Conforming to IEC 68 2 27. EA tests. 31 slaves 31 slaves Discrete I/Os (4I/4O) (1) Analog I/Os (a maximum of 4 channels) Safety interfaces Discrete I/Os (4I/3O) By 3-way SUB-D connector (included with the module) Via power supply integrated into the host platform of the module Via: v centralized display unit on TSX Micro PLC or via the display unit of TSX SAY 1000 module v use of the Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software diagnostics function v use of the ASI-TERV1 adjustment console (infrared link) (1) If the interfaces are connected using extended addressing, the type of discrete I/Os is 4I/3O (instead of 4I/4O).
Operation Storage
Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance Number of connectable interfaces With standard addressing (or slaves) With extended addressing Type of connectable interfaces With standard addressing
With extended addressing Line connection Module power supply Display/diagnostics
Diagnostics
TSX SAY 1000 module (AS-Interface V2) The two indicator lamps 3 on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 module that correspond to the two pushbuttons 4 are used for diagnostics at module level:
Indicator lamps marked: PWR: FAULT: AS-Interface line fault AS-Interface power supply present Pushbuttons marked: A/B: selection of MODE: module slave group on Off line/On line display unit 2
5
5.
The display unit on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 master module allows simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slave devices on the AS-Interface line. Detailed diagnostics for each of these slave devices can be carried out via the ASI TERV2 adjustment console.
Reference
Description Number Profile per PLC AS-Interface 1 for 57 Cp AS-Interface master 1 for 57 0p M2E module (2) 2 for 57 1p for Premium 4 for 57 2p PLCs and 8 for 57 3p Atrium 8 for 57 4p slot-PLCs 8 for 57 5p Max. number Reference of I/Os (1) 62 discrete devices TSX SAY 1000 31 analog devices (3) 31 safety devices Weight kg 0.340
TSX SAY 1000
(1) These maximum values cannot be cumulated. (2) The 3-way SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface cable is supplied with the module. (3) Supports analog devices that have between 1 and 4 input or output channels.
5/5
Product data sheet

Field devices
Advantys, interfaces for discrete I/O
Presentation
ASI 20MT modular interfaces enable traditional discrete sensors and actuators (sensors, motor starters, pushbuttons, pilot lights...) to be connected to AS-Interface. Due to their particularly compact size, they are suitable for fitting in small-size enclosures (pushbutton and pilot light interfacing) as well as in larger, floor-standing enclosures. Conforming to the AS-Interface V2.1 specification, they offer diagnostic functions and are available, depending on the model, with standard addressing (up to 31 Slaves per Master) or with extended A/B addressing (up to 62 Slaves per Master). The inputs are compatible with 2 and 3-wire sensors, supply to the the sensors being provided, depending on the model, via the AS-Interface line or by an external c 24 V source (isolated inputs). The outputs, supplied by an external source, are of the relay or 2 A triac or 0.5 A transistor type. All connectors are of the removable type and are supplied with screw terminal block as standard. Quick connect terminal blocks are available as an accessory. A "Jack" connector on the front panel allows allows addressing of the product independently, or when installed.
Composition
AS-Interface and auxiliary supply connection: 1 ASI 20MACC4 screw terminal blocks, fitted as standard. 2 ASI 20MACC1 insulation displacement connectors for chaining, to be ordered separately. 3 APE 1PAD21 self-stripping connectors, to be ordered separately. Sensor/actuator connection: 4 ASI 20MACC2 screw terminal blocks, fitted as standard. 5 ASI 20MACC3 spring terminal connectors, to be ordered separately.
5
5
Chaining
The AS-Interface line and the auxiliary supply can be chained using ASI 20MACC1 insulation displacement connectors, to be ordered separately.
5.2
Description
109482-28-M
1 2 8 3 9 6 4
7 5 10
1 Removable screw terminal block for connection of a c 24 V PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) auxiliary power supply, for supply to the transistor outputs and the isolated inputs. This terminal block can be replaced by an APE 1PAD21 selfstripping block or an ASI 20MACC1 quick connect block for chaining several ASI 20MT interfaces. 2 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the AS-Interface line. This terminal block can be replaced by an APE 1PAD21 self-stripping block or an ASI 20MACC1 quick connect block for chaining several ASI 20MT interfaces. 3 Removable labels for marking the interface and the address, fitted as standard. 4 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the inputs and of the power supply for the sensors. This terminal block can be replaced by an ASI M20ACC3 quick connect terminal block. This terminal block is fitted with a locating facility to prevent inversion of the 2 terminal blocks on the front panel. 5 ASI 20MACC2 removable screw terminal block for connection of the outputs and of the power supply for the relay and triac outputs. This terminal block can be replaced by an ASI 20MACC3 quick connect terminal block. 6 Input status LED. 7 Output status LED. 8 Diagnostic LED. 9 Jack connector for connection of an ASI TERACC2 cable (see page 5/78) for addressing and diagnostic terminal type ASI TERV2 or XZ MC11. 10 Device for clipping onto 5 35 mm symmetrical DIN rail and screw fixing onto panel.
5/6
Product data sheet

(continued)

Field devices
Environment
Product certifications Operating temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Dimensions Shock resistance Vibration resistance Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Resistance to transients Dielectric test voltage between AS-Interface line and the outputs Overvoltage category Degree of pollution C C Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 WxHxD mm Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Hz Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV Conforming to IEC/EN 60364-4-41 V UL, CSA, GL (pending) - 20+ 60 - 40+ 85 IP 20 25 x 87 x 77 15 gn (for 11 ms) 213.2 amplitude 1 mm, 13.2100: 1 gn 6 10 2 500 (transistor outputs), 3750 (relay and triac outputs)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60664-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60664-1
II 2
AS-Interface characteristics
AS-Interface version AS-Interface supply Diagnostic signalling cV AS-Interface power ON Auxiliary supply ON Input/output status Fault (1) N of data bits/n of inputs or outputs D0 D1 D2 D3 Value of input or output status data bit D0 to D3 V2.1 26.531.6 Green LED Green LED Yellow LED Red LED Input 1 or output 1 Input 2 or output 2 Input 3 or output 3 Input 4 or output 4 0 = input or output OFF 1 = input or output ON Output state 0 Not used On 35 mm 5 rail (horizontal only) or screw fixing using 2 x 3 screws Polycarbonate (UL94VO) Removable terminal block ASI 20MACC4: 0.2 to 2.5 mm2; ASI 20MACC1: 0.5 to 0.75 mm2; APE 1PAD21: 0.5 to 0.75 mm2 Removable terminal block ASI 20MACC2: max 1.5 mm2; ASI 20MACC3: 0.14 to 1.5 mm2
Output fallback if watchdog tripped Parameter bit Mounting Housing material Connection AS-Interface
Sensors
5.2
(1) Fault LED: off = no fault, on steady = no data exchange on AS-Interface, flashing = peripheral fault.
5/7
Product data sheet

(continued)

Field devices
AS-Interface characteristics specific to I/O with standard addressing

Interface type Maximum number of addresses for one master Number of inputs Number of outputs Supply to the sensors (inputs) Supply to the actuators (outputs) Profile (I/O code, ID code, ID1, ID2) (3) AS_Interface certifications Consumption on No-load the AS-Interface line Maximum (4) ASI 20MT4I4OR 20MT4I4OS 31 4 4 4 x 2 A relay 4 x 0.5 A transistor Via the AS-Interface line max: 200 mA External a 250 V max, c 150 V max S7.0.F.E N 52101 15 110 20MT4I4OSA 4 isolated (1)
Via external PELV (2) power supply (AUX) max: 200 mA Via external PELV (2) power supply (AUX)
mA mA
N 52301 15 50
N 52401 15 20
AS-Interface characteristics specific to I/O with extended A/B addressing

Interface type Maximum number of addresses for one master Number of inputs Number of outputs Supply to the sensors (inputs) ASI 20MT4IE 20MT2I1OTE 62 4 2 1 x 2 A triac Via the AS-Interface line max: 170 mA 20MT4I3ORE 4 3 x 2 A relay Via the AS-Interface line max: 170 mA External max: a 250 V S7.A.7.0 52201 15 90 20MT4I3OSE 20MT4I3OSAE 4 4 isolated (1) 3 x 0.5 A transistor Via the Via external AS-Interface PELV (2) power line supply (AUX) max: 150 mA max: 200 mA Via external PELV (2) power supply (AUX) 52302 15 50 52401 15 20 20MT2I1OTE
Supply to the actuators (outputs) Profile (I/O code, ID code, ID1, ID2) (3) AS-Interface certification n Consumption on No-load the AS-Interface line Maximum (4)
S0.A.7.0 52501 15 50 20MT4IE
mA mA ASI
External a 24250 V S3.A.7.0 53801 15 40 20MT4I4OR 20MT4I3ORE
Input characteristics (sensor side)

Interface type Sensor type State 1 guaranteed State 0 guaranteed Conformity of inputs 20MT4I4OSA 20MT4I4OS 20MT4I3OSAE 20MT4I3OSE PNP 2 or 3-wire U > 11 V and I > 6 mA U < 5 V and I < 2 mA Type 2
Conforming to IEC 61131-2
Output characteristics (sensor side)
5.2
Interface type Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a c
ASI V V V A A A A A A A mA mA A
20MT4IE
20MT4I4OR 20MT4I3ORE 250 150 2 4 2 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.5 10
Maximum drop-out voltage at Ith Thermal current per channel (Ith/channel) Thermal current per common Rated operational current (Ie) AC 12 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 DC 12 6 cycles/minute AC 15 24250 Va DC 13 24150 Vc AC 14 Minimum current Maximum leakage current Built-in overcurrent protection Mechanical life in millions of operating cycles Response time (5)
20MT4I4OSA 20MT4I3OSAE 19.2...30 PELV (2) 0.3 0.5 2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 at c 30 V
20MT4I4OS 20MT4I3OSE 19.2...30 PELV (2) 0.3 0.5 2 0.5 0.5 0.5
20MT2I1OTE 250 3 2 2 2 8 No
No 20 10 10
Yes, electronic 1 1 1 1
10 10
Switching time from OFF to ON Switching time from ON to OFF
ms ms
1 1
(1) AS-Interface line isolated inputs. These inputs have a potential common with the outputs. (2) Protective Extra Low Voltage c 19.230 V; the regulations relating to these installations are defined in publication NF C 12-201 and in standard IEC 60364-4-41. (3) Bit ID1 can be modified by the user, in particular using the addressing terminal. (4) Consumption with all Inputs/Outputs On and sensor not energised. (5) Add the AS-Interface cycle time.
5/8
Product data sheet

(continued)

Field devices
References
Modular interfaces supplied with removable screw terminal blocks
109483 109481
Type of addressing Standard
Number of inputs (1) 4
Number, type of outputs 4 x z 250 V/2 A relay 4 x c 24 V/0.5 A transistor
Reference ASI 20MT4I4OR ASI 20MT4I4OS ASI 20MT4I4OSA ASI 20MT4IE ASI 20MT2I1OTE ASI 20MT4I3ORE ASI 20MT4I3OSE ASI 20MT4I3OSAE
Weight kg 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090
4 isolated Extended A/B 4 2 ASI 20MT4I4OR ASI 20MT4IE 4
4 x c 24 V/0.5 A transistor 1 x a 250 V/2 A triac 3 x z 250 V/2 A relay 3 x c 24 V/0.5 A transistor
4 isolated
3 x c 24 V/0.5 A transistor
Spare parts
Description For use with Connectors AS-Interface and auxiliary Terminal block type Screw Insulation Displacement Connector Self-stripping connector Screw Spring Legends Sold in lots of 5 yellow + 5 black 5 yellow + 5 black 16 grey 10 10 22 Unit reference ASI 20MACC4 ASI 20MACC1 Weight kg 0.010 0.010
APE 1PAD21 ASI 20MACC2 ASI 20MACC3 ASI 20MACC5
0.240 0.020 0.020
ASI 20MT4I3OSE Inputs/outputs (2)
(1) Unless marked "isolated", the inputs and sensor electronics are supplied from the AS-Interface line. (2) Connectors supplied with locating facility not activated; locating facility to be activated by cutting off a lug.
5.2
5/9
Product data sheet

Field devices
Advantys, interfaces for analogue inputs
Presentation
ASI 20MA2VU/VI modular interfaces enable analogue output sensors (proximity, pressure, temperature sensors...) to be connected to AS-Interface. Due to their particularly compact size, they are suitable for fitting in small-size enclosures as well as in larger, floor-standing enclosures. Inputs are of the current type (0-10 mA or 4-20 mA, depending on connection) or voltage type (0-10 V), and supply to the sensors is from the AS-Interface line. All connectors are of the removable type and are supplied with screw terminal block as standard. Quick connect terminal blocks are available as an accessory. A "Jack" connector on the front panel allows addressing of the product independently, or when installed.
Composition
AS-Interface connection: 5 1 ASI 20MACC4 screw terminal block, fitted as standard. 2 ASI 20MACC1 insulation displacement connector for chaining, to be ordered separately. 3 APE1 PAD21 self-stripping connector, to be ordered separately. Sensor connection: 4 ASI 20MACC2 screw terminal block, fitted as standard. 5 ASI 20MACC3 spring terminal connector, to be ordered separately.
6 The AS-Interface line can be chained using an ASI 20MACC1 insulation displacement connector, to be ordered separately.
109481-28-M
1 5 2 6
5.2
Description
1 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the AS-Interface line. This terminal block can be replaced by an APE 1PAD21 self-stripping block for connecting a single interface, or by an ASI 20MACC1 quick connect block for chaining several ASI 20MA interfaces. 2 Removable labels for marking the interface and the address, fitted as standard. 3 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the inputs and of the power supply for the sensors. This terminal block can be replaced by an ASI 20MACC3 quick connect terminal block. 4 Not used. 5 Diagnostic LED. 6 Jack connector for connection of an ASI TERACC2 cable (see page 5/78) for addressing and diagnostic terminal type ASI TERV2 or XZ MC11. 7 Fitting for clipping onto 5 35 mm symmetrical DIN rail and screw fixing onto panel.
Environment
Product certifications Operating temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Dimensions Shock resistance Vibration resistance Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Resistance to transients Overvoltage category Degree of pollution C C Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 WxHxD mm Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Hz Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC/EN 60664-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60664-1 V/m kV UL, CSA, GL (pending) - 20+ 60 - 40+ 85 IP 20 25 x 87 x 77 15 gn (for 11 ms) 213.2 amplitude 1 mm, 13.2100: 1 gn Level 3 10 2 II 2
5/10
Product data sheet

(continued)

Field devices
Advantys, interfaces for analogue inputs
AS-Interface version AS-Interface profile (I/O code, ID code, ID1, ID2) (1) Maximum number of addresses AS-Interface supply Consumption on the No-load AS-Interface line Maximum Diagnostic signalling AS-Interface power ON Fault (2) Parameter bit P0 P1 P2 P3 Mounting Housing material Connection V2.1 S7.3.F.D 31 26.531.6 60 250 Green LED Red LED and fault bit Not used 0: input 1 On, input 2 Off, 1: input 1 On, input 2 On 1: fault bit On Not used On 35 mm 5 rail (horizontal only) or screw fixing using 2 x 3 screws Polycarbonate (UL94VO) Removable terminal block ASI 20MACC4: 0.2 to 2.5 mm2; ASI 20MACC1: 0.5 to 0.75 mm2; APE 1PAD2: 0.5 to 0.75 mm2 Removable terminal block ASI 20MACC2: max 1.5 mm2; ASI 20MACC3: 0.14 to 1.5 mm2
cV mA mA
AS-Interface
Sensors
Analogue input characteristics (sensor side)

Interface type Inputs Sensor input type Max. permissible value without destruction (3) Supply to sensors Input impedance Range of values Resolution Refresh time cV c mA V decima l bits ms Voltage Current cV c mA ASI 20MA2VU 010 Analogue 14 Via the AS-Interface line only 20 000 010 000 12 < 50 ASI 20MA2VI 020 or 420
24 250 020 000 or 400020 000
(1) Bit ID1 can be modified by the user, in particular using the addressing terminal. (2) Fault LED: off = if parameter bit 2 On, no fault, on steady = AS-Interface exchange fault, flashing = voltage > 10.5 V (VU), current < 1 mA or > 21 mA (VI). (3) The inputs are not protected above these values.
5.2
109481
References
Modular interfaces supplied with removable screw terminal blocks
Inputs (1) Number 2 Reference Type c 010 V c 020 mA c 420 mA ASI 20MA2VU ASI 20MA2VI Weight kg 0.090 0.090
Spare parts
Description ASI 20MA2Vp Connectors For use with AS-Interface Terminal block type Screw Sold in lots of 5 yellow + 5 black Insulation 5 yellow Displacement + 5 black Connector Self-stripping 16 grey connector Screw Spring 10 10 22 Unit reference ASI 20MACC4 ASI 20MACC1 Weight kg 0.010 0.010
APE 1PAD21
0.003
Inputs (2) Labels
ASI 20MACC2 ASI 20MACC3 ASI 20MACC5
0.020 0.020
(1) The inputs and sensor electronics are supplied from the AS-Interface line. (2) Connectors supplied with locating facility not activated; locating facility to be activated by cutting off a lug.
5/11
Product data sheet

Field devices
Advantys, interfaces for IP 67 I/O
12
Presentation
ASI 67F interfaces enable traditional sensors and actuators - in particular proximity sensors, photo-electric sensors and limit switches - to be connected to AS-Interface.
564407-24-M
Because of their IP 67 degree of protection, they can be mounted directly on the machine, as near as possible to the sensors and actuators. Two types of housing are available: b A compact, 45 mm wide housing for 4-channel interfaces, b A flat, 60 mm wide housing for 8-channel interfaces. The sensors and actuators are connected to the interface by M12 connectors. The AS-Interface line and any external power supply are connected in one of the following ways, depending on the model: b Directly to the ribbon cables via an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) (2 possible mounting positions). b By means of an M12 connector. Conforming to the AS-Interface V2.1 specification, they offer diagnostic functions and are available, depending on the model, with standard addressing (up to 31 Slaves per master) or with extended addressing (up to 62 Slaves per master). Specific "V1 compatible" versions allow replacement of previous XZS interfaces and use in association with V1 masters.
1 12
564405-19-M
10
6 9 2 3 2
10 3 7 5 8 12 11 8 12 11
1
564406-24-M
12
The inputs are compatible with 2 and 3-wire sensors and with the majority of models in the Osiris, Osiprox and Osiswitch sensor ranges, with or without alarm output. Supply to the sensors (200 mA max) is via the AS-Interface line. The outputs, supplied by an external source, are of the 2 A transistor type. 9
564408-19-M
Description
5 10 12 5 9 1 10 4 5 8 12 11 8 12 11 4 ASI 67F interfaces comprise: M12 connectors for connecting the sensors and actuators. Connector for yellow ribbon cable (AS-Interface line). Connector for black ribbon cable (auxiliary supply) - depending on model. M12 connectors for connecting the AS-Interface line and the auxiliary power supply, also allowing connection for addressing via an ASI TERACC1F connection cable. 5 Holes for fixing screws. 6 Fitting for clipping onto 5 35 mm symmetrical rail. 7 Jack connector for connection of an ASI TERACC2 cable (see page 5/78) for terminal ASI TERV2 or XZ MC11. 8 Diagnostic LED. 9 I/O status LED. 10 Channel marker labels. 11 Interface marker label. 12 Interface to connection base fixing screws. 1 2 3 4
5.2
5/12
Product data sheet

(continued)
1

Field devices
Environment characteristics
Product certifications Operating temperature Storage temperature Installation category Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Dielectric test voltage conforming to IEC/EN 60664-1 To IEC/EN 60529 To IEC 60664 To IEC 60529 To IEC 60068-2-27 To IEC/EN 60068-2-6 To GL Inputs and outputs Inputs and auxiliary supply Outputs and AS-Interface line Auxiliary supply and AS-Interface line Inputs and AS-Interface line Outputs and auxiliary supply To IEC/EN 61000-4-2 To IEC/EN 61000-4-3 To IEC/EN 61000-4-6 C C UL, CSA (GL pending) - 25+ 70 - 40+ 85 II IP 67 (IP 54 for use as tap-off or at line end) 30 (for 11 ms) 236 Hz: amplitude 1 mm, 36...150 Hz: 5 gn 213.2 Hz: 1 mm, 13.2100 Hz: 0.7 gn 500 (for 1 minute) 500 (for 1 minute) 2 for 1 minute between the M12 connectors and earth 500 No insulation No insulation 8, level 3 10, level 3 3
gn
V V kV V
Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Resistance to conducted disturbance induced by the radiated fields Surge withstand Immunity to transients Degree of pollution Flame resistance Mechanical resistance Mounting Tightening torque Material of metal parts Housing material AS-Interface version AS-Interface supply Protection Connection Diagnostic signalling
kV V/m V
To IEC/EN 61000-4-5 To IEC/EN 60100-4-4 To IEC/EN 60604-4-1 To IEC/EN 60695-2-11 Product drop test
kV
Fixing screws
Nm
1 kV at 2 Ohms (differential mode), 2 kV at 12 Ohms (common mode) 2, level 3 Level 3 At 750 C, extinction < 30 s (hot wire test) 1 (no damage) 2 or 3 x M4 screws On 35 mm rail IEC/EN 60715 (for connection base ASI 67FFB01) 0.6 Stainless steel PBT 30% GF Valox 553 V2.1 26.531.6 Against polarity inversion Jack connector (for ASI 67FFPppp) M12 connector (for ASI 67FMPppp) Green LED Green LED Red LED Yellow LED FP04A 19 mA 80FF n 55201 O1 O2 O3 O4 FP33ER 52 mA 7A7E n 74701 I1 / O1 I2 / O2 I3 / O3 FP44A 49 mA 70FF n 55301
V To the addressing terminal AS-Interface power ON Auxiliary supply ON Fault Input/output status
5.2
Characteristics of V1 compatible interfaces

Interface type ASI 67F AS-Interface max. consumption without sensor supply (1) AS-Interface profile (I/O code, ID code, ID1, ID2) AS-Interface certification Maximum number of addresses Number of D0 data bits/number of I/O D1 D2 D3 Input or output status D0 to D3 data bit value Output fallback Parameter bits Product status in the event Sensor supply overload of a peripheral fault (I > 200 mA). Overload on one output FP40A FP22A 45 mA 32 mA 00FF 30FF n 55001 n 55101 31 I1 I1 I2 I2 I3 O3 I4 O4 0 = input or output Off 1 = input or output On Off in the absence of communication Not used Interface inhibited (2) Interface not inhibited (3)
I4 / O4
Interface not Interface inhibited (2) (3) inhibited (3) The inputs power supply is shut-down
Peripheral fault information Dimensions
WxHxD
45 x 80 x 42 60 x 151 x 40 (1) Add the consumption of the sensor supply to obtain the total maximum consumption on the AS-Interface line. (2) The status of the inputs is no longer communicated to the master. (3) All the outputs are off.
5/13
Product data sheet

(continued)
1

Field devices
Characteristics of V2.1 compatible interfaces with standard addressing

Interface type ASI 67F AS-Interface max. consumption without sensor supply (1) AS-Interface profile (I/O code, ID code, ID1, ID2) AS-Interface certification Maximum number of addresses Number of data bits/number of I/O D0 D1 D2 D3 Input or output status D0 to D3 data bit value Output fallback Parameter bits Product status in the event of a peripheral fault Peripheral fault information pP40D 45 mA 00FE n 55001 31 pP22D 32 mA 30FE n 55101 pP04D 19 mA 80FE n 55201 pP44D 49 mA 70FE n 55301 FP44DY MP44DY FP80DY 90 mA 01FF (x 2) n 64801
7FFE n 55303
n 55306
Dimensions avec embase WxHxD
ASI 67FFB01 ASI 67FFB02 ASI 67FFB01
Address 1 Address 2 I1 I1 O1 I1 or O1 I1-1 I2-1 I2 I2 O2 I2 or O2 I1-2 I2-2 I3 O3 O3 I3 or O3 I1-3 I2-3 I4 O4 O4 I4 or O4 I1-4 I2-4 0 = input or output Off 0 = input Off 1 = input or output On 1 = input On Off in the absence of communication Not used The interface is not inhibited. The peripheral fault bit is On and can be accessed by the master. The peripheral fault bit is On in the case of: output overload or short-circuit, The peripheral fault bit is absence of auxiliary supply, sensor supply overload On in the case of sensor (I > 200 mA). supply overload (I > 200 mA). The 2 LEDs "Fault 1" and "Fault 2" are on simultaneously, whatever input has triggered the fault. 45 x 80 x 42 45 x 116.5 x 37.5 60 x 151 x 30.5 pP40E 45 mA FP40EY MP40EY pP22E 32 mA pP03E 18 mA pP43E 48 mA FP43EY MP43EY FP80EY 90 mA
Characteristics of V2.1 compatible extended A/B addressing interfaces
5.2
Interface type ASI 67F AS-Interface max. consumption without sensor supply (1) AS-Interface profile (I/O code, ID code, ID1, ID2) AS-Interface certification Maximum number of addresses Number of data bits/number of I/O D0 D1 D2 D3 Input or output status D0 to D3 data bit value Output fallback Parameter bits Product status in the event of a peripheral fault Peripheral fault information
Dimensions avec embase WxHxD
ASI 67FFB01 ASI 67FFB02 ASI 67FFB01
0A70 BA70 8A70 7A70 7A7E 0A72 (x 2) n 55001 n 55002 n 55305 n 55101 n 55201 n 55301 n 55302 n 55304 n 64801 62 Address 1 Address 2 I1 O1 O1 I1 or O1 I1-1 I2-1 I2 O2 O2 I2 or O2 I1-2 I2-2 I3 I3 O3 I3 or O3 I1-3 I2-3 I4 I4 - (2) I4 (2) I1-4 I2-4 0 = input or output Off 0 = input Off 1 = input or output On 1 = input On Off in the absence of communication Not used The interface is not inhibited. The peripheral fault bit is On and can be accessed by the master. The peripheral fault bit is On in the case of: output overload or short-circuit, The peripheral fault bit is absence of auxiliary supply, sensor supply overload On in the case of sensor (I > 200 mA). supply overload (I > 200 mA). The 2 LEDs "Fault 1" and "Fault 2" are on simultaneously, whatever input has triggered the fault. 45 x 80 x 42 45 x 116.5 x 37.5 60 x 151 x 30.5 PNP (2 and 3-wire) 1830 200 (for an operating temperature < 40 C) 150 (for an operating temperature between 40 C and 70 C) 100 for ASI 67FpP22p U > 11 V and I > 6 mA U < 5 V and I < 2 mA 8 Type 2 (1) Add the consumption of the sensor supply to obtain the total maximum consumption on the AS-Interface line. (2) O4 must not be used in the program. (3) The supply to the sensors is protected against overload and short-circuits.
Input characteristics (sensor side)

Sensor type Supply voltage Maximum sensor supply current (3) State 1 guaranteed State 0 guaranteed Nominal current (per input) Conformity of inputs V To IEC/EN 60947-5-1 mA Via the AS-Interface line
mA To IEC/EN 61131-2
5/14
Product data sheet

(continued)
1

Field devices
Output characteristics (sensor side)

Type Supply to actuators Maximum drop-out voltage at In Thermal current per channel Thermal current per common Leakage current Protection By auxiliary supply Solid state (PNP transistor) 21.6...27.2 / Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) 1 2 4 (for an operating temperature < 40 C) 2 (for a temperature between 40 C and 70 C) A Max. 12 per channel Thermal (integrated). Individual protection for each channel (automatic reset on elimination of the fault) Integrated A 2 A 2 ms < 20 ms < 20 (1) An external protection device (diode) must be fitted in parallel with the load for highly inductive applications (L/R > 50 ms). V V A A
Nominal current Response time
Against overloads and short-circuits Against polarity inversion DC-12 DC-13 (1) OFF to ON ON to OFF
References V1 compatible interfaces

These interfaces replace the XZS CA and XZS DA ranges. XZS CA and XZS DA interfaces can be replaced when maintenance work is carried out, without any need for adjustments on the PLC and reusing the existing fixing screws (profile and fixing centres are compatible). The interfaces can also be used to build new installations with V1 masters. They are only available with standard addressing and do not include any peripheral fault management functions. Direct connection interfaces via insulation displacement connector (IDC) (1), for use with a connection base
121111-19-M
121105-24-M
Addressing Number of inputs Standard 4 2 3 ASI 67FFP40A ASI 67FFP44A 4
Number Housing of type outputs 2 4 3 4
M12 Reference connector pin arrangement Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FFP40A (4-channels) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FFP22A (4-channels) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FFP04A (4-channels) Flat, 60 mm Specific ASI 67FFP33ER (6-channels) Flat, 60 mm Standard ASI 67FFP44A (8-channels)
Weight
kg 0.090 0.090 0.120 0.090 0.090
5.2
121110-23-M
Connection bases for direct connection interfaces via IDC connector

For interfaces Fixing Rail mounting Yes No No Reference ASI 67FFB01 ASI 67FFB02 ASI 67FFB03 Weight kg 0.044 0.039 0.066
121109-17-M
Compact type, 45 mm 2 fixing points (4-channel) 4 fixing points (CNOMO centres) Flat type, 60 mm 4 fixing points (8-channel) (CNOMO centres)
121108-17-M
Separate components
Description Sealing plug for M12 connector Heat shrinkable cable end (2) Sold in lots of 10 10 Unit reference ASI 67FACC1 ASI 67FACC2 Weight kg 0.013 0.020
ASI 67FFB01
ASI 67FFB02
ASI 67FFB03 (1) Products supplied with two M12 plugs, not fitted (for 45 mm compact type), with four M12 plugs, not fitted (for 60 mm flat type) and one M12 plug (addressing) fitted. (2) Enables IP 67 sealing to be achieved at the end of a ribbon cable.
5/15
Product data sheet

(continued)
1

Field devices
V2.1 compatible interfaces

These interfaces fully comply with the AS-Interface V2.1 specification: b Up to 62 interfaces can be associated with each master (extended A/B addressing), b Peripheral fault management. They replace and reinforce the ASI M range. Two types of M12 connector pin arrangement are available for the inputs: b Standard pin arrangement for sensors with single NO/NC output, b Dual pin arrangement (Y) for sensors with signal output + alarm output or sensors with single NO output. Direct connection interfaces via insulation displacement connector (IDC) (1), for use with a connection base
Addressing Number of inputs Standard 4 2 ASI 67FFP40E ASI 67FFP44D 4 Number Housing of type outputs 2 4 4 M12 Reference connector pin arrangement Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FFP40D (4-channel) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FFP22D (4-channel) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FFP04D (4-channel) Flat, 60 mm Standard ASI 67FFP44D (8-channel) Dual (Y) ASI 67FFP44DY Flat, 60 mm (8-channel) Dual (Y) ASI 67FFP80DY Weight
121111-19-M
121105-24-M
kg 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.160 0.160 0.160
8
121108-17-M
121111-19-M
Extended A/B
Compact, 45 mm Standard (4-channel) Dual (Y) Compact, 45 mm Standard (4-channel) Compact, 45 mm Standard (4-channel) Standard Flat, 60 mm (8-channel) Dual (Y) Flat, 60 mm (8-channel) Dual (Y)
ASI 67FFP40E ASI 67FFP40EY ASI 67FFP22E ASI 67FFP03E ASI 67FFP43E ASI 67FFP43EY ASI 67FFP80EY
0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.160 0.160 0.160
2 4
2 3 3
5.2
ASI 67FFB01 ASI 67FFB02 8
121110-23-M
Connection bases for direct connection interfaces via IDC connector

For interfaces Compact, 45 mm (4-channel) Fixing 2 fixing points 4 fixing points (CNOMO centres) 4 fixing points (CNOMO centres) Rail mounting Yes No No Reference ASI 67FFB01 ASI 67FFB02 ASI 67FFB03 Weight kg 0.044 0.039 0.066
Flat type, 60 mm (8-channel)
Separate components
Description Sealing plug Heat shrinkable cable end Application For M12 connector Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference ASI 67FACC1 ASI 67FACC2 Weight kg 0.011 0.020
To provide IP67 sealing at 10 the end of a ribbon cable
ASI 67FFB03
(1) Products supplied with two M12 plugs, not fitted (for 45 mm compact type), with four M12 plugs, not fitted (for 60 mm flat type) and one M12 plug (addressing) fitted.
5/16
Product data sheet

(continued)
1

Field devices
V2.1 compatible interfaces (continued)

Interfaces with remote M12 connector (1)
DF564408-19-M
Addressing Number of inputs
Number Housing of type outputs
Standard
4 2 4
2 4 4
M12 Reference connector pin arrangement (2) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FMP40D (4-channel) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FMP22D (4-channel) Compact, 45 mm Standard ASI 67FMP04D (4-channel) Flat, 60 mm Standard ASI 67FMP44D (8-channel) Dual (Y) ASI 67FMP44DY
Weight
kg 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.220 0.220
ASI 67FMP40E Extended A/B 4 Compact, 45 mm Standard (4-channel) Dual (Y) Compact, 45 mm Standard (4-channel) Compact, 45 mm Standard (4-channel) Flat, 60 mm Standard (8-channel) Dual (Y) ASI 67FMP40E ASI 67FMP40EY ASI 67FMP22E ASI 67FMP03E ASI 67FMP43E ASI 67FMP43EY 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.220 0.220
2
121100-24-M
2 3 3
Separate components (3)

Description Sealing plug Application For M12 connector Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference ASI 67FACC1 Weight kg 0.013
IP 54 tap-off
ASI 67FMP43E
IP 67 tap-off
For connecting ASI 67FMP40p to ribbon cable, cable length 0.6 m with M12 straight connector For connection of ASI 67FMP (except ASI 67FMP40) to ribbon cable, cable length 0.3 m with M12 straight connector
XZ CG01205D
0.090
ASI DCPM12D03
0.150
5.2
(1) Products supplied with two M12 plugs, not fitted (for 45 mm compact type) or with four M12 plugs, not fitted (for 60 mm flat type). These are monobloc products; there is no need to order connection bases. (2) Connectors for connecting sensors/actuators. (3) For other tap-off accessories, see page 48369/3 (connection accessories).
5/17
Product data sheet

Field devices
TeSys U starter-controllers
AS-Interface communication modules

1
531118
The AS-Interface communication modules make it easy to connect starter-controllers to AS-Interface and therefore allow remote control and command of these startercontrollers. Module ASILUF C51 incorporates wide mounting rail. The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present, communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by 2 LEDs (green 4 and red 5). Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is totally transparent to the user. The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing terminal. The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL. The product is supplied with a yellow connector 6 for connection to AS-Interface, a black connector 7 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black connector 8 for connection of the outputs.
3
1 2
Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault 3 Outputs for starter commands 4 Yellow connector for connection to AS-Interface 5 Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary power supply
Series type connection

Architecture Communication modules ASI LUF C5 or ASI LUF C51 7 Tap-off TCS ATV01N2, see page 5/63 8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
6
5
8 6
5.3
c 24 V AS-Interface
Information transmitted via AS-Interface

AS-Interface profiles Data bits (command) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) 7.D.F.0 profile and 7.A.7.E profile =0 =1 Stop forward Forward running Stop reverse Reverse running Not used Not used Not used Not used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Not used Not used =1 Ready Running Not used Not used
Data bits (status)
References
Description Communication modules Comunication module with extended addressing (1) For one master. Nb. of addresse Item (1) 31 max. 1 62 max. 1 Reference ASI LUF C5 ASI LUF C51 Weight kg 0.065 0,065
5/18
Product data sheet

(continued)
2

Field devices
TeSys U starter-controllers
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
531121
Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
1
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUB pp LU2B pp Item 3 5 Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B

531122
b Wire link Allows insertion, for example, of an Emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may be used.
Connection of the communication module (1)

Achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables: b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow). b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1 5
Description Tap-off Length m 2 Reference TCS ATV01N2 Weight kg 0.265
(1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires. Black wire: + 24 V. White wire: 0 V. Blue wire: AS-Interface (). Brown wire: AS-Interface (+). LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M
5.3
5/19
Product data sheet

Field devices
D.O.L. starters, LA9 Z modules
Presentation
AS-interface modules LA9 Z32810 and LA9 Z32811 allow motor starters to be monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the AS-Interface enclosed starter range, LF1 and LF2, LF7 and LF8. The module sizes offered are: 2 inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/2 outputs.
AS-I PWR
These products can be mounted in two ways: b on 5 rail, b on LA9 Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.
565189
5.3
565188
AS-I PWR
Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, flexible terminal type connector, so reducing installation time. The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector. The external c 24 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).
5/20
Product data sheet

(continued)
2

Field devices
D.O.L. starters, LA9 Z modules
Fields of application
The various module sizes allow control of: b non-reversing starters, b reversing starters, b 2-speed starters for motors with separate windings. The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a current of 0.5 A at c 24 V and can therefore switch the following contactors: b LP1/LP4 K06K12, b LC1 D09D32.
Composition
565190
AS-Interface module 1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator: - red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off, - green: communication OK, outputs OK, - red/yellow flashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31), - off: no power supply to AS-Interface. 2 Green PWR LED: - LED on: auxiliary power supply ON, - LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.
1
AS-I PWR
5.3
5/21
Product data sheet

(continued)
2

D.O.L. starters
LA9 Z modules
General system environment

Interface type Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Dimensions Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Flame resistance Resistance to external mechanical impact Vibration resistance Immunity to non-dissipating shockwave (Uimp) Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Immunity to conducted radio-frequency interference Immunity to radiated radio-frequency interference Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection AS-Interface supply Cabling c.s.a., AS-Interface Cabling c.s.a., 24 V Cabling c.s.a., input/output LA9 Z32810 AS-Interface N 18701 TH IP 20 45 x 65 x 86 - 40+ 85 - 10+ 55 2000 960 15 gn 2 gn kV kV kV kV V/m V/m 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 10 10 LA9 Z32811 AS-Interface N 18601
Conforming to IEC 60539 WxHxD Storage, conforming to IEC 60539 Operation Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 1/2 sine wave, 11ms conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 5150 Hz conforming to 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 level 4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1)
mm C C m C
Class A V mm2 mm2 mm2 mA m A A 29.5-31.6 2 x 0.50.75 2 x 0.50.75 0.082.5; AWG2812 7 100 % 0.4 0.5 2 100 % Yes Yes
Flexible cable Flexible cable Flexible cage terminal and flexible cable
5.3
Input current Coincidence of inputs Maximum length of wires to switching components Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (24 V) Thermal current Ith Coincidence of outputs Short-circuit protection By flywheel diode Outputs switched off Watchdog in event of interference on the AS-Interface line AS-Interface profile Number of I/O Current consumption On AS-Interface On/OFF Data bits Status Command D0 (O) D1 (O) D2 (O) D3 (O) Status D0 (I) D1 (I) D2 (I) D3 (I) Parameters P0P3
mA Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4
3F 2 inputs/1 output 812 0 Off Not used Not used Not used Absent Absent Not used Not used Not used
1 On
7F 4 inputs/2 outputs 812 0 Off Off
1 On On
Present Present
Absent Absent Absent Absent
Present Present Present Present
5/22
Product data sheet

(continued)
2

D.O.L. starters
LA9 Z modules
AS-Interface modules (1) (2)

No. of Number channels of inputs 3 2 Number Output of outputs voltage V 1 c 24 Current Reference per output A 0.5 LA9 Z32810 Weight kg 0.070
AS-I PWR
c 24
0.5
LA9 Z32811
0.070
Accessories
LA9 Z3281p Description Busbar system mm 40 or 60 Width mm 45 Reference Weight kg 0.044
Modules without electrical connection, for use with all LA9 Zpp adapters
LA9 Z32744
54
LA9 Z32745
0.051
Module with PE + N polarity and 5-way connector
40
45
LA9 Z32740
0.091
54
LA9 Z32741
0.098
60
45
LA9 Z32742
0.085
54
LA9 Z32743
0.092
Replacement connectors and adapter cable

Description Colour Insulation Displacement Yellow Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) for auxiliary supply Black Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference LA9 Z32825 Weight kg 0.100
LA9 Z32826
0.100
(1) User's Manual to be ordered separately, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Supplied with connectors LA9 Z32825 and LA9 Z32826.
5.3
5/23
Presentation

Field devices
Enclosed starters, models LF1/LF2 and LF7/LF8
Presentation
LF7 and LF8 starters These are the entry level models in our range of starters which communicate on AS-Interface. These starters incorporate interface module LA9 Z32811 and are subdivided according to the different power connection methods (cable gland or Harting plug-in connectors) and Local/AS-Interface remote operating modes. These economical devices provide a simple and effective solution for building decentralised motor starters as near as possible to the motor. LF1 and LF2 starters These complete, intelligent starters incorporate pre-programmed functions and a fault-management function. They are available in insulated or metal enclosures to suit different environments. When fitted with Harting plug-in connectors (variant A74), they drastically reduce setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability of machines.
Decentralisation of machine starters

These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling. They are designed for building decentralised electrical installations, i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible to the motors they are to control. The decentralisation of the starters provides obvious advantages regarding power distribution to machines not grouped together, for example: motors driving a conveyor system. Traditional installation
Equipment floor-standing enclosure
5
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs Contactor + thermal overload relay
Decentralised installation
5.3
Power
Distribution enclosure
AS-Interface
M
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller AS-Interface starter
Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable. These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors (control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise: - a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker, - a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing), - an electronic control device or, for LF7 and LF8, an AS-Interface module, LA9 Z32811. Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.
5/24
Description

Field devices
Connection by cable gland

1 2 3
565204
4
565205
1 2 3
5 6 7
11
10 9
11
10 9
1 Yellow LED, illuminated when motor running. 2 Red LED illuminated when there is a motor fault (overload or short-circuit) or an internal fault in the starter, or in the event of a communication fault. 3 Green LED illuminated (steady light) when the AS-Interface line is powered and 13 flashing when information to the starter is being transmitted via the AS-Interface 12 line. 4 Knock-out for cable gland (included for auxiliary supply, power extension or output 6 control relay cabling, if required). 7 5 Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79). 7 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF2). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running (variant A79). Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF1) . Function: Pulsed operation (variant A79). 8 Cable gland for power supply cable. 9 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap) (variants A78 and A79). 10 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply, if required. 11 Cable gland for motor cabling. 12 Reset pushbutton. 13 Stop pushbutton.
Connection by plug-in connectors (variant A74)

1 2 3 8 4
565206
5
565207
1 2 3 8 4 14 15
13 12
11 9 10
13 12
11 9 10
1 23
565208
7
565209
1 2 3 4 14 15
1 Yellow LED, illuminated when motor running. 2 Red LED illuminated when there is a motor fault (overload or short-circuit) or an internal fault in the starter, or in the event of a communication fault. 3 Green LED illuminated (steady light) when the AS-Interface line is powered and flashing when information to the starter is being transmitted via the AS-Interface line. 4 Knock-out for cable gland (included) for auxiliary supply cabling, if required. 5 Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2) 6 Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 7 Female connector for power supply to the next motor starter (2) 8 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79). 9 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF2). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running (variant A79). Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF1). Function: Pulsed operation (variant A79). 10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2). 11 Knock-out for cable gland (included) for output control relay. 12 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap) (variants A78 and A79). 13 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply, if required. 14 Stop pushbutton. 15 Reset pushbutton.
(1) Extension cables: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Harting plug-in connector to be fitted to cable (not included).
5.3
13 12 8 11
9 10
13 12 8 11
9 10
5/25
Functions

Field devices
Auxiliary supply
AS-Interface c 24 V auxiliary supply Control-command and contactor supply Control-command supply Contactor supply
Power supply
LF1 and LF2 starters do not require an auxiliary supply to operate the contactors, since that provided by the AS-Interface line (yellow cable) is sufficient. Again, this reduces the cabling required. However, depending on the application, it is possible to supply the contactor coils by an external c 24 V source. Selection is made by repositioning a jumper within the starter. A c 24 V supply is necessary for LF7 and LF8 starters.
Motor command-control
5
11427
The functions provided by this range of starters are: - motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface, - D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing), - overload protection of the motor, - short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling. Starters with rotary control knob These starters provide the following functions: - load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob, - IP 55 degree of protection, double insulation. Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on or whilst in the off position and padlocked.
5.3
The rotary control knob has 3 positions: 0: switch-disconnector opened manually, I: switch-disconnector closed, Trip: switch-disconnector tripped.
11429
Starters with pushbutton control These starters provide the following functions: - pushbutton resetting of the protection device, - pushbutton stop, - IP 65 degree of protection, double insulation.
5/26
Functions (continued)

Field devices
Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the switch-disconnector function. Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a stop pushbutton (black) (1). In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker is possible after the motor has cooled down. Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a reset pushbutton (blue) (1).
11423
Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79) This starter variant is fitted with a 2-position local/AS-Interface switch which, depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions: b AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter. b Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC. b 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starters (LF2, LF8). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. Pushbutton for non-reversing starters (LF1, LF7). Function: Pulsed operation. Control via a control station
AS-Interface Message 2 Message 1
5.3
Power supply
It is possible to achieve manual local start control from a pushbutton control station connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. Actuation of the pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller (message 1) which passes it on to the starter (message 2).
(1) Only a rotary control knob is available for starters LF7 and LF8.
5/27

Field devices
Local signalling
Visual indication of the various operating states is provided by LEDs (3 LEDs for LF1/LF2 and 1 LED for LF7/LF8) located on the enclosure cover.
Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation. External safety functions are not processed by the starter. Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 60204 9.2.5.4). Protection against sudden restarting, after an accidental power supply failure, must be provided by a safety device separate from the starter. The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop function if the machine is fitted with other actuators. The control operators on the starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 60204 10.2.1. Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since this control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.
Loss of control (LF1, LF2 only)

When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC. In this case, it can be configured to adopt the following fallback conditions: - motor set to stop (applications: potentially dangerous movements), - motor set to run in direction 1 (forward) (applications: fans, pumps), - or motor continues to run as it was immediately prior to loss of control (application: suction grippers). The fallback configuration is set via AS-Interface. The default configuration is with the motor set to stop.
Output control relay
(LF1, LF2 only)
This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (24 V, 1 A), via AS-Interface.
5.3
AS-Interface
5/28

Field devices
Starters with sensor connected

Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or 2-wire limit switches can be connected directly to the starter. The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via AS-Interface. In addition, for LF1 and LF2 starters only, the sensor signal can be processed locally to achieve a Reflex motor stop. This function is selected by means of micro switches. 127 other selections are reserved for future applications. Reflex stop (LF1, LF2 only) There are two types of Reflex stop function: b Reflex stop function n 1 Sensor n 1 directly controls stopping of the motor. After a new start instruction, the motor restarts (stop instruction then start instruction). A Reflex stop makes it possible to achieve precise and repetitive positioning, independently of the AS-Interface and PLC cycle times. For reversing starters, sensor n 1 acts on both running directions. Sensor n 2 does not affect Reflex operation.
Sensor 2 AS-Interface Rev
Sensor 1
Forw
Time
Instruction from AS-Interface Motor controlled by the starter Information from sensor 1 = component present
5.3
b Reflex stop function n 2 Sensor n 1 controls stopping of the motor when it is running in the forward direction. Sensor n 2 controls stopping of the motor when it is running in reverse direction. A new start instruction (stop instruction then start instruction) causes restarting of the motor even if a component is still detected. Sensor n 2 does not affect forward running. Sensor n 1 does not affect reverse running.
5/29
Characteristics

Field devices
Environment
Starter type Conforming to standards LF1, LF2 IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1, IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) Standard version Starters with rotary control knob Starters with pushbutton control Storage C C Operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane m TC IP 55 IP 65 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 40 2000 LF7, LF8
Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device conforming to IEC 60439-1 Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating
AS-Interface N 18601 TH IP 55 - 40+ 85 - 10+ 40
30
30
90
90
Flame resistance of equipment Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 5150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Safe separation of circuits
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures
960 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Immunity to non-dissipating shockwave (Uimp) Material and colour of enclosure base Material and colour of enclosure cover Resistance to chemical agents
kV
6: power 6: power 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fibre, black throughout Sheet steel, RAL 7032 Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fibre, grey RAL 7032 throughout Sheet steel, RAL 7032 Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.
5.3
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 kV kV kV 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 3) 4/2: power (level 4) 2/0.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 2) 10 10 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs
Immunity to conducted radio-frequency disturbance Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1)
V/m V/m
Class B
Class A
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference.
Functions : pages 5/26 to 5/29
References : pages 5/34 to 5/37
5/30
Characteristics (continued)

Field devices
Connection
Starter type Power supply cabling Screw clamp terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Clamping capacity mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm LF1, LF7 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15 LF2, LF8 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 1x4 1x4 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15
Cable gland (Pg 16) Motor cabling Screw clamp terminals
Cable gland (Pg 16) Auxiliary 24 V supply and output control relay cabling
Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Clamping capacity
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm
Terminal block Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (2) Cable gland Clamping capacity Pg 13 (included) Pg 16
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm mm
Pole electrical characteristics

Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (circuit-breaker) Conforming to 947-4-1 (motor starter) Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to 230/240 V IEC 60947-2 400/415 V Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2 C.O.: closing, opening In category AC-3 Maximum operating rate A AC-3 V V Hz kA kA 415 415 50/60 > 100 > 100 Yes
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Breaking capacity (Ics and Icu) Sensitivity to phase failure
Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)

Mechanical durability Electrical durability Service class C.O. C.O. C.O./h 100 000 100 000 25
5.3
Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)

Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability Electrical durability In operating cycles per hour In millions of operating cycles In category AC-3 to 8.5 A 3600 30 800 000 (1) Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver 5.5. (2) Flat screwdriver 3.5. 5
5/31

Field devices
Sensor inputs
Starter type Connection Nominal input values Voltage Maximum current available per sensor Sensor supply (including ripple) At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current V mA V V mA V mA k ms ms LF1, LF2 (A78 and A79) M12 c 24 50 1930 c >12.6 > 4.9 c <5 < 2.1 >2 7 9.8 2 2-wire/3-wire None Resistive for PNP type sensor LF7, LF8 (A78) M12 c 24 7 2 2-wire
Input value limits
Input impedance Filtering time Maximum number of sensors Proximity sensor compatibility Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line Input type Typical Maximum
Output control relay (for starters LF1 and LF2 with variants A78 and A79)
Operating voltage limit Thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Service life Resistive on an a 24 V load load AC-12 Inductive load AC-14 Service life Resistive on a c 24 V load load DC-12 Resistive load DC-3 Response time Contact type a.c. supply d.c. supply Millions of operating cycles V V A 24 24 5 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 1 (2) in 1 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, 1 (2) in 0.5 A current, 5 (3) in 0.25 A current. 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 0.2 (1) in 2 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, > 1 (3) in 0.25 A current. ms ms < 10 < 10 C/O
Millions of operating cycles
Latching Unlatching
5.3
Built-in protection
Isolation
None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted Against overloads and short-circuits Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators Against a.c. or d.c. inductive overloads V 1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s rms voltage between output and earth or between output and internal logic Insulation resistance between m > 1000 output terminals and AS-Interface (1) 0.2 of an operation (C/O) per second. (2) 0.5 of an operation (C/O) per second. (3) 1 operation (C/O) per second.
5/32

Field devices
Consumption
Starter type Product configured Product configured for for supply from the supply from an AS-Interface line auxiliary c 24 V supply LF1 LF2 LF1 LF2 LF7 De-energised 80 mA 90 mA 80 mA 90 mA 8 mA Inrush 190 mA 200 mA 80 mA 90 mA 110 mA 120 mA 80 mA 90 mA 12 mA Sealed With sensor Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 15 mA (signal = 1) Relay 25 mA De-energised Inrush Energised 0 110 mA 30 mA 0 110 mA 30 mA 0 750 mA 750 mA
Current consumption
From the AS-Interface line
LF8 8 mA 12 mA
From the auxiliary c 24 V supply
0 750 mA 750 mA
Data exchange characteristics

AS-Interface profile Data bits (commands) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Data bits (status) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) Parameter bits Bit value Parameter P0 Parameter P1 Parameter P2 Parameter P3 7.D (3) =0 =1 7F For commands, please refer to the LF7 and LF8 starter schemes
Stop - forward running Start - forward running Stop - reverse running Start - reverse running (2) Deactivation of Activation of control relay control relay Not Used Not Used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Sensor 1 signal absent (1) Sensor 2 signal absent (1) =0 Maintain operational state Fallback condition Start Not used =1 Ready Running Sensor 1 signal present (1) Sensor 2 signal present (1) = 1 (default value) Assume fallback condition Fallback condition Stop Not used Not used Not used Not used For states, please refer to the LF7 and LF8 starter schemes.
5.3
Reflex function Reflex function Not used inhibited enabled (1) Only applicable to starters with sensors (variants A78 and A79). (2) Only on LF2 or LF8. (3) Please consult the users guide supplied with the product.
5/33
Product data sheet

Field devices
Enclosed starters, models LF1/LF2 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) IP 55 - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors LFp P: polycarbonate (2). LFp MP: sheet steel
Starters in insulated enclosures

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW
11427
400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
Circuit-breaker adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
Starter Reference
Weight kg
Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with blue handle on black background (3)
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 LF1 P00D (4) LF1 P02D LF1 P03D LF1 P04D LF1 P05D LF1 P06D LF1 P07D LF1 P08D LF1 P10D LF1 P14D LF1 P16D 1.020 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350
LF1 PppD
11427
5
LF1 PppDA78
11432
Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with blue handle on black background (3)
Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF2 P00D (4) LF2 P02D LF2 P03D LF2 P04D LF2 P05D LF2 P06D LF2 P07D LF2 P08D LF2 P10D LF2 P14D LF2 P16D 1.020 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600
5.3
LF2 PppDA79A74
Starters in metal enclosures

Add the letter M after LF1 or LF2 in the references selected above. Example: LF1 P02D becomes LF1 MP02D. To order a starter that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF1 or LF2 and the letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF1 P02D becomes LF1 MP02DU. Metal enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors.
Variants (pre-assembled)
Description
11431
For mounting on
LF2 MPppDA74A79
With HARTING connectors (6) Insulated or metal enclosure With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure and local/AS-Interface control With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79 (1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. (2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the letter R to the end of the reference. Example: LF1 MP02DR. (4) Supplied without circuit-breaker GV2 P. (5) Example: LF1 P02DA79A74. (6) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately).
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (5) A74 A78 A79
5/34
Product data sheet

Field devices
Enclosed starters, models LF1/LF2 M
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Insulated enclosure Metal enclosure Operation IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) IP 65 IP 55 - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors LFp M: polycarbonate (2). LFp MM: sheet steel

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW
11429
400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
Circuit-breaker Adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
Starter Reference
Weight kg
Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control

0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 LF1 M00D (3) LF1 M02D LF1 M03D LF1 M04D LF1 M05D LF1 M06D LF1 M07D LF1 M08D LF1 M10D LF1 M14D LF1 M16D 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300
LF1 MppD
11426
Reversing starters with pushbutton control

Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF2 M00D (3) LF2 M02D LF2 M03D LF2 M04D LF2 M05D LF2 M06D LF2 M07D LF2 M08D LF2 M10D LF2 M14D LF2 M16D 1.000 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550
LF1 MppDA78
11425
5.3
LF1 MppDA79
Starters in metal enclosures

Add the letter M after LF1 or LF2 in the references selected above. Example: LF1 M02D becomes LF1 MM02D. To order a starter that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF1 or LF2 and the letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF1 M02D becomes LF1 MM02DU. Metal enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors.
Description
11432
For mounting on
LF2 MMppDA79A74
With HARTING connectors (5) Insulated or metal enclosure With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure With connections for 2 sensors and Insulated enclosure local/AS-Interface control With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79 (1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. (2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Supplied without GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker. (4) Example: LF1 M02DA79A74. (5) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately).
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A74 A78 A79
5/35
Product data sheet

Field devices
Enclosed starters, model LF7 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation IP 55 - 10 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors Polycarbonate (1)

Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with red handle on yellow background
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
11637
Starter Reference
Weight kg 1.020 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350
LF7 P00D (2) LF7 P02D LF7 P03D LF7 P04D LF7 P05D LF7 P06D LF7 P07D LF7 P08D LF7 P10D LF7 P14D LF7 P16D
LF7 PppD
11633
LF7 PppDA74
Description With HARTING connectors (4) Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A74
5.3
With local/AS-Interface control (5) A79 (1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker. (3) Example: LF1 P02DA79A74. (4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately). (5) LF7 enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors (2-wire only).
5/36
Product data sheet

Field devices
Enclosed starters, model LF8 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation IP 55 - 10 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors Polycarbonate (1)

Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with red handle on yellow background
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
11637
Starter Reference
Weight kg 1.020 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600
LF8 P00D (2) LF8 P02D LF8 P03D LF8 P04D LF8 P05D LF8 P06D LF8 P07D LF8 P08D LF8 P10D LF8 P14D LF8 P16D
LF8 PppDA78
11633
LF2 PppDA78A74
Description With HARTING connectors (4) Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A74
5.3
With connection for 2 sensors (2-wire only)
A78
With local/AS-Interface control
A79
(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker. (3) Example: LF8 P02DA79A74. (4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately).
5/37
Product data sheet

Field devices
TeSys U enclosed starters, models LF1/LF2 AU
Prsentation
TeSys U enclosed starters are decentralized electrical devices communicating on the AS-Interface bus. They are used to control an electric motor via the AS-Interface bus that links it to a remotely-located PLC. These starters are designed to control three-phase AC motors with a motor rating less than 12 A. They can also be used to control single-phase motors. In addition to control, they also protect motors against overloads and short-circuits. Installing starters as close as possible to the motors considerably reduces the length of the cables required for the power and control/signal circuits, thus reducing the overall cost of the electrical installation: b Reduction in the cost of installation manpower, cables and cable ways. b Improved flexibility of the installation: easier to add motors. There are 4 criteria when selecting a starter model: b Reversing or non-reversing b With or without reflex function b With or without local control b With or without additional output.
Motor Stop Functions TeSys U enclosed starters are designed to control electric motors, mainly for conveyor systems. Motor stopping is controlled by position sensors in two different ways, depending on how the sensors are connected: b Sensors connected directly to the starter: Reflex stop. Motor stopping is controlled locally via the sensors by direct action on the starter. The state of the sensors is also transmitted to the PLC by the AS-Interface bus. b Sensors connected to the starter via the AS-Interface bus: Standard stop. Motor stopping is controlled remotely from the PLC according to the state of the sensors transmitted on the AS-Interface bus. Local Control of Starters Depending on the model, starters feature a local control option. This enables manual control of the motor independently of the PLC. Starters are controlled locally using two knobs on the front of the enclosure: b An Auto/0/Man knob: v Auto, only the PLC controls the motor. Manual commands are not taken into account, v 0, starter off: neither the PLC, nor manual commands are taken into account. The outputs are at state 0, v Man, only local commands I/0/II are taken into account. PLC commands are nottaken into account. b An On knob I/0/II or a pushbutton depending on the model: v I, motor runs in direction 1, v 0, motor stopped, v II, motor runs in direction 2.
5.3
Description
The front panel of TeSys U enclosed starters comprises: 1 Enclosure screws 2 AS-Interface bus communication interface (display of bus and I/O states) 3 TeSys U contactor-breaker (access window) 4 Reversing or non-reversing manual control (with LFp AU12Mp12 models) 5 Auto/man control with key-locking (with LFp AU12Mp12 models) 6 2 cable glands for power supply and power daisy chain 7 One cable gland for power to motor 8 4 x M12 connector for connecting AS-Interface bus/c 24 V, sensor 1, sensor 2 and O3 additional output (depending on model).
2 3
4 5
6 7
5/38
Product data sheet

(continued)
2

Field devices
TeSys U enclosed starters, models LF1/LF2 AU
Characteristics
Starter type AS-Interface AS-Interface version AS-Interface profile Maximum number of addresses AS-Interface supply Consumption on the AS-Interface line Diagnostic AS-Interface signalling Inputs/Outputs LF1 AU12Mp1p / LF2 AU12Mp1p V2.1 S7.A.7.0 (I/O code. ID code. ID1. ID2) 62 26.531.6 50 3 DELs: ASI PWR (green), AUX PWR (green) and Fault (red), 4 yellow DELs: I1I4 (Ready, Auto, Sensor 1, Sensor 2) 3 yellow DELs: O1...O3 (Direction 1, Direction 2 and Output 3) 12 12, AC-43 460 (3-phase), 265 (single-phase) 4060 Hz 600 4 10 3,600 cycles/hour c 19.226.4 75 (non-reversing without reflex), 155 (non-reversing, with reflex), 235 (reversing, with reflex) At state 1: U > 11 V and I > 6 mA, at state 0: U < 5 V and I < 2 mA IP 54 window closed, IP 20 window open, conforming IEC/EN 60947-1 - 20+ 60 (max. + 55 with standard control units) 2000 Sheet steel, RAL 7032 200 x 300 x 153 (197 with key-locking) IEC/EN 60068-2-6/-2-27, IEC/EN 60947-1/-2/-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-4-2/4-3/4.4/4-5/4.6, IEC/ EN 60664-1, IEC 61326, IEC 60204-1 AS-Interface n 18601
V mA
TeSys U power circuit
Rated thermal current Rated operating Current Voltage Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Max. number of operations TeSys U Supply voltage control circuit Typical max. current Sensors logical state TeSys commun Degree of protection Operating temperature Max. operating altitude Material and colour of enclosure Dimensions (W x H x D) Conforming to standards Product certifications
A A V( V kV kA V mA
C m mm
5
References
TeSys U 12 A non-reversing starters in metal enclosures
Reflex function Local control No No Yes No Yes Additionnal output No Yes No No Yes No Reference LF1 AU12MS11 LF1 AU12MS13 LF1 AU12MS12 LF1 AU12MR11 LF1 AU12MR13 LF1 AU12MR12 Weight kg
Yes
TeSys U 12 A reversing starters in metal enclosures

Reflex function Local control LFp AU12Mp11/13 LFp AU12Mp12 No No Yes No Yes Additionnal output No Yes No No Yes No Reference LF2 AU12MS11 LF2 AU12MS13 LF2 AU12MS12 LF2 AU12MR11 LF2 AU12MR13 LF2 AU12MR12 Weight kg
5.3
Yes
c 24 V standard control units

Maximum standard power ratings motors 50/60 Hz Setting range Single-phase 3-phase 400 V 3-phase 460 V (class 10) 230 V 0,291.15 kW 0,692.76 kW 0,060.24 kW 0,140.56 kW 0,52 kW 1.24.8 kW 0,260.67 kW 0,62.4 kW 1.445.76 kW 0.150.6 A 0.351.4 A 1.255 A 312 A Reference Weight kg LUCA X6BL LUCA 1XBL LUCA 05BL LUCA 12BL 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135
LUCA ppBL
Accessories for TeSys U enclosed starters Description Vente par Utilisation

Bornier pour alimentation Pattes de fixation Raccordement par le haut (4 x 1,5 mm2) Pattes orientables pour coffret. Non 4 inclut avec LFpAU12Mp1p Q. indiv. 1
Reference unitaire GV1 G09 AE3 FX122
Weight kg 0.040 0.080
5/39
Product data sheet

Field devices
Accessories for enclosed starters, variant A74
Insulated enclosures, models LF1/LF2 P, LF1/LF2 M, LF7 P and LF8 P (connection by plug-in connectors)
Power extension (daisy-chaining) Terminal
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFC
LA9 LFT
Metal enclosures, models LF1/LF2 P and LF1/LF2 M (connection by plug-in connectors)
5.3
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFMM
LA9 LFFM40
5/40
Product data sheet

(continued)
2

Field devices
Accessories for enclosed starters, variant A74
Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74

Presentation In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF starters are fitted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to allow 2 types of connection topology.
Connection using tap links
LF LF
This configuration avoids having to switch off the power supply when replacing or adding one or more starters. Although machine availability is increased, a larger number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.
Connection using power extension (daisychaining)
The number of power connections per starter is halved, but continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the upstream starters are disconnected or removed. With LF LF this type of installation, special precautions must be taken because removal of a starter at the head of the power supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be removed under load (prohibited by standard EN60204 above 3kW/400V). The 2 connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up of power extension configurations by the user.
Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)

Enclosure Capacity application mm2 Power 3-pole extension 1.5 or 2.5 Kit contents For Reference mounting on IP 55 LA9 LFC enclosures LF1, LF2, LF7, LF8 IP 55 LA9 LFT enclosures LF1, LF2, LF7, LF8 Weight kg 0.150
Terminal
3-pole 1.5 or 2.5
1 female connector 2 male connectors and corresponding power sockets (1) 1 female connector 1 male connector, 1 blanking plug and corresponding power sockets (1)
0.110
Crimping contacts
Type Male Capacity mm2 1.5 2.5 Female 1.5 2.5 Sold in lots of 100 100 100 100 Unit reference LA9 LFM15 LA9 LFM25 LA9 LFF15 LA9 LFF25 Weight kg 0.120 0.120 0.160 0.150
5.3
Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74

Connection kit
For connector Input Kit contents 1 metal cover 2 size 16 cable glands 1 blanking plug 1 female power socket (3P + earth) 4 female crimping contacts (2) 1 metal cover 1 size 16 cable gland 1 female power socket (3P + earth) (1) Capacity mm2 1.5 2.5 Thermal current A 10 10 For Reference mounting on Metal enclosures LF1, LF2 LA9 LFFM40 Weight kg 0.260
Output to motor
Metal enclosures LF1, LF2
LA9 LFMM
0.060
Crimping contacts
Type Voltage Sold in lots of V 400 100 400 100 Unit reference LA9 LFM15 LA9 LFM25 Weight kg 0.120 0.120
Male
(1) Crimping contacts to be ordered separately. (2) For flexible cable, 4 mm2 maximum, Ith: 16 A, Us: 400 V.
5/41
Product data sheet

Dedicated components
Control stations and adapter for control and signalling units
Environment
Control stations XAL S200pE Product certifications Ambient air temperature around the device Degree of protection Dimensions Vibration resistance Shock resistance Materials Enclosure flame resistance Mechanical life Connection Adapter XAL SZ1E for control and signalling units Product certifications Ambient air temperature Operation around the device Storage Degree of protection Connection Operation Storage C C AS-Interface N 72301 - 25+ 70 - 40+ 70 IP 65 68 x 104 x 102 5 gn (f = 2500 Hz) 70 gn conforming to IEC 68-2-27 (pushbuttons) Polycarbonate enclosure, coloured grey RAL 7035 and grey RAL 7021 NF C 20-455: 960 C, UL 94: V0 3 million operating cycles By M12 male connector
WxHxD
mm
C C
UL (pending) - 25+ 70 - 40+ 70 IP 20 4 wires and 3 wires 0.22 mm2
mm2
Electrical characteristics
Control stations XAL S200pE Power supply Current consumption, AS-Interface line Contact blocks Illuminated pushbutton LEDs Short-circuit protection XAL S2001E, XAL S2002E XAL S2003E mA mA Via the AS-Interface line < 45 < 80 1 N/C and 1 N/O, 24 V, 5mA LED, c 24 V, 20 mA Yes, for the LED indicators
XAL S2003E
Adapter XAL SZ1E for control and signalling units Power supply Current consumption, AS-Interface line Inputs Outputs
mA
Via the AS-Interface line < 80 For 2 N/C or N/O discrete contacts: 24 V, 5 mA For 2 LED indicators: c 24 V, 20 mA With short-circuit protection
Communication characteristics
Control stations XAL S200pE AS-Interface profile Data bits (Inputs) Bit value D2 D3 Data bits (Outputs) (XAL S2003E only) Bit value D0 D1 Parameters P0 to P3 S-B.A.E 0 Pushbutton I unoperated (N/O contact open) Pushbutton O operated (N/C contact open) 0 Green indicator off Red indicator off Not used 1 Pushbutton I operated (N/O contact closed) Pushbutton O unoperated (N/C contact closed) 1 Green indicator on Red indicator on
5.4
Parameter bits
Adapter XAL SZ1E for control and signalling units AS-Interface profile Data bits (Inputs) Bit value D2 D3 Data bits (Outputs) Bit value D0 D1 Parameters P0 to P3
S-B.A.E 0 Pushbutton 1, contact open Pushbutton 2, contact open 0 Indicator 1 off Indicator 2 off Not used
1 Pushbutton 1, contact closed Pushbutton 2, contact closed 1 Indicator 1 on Indicator 2 on
Parameter bits
5/42
Product data sheet

(continued)

Control stations and adapter for control and signalling units
References
Control stations for AS-Interface cabling system
Description Control stations With 2 spring return flush pushbuttons, 22 mm Pushbutton colours Pushbutton I (N/O contact): white Pushbutton O (N/C contact): black Reference XAL S2001E Weight kg 0.190
Pushbutton I (N/O contact): green Pushbutton O (N/C contact): red
XAL S2002E
0.190
XAL S2001, XAL S2002
XAL S2003
Control stations With 2 spring return flush, illuminated pushbuttons, 22 mm
Pushbutton 1 (N/O contact): green Pushbutton 2 (N/C contact): red
XAL S2003E
0.220
Adapter for control and signalling units

Description 2 input/2 output interfaces Reference XAL SZ1E Weight kg 0.050
5
XAL SZ1E
5.4
5/43
Product data sheet

Illuminated indicator banks type XVB
XVB illuminated beacons and indicator banks are visual or audible signalling units used mainly to indicate machine operation sequences and to check status from a distance. They are visible through 360. Examples: machine start, machine stop, no material, call technical personnel, fault signalling, etc. XVB indicator banks are connected to the AS-Interface cabling system means of a base unit containing an integrated circuit (ASIC).
2 XVB C6pp 4 XVB C081
Indicator bank
For customer assembly Variable composition, with up to 4 illuminated or audible signalling units, supplied unassembled (for assembly by the user). It comprises: 1 A base unit, incorporating a removable terminal block and bottom or side cable entry; an M12 outgoing connector for the AS-Interface line. 2 1 to 4 coloured lens units: green, red, orange, blue, clear or yellow. 3 Or 1 audible signalling unit. (Maximum configuration: - 4 illuminated lens units or - 3 illuminated lens units + 1 audible signalling unit). 4 A top cover (except with discharge tube unit). The illuminated or audible signalling units stack vertically and are easily locked and unlocked by an integral ring nut. Only one flash discharge tube unit can be fitted on each indicator bank, always at the top. Electrical connections between each unit are made automatically during assembly.
2 XVB Cppp
3 XVB C9p
XVB CY2
11 1 XVB C21p 9 XVB C22
Accessories 5 Support tube 100, 400 or 800 mm. 6 Support tube concealment cover. 7 Fixing plate screwed onto tube for mounting on a horizontal surface. 8 Fixing plate for mounting on a vertical surface. 9 Coloured markers (1). 10 Legend holders with legend (1). 11 Legends that attach to locking ring of individual signalling units for identification.
Setting-up
10
XVB C23
Fixing Base fitted directly onto panel by means of 2 screws or by means of a plate screwed to the support tube. Cabling By means of a removable terminal block incorporated in the base unit (simplified wiring). The screw and captive cable clamp terminals are protected to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
(1) These allow the position of the various units (illuminated or audible) to be marked for identification in the event of disassembly.
5.4
6 XVB C020
5 XVB C02
7 XVB C11
8 XVB C12 (1)
5/44
Product data sheet

(continued)

Environment
Product certifications Conforming to standards Protective treatment Ambient air temperature Standard version Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 68.2.27 Conforming to IEC 68.2.6 Tube mounting Direct mounting on base unit Conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010 Conforming to UL 508 Illuminated lens units Base unit and top cover Tube Fixing plate C C Standard version CSA, UL (pending) IEC/EN 60947-5-1 TC - 20+ 70 - 10+ 50 25 gn 5 gn Class I Class II IP 65 Type 4X NEMA "Indoor" Polycarbonate Polycarbonate Painted aluminium Zamak
Shock resistance Vibration resistance Protection against electric shocks conforming to IEC 536 Degree of protection
Material
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Voltage limits Consumption Conforming to IEC 947-1 Conforming to IEC 947-5-1 LED unit Steady Flashing Unit with discharge tube (on energisation) Audible signalling units Conforming to IEC 947-1 Illuminated units, steady Units with discharge circuit (flash lamp with integral tube) V V mA mA mA mA kV 250 0.85 to 1.10 Un (Un: nominal voltage) z 24 V: < 30 z 24 V: < 40 z 24 V: 5J unit: < 430 z 1248 V: < 20 V U imp = 4 Bulbs with BA 15d base fitting, minimum power 5 W, maximum power 10 W 13 (integral high intensity tube) with clear lens unit: 5J tube 26 (integral high intensity tube) with clear lens unit: 10J tube
Rated impulse withstand voltage Bulb type Illuminating power
cds
Audible signalling unit
Continuous or intermittent signal dB Fundamental frequency kHz Common to all 5 units Depending on number of units Maximum clamping capacity on protected, ready-to-tighten, screw and captive cable clamp terminals Flashing units Units with discharge circuit mm2
90 at 1 m 2.8 1 terminal referenced C 1 or 5 terminals referenced 1 to 5 1 x 1.5 with cable end
Terminal referencing
Connection
5.4
Frequency of illuminated units
Hz Hz
1 1
5/45
Product data sheet

(continued)

Characteristics specific to the AS-Interface base unit

Supply to components Via the AS-Interface line External No-load Under load Supply via the AS-Interface line External supply V V mA mA mA A 2431.6 19.230 PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) 30 (with supply via the AS-Interface line or external supply) 250 (with supply via the AS-Interface line), 30 (with external supply) 200 max for 1 to 4 units 0.7 max per unit, 2 max for 4 units S.7.F N 25701 Bit value D0 (Input) D1 (Input) D2 (Input) D3 (Input) 0 Unit 1: fault Unit 2: fault Unit 3: fault Unit 4: fault Unit 1: off Unit 2: off Unit 3: off Unit 4: off Unit 1: flashing Unit 2: flashing Unit 3: flashing Unit 4: flashing By 2 links By M12 connector 1 Unit 1: on Unit 2: on Unit 3: on Unit 4: on Unit 1: on Unit 2: on Unit 3: on Unit 4: on Unit 1: steady Unit 2: steady Unit 3: steady Unit 4: steady
Current consumption, AS-Interface line Current supplied to the illuminated or audible signalling units
AS-Interface cabling system profile AS-Interface cabling system certification Data bits State of unit diagnostics
Control of units D0 (Output) D1 (Output) D2 (Output) D3 (Output) Unit parameter P0 setting bits P1 P2 P3
Supply via the AS-Interface line or external supply Connection to the AS-Interface line
Programming of the supply
References
AS-Interface base unit attached directly to tube
Description
560580
Type AS-Interface
Reference XVB C21A
Base unit + top cover with M12 side cable entry
Weight kg 0.190
Base unit + cover with bottom cable entry, 1 m length flying lead with M12 moulded end connector (1)
AS-Interface
XVB C21B
0.300
5.4
522039
XVB C21A
Illuminated lens units, steady

Description Illuminated lens units for use with XVB C21p base unit Indicator LED supplied z 24 V Colour Green Red Orange XVB C2Bp Blue Clear Yellow Reference XVB C2B3 XVB C2B4 XVB C2B5 XVB C2B6 XVB C2B7 XVB C2B8 Weight kg 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150
(1) Can only be fitted using support tubes and fixing plate XVB C11.
5/46
Product data sheet

(continued)

Illuminated indicator banks (XVB), lens units and base units
522041
References (continued)
Illuminated lens units with flash discharge tube
Description Illuminated lens units For use with base unit XVB C21p Light source Flash discharge tube 5 joules z 24 V Colour Green Red Orange Blue Clear Yellow Green Red Orange Blue Clear Yellow Reference XVB C6B3 XVB C6B4 XVB C6B5 XVB C6B6 XVB C6B7 XVB C6B8 XVB C8B3 XVB C8B4 XVB C8B5 XVB C8B6 XVB C8B7 XVB C8B8 Weight kg 0.295 0.295 0.295 0.295 0.295 0.295 0.305 0.305 0.305 0.305 0.305 0.305
522040
XVB C6pp
XVB C8pp
Flash discharge tube 10 joules z 24 V
522042
Audible signalling unit

Description Buzzer unit 90 dB at 1 m - adjustable 70 or 90 dB - continuous or intermittent modes (microswitch) - for use with base unit XVB C21p XVB C9pp Characteristics z 1248 V Reference XVB C9B Weight kg 0.170
Accessories common to beacons and indicator banks

Description Aluminium support tube, black paint finish Aluminium support tube, unpainted
821009 821012
Characteristics 100 mm 400 mm 800 mm 100 mm 400 mm 800 mm
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Unit reference XVB C02 XVB C03 XVB C04 XVB C02A XVB C03A XVB C04A XVB C020 XVB C030 XVB C040 XVB C11
Weight kg 0.100 0.350 0.690 0.100 0.350 0.690 0.080 0.305 0.610 0.170
XVB C02 XVB C020
Support tube 100 mm concealment cover 400 mm 800 mm Fixing plate for horizontal surface
For mounting on tube 1 XVB C0p For direct mounting 1 on base unit or with plate XVB C11 + tube XVB C0p 10 W 6.5 W White Green Red Blue YellowOrange 10 10 1 1 1 1 1
821010
Fixing plate for vertical surface
XVB C12
0.380
Incandescent bulbs 24 V BA 15d base fitting XVB C11 LEDs BA 15d base fitting 24 V
DL1 BLB DL1 BEB DL1 BDB1 DL1 BDB3 DL1 BDB4 DL1 BDB6 DL1 BDB8
0.090 0.090 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
5.4
821011
Accessories specific to indicator banks

Description Cover only Set of coloured markers Set of 5 legend holders Sheet of 85 legends Sheet of 52 legends SIS labelling software Characteristics 6 colours Identification of stacked units on base For base unit legend holder XVB C23 Identification of stacked units on locking ring Creation of legends (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish) Reference XVB C081 XVB C22 XVB C23 XVB CY1 XVB CY2 XBY 2U Weight kg 0.030 0.001 0.002 0.005 0.005 0.010
XVB C12
5/47
Operating principle

Safety solutions
AS-Interface Safety at work monitors
Operating principle
Programmable controller
Yellow cable
Standard interface AS-Interface Safety at work monitor Safety interface for Emergency stop button Safety interface for Emergency stop mushroom head pushbutton stations Safety interface M12 connectors Safety interface for light curtains Standard interface ISO M16 safety interface for safety switch
AS-Interface supply
AS-Interface for sensors and actuators has evolved. Standard process information and information relating to safety can now be transmitted over the same cable. Capable of managing safety functions up to level 4 of standard EN-954-1/ISO 13849-1 and conforming to standard IEC 61508 (2000), the AS-Interface Safety at work system meets the needs of the most common safety applications, such as: b monitoring of Emergency stops with instantaneous break contacts (stop category 0), b monitoring of Emergency stops with delayed break contacts (stop category 1), b monitoring of switches with and without interlocking, b monitoring of light curtains, etc. Parameters for options relative to the selected safety function (for example, start button monitoring) may be set for all pre-defined, certified functions. Safety is incorporated into AS-Interface by adding a safety monitor and safety interfaces connected together with other standard AS-Interface components on the yellow cable. Safety information is exchanged only between the safety monitor, the AS-Interface line master and the safety interfaces. This is transparent for the other standard AS-Interface components. Based on this principle, existing AS-Interface installations can be updated with safety functions without having to replace the components (masters, I/O interfaces, power supplies, etc.). Safety circuits are diagnosed readily, and with no additional wiring, by standard AS-Interface master communicating with the safety monitor(s) via the yellow cable. The ASI SWIN2 configuration software is included on the Safety Suite CD-Rom. The AS-Interface Safety at work system is configured using software ASI SWIN2 running on Windows. A library of pre-defined and certified safety functions is made available by the software and the user can graphically select the desired safety functions, even at the last minute, by using the Drag and drop method in the configuration software. Knowledge of a programming language or specific tools is not necessary to parameter the system. The configuration is loaded into the safety monitor(s) by means of a PC by carrying out a secure serial transmission and using the parameter setting connector on the front face of the monitor. To meet various safety requirements, the AS-Interface Safety and work monitor is available in two versions: b monitors for basic monitoring of safety devices, b monitors for enhanced monitoring of safety devices. AS-Interface Safety at work monitors for basic and enhanced monitoring are available with: b 1 safety output with 2 contacts, or b 2 independent safety outputs with 2 x 2 contacts. In addition to safety outputs with volt-free contacts, AS-Interface Safety at work safety monitors are equipped, depending on the model, with one or two solid-state signalling outputs and LEDs on the front face to indicate the status of the system and of the monitoring circuits. To monitor more safety functions simultaneously or to stop several safety circuits at different locations, an increased number of safety monitors can be used on AS-Interface. The safety interfaces are connected directly on the yellow cable via an insulation displacement connector (IDC). Their addressing is carried out using self-addressing via AS-Interface master or manually, using addressing terminal ASI TERV2. The compactness of the safety interfaces enables their direct attachment to control devices such as Emergency stop buttons or switches. In addition to interfaces that can be attached to products, versions with 1 or 2 M12 connectors are also available.
5.5
5/48
Functions

Safety solutions
Monitoring functions
AS-Interface Safety at work monitors For basic monitoring of safety devices ASI SAFEMON1/2 - Emergency stops - Safety switches - Safety light curtains For enhanced monitoring of safety devices ASI SAFEMONpB - Emergency stops - Safety switches - Safety light curtains - Button for validation of linked devices - Conditionally dependent devices - Devices with bouncing contacts - OR (up to 6 devices) - AND - FLIP FLOP - On-delay - Off-delay - PULSE on positive edge - Feedback loop - Feedback loop monitoring over AS-Interface - Automatic start - Start monitored by the AS-Interface slave - Start monitored by connection to monitor - Start monitored by the safety interface - Stop category 1 - Stop category 0 -
Monitoring of safety devices
Logic functions
- OR (up to 2 devices)
External devices monitoring (EDM)
- Feedback loop
Start devices
Automatic start Start monitored by the AS-Interface slave Start monitored by connection to monitor Start monitored by the safety interface
Output devices
- Stop category 1 - Stop category 0
5.5
5/49
Characteristics

Safety solutions
Characteristics
AS-Interface Safety at work monitor type Products designed for max. use in safety related parts of control systems (conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1) Conformity to standards ASI SAFEMON1, ASI SAFEMON1B Category 4 max. ASI SAFEMON2, ASI SAFEMON2B
Product certifications Dimensions AS-Interface profile WxHxP
IEC 61508 (2000), EN/IEC 60204-1 (1998), EN 50295 (1999), EN 61000-6-2 (2000), EN 50081-2 (1993), EN/IEC 61496-1 (1997), EN/IEC 60947-5-1 (1997), EN 574 (1996)/ISO 13851 UL, CSA, TV 45 x 104 x 120 7.F mA 44 IP 20 V mA ms s c 24 15% 150 < 40 < 10 Opto-electronic coupler input (active when High), input current approximately 10 mA c 24 V Opto-electronic coupler input (active when High), input current approximately 10 mA at c 24 V PNP transistor output, 200 mA Volt-free N/O contacts, max. contact load External, with max. of 4 A MT C C - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 200
Consumption on AS-Interface line Type of protection (suitable only for use in electronic rooms/ electrical enclosures with a minimum IP 54 degree of protection) Operating voltage Ub Rated operating current Response duration Pick-up delay Inputs Start Protection control (EDM) Outputs Safety on indication Safety
Fuse protection Operating temperature Storage temperature
Nota : The impedance of a safety monitor must be taken into account when selecting the number of interfaces on AS-Interface, even if it is used in watchdog mode. The technical details of the system are described in the Schneider Electric AS-Interface guide, in the safety monitor hardware and software manuals and in the configuration software on telemecanique.com.
5.5
5/50
References

Safety solutions
References
Type
521270
For basic monitoring of safety devices
Number of safety circuits 2 N/O
Solid-state Supply outputs for PLC 1 c 24 V
Reference ASI SAFEMON1
Weight kg 0.300
2 x 2 N/O
c 24 V
ASI SAFEMON2
0.300
For enhanced monitoring of safety devices
2 N/O
c 24 V
ASI SAFEMON1B
0.300
2 x 2 N/O ASI SAFEMONp
c 24 V
ASI SAFEMON2B
0.300
Safety Suite configuration software

Description AS-Interface Safety at work configuration software with hardware and software user guide supplied on CD-ROM For use with Safety monitors ASI SAFEMON1/2 for basic monitoring of safety devices Safety monitors ASI SAFEMONpB for enhanced monitoring of safety devices Language Reference Weight kg 0.020
EN/FR/DE/IT/ES/PT ASI SWIN2
Setting-up and diagnostic tools

Description Adjustment terminal Application Addressing and diagnostics of AS-Interface V2.1 interfaces AS-interface I/O test whilst powered-up AS-Interface interface diagnostics Reference ASI TERV2 0,500
ASITERV2 AS-Interface line analyser Identification of transmission errors on the AS-Interface line ASI SA01 0,160
ASI SA01
Accessories
Description Cables Function Parametering, RS 232 Reference ASI SCPC Weight kg 0.100
Transfer between 2 monitors
ASI SCM
0.500
5.5
5/51
Operating principle, presentation

Safety solutions
Safety interfaces
Operating principle
Safety is incorporated into the AS-Interface system by adding a safety monitor and safety interfaces connected together with other standard AS-Interface components on the yellow cable. Safety information is exchanged only between the safety monitor, the AS-Interface line master and the safety interfaces. This is transparent for the other standard AS-Interface components. Based on this principle, AS-Interface systems that are already installed can be updated with safety functions without having to replace the existing components (master, I/O interfaces, power supplies, etc.). Safety circuits are diagnosed readily and without additional wiring, as the standard AS-Interface master can communicate with the safety monitor via the yellow cable.
Presentation
Interfaces for Harmony 22 mm Emergency stop
Metal
Plastic
Interfaces for products with M12 connector
5
1 x M12 entry 2 x M12 entries
Interfaces for products with ISO entry
ISO M16 or M20 entry
Interfaces premounted in Emergency stop mushroom head pushbutton stations XAL K, with M12 entry
5.5
Turn to release
Key release (n 455)
Interfaces for mounting in enclosure for Harmony 22 mm Emergency stop mushroom head pushbuttons
Metal
Plastic
5/52
Environment, characteristics

Safety solutions
Safety interfaces
Safety interface type
ASI SSLB4
ASI SSLB5
ASI SSLC1
ASI SSLC2
ASI SSLLS
ASI ASI SEA1C SEK1C
ASI SSLE4
ASI SSLE5
Environment
Products designed for max. use in safety related parts of control systems (conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1) Conformity to standards Category 4 max. EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60204-1, EN/IEC 60204-1 EN 418/ISO 1385 0 (pending), EN/IEC 60947-55 (pending) UL, CSA, TV Conforming to IEC 529 IP 20 IP 67 EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/IEC 61496-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-3, EN 574/ISO 13851 EN/IEC 60204-1, EN/ISO 12100, EN 418/ISO 13850 UL, CSA IP 65 IP 00
Product certifications Degree of protection
AS-Interface profile
0.B.F.F
Addressing Ambient air temperature For operation For storage C C
Using adjustment terminal ASI TERV2 - 10+ 55 - 25+ 85
Mechanical characteristics
Mechanical durability Shock resistance Vibration resistance In thousands of operating cycles 0.3 10 gn 5 gn 0.3
Supply by AS-Interface line Voltage Voltage limits V Via AS-Interface, c 24 - 15+ 15%
Consumption
1.2
Consumption on AS-Interface line
mA
45
Connection on AS-Interface line
IDC (Insulation Displacement Connector) Connector (type)
b (M12)
b (M12)
Note: The technical details of the system are described in the Schneider Electric AS-Interface guide, in the safety monitor hardware and software manuals and in the configuration software on telemecanique.com.
5.5
5/53
References

Safety solutions
Safety interfaces
References
Interfaces for 22 Emergency stop
Type
580116 580117
Metal
Type of contact N/C + N/C
Connection on AS-Interface line IDC
Reference ASI SSLB4
Weight kg 0.080
Plastic
N/C + N/C
IDC
ASI SSLB5
0.040
ASI SSLB4 + ZB4 BS844
ASI SSLB5 + ZB5 AS844
Interfaces for products with connector

Type 1 x M12 entry
580118 580119
Number of contacts 2
Connection on AS-Interface line Connector
Reference ASI SSLC1
Weight kg 0.040
2 x M12 entries (1)
Connector
ASI SSLC2
0.050
ASI SSLC1
ASI SSLC2
Interfaces for products with ISO entry

Type
580120
1 x ISO M16 entry (2)
Connection on AS-Interface line IDC
Reference ASI SSLLS
Weight kg 0.040
ASI SSLLS
Interfaces premounted in Emergency stop mushroom head pushbutton stations XAL K

Type
105580 105581
Turn to release
Reference ASI SEA1C
Weight kg 0.170
Key release (n 455) (3)
Connector
ASI SEK1C
0.190
5.5
ASI SEA1C
ASI SEK1C
Interfaces for mounting in enclosure for Harmony 22 mm Emergency stop mushroom head pushbuttons
Type
105582 105583
Metal
Reference ASI SSLE4
Weight kg 0.060
Plastic ASI SSLE4 ASI SSLE5
Connector
ASI SSLE5
0.025
(1) Only use pre-wired connectors XZ CP1541Lp. (2) For ISO M20 product, see adaptor. (3) For other mushroom head buttons, please refer to our Human Machine Interface catalogue.
5/54
References (continued)

Safety solutions
Safety interfaces
Addressing accessories
Description Adaptor specifically for safety interfaces type ASI SSLBp, ASI SSLCp, ASI SSLLS Application Connection to adjustment terminal ASI TERV2 Reference ASI SAD1 Weight kg 0.060
105967
ASI SAD1
Setting-up and diagnostic tools

Description Adjustment terminal Application Reference Addressing and diagnostics of ASI TERV2 AS-Interface V2.1 interfaces AS-Interface I/O test whilst powered-up AS-Interface interface diagnostics 0,500
AS-Interface line analyser Identification of transmission errors on ASI SA01 the AS-Interface line
0,160
Accessories
Type Material Unit reference DE9 RI2016 ZB4 BS844 ZB5 AS844 ZB4 BS944 ZB5 AS944 Weight kg 0.040 0.060 0.050 0.098 0.071
Adaptor for ISO M20 Metal (sold in lots of 5) 40 red mushroom head Emergency stop Metal buttons, turn to release (1) Plastic 40 red mushroom head Emergency stop Metal buttons, key release (n 455) (1) Plastic
(1) For other mushroom head buttons, please refer to our Human Machine Interface catalogue.
5.5
5/55
Wiring system

Infrastructure
Description
The infrastructure offer contains cables in standard and TPE in yellow and black. The tap-off offer contains different types of tap-off. The tap-offs have the best quality available on the market and do not contain any loose parts. All tap-offs are rated IP67.
Distributed AS-Interface Optimized / Distributed AS-Interface High Performance

Premium TSX SAY 1000
TWD NOI 10M3 Twido Phaseo ASI ABL M3024 TeSys U ASI LUF C5E Advantys E/S IP 67 ASI FMP22E Line extension
Advantys E/S IP 67
TCS ATV01N2 ASI 67FFB03
TCS ATV01N2 ASI 20MT41E
TCS ATV011F1 TCS ARR01M + TCS ATN011F
Advantys E/S IP 20
Setting-up
Products connected to the As-Interface cable Only the AS-Interface + and AS-Interface - terminals of a product may be connected to the AS-Interface cable.
Earthing
The earth terminals (Shd or Gnd) on products must be connected to the machine earth and to the enclosure earth, and these points must be themselves connected to earth: b b b b b b AS-Interface supply. Auxiliary supply. Earth fault monitor. Safety monitor. AS-Interface master. Programmable controller rack.
5.6
In addition to double insulation of the AS-Interface supply, this condition ensures: b Safety of personnel on an AS-Interface line. b Good resistance to electromagnetic interference (EMC).
5/56

Infrastructure
Setting-up (continued)
Connection of power supplies b If a switch has to break the AS-Interface supply, then it must be located upstream of the AS-Interface supply: the switch must not be installed on the AS-Interface line. b If a switch has to break a programmable controllers supplies, then this switch must be common to the PLC's AS-Interface supply and to its auxiliary supply (24 V or 220 V). This makes it possible to ensure that both supplies are switched on and off at the same time. b It is recommended that AS-Interface supplies be installed close to the programmable controllers.
Use of an earth fault monitor
In order to conform to machine standard EN 60204-1 (in particular paragraph 9.4.3.1 concerning earth faults), the AS-Interface system must include an earth fault monitor. The earth fault monitor may be: b Either separate from the power supply (example: RMOPAS101), b Or built into the power supplies (example: ASI ABLD300p).
Cable lengths
AS-Interface cables
We recommend use of the yellow ribbon cable (see page 5/60). The maximum length of an AS-Interface run is 100 m, which can be extended to 200 m by using one repeater (see page 5/63) or to 300 m with 2 repeaters. It is not possible to exceed a distance of 300 m between the master and the most distant slave. By placing the master in the middle of the network, runs of up to 500 m are possible.
M A A
100 m
100 m
100 m
100 m
50 m
50 m
100 m
100 m
S M
200 m
5.6
M = Master module A = Supply S = Interface or component The TCS ARR01M line extension allows extending the length of one segment up to 200 m. Schneider Electric recommends inspecting each installed network with the ASI SA01 AS-Interface analyzer. If the impedance compensation with the line extension is successful, it is the price worthiest solution to extend the maximum length of an AS-Interface segment.
5/57

Infrastructure
Cable lengths (continued)
Calculating cable lengths
The total length of cable and wires connected to the AS-Interface + terminals and AS-Interface - terminals of the master must be carefully counted, both inside and outside the enclosure, including the lengths of tap-offs in cases where AS-Interface components are not installed directly on the yellow cable using the IDC system. Lengths of tap-off cables must be counted twice. We therefore recommend using short tap-off runs and, wherever possible, using products installed directly on the yellow cable via IDC connectors (example: IP 67 interfaces, references ASI 67FFPppp).
2m
2m
2m
0,3 m
5
Total length of ribbon cable Total length of round wire Total length of tap-offs Length of network = 40 m = Lc = 2 m = Lf = 4.3 m = Ld = Lc + Lf + 2 x Ld = 50.60 m
Cables between sensors/actuators and interface inputs
Sensors/actuators must be supplied with power directly at the AS-Interface interface terminals or connectors. The sensor supply must not be connected to any potential. Maximum lengths are: b Between safety sensors and safety interfaces: 3 m (2 m recommended). b Between standard sensors/actuators and interfaces: 10 m.
5.6
5/58

Infrastructure
Cable routing b Do not route the AS-Interface cable with other cables in the same strand. In exceptional circumstances, it is permissible to run cables carrying low power signals (for example: wires connected to start/stop buttons) close to the AS-Interface + and AS-Interface - cables. b Do not route the AS-Interface cable close to sources of interference (variator cables, etc...) including inside the enclosure. b To ensure symmetry, the AS-Interface cable must be laid flat in relation to the support on which it is fixed, especially if the support is in metal. v the end of the AS-Interface cable must be protected (never leave the end of the cable open), for example by terminating the line with an IP 67 interface, v in an enclosure, when standard wire is used for cabling AS-Interface + and AS-Interface - lines, these wires must be of the same length and must be laid in parallel. They must be spaced no more than 10 mm apart.
Limiting the interference emitted by certain products
In order to limit the electromagnetic disturbance emitted by products, a number of recommendations must be taken into account: b Fit frequency variators with suitable filters. b Use screened cables between the variator and the motor. b Fit inductive loads (coils of contactors, relays, brakes, solenoid valves etc.) with flywheel diodes, varistors or RC circuits. When it is not possible to completely eliminate emitted interference, is it essential to ensure that the following distances are maintained. b In the case of an AS-Interface installation including safety products, the AS-Interface cable or the safety input cables must be located at a distance greater than: v 50 cm from products which have a control circuit with inductive load (relays, contactors, coils, reversing contactors, etc...). v 100 cm from products such as welding machines, power circuits in general, electronic speed regulators, switch mode power supplies. b In the case of an AS-Interface that does not include safety products, the AS-Interface cable or standard sensor/actuator cables must be located as a distance greater than: v 10 cm from products which have a control circuit with inductive load (relays, contactors, coils, reversing contactors, etc...). v 50 cm from products such as welding machines, power circuits in general, electronic speed regulators, switch mode power supplies. In all cases, we recommend that the practical installation guidelines in the Schneider Electric EMC manual be followed (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
5.6
5/59
Wiring system

Infrastructure
AS-Interface cables
Flat cables and accessories

The special profile of these 2-core flat cables eliminates the risk of polarity reversal when connecting. Connections to the cables are made by IDCs (Insulation Displacement Connectors), see connection accessories. The sheath material self-seals the holes made by the IDC when the connector is removed. Degree of protection IP 67. Ambient air temperature: b standard cable: v operation: 25+ 85 C, v storage: - 40+ 85 C, b TPE cable (oil and vapour resistant): v for operation with cable flexing: - 30+ 105 C, v for non-flexing operation or storage: - 40+ 105 C.
Description
806437
Flat cable 2 x 1.5 mm2 Ue 48 V XZ CB1pp0p
Sheath colour Yellow (for AS-Interface)
Length 20 m
Type of cable Standard TPE Standard TPE Standard TPE Standard TPE Standard TPE Standard TPE
Reference XZ CB10201 XZ CB10201H XZ CB10501 XZ CB10501H XZ CB11001 XZ CB11001H XZ CB10202 XZ CB10202H XZ CB10502 XZ CB10502H XZ CB11002 XZ CB11002H
Weight kg 1.400 1.400 3.500 3.500 7.000 7.000 1.400 1.400 3.500 3.500 7.000 7.000
50 m
100 m
Black (for separate c 24 V supply)
20 m
50 m
5
100 m
806438
Description Cable gland protective seal
Application For use with flat cable and 11 mm cable gland (DIN Pg 11)
Sold in lots of 10
Unit reference XZ CE40
Weight kg 0.001
XZ CE40
522173
Heat shrinkable cable end
For achieving IP 67 degree of protection
10
ASI 67FACC2
0.002
ASI 67FACC2
Dimensions
Cables XZ CB1pppp
10 2,5 0,5
5.6
BU 6,5
4 3,6 BN
5/60

Infrastructure
Connection accessories
Accessories for connection to AS-Interface flat cables

Tap-offs for connection of AS-Interface components to flat cables Connection to flat cables by IDC (Insulation Displacement Connector). Ue 40 V, Ie 2 A. Ambient air temperature: - 25+ 70 C (operation), - 40+ 85 C (storage). Description Connection to Cable Fixing Reference Weight the AS-Interface length kg component 1m Screw TCS ATN011F1 0.090 Tap-offs for By 5-way female connection to straight a flat cable for M12 connector 2m Screw TCS ATN011F2 0.130 AS-Interface (yellow) (2 x 0.34 mm2 cable) Degree of protection By cordset 2m Screw TCS ATN01N2 0.215 IP 67 with flying leads 2 cable) (2 x 0.34 mm Brown wire AS-i Blue wire: AS-i
DF521832
TCS ATN011Fp
Tap-offs for connection to two flat cables: - 1 for AS-Interface (yellow) - 1 for the separate supply (black) Degree of protection IP 67 TCS ATV011Fp
DF521833
1m By 5-way female straight M12 connector 2m (4 x 0.34 mm2 cable) 2m By cordset with flying leads (4 x 0.34 mm2 cable) Brown wire AS-i Blue wire: AS-i White wire: 0 V Black wire: + 24 V
Screw Screw Screw
TCS ATV011F1 TCS ATV011F2 TCS ATV01N2
0.140 0.180 0.265
T connectors
Description T connectors for connection to a flat cable for AS-Interface (yellow) Degree of protection IP 67 Branch for extension to two flat cables : 1 flat cable (yellow), 1 flat cable (black) Degree of protection IP 67 Connection to the Fixing AS-Interface sensor or actuator By 5-way female M12 connector Screw Reference TCS ATN011F Weight kg 0.026
806440
806439
Screw
TCS ATN02V
0.019
TCS ATN011F
TCS ATN02V
5.6
5/61

Infrastructure
Connection accessories
Dimensions
Tap-offs TCS ATN011Fp/ATN01N2 TCS ATV011p and TCS ATV01N2
(1)
19
(1)
19
4 6 12
38
38
40
6 12
12
24 35
(1) Cable length 1 or 2 m. Cable with stripped ends (brown: AS-i , blue: AS-i ) or fitted with an M12 end connector Connection base XZ SDE1113
24 35
(1) Cable length 1 or 2 m. Cable with stripped ends (brown: AS-i , blue: AS-i , white: 0 V, black: + 24 V) or fitted with an M12 end connector Cover for connection base XZ SDP
35 (1)
66
80
12
5
20
31 45 (2)
13
31 45
(1) Mounting on 6 rail (2) When mounting side-by-side, leave a clear space of at least 1 mm between the bases. T connectors TCS ATN011F TCS ATN02V
19
19
4 6 12
38
4 6 12
38
40
5.6
24 35
12
10
12
24 35
(1) Connector adjustable to 2 positions, at 90.
(1) Connector adjustable to 2 positions, at 90.
Connections
M12 connectors on T connectors TCS ATN011Fp and TCS ATN01N2 M12 connectors on tap-offs TCS ATV011Fp and TCS ATV01N2
AS-i AS-i
3 4 1
3 2
4 1
+ AS-i
2 0V
+ AS-i
5/62
12
40
66
80
40
Product data sheet

Line extension and repeater
Presentation
The passive bus termination permits a circuit extension up to approximately 200 m, see page 5/59. The repeater allows an AS-Interface line to be extended by 100 m (the maximum length of the line becomes 300 m). Direct connection to the flat AS-Interface cable by insulation displacement connectors (IDCs). Galvanic isolation between the segments.
Description
4 5 Line Extension TCS ARR01M comprises: 1 Two LED (green and Yellow): bus voltage > 26 V and > 18,5 V 2 5-way male M12 connector 6 Repeater ASI RPT01 comprises: 3 A PWR1 LED (green): power ON, AS-Interface line no 1 4 An FLT1 LED (red): communication fault on AS-Interface line no 1 5 An FLT2 LED (red): communication fault on AS-Interface line no 2 6 A PWR2 LED (green): power ON, AS-Interface line no 2 7 AS-Interface cable no 2 connection 8 AS-Interface cable no 1 connection 9 Four unused blanking plugs
3 7 8 1 2 9
Characteristics
TCS ARR01M
Ambient air temperature Degree of protection Dimensions (W x H x D) Material Connection Power supply Current consumption Operational voltage Isolation Diagnostic signalling C Operation: - 10+ 55 Storage: - 25+ 75 IP 65 46 x 19 ( x L) To yellow AS-Interface cable Via the AS-Interface cable 10 c 30 U > 26 V: green LED U > 18,5 V: yellow LED
ASI RPT01
mm
44 x 102 x 70 (W x H x D) Plastic
mA V
60 per AS-Interface segment (120 mA total) c 18.531.6 (depending on AS-Interface specification) Galvanic isolation between the segments AS-Interface power ON: One green LED per segment Communication fault: One red LED per segment
References
573216 522109
Description Line extension
Application For extending the length of one segment up to 200 m For extending an AS-Interface line up to 100 m
Reference TCS ARR01M
Weight kg 0.047
Repeater
ASI RPT01
0.190
TCS ARR01M
ASI RPT01 ASI RPT01
Dimensions
TCS ARR01M
5.6
19
(2)
80
37 46
(1)
70
M 12
44
(1) AS-Interface cable no 1 (master side) (2) AS-Interface cable no 2 (extension side)
102
5/63
Presentation

Installation system
Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies
Power supplies for AS-Interface line

Consistent with the standard Phaseo line, the range of ASI ABL power supplies is designed to deliver a d.c. voltage, as required by AS-Interface systems. Three versions are available to meet all needs encountered in industrial applications, in enclosures, cells or floor-standing enclosures. These single-phase, electronic, switch mode power supplies guarantee the quality of the output current, in accordance with the electrical characteristics and conforming to standard EN 50295.
PE N L
100-240V
24 V AS-i : 2,4 A
ASI ABLB3002
b ASI ABLB300p Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4 and 4.8 A ratings, the outgoing terminal block allows the cable to be connected separately to the AS-Interface interface modules and to the AS-Interface master. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.
AS-i + AS-i
GND AS-i + AS-i
GND
(1) AS-Interface AS-Interface master interface module module
Reset
PE N L + 1 2
Earth fault
100-240V
Reset Fault Fault Fault + ON OFF TEST RESET
24 V AS-i : 2,4 A
ASI ABLD3002
b ASI ABLD300p Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4 and 4.8 A ratings, it allows diagnosis and management of earth faults on AS-Interface interface modules. In the event of an earth fault, the Phaseo power supply stops dialogue on AS-Interface and puts the installation in a fallback condition. Restarting is only possible after deliberate acknowledgement of the fault. Two inputs/outputs enable dialogue with a processing unit. The outgoing terminal block is used to connect the AS-Interface cable separately to the interface modules and master modules. Input, output and earth fault LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics. Warning: the earth (GND) (2) connection must be made. In the event of disconnection, the built-in detector becomes inoperative. To obtain earth connection diagnostics, it is recommended that an ASI ABLB300p power supply be used together with insulation relay RMO PAS101, see page 5/71. bASI ABLM3024 Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this product provides two separate power supplies, which are totally independent in the way they operate. Two output voltages - 30 V/2.4 A (AS-Interface line supply) and 24 V/3 A - are available, so making it possible to supply the control equipment without an additional power supply. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.
AS-i + AS-i
GND AS-i + AS-i
GND
(2) AS-Interface AS-Interface interface master module module
PE
100-240V
24 V AS-i : 4,8 A
ASI ABLM3024
AS-i
24 V - 3 A 24 30,5 V
5.6
AS-i + AS-i
GND AS-i + AS-i
GND
(1) 24 V c control AS-Interface AS-Interface master interface module module
(1) Recommended connection. (2) Compulsory connection.
5/64
Characteristics

Installation system
Technical characteristics
Type of power supply Functions Product certifications Dimensions Conforming to standards ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLB3004 ASI ABLD3002 Supply to the AS-Interface line (30 V c) UL 508, CSA 22-2 n 950 54 x 120 x 120 81 x 120 x 120 54 x 120 x 120 EN 60950, TV EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 55022 class B No ASI ABLD3004 ASI ABLM3024 30 V c 24 V c supply supply
WxHxD Safety EMC Low frequency harmonic currents
mm
81 x 120 x 120
Input circuit
LED indication Input voltage Rated values Permissible values Permissible frequencies Efficiency at nominal load Current consumption Current at switch-on Power factor V V Hz % A A Orange LED a 100240 a 85264 4763 > 83 0.5 < 30 0.65
> 83 1 0.5 1
> 80
Output circuit
LED indication Nominal output voltage Nominal output current Precision V A V Green LED 30 (AS-Interface) 2.4 4.8 3% 300 - 50 10 Permanent. Automatic restart after elimination of the fault 1.1 In Tripping if U > 1.2 Un Tripping if U < 0.95 Un U> 1.2 Un U< 0.95 Un U> 1.5 Un U< 0.8 Un 2.4 4.8 c 30 2.4 c 24 3 100 to 120 %
Adjustable output voltage Line and load regulation Residual ripple - interference Holding time for I max and Ve min Short-circuit Overload Overvoltage Undervoltage
Micro-breaks Protection
mV ms
Operating characteristics
Connections Ambient conditions Input Output Storage temperature Operating temperature Maximum relative humidity Degree of protection Vibrations mm2 mm2 C C 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth, multiple output - 25 to + 70 0 to + 60 (derating from 50) 95 % (without condensation or dripping water) IP 20 (conforming to IEC 529) EN 61131-2 Vertical > 100000 (conforming to Bell core, at 40 C) 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mm 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mm 500 V/50 Hz/1 mm Yes (not interchangeable) Class B (conforming to EN 55022) EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air) EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m) EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV), EN 61000-4-6 (10 V) EN 61000-4-11
Operating position MTBF Dielectric strength
h Input/output Input/earth Output/earth (and output/output) Conducted/radiated Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic Conducted interference Mains interference
Input fuse incorporated Disturbance Immunity
5.6
5/65
Characteristics, selection

Installation system
Output characteristics
Derating The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature.
P/Pn (%) 140
120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 70 40 50 60 Maximum operating temperature (C)
Selection
Upstream protection of power supplies for AS-Interface line
Type of a 115 V single-phase mains supply Type of Thermal-magnetic protection circuit-breaker Single-pole GB2 CBpp 2-pole GB2 DBpp C60N ASI ABLB3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) ASI ABLB3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (1) ASI ABLD3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) ASI ABLD3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (1) ASI ABLM3024 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) (1) UL certified circuit-breaker. a 230 V single-phase Gg fuse Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker GB2 DBpp GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB06 C60N MG24516 (1) MG17453 (1) MG24516 (1) MG17453 (1) MG17453 (1) Gg fuse
2A 4A 2A 4A 2A
2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
Function diagram
10
N L + 1
5
2
1 2
ON/OFF DDT
Supply AS-i + AS-i , and GND (4)
AS-i +
6 7
24 V AS-i : 2,4 A
8 9 1 4 3
AS-i
(1)
3 or 10 4 5
Reset
(1)
Reset
(1)
Test
(3)
Fault
(2)
(3)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(3)
(2)
5.6
AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND
6 7 8 9
AS-i Fault + Fault

OFF ON Input at state 0 or contact open Input at state 1 or contact closed LED off LED on
(1) 30 ms min. (2) 15 ms. (3) 20 ms. (4) Warning: the earth fault detector will only operate if the earth (GND) terminal is connected.
5/66
References, schemes

Installation system
ASI ABL regulated switch mode power supplies

Mains input voltage 5060 Hz V 100240 single-phase wide range Output voltage V c 30 Nominal power W 72 Nominal Auto-protect current reset A 2.4 Auto Earth fault detection No Reference Weight kg 0.800
ASI ABLB3002
145 72 145
4.8 2.4 4.8
Auto Auto Auto
No Yes Yes
ASI ABLB3004 ASI ABLD3002 ASI ABLD3004
1.300 0.800 1.300
ASI ABLp30pp
c 30 c 24
72 72
2.4 3
Auto
No
ASI ABLM3024
1.300
Schemes
ASI ABLB300p
N L
ASI ABLD300p
N L
+
ASI ABLM3024
1 2 N L
Set
Fault detector Filter Filter
ON/ OFF
Filter
5
AS-i + GND AS-i + GND
AS-i +
AS-i +
AS-i +
GND
GND
AS-i +
GND
24 V
GND
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
5.6
5/67
Presentation

Installation system
Insulation control relay for AS-Interface line
The RM0 PAS101 insulation control relay detects and signals any earth fault on either of the 2 polarities of an AS-Interface line segment. It takes into account any input/output earth faults of PNP intelligent splitter boxes that are not isolated from the AS-Interface line. Used in conjunction with an impedance adapter LA9 RM401 on the supply, the RM0 PAS101 insulation relay also detects any faulty connection of the protective earth to the relay itself and/or the supply.
Presentation
1
Q4 Q1
2 3 4
TEST
RESE
BUS
BUS
1 101 301
4 104 204 205
105 206
108
5 6
Insulation control relay for AS-Interface: insulation control relay. 1 Connection to the AS-Interface line 2 TEST button 3 RESET button 4 Relay status LED indicator 5 I/O status LED indicator 6 Power supply plug-in terminal block 7 Plug-in terminal blocks
201
OK + FAULT FAULT
Operating principle
7 7
The RM0 PAS101 insulation control relay is supplied directly from the AS-Interface line. In the event of a fault, 1 of 2 output contacts allows breaking of the supply to the actuators whilst the other can be used to signal the fault to a PLC. Also, the RM0 PAS101 insulation control relay inhibits AS-Interface communication in the event of a fault, in order to activate the watchdog functions of the connected slaves. Resetting and testing of the product can be performed either by using the buttons on the front left-hand side of the relay, or by applying a + 24 V signal to the inputs on the terminal block (control by PLC output). Operation with no fault present On power-up of AS-Interface, if the insulation resistance between each of the AS-Interface polarities (AS-Interface + and AS-Interface ) and the earth terminal is greater than 40 k, the output relay energises and the OK LED illuminates. Appearance of a fault If one or both of the resistances measured (R ASi +/Earth and/or R ASi /Earth) falls below approximately 40 k, or in the event of a fault in the earth connection to the RM0 PAS101 relay: b data exchanges on the AS-Interface line are inhibited which, in turn, triggers an alarm at the AS-Interface master within 5 ms, b the output relay contacts open, b the polarity on which the fault is detected is signalled by illumination of one of the two LEDs (FAULT + / FAULT ), located on the front left-hand side of the relay. Fault memory The contacts remain open and the Fault LED stays on, even if the fault disappears, unless the supply to the AS-Interface + and AS-Interface terminals is broken. In this case, providing the fault has disappeared, the relay resets itself when the supply is restored and the output relay contacts reclose. Resetting As soon as the fault is eliminated, the relay can be reset which, in turn, extinguishes the associated Fault LED. and closes the output relay contacts. Two methods of resetting are possible: b locally, by pressing the RESET button, b remotely, by a change of state lasting more than 30 ms of the signal between terminals S1 and S2 (see function diagram on next page). This input must be permanently maintained at the high state when not being used for resetting. Test The relay has a test feature to simulate faults. Each test sequence alternately simulates an insulation fault on one of the two line polarities. The relay must respond as if the fault were authentic. The relay must then be reset as detailed above. Each subsequent test sequence checks the other polarity of the AS-Interface line (see function diagram on next page). Two methods of testing are possible: b locally, by pressing the TEST button, b remotely, by a change of state lasting more than 30 ms of the signal between terminals S3 and S4.
5.6
5/68
Presentation (continued)

Installation system
Function diagram
Operation with no fault present Supply AS-i + and AS-i AS-i + AS-i
(1)
Reset S1 S2
(1)
(1)
(1)
Test S3 S4 Output relay Contacts 15/18 25/28
(1) (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (2)
(1) (3) (2)
LED / OK FAULT + FAULT
Relay off Relay on Input at state 0 or contact open Input at state 1 or contact closed LED off LED on (1) 30 ms (2) 15 ms (3) 20 ms
5.6
5/69
Characteristics

Installation system
Environment
Product certifications Conforming to standards Degree of protection Dimensions Resistance to incandescent wire Shock resistance Vibration resistance Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated fields Immunity to transients Ambient air temperature Insulation voltage (for one minute) Installation category Degree of pollution Mounting Cable c.s.a. Conforming to IEC 529 (against direct contact)) WxHxD Conforming to IEC 695-2-1 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Operation Storage Terminals/mounting rails Conforming to IEC 664 Conforming to IEC 654 Standard mounting rails AS-Interface n 16701 IEC 204, 1 and 2, EN 60204, 1 and 2 IP 2X mm C ms Hz kV MHz V/m kV C C kV 90 x 76 x 58 750: extinction < 30 s 11 (half sine wave), 15 gn 5...100, 0.7 gn 8 in open air, 6 on contact 80...1000 15 2 kV AS-Interface, 1 kV on the inputs - 5...+ 60 - 25...+ 70 2
Tightening torque Operating range Average consumption at 30 V Response time
II 2 On solid mounting plate: 15 mm mounting rail or using ABE ACC01 On chassis: 15 mm and 7.5 mm mounting rails 1 conductor 2 conductors Flexible cable without cable end mm2 0.142.5 AWG 2614 mm2 0.091.5 0.090.75 Flexible cable with cable end AWG 2816 2820 mm2 0.144 0.22.5 Solid cable AWG 2612 2414 With 3.5 mm flat screwdriver Nm 0.6 cV mA ms ms k k 29.531.6 50 < 20 <5 < 15 <7 2 relays, each with 1 N/O contact Energised on absence of fault when AS-Interface + AS-Interface supplied 50 5 5 2 Insulation fault, polarity AS-Interface + Insulation fault, polarity AS-Interface Supply to relay on and no fault present Test input at state 1 Reset input at state 1 Output relays energised
Measuring input characteristics

On the AS-Interface line Opening of relay contacts AS-Interface communication interrupt R AS-i + Earth R AS-i Earth
Detection threshold
Output relay characteristics and operation

Number of C/O contacts Output relay state Rated operational voltage Conventional thermal current For U contact = c 24 V Rated operational current c 12 V c 13 V (U/R =10 ms) Operating status indication FAULT +, red LED on FAULT , red LED on OK, green LED on Test, yellow LED on Reset, green LED on R1 and R2, green LED on cV A A A
5.6
Test input and Reset input characteristics

Consumption per channel at Un A Un = c 24 V State 1 guaranteed U > or I > State 0 guaranteed U < and I < Conformity Conforming to IEC 1131-2
(supplied from external source)

mA 13 V/mA 11/5 V/mA 5/2 Type II
5/70
Reference, connection

Installation system
References
Description
532759
Reference RM0 PAS101
Insulation control relay for AS-Interface line (supplied with an impedance adapter) Impedance adapter (replacement part)
Weight kg 0.260
LA9 RM401
0.008
Connection
Recommended wiring scheme
AS-Interface supply To As-Interface line master Test (PLC output)
R<
X1
X2
X3
X4
S4
S2
18
S3
S1
15
GND
0V
0V
Emergency stop
25
28
Test (PLC output)
Remote reset Reset (PLC output)
Fault (PLC input)
0V 24 V
Supply to actuators (1)
AS-Interface line
(2)
RM0 PAS101 2 3
b The insulation control relay impedance is the same as that of a network slave. b For correct operation, fit the impedance adapter 1 directly on the AS-Interface line supply 2, between terminals AS-Interface and Shd. b Connections to earth: both the AS-Interface line supply and the RM0 PAS101 insulation relay must be connected separately to a reliable earth (resistance < 3 ).
AS-i AS-i + Shd
1 Impedance adapter LA9 RM401. 2 AS-Interface line supply. 3 AS-Interface master.
1
(1) Use an interposing relay if the current consumption of the actuators is greater than the breaking capacity of the internal relay (DC12: 5A/30 V, DC13: 1.5 A/30 V) (2) Maximum distance between the insulation control relay and the AS-Interface master: 2 meters Voltage at the RM0 PAS101 insulation control relay must be between 29.5 and 31.6 V.
5.6
5/71
Product data sheet

Ethernet / AS-Interface gateway
Presentation
The TCS AGEA1SF13F Modbus/TCP to AS-Interface gateway provides access to AS-Interface slave devices on an Ethernet based industrial network. The gateway implements an AS-Interface master with a master profile M4 according to the AS-Interface Complete Specification version 3.0. The M4 master profile allows access to all slave profiles defined in this specification.
Description
The digital analog input/output slaves are available with Modbus read and write register requests, so it is possible to configure an I/O scanner in a PLC to include all digital and analog I/O on the AS-Interface network. The gateway needs no additional configuration software. The little configuration needed can be done directly at the devices with a menu driven user interface.
TCS AGEA1SF13F
Characteristics
Modbus / TCP AS-Interface gateway
TransparentReady features Conformance class Standard Bit rates Connector Master profile Standard
TCS AGEA1SF13F
A10 IEEE 802.3, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Mbps 10/100 RJ45 M4 V3.0 Approx. 200 mA out of AS-Interface circuit AS-Interface voltage V > 500 EN 50082, EN 50081 C O...+ 55 C - 25...+ 85 Stainless steel mm 100 x 120 x 83 IP20 According to EN 61 131-2 g 550 Displaying slave addresses and error messages Power on Ethernet network active Configuration error AS-Interface voltage OK AS-Interface normal operation active Automatic address programming enabled Gateway is in configuration mode 4
Housing Dimensions (L x W x H) WxHxD Degree of protection Conforming to DIN 40 050 Tolerable loading reffering to impacts and vibrations Weight HMI LCD LED green (POWER) LED green (SER ACT) LED red (CNF ERR) LED green (ASI PWR) LED green (ASI ACT) LED green (PRG EN) LED yellow (PRJ MODE) Buttons
References
Transparent Functions Reference Weight Ready class kg TCS AGEA1SF13F AS-Interface/Ethernet A10 - 1 AS-Interface port gateway - 1 Ethernet port, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Description
5.7
TCS AGEA1SF13F
5/72
Product data sheet

CANopen / AS-Interface gateway
Presentation
The TCS AGCA1SF14M CANopen to AS-Interface gateway provides access to AS-Interface slave devices on an CANopen based industrial network. The gateway implements an AS-Interface master with a master profile M4 according to the AS-Interface Complete Specification version 3.0. The M4 master profile allows access to all slave profiles defined in this specification.
Description
The gateway implements the CAN in Automation profile 446 for CANopen to AS-Interface gateways. The digital inputs and outputs are mapped to PDOs and enabled by default. The analog channels are also mapped to PDOs, but they are disabled by default. So it is very easy to configure the gateway and a PLC to include all digital and analog I/O on the AS-Interface network. The gateway needs no additional configuration software. The little configuration needed can be done directly at the devices with a menu driven user interface.
TCS AGCA1SF14M
Characteristics
CANopen features Conformance class Standard Bit rates Connector Medium Master profile Standard
TCS AGCA1SF14M
S20 CiA 446 Kbps 10/1000 9-way male Sub-D Shielded dual twisted pairs M4 V3.0 Approx. 200 mA out of AS-Interface circuit AS-Interface voltage V > 500 EN 50295, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 C O...+ 55 C - 25...+ 85 Stainless steel mm 85 x 120 x 83 IP20 According to EN 61 131-2 g 520 Displaying slave addresses and error messages Power on Module/Network status (MNS) Configuration error AS-Interface voltage OK AS-Interface normal operation active Automatic address programming enabled Gateway is in configuration mode 4
Housing Dimensions WxHxD Degree of protection Conforming to DIN 40 050 Tolerable loading reffering to impacts and vibrations Weight HMI LCD LED green (POWER) LED green (MNS) LED red (CNF ERR) LED green (ASI PWR) LED green (ASI ACT) LED green (PRG EN) LED yellow (PRJ MODE) Buttons
References
Conformance Functions class CANopen/AS-Interface A10 - 1 CANopen port gateway - 1 AS-Interface port Description Weight kg TCS AGCA1SF14M Reference
5.7
TCS AGCA1SF14M
5/73
Product data sheet

Profibus / AS-Interface gateway
Presentation
The TCS AGPA1SF14F Profibus to AS-Interface gateway provides access to AS-Interface slave devices on a Profibus based industrial network. The gateway implements an AS-Interface master with a master profile M4 according to the AS-Interface Complete Specification version 3.0. The M4 master profile allows access to all slave profiles defined in this specification.
Description
The gateway is a Profibus DPV1 slave but can also run with a DPV0 master when using DPV0 features only. It supports up to 244 input bytes and 244 output bytes, but with a max. of 288 I/O bytes. The number of inputs and outputs to be transferred are configured in the Profibus configuration software (e.g. Sycon) as a part of the DP functions. The gateway needs no additional configuration software. The little configuration needed can be done directly at the devices with a menu driven user interface.
TCS AGPA1SF14F
5.7
5/74
Product data sheet

(continued)

Profibus / AS-Interface gateway
Characteristics
Profibus AS-Interface gateway
Profibus DP features Standard Bit rates Connector Master profile Standard
TCS AGPA1SF14F
DIN 19245 part 1-3 Kbps 9,6...12000, automatic recognition Sub-d 9 female M4 V3.0 Approx. 200 mA out of AS-Interface circuit AS-Interface voltage V > 500 EN 50082, EN 50081 C O...+ 55 C - 25...+ 85 Stainless steel mm 85 x 120 x 83 IP20 According to EN 61 131-2 g 460 Displaying slave addresses and error messages Power on Profibus master recognized Configuration error AS-Interface voltage OK AS-Interface normal operation active Automatic address programming enabled Gateway is in configuration mode 4
Housing Dimensions WxHxD Degree of protection Conforming to DIN 40 050 Tolerable loading reffering to impacts and vibrations Weight HMI LCD LED green (POWER) LED green (PROFIBUS) LED red (CNF ERR) LED green (ASI PWR) LED green (ASI ACT) LED green (PRG EN) LED yellow (PRJ MODE) Buttons
References
Description Profibus/AS-Interface gateway Functions - 1 Profibus port - 1 AS-Interface port Reference Weight kg TCS AGPA1SF14F
TCS AGPA1SF14F
5.7
5/75
Product data sheet

Tools
AS-Interface Design installation : software terminals
AS-Interface Design installation configuration software

Description Supplied on CD-ROM (PC) Reference SIS CD 2020002 Weight kg 0.090
Terminal characteristics
Terminal type Ambient air temperature around the device Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Supply Recharging time Operating time Display Keypad Connection Overload and short-circuit protection C mm h ASI TERV2 Operation : 0+ 55, storage : - 20+ 55 IP 40 84 x 195 x 35 LR6 batteries 2500 addressing operations LCD screen, 25 Selector switch + 4 keys To AS-Interface slave by infrared with cable ASI TERIR1, or direct using cable ASI TERACCpp Yes
mm
References
Terminals
Description Reference ASI TERV2 Weight kg 0.500
Adjustment terminal Runs on LR6 batteries. Allows addressing of AS-Interface V1 and V.2.1 slaves and diagnostics Cables to be ordered separately
ASI TERV2
Case containing: ASI TERV2SET ASI TERV2 adjustment terminal with: - Cables XZ MG12, XZ MG13, ASI TERIR1, ASI TERACC1M, ASI TERACC1F and ASI TERACC2, - Protective cover
1.000
Accessories
Description Cable adaptors for terminals ASI TERV2 XZ MG11 XZ MG12 For addressing Products with green terminal block (ABE 8pp, APP 1pp) Products with green or yellow terminal block (ABE 8pp, APP 1pp, ASI LUFpp, ASI 20Mpp) Infrared (ASI SSLpp) Reference XZ MG11 Weight kg 0.070
XZ MG12
0.070
ASI TERIR1
0.070
5.7
ASI TERIR1 ASI TERACC1M
Products with M12 male connector
ASI TERACC1M
0.070
Products with M12 female connector (XVB pp, XAL pp, LFp pp, ASI 67FMPpp) Products with Jack plug (ASI 20Mpp, ASI 67FFPpp) ASI TERACC2 ASI TERACC1F
ASI TERACC1F
0.070
ASI TERACC2
0.070
5/76
Product data sheet

Tools
AS-Interface line analyser
Presentation
ASI SA01 is an AS-Interface line analysis system which complements the local diagnostic functions of the AS-Interface master and gateways.
SUB-D data cable
ASISA01
AS-Iinterface line analyser
Diagnostic software
This diagnostic tool allows accurate analysis of the operation of new or existing (previously installed) AS-Interface lines. It enhances the capabilities of the line master: b by increasing the capacity for reception of messages transmitted to the hosts, b by locating errors that have occurred on the AS-Interface line. The inter-operability of the AS-Interface line analyser allows it to be integrated into AS-Interface lines equipped with components supplied by other manufacturers. Functions of the AS-Interface line analyser b Saving and evaluation of all data exchanges on the line, without any intervention by the analyser. b Identification and correction of errors coming from the line or from a particular slave. b Saving of the structure and quality of the AS-Interface line. b Search for and preventive treatment of weak points.
It consists of a line analyser, diagnostic software for the line analyser and a SUB-D data cable
Characteristics
Tool type Type Interfaces ASI SA01 AS-Interface line passive device AS-Interface line RS 232 for connection to the PC Tripping inputs (24 V) Tripping outputs (TTL) 2.1 mm Operation Storage C C 139 x 91,5 x 28 0+ 55 - 25+ 70 EN 50081-2, EN 61000-6-2 256 000 AS-Interface telegrams mA V PC configuration Operating system About 70, on the yellow cable u 500 IBM compatible PC, 80486 processor or higher Windows 95/98, Windows Me, Windows NT4, Windows 2000 and Windows XP By 3 LEDs Correct supply voltage RS 232 link activity Test mode
AS-Interface specification Dimensions (W x H x D) Ambient air temperature
Electromagnetic compatibility Telegram memory Current consumption Insulation voltage Diagnostic software
Display Green LED (Power) Yellow LED (Ser active) Green/red LED (Test)
References
Name AS-Interface line analysis tool Description Pack comprising: - diagnostic software for the AS-Interface line analyser, - AS-Interface line analyser, - SUB-D data cable Reference ASI SA01 Weight kg 0.160
5.7
ASI SA01
5/77
6/0
Contents
6 - Collaborative Automation Partner Program
Presentation
b Presentation of the partner program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2 b Modbus-IDA organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/3 b CAN in Automation (CiA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4 b AS-International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/5
Partner data sheets

b ACKSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/6 b ACTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/7 b Anyware Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/8 b Berger Lahr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/9 b Bilh + Wiedemann GmbH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/12 b connectBlue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/15 b DATA-LINC Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/16 b Festo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18 b FieldServer Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/19 b Hilscher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20 b Hirschmann Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/22 b HMS Industrial Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/24 b Industrial Control Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/26 b IXXAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/27 b Niobrara R & D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30 b Phnix Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/31 b ProSoft Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/32 b Webdyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34 b Woodhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/35
6/1
Presentation
Collaborative Automation Partner Program

Partners
Presentation of the partner program

Overview The Collaborative Automation approach is a way of sharing data, interconnecting software tools, accessing information in real time at any point within an architecture all with the aim of maximizing productivity. The Collaborative Automation Partner Program is a program for sharing technology. Its aim is to follow a collaborative approach to promote partner products and solutions that complement the Telemecanique offer within the world of industrial control systems. The products promoted in this program use technologies developed either by our partner organizations, or by Telemecanique (Modbus Plus or Fip networks, Modicon Quantum or Modicon Premium PLCs, Unity interfaces to name but a few examples), or they use standard technologies (Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP, OPC, etc). The program partners There are currently more than 80 member organizations in the Collaborative Automation Partner Program offering more than 700 products in total. There are 3 categories of partner: b Technology partners b Unity partners b Transparent Ready partners The Transparent Ready partner offers are principally in the areas of wireless communication TCP/IP based, gateways, servers, modems, bridges and remote application solutions over the Internet.
Contacts
Find out more about the Collaborative Automation Partner Program at: www.collaborativeautomation.com For any additional information, contact: Collaborative Automation Partner Program 245 Route des Lucioles - BP 147 06903 Sophia Antipolis - Cedex France v Fax: +33 (0)4 97 23 14 99 v E-mail: info.capp@schneider-electric.com More information on how to join the partner program can be found on the Collaborative Automation website : www.collaborativeautomation.com
6/2
Presentation

Modbus-IDA organisation
Modbus-IDA presentation
Modbus-IDA organisation mission statement Modbus-IDA is a group of independent users and suppliers of automation devices that seeks to drive the adoption of the Modbus communication protocol suite and the evolution to address architectures for distributed automation systems across multiple market segments. Modbus-IDA will also provide the infrastructure to obtain and share information about the protocols, their application and certification to simplify implementation by users resulting in reduced costs (e.g. the specifications of the Modbus suite of protocols are available on line, free of charge). Modbus-IDA Provides Visibility to Modbus and Modbus related Products Modbus products are the solutions to Modbus users worldwide. Modbus-IDA helps users find suppliers through a visibility program that includes: b Member listing on the Modbus-IDA.org website. b Product highlights in the Modbus newsletter and on the web. Join the discussion as Modbus-IDA embraces new technologies, and help guide the future of Modbus-IDA as part of the technical working groups. You can join on-line at www.modbus-ida.org Benefits for component suppliers, Integrators and Users Your Membership in Modbus-IDA helps provide a myriad of open technology benefits to you and your employees. An extract of the benefits includes: b Access to a rich library of shared users and implementers experiences. b Participation in a dynamic resourceful User Forum. b Access to a consultant referral directory that brings together users and experts. b Newsletters and technical training programs. Modbus protocol Conformance Testing Program The true benefit of any open standard is the assurance it provides to users that the products they buy will interoperate seamlessly. Unfortunately, any specification, no matter how carefully written, is subject to interpretation and occasional misunderstanding. That's where conformance testing becomes valuable. The Modbus Conformance Testing Program provides independent verification that a broad array of qualifications has been met in compliance with Modbus specifications. It provides end users with the comfort that their design and configuration process will proceed smoothly and assures suppliers that their products were developed in accordance with key Modbus criteria. This program is administered by Modbus-IDA.org and is performed at independent service provides, the Modbus TCP/IP Conformance Test Laboratory are available in the United States of America and China. For more details, consult the Modbus-IDA website. TCP/IP Modbus toolkit available through Modbus-IDA.org The first edition of the TCP/IP Modbus CD Toolkit V1.0 is a great collection of resources, selected to assist users and developers in implementing Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus servers or clients. This toolkit targets essential messaging services. Additional toolkits will be made available in the future to facilitate the deployment of other Transparent Ready services such as Global Data, etc. This resources toolkit provides Specifications, Implementation Guides, diagnostics, test tools and examples source code. Also included the certification test suite as developed and used by the Modbus Certification Laboratory at the University of Michigan. Become involved with the Modbus-IDA.org Take advantages of the Modbus-IDA Website: www.modbus-ida.org
6/3
Presentation, references, contact

CAN in Automation (CiA)
Presentation
CAN in Automation organization mission statement CAN in Automation (CiA) is an international group of users and manufacturers working on two aspects: development and promotion of CAN-based higher-layer protocols. b The technical part of the group's work is mainly the development and maintenance of specifications. The specification ranges from definitions for the physical layer to definitions for the application layer and device profiles. CiA works with international standardization bodies like ISO or IEC. CiA offers support for the certification of devices according to the specifications. b The other aspect is the promotion of the group's work. Current activities of CiA comprise teaching seminars and education of system developers to reach this objective. The publication of product guides, catalogs, magazines, and brochures also supports this objective. Talks in conferences, the presence with a booth at trade fairs and exhibition, and not to forget the CiA web site (http://www.can-cia.org) round off the promotional objectives of the group. Conformance test and product certification The true benefit of any open standard is the assurance it provides to users that the products they buy will inter-operate seamlessly. Unfortunately, any specification, no matter how carefully written, is subject to interpretation and misunderstanding. That is where conformance testing becomes invaluable. The CANopen conformance test provides the independent verification that a broad array of qualifications has been met in compliance with the CANopen specifications. The CANopen conformance test tool supports the conformance test. The CiA web site lists products which have passed the conformance test and are certified to fulfill the specifications. CiA CANopen device catalog The CiA CANopen Product Guide is available on CD-ROM and on the web site http://www.can-cia.com/products. It is a comprehensive summary of the CANopen devices available on the market. The products are listed in the catalog by manufacturer, CiA standard, application, and product name. CANopen Conformance Test Suite
The CANopen Conformance Test Suite, which is also used for the CANopen certification is available for any manufacturer of a CANopen device and for any user of CANopen devices. Anybody is able to check conformance of a CANopen NMT slave device according to the standards and to prepare the CANopen device to pass the certification process. The Conformance Test Suite provides b The test of the application layer services, b The test of the EDS against the object dictionary of the CANopen device, b The verification of the network states and transitions.
References
Description This version is used to verify that a CANopen device is conform to CANopen Version 4.01 and later. Reference CANopen Conformance Test Suite Version 2.0
Both software versions are requiring a CAN hardware interface installed on the PC to access the CANopen devices to be tested. The internal access of the software to the CAN hardware interface is based on a well-defined interface called CANopen Testing Interface (COTI). Currently, several companies are providing the hardware with that interface. The current interface list can be requested at CAN in Automation.
Contact
CAN in Automation (CiA) Am Weichselgarten 26 D-91058 Erlangen Germany v v v v 6/4 Phone: +49-9131-690 86-0 Fax: +49-9131-690 86-79 E-mail: headquarters@can-cia.org Website: www.can-cia.org
Presentation, references, contact

AS-International
Presentation
AS-International Association, the AS-Interface Organization mission statement The AS-Interface Organisation exists since 1991, that means 15 years market leader in the sensor actuator level. The success figures give a unique impression of the market situation. b More than 10 Million AS-Interface nodes in the field b More than 1000 certified products b More than 280 manufacturers support the system In 1991 the first specification for the AS-Interface system has been adopted by the association. Since than the technology has improved well and the system has penetrated the market. Today AS-Interface is market leader in the sensor/ actuator level. With the implicated power of innovation AS-Interface still leads to new fields of applications. AS-Interface allows cost optimised wiring solutions in single systems as well as it is a cost effective carrier to other networks (Ethernet, CAN). For all this systems it provides the basic communication, no matter what system is used on the host level. That makes AS-Interface an secure long lasting invest. AS-Interface is an international standard according to IEC 62026-2 /EN 50295. The AS-Interface organization AS-International Association supports the user with general technology information and ensures the stabile innovative future caring for this standard. Detailed information of our activities you find in the internet at www.as-interface.net. Products that work, proven by certification The simple installation of AS-Interface is the first step. The certification provides you a true indicator for compatible products during start up. A product certified according to the AS-Interface specification is a product that works in terms of the system. The AS-International certification office certifies products that have proven there compatibility to the specification. You can identify certified products by the certification sign and the 5 digit certification number. The full range of more than 1000 AS-Interface certified products is available. Most of them you can find in the product catalog at www.as-interface.net. AS-Interface device catalog The AS-Interface Internet product catalog contains about 1000 products. A good assortment of AS-Interface product range can be found by a few clicks at http://www.as-interface.net/EN/Products. What ever you look for, the database has an easy search system that make it simple for you to find the product you need. The actual product innovations are provided at: http://www.as-interface.net/EN/Products/Innovations. AS-Interface Safety at Work technology provides easy to install machine safety components. You can find a full range of products at http://www.as-interface.net/EN/Products/Safety/Components. AS-Interface Academy The AS-Interface academy is an online learning tool that provides a keen knowledge of AS-Interface for beginners and advanced users. 24 hours a day the Academy on www.as-interface.net can be used for learning the basics of field bus technology or the fine details of dedicated AS-Interface solutions.
References
b AS-Interface Safety at Work application handbook: The AS-Interface Safety at work application handbook provides detailed information of safety at work technology with a detailed few to applications. b AS-Interface The Automation Solution: The book is a compilation of technology, functionality and applications. It is a compendium of AS-Interface engaged to give a deep knowledge of the System.
Contact
AS-International Association Zum Taubengarten 52 63571 Gelnhausen Germany v v v v Phone: 0049 (0)6051 473212 Fax: 0049 (0)6051 473282 Email: info@as-interface.net Website: www.as-interface.net. 6/5
Partner data sheet

ACKSYS
ACKSYS wireless solutions

ACKSYS ACKSYS is a French company specializing in telecommunication solutions for all industrial sectors where high performance, reliability and longevity are major requirements (industrial control systems, telecommunications, aviation, military, transport and healthcare). Wireless solutions for industry (WiFi IEEE 802.11b) ACKSYS also offers a range of wireless equipment based on the WiFi standard IEEE 802.11b. This range comprises an Ethernet/WiFi access point, an Ethernet/WiFi bridge and an RS 232, RS 422/RS 485 serial link server on Ethernet WiFi that also operates as a gateway between serial Modbus devices and the Modbus TCP/IP network. These devices can be used to: b Build a wireless Ethernet network infrastructure (WL-ACCESS devices and WL-BRIDGE devices. b Connect two separate Ethernet networks without using any additional wiring (WL-BRIDGE). b Connect serial link devices to the wireless Ethernet network. b Connect an RTU serial Modbus device to a wireless Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet network (WL-COMETH device in gateway mode). b Create a wireless connection between two serial link devices (WL-COMETH device in full duplex radio modem mode). Unlike conventional, non-WiFi radio modems, which require same brand devices at both ends of the connection, WL-COMETH offers total interoperability of all devices conforming to standard IEEE 802.11b within the network, meaning that a single access point can communicate with more than 100 WL-COMETH devices. It is also possible to replace a wired full duplex serial link using two WL-COMETH radio devices. IP65 weatherproof versions are also available for outdoor applications or applications in damp or dusty environments.
WL-COMETH
WL-COMETH, IP 65
WiFi radio 2.4 GHz
Modbus serial link (RS 485)
Modbus TCP/IP network
Serial Modbus to Modbus TCP/IP connection
6
WL-BRIDGE WL-ACCESS
WL-COMETH is available in versions with 1, 2 and 4 RS 232, RS 422/RS 485 serial channels. All WL range devices have a built-in a 85/264 V and c 100/370 V or low voltage c 9/36 V power supply. They have universal mounting options (in enclosure, or wall or din rail mounting). Antennas are mounted on RSMA screw connectors allowing the use of high gain antennae for long distance applications.
Contacts
WiFi radio 2.4 GHz
Installing radio solutions requires specialist expertise. Please contact our partner: Eric CARIOU ACKSYS Communications & Systems ZA du Val Joyeux 10 rue des Entrepreneurs Villepreux 78450 France
Modbus TCP/IP network interconnection
v v v v
Phone: +33 (0)1 30 56 46 46 Fax: +33 (0)1 30 56 12 95 E-mail: eric.cariou@acksys.fr Website: www.acksys.fr
6/6
Partner data sheet

ACTL
eWON : Ethernet Gateway, Remote Access and eSCADA

Presentation eWON (eYES Watching Over the Net) is a family of products, ranging from an intelligent Ethernet gateway to a complete remote management solution for PLCs, devices and standalone equipment, with many embedded features, advanced services and tools. Fully compatible with the whole range of Schneider PLCs, eWON is the ideal connectivity companion for your applications. All eWON models are DIN rail mounted and are powered c 12-24 V. They are equipped with a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port and a RS 232/RS 485 serial port. Additionnal features: b Full TCP/IP and PPP RFCs compliance b Embedded web server, http, SMTP, DNS b FTP client & server, SNMP (MIB II & Data) b NTP (Network Time Protocol) b Support for scripts programming (in Basic) b
Internet PSTN GSM/GPRS
eWON500: Modbus Programmable Gateway Using internal memory tags, eWON publishes, in Modbus TCP/IP and/or in SNMP, data collected through numerous serial protocols, with advanced alarm capabilities. As the RS 232/RS 485 serial port can be accessed directly with scripts in BASIC, eWON decodes proprietary ASCII command sets and protocols of various devices (scalers, tracers, x-meters and more) making them available to higher end systems such as ERP, MES, SCADA, Historian, etc
Web Server
eWON2001 & eWON4001 : PLC Remote Service & Management Either point-to-point or through Internet, thanks to their optional embedded PSTN or GSM/GPRS modem, these eWON models offer efficient RAS service, enabling transparent operation from PL7 Pro, Concept or Unity, directly to the PLC programming port. Using advanced alarm management features, eWON will warn you of critical situations by mail, SMS or SNMP traps. With its data logging and reporting features, eWON 4001 will even send, at regular intervals or on alarms, by mail or by FTP, a complete production report or a graph with the latest trends.
Alarms by SMS, E-mail
Datalogging
viewON : Design your own SCADA-like WEB pages, nice and easy !
Ethernet and/or RS 232/RS 485
Cutting short on delays and development costs, viewON enables everyone to create one's own HMI and production synoptics, on web pages, within minutes and without writing a single line of code. Thanks ot its intuitive menus, animations and object libraries, viewON makes design of such complex pages easy and straightforward.
Contacts
More information: www.ewon.biz Worldwide distributors list: www.ewon.biz/CtDistrib.htm
Uni-Telway, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, XIP
International Technical Support: support@ewon.biz International Sales Information: sales@ewon.biz ACTL sa 10A, avenue de lartisanat B-1420 Braine LAlleud Belgium v Phone: +32 2 387 27 82 v Fax: +32 2 384 47 16
6/7
Partner data sheet

Anyware Technologies
Company Presentation
Anyware Technologies is a French software editor and solution provider expert in embedded software, web technologies and IT systems. Leveraging its technology, tools and expertise, the company has developed an innovative products and services offering in 2 business areas: b M2M Solutions: Our Machine To Machine Solutions allow remote assets to be easily monitored, diagnosed and managed. With our products you can develop your M2M applications and experience effective benefits in record time! We have developed a specific vertical offer for the automation market. Targeted at production and maintenance teams. Our industrial control products allow for an improvement of your industrial installations'productivity. b Solutions & Technologies: A services offer which includes expertise, consulting services around "open source" kernels, web technologies and IT integration.
Automation products and solutions

Wi-Fi
Entreprise Network HTTP only PLC Programming Tool Electrical CAD SCADA Industrial Network
thinPLC: An easy and universal access to your automation applications. thinPLC is a software dedicated to automation diagnostics. It's a thin client tool allowing remote or on-site diagnostics for PLC-based industrial installations. thinPLC enables you to visualize and animate PLC applications in real time, from a simple web browser, without requiring PLC programming tools. It easily extends any third party tools (supervisors, control/command HMI...) with the benefit of PLC programs dynamic display. b Increase operators autonomy and maintenance team efficiency significantly. b Higher productivity: downtime is minimized and the production equipments are better exploited. b Low financial and human resource investments: you get used to the product rapidly and with minimal costs. thinHMI: Your thin client HMI solution dedicated to automation. thinHMI enables you to design graphical and real-time animated web pages for industrial HMI. It does not require any specific skills in web technologies. Generated website can be uploaded on any industrial device equipped with a web server and then displayed from a web browser. b b b b b Adaptability: it has been thought and developed specifically for the industrial world. Precision: HMI animated in real time. Empowerment: HMI can be developed with no skills in web technologies. Performance: HMI are optimized and complete. Easy and user-friendly: you get familiar to it quite immediately.
Active Webserver OPC Modbus
M2M products and solutions

M2M Developer Suite: A quick and easy-to-use software development environment to develop your own M2M applications. M2M Developer Suite is a powerful development environment tool enabling Machine-To- Machine solutions to be developed, generated and deployed from the embedded application to the central server application and the IT System integration. It offers a user-friendly and powerful programming interface which enables you to use wireless programming modules to their full extent. It generates an application which remains opened to further customization, thus offering more flexibility and freedom for developers. b It dramatically simplifies and shortens your development cycle: your M2M solution is implemented twice faster than with any other traditional development tool. b Higher ROI: development cycles are shortened and development costs lowered. b The value of your M2M system is maximized: implementation of an application from end to end which is rich in functionalities, interoperable (can be connected with any machine or IT system) and easy to deploy.
Contacts
Anyware Technologies Prologue II Rue Ampre BP 87216 31672 Labge Cedex France v v v v Phone: +33 (0)5 61 00 52 90 Fax: +33 (0)5 61 00 51 46 Website: http://www.anyware-technologies.com More Information: www.anyware-tech.com
6/8
Partner data sheet

Berger Lahr
Motion Controls
Twin Line TLC6pp
Presentation
Twin Line TLC 6pp as a freely programmable positioning controller features integrated PLC and motion functionality. It is programmed with the CoDeSys programming system according to IEC 61131-3. Available programming languages: LD: Ladder diagram, FBD: Function block diagram, IL: Instruction list, ST: Structured text, SFC: Sequential function chart, CFC: Continuous function chart
Characteristics
CANopen features Structure Standard Physical interface Data rate Medium DS 301, DS 402 9-pole SUB-D up to 1 Mbps Shielded dual twisted pairs
SMC
Presentation
The SMC motion controller with integrated soft PLC is the ideal solution for controlling simple motion sequences; for example in automated production cells and in all applications requiring coordinated motion. As an autonomous process module, SMC can coordinate up to 32 drives or control devices such as I/O modules. Special benefit: due to the very compact design, SMC requires minimum space in the control cabinet.
Characteristics
CANopen features Structure Standard Physical interface Data rate Medium DS 301, DS 405 9-pole SUB-D 1 Mbps Shielded dual twisted pairs
6
Twin Line Cell Controller (TLCC)
Presentation
1 2 3
The Twin Line Cell Controller (TLCC) is a motion controller with an integrated high-performance soft PLC. The device features an Ethernet connection and an integrated HTML server. The link-up to host systems can be implemented with an OPC server.
Description
The Twin Line Cell Controller TLCC have the following on the front face: 1 7 segment display 2 A RJ45 connector used to connect Ethernet network 3 A 9-way connector used to connect CANopen bus.
Characteristics
CANopen features Structure Standard Physical interface Data rate Medium DS 301 V4.02 9-pole SUB-D Up to 1 Mbps Shielded dual twisted pairs
6/9
Partner data sheet (continued) Collaborative Automation Partner
Program
Berger Lahr
TLM2
Presentation
TLM 2 is a powerful multi-axis motion controller with integrated soft PLC. The controller can synchronously control up to four drives via pulse/direction interfaces. The Ethernet interface enables networking with hosts via OPC data interchange. As a CANopen master, the controller can coordinate up to 126 drives or slave devices such as I/O modules. Special feature of TLM 2: NC interpolation of up to four drives, e.g. for motion in gluing, cutting, axis portals and XY table applications and all technology applications such as cam disc, cam switch and angle-synchronous mode.
Characteristics
CANopen features Structure Standard Physical interface Data rate Medium DS 301, DS 405 9-pole SUB-D Up to 1 Mbps Shielded dual twisted pairs
Stepper
Twin Line TLC5pp
Presentation
Twin Line TLC 5pp as positioning controller with fieldbus interface is controlled by a master (such as PC/PLC) via the fieldbus interface. TLC 5pp is available for stepper motors in the power range up to 8.0 kW. Device-specific operating modes and functions: Point-to-point, velocity, electronic gear, reference motion, manual motion, oscillator, teach-in, capture inputs, output cam switching signal.
Characteristics
CANopen features Structure
Standard Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen communication Operating temperature adapter Degree of protection
DS 301, DS 402 V2 9-pole SUB-D up to 1 Mbps Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...50 IP20 (optionnal IP54)
SD3 28
Presentation
The power electronics are available up to 6.8 A. SD 3 28 is suitable for mains supply with a 1115 V and a 230 V (50/60 Hz). The drives features a CANopen interface. The line filter is integrated and the current is reduced automatically. Rotation monitoring is on board. Power Removal - Function integrated
Characteristics
CANopen features Structure Standard Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen communication Operating temperature adapter Degree of protection DS 301, DS 402 V3 RJ45, spring-loaded terminals up to 1 Mbps Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...50 IP20
6/10
Program
Berger Lahr
Intelligent Compact Drive IcLA

Presentation
IcLA are intelligent compact drives. They integrate everything required for motion tasks: positioning controller, power electronics and servo, EC or stepper motor. The benefits for new perspectives in planning, design and installation are: b No control cabinet for control electronics b Extremely compact drive size b Very little wiring. Power Removal - Function integrated
Characteristics
CANopen features Standard Profile Structure Physical interface Data rate Medium CANopen communication Operating temperature adapter Degree of protection DS 301 V4.02 M12 (with industrial connector option) 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 Shielded dual twisted pairs 0...+ 65 IP 54
kbps C
Contact
Berger Lahr GmbH & Co. KG Breslauer Strasse 7 D-77933 Lahr Germany v v v v Phone: +49 7821 946 01 Fax: +49 7821 946 313 E-mail: info@berger-lahr.com Website: www.berger-lahr.com
(1) Berger Lahr, a company of Schneider Electric.
6/11
Partner data sheet

Bihl + Wiedemann GmbH
Presentation
Bihl+Wiedemann is an internationally acting specialist in developping and manufacturing of AS-Interface products. The company, known as the "AS-Interface Masters", offers a wide range of AS-i Masters, AS-i Analog Modules, AS-i OEM Modules and all kind of AS-i accessories to give the user the best solution for each application.
AS-i Modbus Plus Gateway: BWU1583

Presentation The AS-i/Modbus Plus Gateway serves to connect the Actuator-Sensor-Interface to a hierarchically higher Modbus Plus network. The Gateway acts as a complete Master for the AS-i and as a node for Modbus Plus. All AS-i functions can be called via the Modbus Plus network. As with all Masters of Bihl+Wiedemann, commissioning, debugging and setting up of the AS-i parameters can be accomplished with the use of two push-buttons, the LCD display and the LEDs directly on the system, but it can also be handled via Modbus Plus. Advanced AS-i diagnostics allows to detect occasional occurring configuration errors and to judge the quality of the AS-i communication. Features b b b b AS-i Gateway to Modbus Plus 1 AS-i Master Modbus Plus node Advanced AS-i diagnostics.
AS-i 3.0 Modbus Gateway in Stainless Steel : BWU1641

Presentation The AS-i 3.0 Modbus Gateway in Stainless Steel serves to connect the Actuator-Sensor-Interface to a hierarchically higher Modbus network. It is characterized by unique diagnostic functions. It reliably detects the assignment of one address to two slaves. An error message points to the duplicate addresses in plaintext. Meanwhile, the superior control receives this information and is able to react accordingly. Furthermore it contains an AS-i earth fault detector. The identification of the first earth fault hedges the system. The earth fault detector directly informs the superior control. This signal produces the control's reaction. The integrated AS-i noise detector continually checks the analog signal on the bus line and detects noise and over voltage on AS-Interface. In that manner emerging problems can be covered in a state in which telegram repetitions do not occur yet. Features b b b b 1 AS-i Master Recognition of Duplicate AS-i Addresses AS-i Earth Fault Detector integrated AS-i Noise Detector integrated.
6/12
Program
AS-i 3.0 DeviceNet Gateway in Stainless Steel: BWU1818

Presentation The AS-i 3.0 DeviceNet Gateway in Stainless Steel serves to connect the Actuator-Sensor-Interface to a hierarchically higher DeviceNet network. It is characterized by unique diagnostic functions. It reliably detects the assignment of one address to two slaves. An error message points to the duplicate addresses in plaintext. Meanwhile, the superior control receives this information and is able to react accordingly. Furthermore it contains an AS-i earth fault detector. The identification of the first earth fault hedges the system. The earth fault detector directly informs the superior control. This signal produces the control's reaction. The integrated AS-i noise detector continually checks the analog signal on the bus line and detects noise and over voltage on AS-Interface. In that manner emerging problems can be covered in a state in which telegram repetitions do not occur yet. Features b b b b b b DeviceNet to AS-i Bridge 1 AS-i 3.0 Master Recognition of Duplicate AS-i Addresses AS-i Earth Fault Detector integrated Advanced Diagnostic Function AS-i Noise Detector integrated
Accessories b Software "AS-i Control Tools" with serial cable for AS-i master in Stainless steel (Art. no. BW1602) b DeviceNet Mastersimulator with USB interface (art. no. BW1420) b Data transmission cord for AS-i Gateways with CAN interface (art. no. BW1226) b AS-i power supply 4 A (art. no. BW1649).
AS-i DiagnosticTuner : BWU1843

Presentation The primary task of the AS-i Diagnostic Tuner is the length adjustment in AS-i circuits without repeater. It enables a stable communication with net lengths to approximately 300 m without the use of a Repeater or without a second power supply unit. The AS-i Diagnostic Tuner is used as a diagnosis unit which announces the bus function of the control online. The AS-i Diagnostic Tuner is able to read the traffic light announcements for each individual slave and to send them to the superordinate control system. The result can be integrated into an application program. It shows whether the optimization has occured. So gradual changing of the AS-i circuit's quality can be recognized and repaired on time. The AS-i Diagnostic Tuner can be switched off completely over a switch or set on a default value. The AS-i Diagnostic Tuner operates according to the new "combi slave profile" S-7.A.5, in which digital and serial data are transferred parallely. 2I/1O data for the basic function of the tuner are transmitted thereby as usual, and are usable with each master. The serial data - here the analog values of the tension and the traffic light values of the individual slaves - are transmitted by the piece with the remaining bits, built up in the master again and sent from here than simple complete telegram to the control. The user finds the up-to-date measured AS-i tension and the minimum AS-i tension as 16 bit analog value in the field of the input data (similar to the analog value transmission). So that data transmission rates of approx. 50 Baud are attainable in the AS-i A/B operation. Because of the ID code "A" is the Diagnostic Tuner a slave with an extended address range and takes in the A/B operation one of 62 addresses, in the standard mode as A-slave one of 31. Since the Diagnostic Tuner uses the extended functions as slave, he must be used together with an AS-i 3.0 Master. The AS-i Tuner is compatibel to the AS-i Diagnostic Tuner but without diagnostics via AS-Interface.
6/13
Program
AS-i DiagnosticTuner : BWU1843

Features b b b b Triplication of the AS-i circuit length Strengthens the robustness of AS-i Supervises the quality of the installation Tool for the service.
(continued)
References
Product
AS-i Modbus Plus Gateway AS-i 3.0 Modbus Gateway in Stainless Steel AS-i Tuner AS-i 3.0 DeviceNet Gateway in Stainless Steel AS-i Diagnostic Tuner
Reference
BWU 1583 BWU 1641 BWU 1648 BWU 1818 BWU 1843
Contact
Bihl+Wiedemann GmbH Flowrthstrae 41 68199 Mannheim Germany v v v v Phone: +49 621-33996-0 Fax: +49 621-3392239 E-mail: mail@bihl-wiedemann.de Website: www.bihl-wiedemann.com
6/14
Partner data sheet

connectBlue
Presentation connectBlue Wireless offer

Bluetooth Serial Port Adapter (RS 232, RS 422 or RS 485) The Bluetooth Serial Port Adapter enables replacement of serial cables with Bluetooth wireless technology. Bluetooth is robust, proven and well suited for industrial applications and is license free to use. The Serial Port Adapter connected to the RS 232/RS 422/RS 485 port of the industrial device acts like a wireless connection point to the device. A PC, laptop, PDA or any other serial device may connect wirelessly to the industrial device for ranges up to > 100 m. It supports both point-to-point and point-to-multipoint configurations. The Serial Port Adapter is configured using a PC Configuration Wizard or by use of AT commands. The Serial Port Adapter is available in wall/DIN-rail mounted IP 22 or wall mounted IP 65. Use Cases - Serial Port Adapter (RS 232, RS 422 or RS 485) 1 Operators, programmers etc. are provided wireless access to an industrial device for configuration, programming, diagnostics using a standard computer, laptop or PDA. 2 The Serial Port Adapter supports Wireless Multidrop. It is used to replace an RS 422/RS 485 multidrop network (running e.g. Modbus protocol) with Bluetooth.
IP 22 version
IP 65 version
Contacts
Installing radio solutions requires specialist expertise. Please contact our partner:
connectBlue AB, Norra Vallgatan 64 Malm, SE-21122, Sweden v v v v Phone: +46 (0)40 6307100 Fax: +46 (0)40-237137 E-mail: sales@connectblue.se Website: www.connectblue.se
6/15
Partner data sheet

DATA-LINC Group
License-free Wireless Solutions from Data-Linc Group

DATA-LINC Group Founded in 1988, Data-Linc Group has provided exceptionally reliable solutions for industrial automation systems including expert technical support and communications consultation. Data-Linc Group designs and manufactures high performance, superior quality modems that have been successfully implemented in all major industries including water/wastewater, oil and gas, automotive, consumer goods manufacturing/packaging, steel mills, mines, paper mills, utilities and transportation systems. Its products are available worldwide having recently expanded its market with a line of wireless modems for the European Union countries. Contact Data-Linc for information about their broad product line and their ability to interface seamlessly with Schneider equipment as well as a variety of manufacturers PLCs and equipment in hybrid and legacy networks.
Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum Solutions

Features b License-free and wireless operates in the ISM (Industrial/Scientific/Medical) 900 MHz and 2.4 GHz bands b Compact, flexible design with universal mounting, back panel or on optional DIN rail clip b Rated range communication extended by Repeaters and/or high gain antennas b Employs Smart Spectrum frequency hopping technology for exceptional data integrity and reliability-including high interference environments b Wirelessly connects Ethernet PLCs and workstations b Factory or field configured for your application ensuring trouble-free installation b User configurable for Master, Remote, Repeater or Repeater/Remote mode b Front panel LEDs: Power, RF Link, RF In, RF Out, LAN In, LAN Out, LAN Link, LAN Collision, Overrun Error b Superior noise immunity, higher power output and better receiver sensitivity compared to other 2.4 GHz wireless systems b SRM6310E-EU CE Mark and ETSI compliant for installation in EU countries
SRM6310E-EU, SRM6310E, SRM6210E Long Range Ethernet Radio Modems
SRM6p10E License-free Wireless Ethernet Modems Data-Linc Group's SRM6p10E Ethernet Radio Modems offer superior reliability, versatility and performance. The SRM6p10E modems are factory preconfigured for easy, trouble-free installation. Stated ranges for each of the modems may be extended with higher gain or directional antennas and multiples of this distance with repeaters. It offers an unsurpassed rated range of: b SRM6210E, 900 MHz ISM band: up to 40 km (25 miles) and an installed range of up to 56 km (35 miles) in optimal conditions with line-of-sight, b SRM6310E, 2.4 GHz ISM Band: up to 16km (10 miles) with line-of-sight, b SRM6310E-EU, 2.4 GHz ISM Band for European Union Countries (1): up to 8 km (5 miles) with unobstructed line-of-site, and an omni directional antenna.
(1) SRM6310E-EU is designed to meet e European Mark and ETSI RF regulations, It combines advanced frequency hopping technology and a highly sensitive RF receiver to maximize transmission range and industrial performance.
LincView OPC Enhanced Diagnostics Utility Software for SRM Network Management Features b b b b b b b b b
LincView OPC Enhanced Diagnostics Utility software
Simplifies monitoring and control of large, complex networks Offers OPC server capability Graphically displays view of entire wireless network Provides programmable warning/alarms with logging Displays both ends of all RF links Supports multiple radio networks Timestamps last communication Delivers historical graphing of key statistics and values Allows re-configuration of each network modem (RF link must first be present)
LincView OPC (OLE for Process Control), Data-Linc's enhanced diagnostics/management software, allows the monitoring and control of RF networks utilizing the SRM Family of wireless modems. LincView OPC provides the ability to troubleshoot and analyze the performance of RF links in large SCADA networks thus simplifying management of the network and the application together on one screen.
6/16
Program
DATA-LINC Group
High Speed, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum, WiFi Compliant Solutions

FastLinc FLC810E License-free 802.11b High Speed Ethernet Radio Modem Features b Provides fast, high-speed wireless Ethernet connectivity using the 2.412-2.462 GHz license-free spread spectrum band b High output power and excellent receiver sensitivity for outstanding in-plant RF coverage and outdoor range b Rated range of 8 km (5 miles) with unobstructed line-of-sight (multiples of this range using Repeaters) b Coexists with Data-Lincs Smart Spectrum SRM6210E frequency hopping technology for hybrid 900 MHz and 2.4 GHz RF SCADA systems b Wireless connections to PLCs, HMIs, Ethernet I/O systems and portable computers b Compatible with WiFi and IEEE 802.11b compliant devices b Functions as a wireless access point, a station adaptor and a bridge with repeating function b Supports point-to-point, point-to-multipoint and peer-to-peer topologies b Compact, flexible design with universal mounting including an optional DIN rail clip b Web page (HTML) configuration and diagnostics b Built-in data encryption and authentication for added security b Factory or field configured for your application ensuring trouble-free installation b AC or DC powered FastLinc Industrial Ethernet Wireless Modems provide a high-speed, secure wireless solution using 2.4 GHz direct sequence technology with connectivity up to 11 Mbps (over the air data rate) at distances up to 8 km (5 miles) -multiples of this with distance with repeaters. FastLinc modems function as a wireless 802.11b access point, wireless bridge or remote repeater and supports point-to-point, point-to-multipoint and peer-to-peer topologies for IEEE 802.11b, WiFi compliant communications. Both Ethernet stand-alone and PCMCIA models are available. FastLinc FLC800C License-free 802.11b High Speed Ethernet PCMCIA Card Features b Provides high-speed wireless Ethernet connectivity using the 2.412-2.462 GHz license-free spread spectrum band b High output power (200 mW) and excellent receive sensitivity for exceptional range capability b PCMCIA card fits within most laptop computers b Compatible with WiFi and IEEE802.11b compliant devices b Built-in data encryption and authentication for added security b Includes site survey software
FastLinc FLC800C High Speed Wireless Ethernet 802.11b WiFi and IEEE compliant PCMCIA card
FastLinc Industrial Ethernet Wireless Modems are a high-speed, secure wireless solution. The FLC800C Industrial Wireless PCMCIA Card provides much higher output power than commercially available IEEE 802.11b cards. This greatly increases the range in challenging RF environments such as industrial plants. The FLC800C is ideal for portable computers used to access plant networks for HMI, SCADA, maintenance and PLC programming applications. When used in conjunction with the FLC810E modem, a robust wireless industrial network is created for outstanding coverage and high-speed performance. The FLC800C includes a software utility for simple configuration and reports RF performance information. The software provides an easy way to use a portable computer for RF site surveys. Also available in stand-alone Ethernet (FLC810E) models.
Contacts
Installing radio solutions requires specialist expertise. Please contact our partner: DATA-LINC Group 3535 Factoria Blvd. SE Bellevue, WA 98006, USA v v v v Phone: +1 425 882 2206 Fax: +1 425 867 0865 E-mail: sales@data-linc.com Website: www.data-linc.com
Direct access to the DATA-LINC partnership with Schneider Electric, including applications examples: www.data-linc.com/schneider/ 6/17
Partner data sheet

Festo
CANopen
Presentation
Festo Festo is the world-wide leader in intelligent pneumatics. Universal, standardised, or application specific valve terminals cover all possible application domains and help you to design your machine optimal and most cost-effective. Pneumatics, electronics, and network from one source is more than the sum of all parts.
CPV - 400-1600 l/min
Valves terminals CPV compact performance

AS-Interface
CPV - 400-1600 l/min

CANopen
b Highest pneumatic performance on the smallest footprint helps you to save space and weight. b Mounting the CPV decentral and as near as possible to the drives, increase the machine performance by 20%. b Optimised adaptation of the valve size CPV10/14/18 for the drives gives further 40% cycle time reduction. b Integrated diagnosis and condition monitoring reduces and eliminates machine downtime and increases your productivity and customer satisfaction. b Extensible: You can connect further CP modules and CP valve terminals to CPV with CANopen - This saves installation costs and bus addresses and rounds off your pneumatic control chain perfectly with harmonised components. b Compact: CPV with ASI connection. Actuation of a small number of valves, where numerous valve variants can be used from the CPV modular system.
Modbus/TCP
CPX ISO
CPX Mini/Maxi
6
CPX MPA CPX I/O terminal
Valves terminal based on CPX, strong in communication and modular b The electrical terminal CPX is the basis for most modern innovations in electrical periphery. Highly flexible, robust, and saving installation effort. Strong in communication on CANopen, Modbus/TCP and others. b The valve terminal MPA is the dream team with CPX. Consistent appearance, serial linking, robust, flexible, and modular. In short: valve modularity newly defined in the flow rate range 360 700 l/min. b The valve terminal with standardised valves according to ISO 15407-2 - That is standard in small footprint with flow rates ranging from 500 1000 l/min, maximal pneumatic flexibility, functionality, and modularity. b Modular, proven, and maintenance friendly - the adaptive Midi/Maxi with electrical inputs and outputs in metal casing is a reliable specialist in the flow rate range 500 1250 l/min.
Installation system CPI for redefined decentralisation Saving installation costs and nearer to the drive. If a high number of cycles is mandatory, then the valve terminal must be placed as near as possible to the drive. The solution for several valve terminals is to connect them with the installation system CPI. This saves wiring and increases performance.
CPX/CPI decentralised installation system
Contact
Please contact your local Festo representative technical consultant. You can find them on our homepage below the section "Services & Support". Festo AG & Co. KG Eberhard Klotz 73734 Esslingen Germany v v v v Phone: +49 711 347-2964 Fax: +49 711 347-54 2964 E-mail: ekz@festo.com Website: www.festo.com
6/18
Partner data sheet

FieldServer Technologies
FieldServer Gateway
FieldServer Technologies The FieldServer Technologies gateway provides the link from multiple devices to Modbus TCP/IP (and other Modbus protocols including Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, and Modbus Plus). With over 85 different protocol drivers proven to interface to over 350 different devices, FieldServer is the leader in protocol gateways in the process control and building automation industries. The FieldServer driver library includes such common protocols as BACnet, LonWorks, Modbus TCP/IP and many proprietary networks, plus most legacy protocols for devices such as Caterpillar, Data Aire, McQuay, Carrier, and all major Fire Alarm Panels. FS-B20 Series The FS-B20 Series is a serial to Ethernet gateway used to bring legacy devices utilizing a serial protocol to Modbus TCP/IP. This series has a serial port, LonWorks port and Ethenet and has the ability to handle up to 1000 points of information.
FS-B20 Series
http://www.fieldserver.com/products/gateways/FS-B2010.asp
FS-B30 Series For applications requiring additional points or additional protocols the FS-B30 series meets the needs with 4 serial ports, LonWorks port and 2 Ethernet ports. In addition, Third party network ports are available. The multiple serial ports enable the user to bring in multiple serial devices and FieldServer software can combine that information into a common Modbus TCP/IP connection. http://www.fieldserver.com/products/gateways/FS-B3510.asp
FS-B30 Series
FS-B40 Series The FS-B40 Series has 10 serial ports, 2 Ethernet ports and a fieldbus port for such protocols as LonWorks, and others. The FS-B40 is ideal for plant wide applications requiring input from multiple serial and Ethernet devices to link to Modbus TCP/IP. http://www.fieldserver.com/products/gateways/FS-B4010.asp
FS-B40 Series
Contacts
FieldServer Technologies 1991 Tarob Court Milpitas, California 95035, USA v Phone: 408-262-2299 v Toll Free: 888-509-1970 v Fax: 408-262-9042 Sales Support: v Phone: 408-262-2299 x125 v E-mail: sales@fieldserver.com v On-line: Complete our Sales Information Contact form
6/19
Partner data sheet

Hilscher
Industrial Communication - Gateways, Interfaces, Technologies and Design Services

Company and product overview
Presentation
To successfully compete in the automation and technology industry requires a company to focus on its core competencies. This applies to all areas: from PLC manufacturers, motor manufacturers, drive suppliers sensors, etc. What links them all is the many demanding and complex communication technologies that exist in the market today. This is our core competency and this is where we have for twenty years repeatedly set the yardsticks. The spectrum of industrial communication technologies today is very wide-reaching. They range from the traditional fieldbus systems to new technologies that are based on Ethernet. The Ethernet systems are not purely based on traditional technology used in office automation, they have Real-Time extensions, bus based architecture while still offering worldwide access via the internet. These technologies use special gateways, PC boards and ASICs with the associated operating system drivers, OPC Servers and configurators. Our aim is to offer these technologies and products in a user-friendly manner, with functionality on the highest level and to offer them more economically then our customers can do on their own.
Fieldbus Systems Ethernet Networks Configuration Tool AS-Interface, CANopen, CC-Link, ControlNet, DeviceNet, InterBus, ModbusPlus, PROFIBUS, ERCOS. EtherCat, Ethernet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP, Powerlink, PROFINET, SERCOS-III. Based on FDT-/DTM-Technolgy.
netTAP - the universal Gateway

Presentation
For DIN rail mounting in a 25 mm small housing to connect devices with serial, Ethernet or Fieldbus interfaces with each others. It can be easy setup over the diagnostic port, address switches and status LEDs. On port is a direct cable connection to the device which is a ideal to use netTAP as standard interface solution.
Gateway between
6
Gateway
b b b b
Serial RS232 RS422, 485 or Ethernet and CANopen DeviceNet PROFIBUS
CIF - all types of PC based Communication Interfaces With the CIF Communication Interfaces the user have a unified standard for all leading fieldbus systems on different PC hardware platforms. Whether Soft programmable control system, CNC control, Industry terminal, decentralized I/O module or intelligent drive, every application based on a PC standard can be equipped with a CIF card for industrial communication.
PC-Card Form Factors ISA, PCI, PC/104, PC/104+, PCMCIA, CompactPCI
6/20
Program
Hilscher
COM - Communication Module for Embedded Applications

Presentation
Communication Module
These are complete fieldbus interfaces in a very small size and easy to integrate in any kind of automation devices. They are build up with special ASICs, low-power consumption 3.3 V components and a solid mechanical construction with and without fieldbus connectors. The exchange of data with the Host system occurs via a simple to handle Dual-port-memory interface which is the same on all modules. The process variables are provided as process data image and commands are transferred via a Mailbox. The module carries out the data exchange via the fieldbus independently without loading the Host system. These Modules are the simplest and most economical way of integrating proven communication technology into your devices.
Special Features
b Different Connector and LED Options like straight forward, right angled or connection over the base board b Small Size 30 x 70 mm with metal blocks for solid mechanical installation and PE connection b Low Power Consumption 3.3 V and high integrated Network Controllers like EC1 or netX b Dual-Port-Memory up to 32 KByte with 8 Bit or 16 Bit Interface for Ethernet Networks. netX - networX on chip
Presentation
High integrated network controller
The netX is a highly integrated network controller with a new system architecture optimized for communication and maximum data throughput. Based on a powerful 32-Bit / 200 MHz ARM CPU with internal RAM and comprehensive set of peripheral functions including LCD- and SDRAM-Controller to build low cost HMI running Windows CE or Linux or common Communication Platforms for a wide range of automation products like PLCs, Drives, Barcode Reader or intelligent IO blocks.
Special Features
b 32 Bit / 200MHz ARM 926EJ-S and 144 KByte RAM, 32 KByte ROM with Bootloader and Real-Time Kernel b 2 Ethernet Channels with integrated PHYs, IEEE 1588, PHY, Hub, Switch and Extensions for Real-Time b 4 Fieldbus Channels for ASi, CAN, InterBus, PROFIBUS; combine able with each other or 2 with Ethernet b LCD and SDRAM- Controller, DPM or Extensionbus, UART, USB, SPI, I2C, ADC, PWM, Encoder.
Contact
Hilscher GmbH Rheinstrae 15 65795 Hattersheim Germany v v v v Phone: +49 (0)6190 9907 Fax: +49 (0)6190 9907-50 E-Mail: info@hilscher.com Website: www.hilscher.com
6/21
Partner data sheet

Hirschmann Electronics
Switches, Wireless APs/ACs and Security Appliances

Hirschmann GmbH & Co Hirschmann Electronics is a multi-national manufacturer of the broadest line of industrial networking products available today including transceivers, hubs, unmanaged and managed switches, network management software, and fiber interface products. Hirschmann was one of the early pioneers of Ethernet and now specializes exclusively in factory, process, and transportation automation applications. Hirschmann Electronics is an innovator of industrial Ethernet products. This includes switches for Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet. With advances in switching technology, Ethernet has become completely deterministic. Hirschmann managed switch capabilities include redundancy options, full duplex, port mirroring, IGMP Snooping for multicast filtering, and VLAN support for increasing network efficiency and security. Hirschmann is a strategic Schneider Electric partner in the promotion and development of Industrial Ethernet. LION 24 TP Workgroup Switch Fast Ethernet switch with Flexible Gigabit uplink modules, the chassis is a fixed integrated component store and forward switching mode, Ethernet (10 Mbps), Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps).
Characteristics Mahagement Diagnostics Configuration Security Other services Redundancy Max. data rate
SNMP v1, v2, v3, RMON 1, 2, 3 and 9, Web interface, Telnet, BootP LEDs (power, link status, data error) TELNET, terminal SW, BOOTP, DHCP Radius, TACACS+, SSL, SSH, ACL, 802.1x port security MDI/MDIx, 8k MAC addresses , cFlow control, HOL, Ports mirroring, IGMP w/Querier, Broadcast storm controls Spanning and Rapid Spanning Tree , Link Aggregation 8 Gbps, 5.9 million de packets per second
Eagle Security System Ethernet Firewall or Firewall w/VPN. Devices capable of facilitating so-called bump-on a wire firewall security as well as static routing or VPN Virtual Private Networks in 10/100 half/full duplex.
s Characteristics Management Diagnostics Configuration Other services Filters Operating Voltage Encryption Methods Authentication
Serial interface (CLI), HTTPS secure web interface or SNMP LEDs (power, link status, data, error, ACA), HiDiscovery, signaling contact Terminal SW, DHCP, Auto configuration adapter ACA, HiDiscovery and remote file and config storage DHCP server, DHCP client, DynDNS and dial-in access via v.24 port Via IP address, Subnets or Protocols c 24 V DES-56, 3DES-128, AES-128, AES-192, AES-256 PSK or pre-shared secret, X.509v3
BAT 11b Wireless AP/AC Wireless Ethernet Access Point or Access Client. Devices in the wireless 802.11b range @ 11 Mbps with 2 10/100 half/full duplex Ethernet ports.
Characteristics Management Diagnostics Configuration Encryption Antenna Connector Operating Voltage Encryption Methods Authentication
Bat Discovery Protocol, Web Interface LEDs (power, link status, data, error), Bat Discovery DHCP, Bat Discovery None, WEP-64, 128, WEP plus, WPA Dual RSMA antenna connectors for diversity c 24 V Access Point (Infrastructure) Access Client (Ad-Hoc) 160 m outdoors and 30 m Indoors
6/22
Program
Hirschmann Electronics
Switches and routeurs

Mach 3001 Modular Gigabit switch with optional routing, the basic board is a fixed integrated component store and forward switching mode, Ethernet (10 Mbps), Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps).
Characteristics Management Diagnostics
Configuration Security Other services
Protocols
Max. data rate
Serial interface, web interface, SNMPv1, HiVision, automatic topology detection (IEEE 802.1ab) LEDs: Integrated power supply unit (PSU1), c 24 V connections (PSU2, PSU3), integrated fans (FAN1 to FAN4), integrated basic board (BOOT/RUN, MASTER/SLAVE, ERROR), 4 simultaneous RMON groups at each port (statistics, history, alarms, events), port mirroring TELNET, terminal SW, BOOTP, DHCP, DHCP option 82, auto-configuration adapter (ACA 11), HiDiscovery SNMP security, port security, VLANs 802.1Q Prioritization (IEEE 802.1D/p), VLAN (802.1Q), multicast (IGMP snooping/Querier, GMRP), broadcast limiter, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), flow control IEEE 802.3x protocols: RFC791(IP), RFC792 (ICMP), RFC793 (TCP/IP), RFC768 (UDP), RFC826 (ARP), RFC950 Internet standard subnetting procedure with the M-ROUTER module 8 Gbps, 5.9 million packets per second
Mach 3002/3005 Modular Gigabit switch with optional routing, the basic board is a fixed integrated component store and forward switching mode, Ethernet (10 Mbps), Fast Ethernet (100 Mpbs), Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps).
Characteristics Management Diagnostics
Configuration Security Other services
Protocols
Max. data rate
Serial interface, web interface, SNMPv1, HiVision, automatic topology detection (IEEE 802.1ab) LEDs: Integrated power supply unit (PSU1), c 24 V connections (PSU2, PSU3), integrated fans (FAN1 to FAN4), integrated basic board (BOOT/RUN, MASTER/SLAVE, ERROR), 4 simultaneous RMON groups at each port (statistics, history, alarms, events), port mirroring TELNET, terminal SW, BOOTP, DHCP, DHCP option 82, auto-configuration adapter (ACA 11), HiDiscovery SNMP security, port security, VLANs 802.1Q Prioritization (IEEE 802.1D/p), VLAN (802.1Q), multicast (IGMP snooping/Querier, GMRP), broadcast limiter, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), flow control IEEE 802.3x protocols: RFC791(IP), RFC792 (ICMP), RFC793 (TCP/IP), RFC768 (UDP), RFC826 (ARP), RFC950 Internet standard subnetting procedure with the M-ROUTER module 8 Gbps, 5.9 million packets per second
Contacts
Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 72654 Neckartenzlingen Germany v Phone: +49(0)7127/14-0 v Fax: +49(0)7127/14-1214 v Website: www.hirschmann.com
6/23
Partner data sheet

HMS Industrial Networks

Company and product overview HMS Industrial Networks is a world leader in industrial networking, Industrial Ethernet and fieldbus communication, supplying products to the global world of automation. The Anybus range of products from HMS is today the world's most used 3rd party product for industrial network connectivity. Anybus products help OEM's, integrators and end-users to connect their products to all major industrial networks, such as Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP, CANopen, AS-Interface, Modbus Plus, FIPIO, Modbus RTU, Profibus-DP/DPV1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, Profinet, CC-Link and ControlNet. The gateway ranges Anybus Communicator and Anybus X-gateway connect industrial devices or networks to other automation systems and PLC's. The embedded Anybus CompactCom modules connect industrial devices to fieldbuses and industrial Ethernet, while Anybus-PCI interfaces allow for easy and powerful PC-based connectivity. Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP products
Anybus Communicator - Serial to Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP Gateway
Anybus Communicator and Anybus X-gateways
b Connects devices which are equipped with RS232/422/485 interfaces to Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP b Serial connection through Modbus RTU, ASCII as well as other common industrial communication protocols b Connects up to 31 serial devices to Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP b 10/100 MBit interface with IT functionality such as a web-server, flash file system, FTP-server, e-mail, Telnet b Easy setup of TCP/IP settings using the Anybus IPconfig utility b ABC Config Tool included for easy configuration of the communication between the serial network and Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP b Power supply: c 24 V, Size: 120 mm x 75 mm x 27 mm, DIN-rail-mounted, CEand UL-marked.
Anybus X-gateway - Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP versions
b Connects an Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP network to all major fieldbus and Industrial Ethernet networks b Connection possible to Profibus-DP, DeviceNet, CANopen, CC-Link, FIPIO, AS-Interface, Modbus Plus, Modbus RTU, ControlNet, Lonworks, J1939, Interbus, Profinet, Ethernet/IP, FL-net etc b Equipped with an aluminium housing designed for harsh industrial environments (CE- and UL-marked) b IT functionality inside (web server, flash file system, FTP, e-mail), easy setup - no programming required! See also embedded Anybus Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP interfaces! CANopen products
Anybus Communicator - Serial to CANopen Gateway
b Connects devices which are equipped with RS232/422/485 interfaces to CANopen b Serial connection through Modbus RTU, ASCII as well as other common industrial communication protocols b Connects up to 31 serial devices to CANopen b PDO and SDO data objects supported b ABC Config Tool included for easy configuration of the communication between the serial network and CANopen. b Power supply: c 24 V, Size: 120 mm x 75 mm x 27 mm, DIN-rail-mounted, CEand UL-marked.
Anybus X-gateway - CANopen versions
Networking possibilities using Anybus Communicator and Anybus X-gateway
b Connects a CANopen network to all major fieldbus and Industrial Ethernet networks b Connection possible to Profibus, DeviceNet, Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP, CC-Link, FIPIO, AS-Interface, Modbus Plus, Modbus RTU, ControlNet, Lonworks, J1939, Interbus, Profinet, Ethernet/IP, FL-net etc b PDO and SDO data objects supported, CANopen profile DS-301 v.4.02 b Equipped with an aluminium housing designed for harsh industrial environments (CE- and UL-marked) b Easy setup - no programming required! See also embedded Anybus Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP interfaces!
6/24
Program
AS-Interface products
Anybus X-gateway - AS-Interface Master Gateway
b Connects a network of AS-Interface slave devices to all major fieldbus and Industrial Ethernet networks b Connection possible to Profibus, DeviceNet, Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP, CC-Link, FIPIO, CANopen, Modbus Plus, Modbus RTU, ControlNet, Lonworks, J1939, Interbus, Profinet, Ethernet/IP, FL-net etc b Extended Master supporting Master profile M4 according to the AS-interface Complete Specification version 3.0 under development b Equipped with an aluminium housing designed for harsh industrial environments (CE- and UL-marked) b Easy setup - no programming required! See also embedded Anybus Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP interfaces!
Anybus Communicator and Anybus X-gateways
Contacts
HMS Industrial Networks Pilefeltsgatan 93-95, S-30250 Halmstad Sweden v v v v Phone: +46 35 17 29 00 Fax: +46 35 17 29 09 E-mail: sales@hms.se Website: www.anybus.com
6/25
Partner data sheet

Industrial Control Communications
Industrial Ethernet Gateways

ETH-200 Multiprotocol Network Gateway The ETH-200 Ethernet Multiprotocol Network Gateway allows information to be transferred seamlessly between many different fieldbus networks with minimal configuration requirements. The ETH-200 provides: b A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet port, b Two RS 485 ports, b One RS 232 port, b Three common serial ports for direct connectivity to Toshiba 7-series, 9-series, 11-series or VF-nC1 Adjustable Speed Drives (ASDs). These various communication ports operate independently, and are configurable along with the unit's internal point database via a standard web browser. The ETH-200 currently provides support for the following protocols, with others under development: b Modbus TCP/IP (slave) b Ethernet/IP (server) b Modbus RTU (RS 485 master & slave) b Modbus RTU (RS 232 master & slave) b Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys N2 (RS 485 slave) b Sullair Supervisor network (RS 485 master) b Toshiba ASD (common serial master) b Toshiba 3-series ASD (RS 232 master) b Mitsubishi ASD (RS 485 master). Dont see a protocol that you need ? Give us a call: were always willing to investigate the implemenation of additional open or customer-specific drivers. The ETH-200 is a member of the ICC Network Gateway Series product family. Members of this family are designed to provide a uniform interface, configuration and application experience. This commonality reduces the user's learning curve, reducing commissioning time while simplifying support. The ETH-200 provides simultaneous support for many different communication protocols, allowing complex interchanges of data between otherwise incompatible networks.
The heart of the Network Gateway Series concept is an element called the point database. The point database is entirely user-configurable, and provides the mapping information that allows requests from the various supported networks to be interpreted and stored in a common format. This allows data to be routed from any supported network to any other supported network. Additionally, the point database provides the added benefit of data mirroring, whereby current copies of point values (populated by a source port designation) are maintained locally within the gateway itself. This greatly reduces the request-to-response latency times on the various networks, as requests (read or write) can be entirely serviced locally, thereby eliminating the time required to execute a secondary transaction on a different network. When properly configured, the gateway will become essentially transparent on the networks, and the various network devices can engage in a seamless dialog with each other.
Contacts
Industrial Control Communications, Inc. 2204 Timberloch Place, Ste. 250 The Woodlands, TX 77380 USA v v v v Phone: +1 281 292 0555 Fax: +1 281 292 0564 E-mail: sales@iccdesigns.com Website: www.iccdesigns.com
6/26
Partner data sheet

IXXAT
canAnalyser
Overview The canAnalyser offers a wide range of functions and covers various areas of applications. It can be used for online monitoring of the bus traffic, transmission of single-shot or cyclic messages and complete message sequences, tracing of CAN messages and offline analysis of the recorded data. Message traffic and bus load can be statistically analyzed and graphically displayed. A further interesting feature is the possibility to display message content (like "speed" or "voltage") in a graphic view on a time axis or as plaintext with physical units and applied conversion rules. The vast functionality can be controlled by an easy-to-use interface and thus makes the canAnalyser an ideal tool for test and simulation during development as well as for test and trouble shooting during system installation and service. CANopen, DeviceNet and J1939 Higher layer CAN protocols can be analyzed by supplementary modules such as the CANopen, DeviceNet or J1939 modules. The CANopen module interprets all received CAN messages in accordance with the CANopen specifications DS-301, DS-302, DS-305, DS-401, DS-402, DS-405 and DS-406 (more can be easily added). Data parameters transmitted in SDOs and PDOs are displayed each in plaintext. Programming interface and Scripting Host The open programming interface allows to extend the canAnalyser by user written functions and graphical user interfaces. Using Visual Studio .NET (C++, C#, Visual Basic), new customized modules can be developed and added to the canAnalyser. The Scripting Host provides the canAnalyser user with a powerfull interface that combines the advantages of graphic Windows programs with the flexibility of scripts. By using the Scripting Host, the canAnalyser can be quickly and easily adapted to specific measuring and analysis tasks. The Scripting Host supports the languages C# and Visual Basic.Net. Available versions The canAnalyser is available in two versions, standard and lite (see table below). Compared to the lite version, the standard version allows: b the parallel analysis of the two CAN systems (multi channel mode), b the simultaneous execution of several instances of a module, b provides the programming interface and the scriptiong host.
Version Reception Module Transmit Module Trace Module Sequencer Module Graphic Module Statistic Module Signal Module CANopen Module DeviceNet Module J1939 module Multi Channel Capability Multiple Module Instances Open programming Interface Scripting Host Available Non available Standard Lite
Optional Optional Optional
Optional Optional Optional
canAnalyser.com Further information, such as FAQs, a detailed tutorial, a demo version and support are provided on the canAnalyser product homepage: http://www.cananalyser.com
6/27
Program
IXXAT
CAN Interfaces
Overview The IXXAT PC/CAN interfaces enable PC-based applications to access CAN networks via a wide variety of different PC interface standards. The customer can select an optimum PC/CAN interface with regard to the application and performance requirements and to costs. More than 10 different PC interface standards are supported. Driver support Every IXXAT CAN board is delivered with a Windows CAN driver (for Windows 95/98/ME/2000/XP) and a simple CAN bus monitoring tool, which can be used to display and to transmit CAN messages. Besides of the Windows CAN driver, further drivers and programming interfaces are available. b CANopen Master API: Provides a simple programming interface that can be used for the development of individual service and test tools for CANopen systems. b Driver Linux: Basic CAN driver for Linux Kernel 2.4 and 2.6 driver supporting the IXXAT ISA and PCI boards (support of USB in preparation). b CAN-OPC Server: Enables the simple connection of OPC clients (SCADA programs) to CAN systems. b LabView and LabWindows: Fully functional integration examples for LabView and LabWindows based on the Windows CAN driver. Shortlist of available interface boards (For further interfaces please visit www.ixxat.com) b USB to CAN compact: Low cost, active CAN module with one CAN channel (ISO11898-2) for the connection to the USB bus. Ideal for mobile service and analyzing applications using CAN layer-2 or CANopen. b USB to CAN II: CAN module with two channels (ISO11898-2) for connection to the USB bus. Ideal for mobile service and analyzing applications that need more performance than USB-to-CAN compact or access to more than one CAN channel. b iPC-I XC16/PCI: Powerful CAN interface for 5 V and 3.3 V PCI bus systems with two CAN channels (ISO11898-2). Provides high performance and low latency times. Ideal for control applications or for analyzing CAN systems with maximum data rate and bus load. b tinCAN 161: Powerful CAN interface with two CAN channels (ISO11898-2) in PC-card format. Provides high performance and low latency times. Suitable for mobile analyzing and service applications with low up to high performance requirements.
CANblue/Generic
Bluetooth bridge for the wireless interconnection of two separate CAN systems.
CANblue/Generic CAN 1, 250 Kbps
CANblue/Generic CAN 2, 125 Kbps
Device A1
Device A2
Device An
Device B1
Device B2
Overview The CANblue/Generic allows the wireless coupling of two separate CAN networks. CAN messages which are transmitted in one CAN system are sent to the other CAN system via Bluetooth under consideration of optional filter rules. The message filter can be defined for individual CAN identifiers. In ideal conditions, the distance between the CAN/Bluetooth modules can be up to 100m. The CANblue has a powerful 16-bits microcontroller and sufficient memory to store message during a message burst on the CAN bus. LEDs indicate the current status of the coupled networks. The configuration of the CANblue/Generic (e.g. CAN baud rate, filter rules) is also done via bluetooth and can be stored on the CANblue.
6/28
Program
IXXAT
CANbridge
Configurable CAN/CAN Gateway The CANbridge allows the coupling of two CAN networks, including networks with different bit rates. With the aid of conversion rules (gateway tables), CAN messages can be filtered or forwarded under another identifier. With these mechanisms, the bus load can be reduced in the individual networks by only sending messages to the other network which are of interest. Unlike the CAN repeater, the CANbridge enables the enlargement of the maximum network size, so that the sub-systems are fully self-sufficiently with regard to bus arbitration. CAN sub-networks connected by bridges are independent of each other in terms of their real-time behavior and are to be regarded as independent networks. The CANbridge is configured via serial interface with a convenient Windows program. The configuration of the CAN-interfaces, setting of the operating modes and the filter- and conversion tables are saved on the bridge.
CAN-Repeater
ISO/IS 11898-2 CAN Repeater (with Low-Speed Option) The CAN Repeater is used for the galvanic isolation of two segments of a CAN network, and for creating star or tree topologies. One special feature of the Repeater is that it can separate a defective segment from the rest of the network, so that the remaining network can continue working. After elimination of the defect, the segment is switched into the network again. As an option, the Repeater can be equipped with a low-speed bus interface according to ISO/IS 11898-3. This allows operation of the Repeater as a high/low-speed converter. Its galvanic isolation isolates both CAN segments against each other as well as against the power supply.
IXXAT references
Product canAnalyser canAnalyser-Lite CANopen Module for canAnalyser/canAnalyser-Lite USB to CAN compact with SUB-D 9 connector et isolation USB to CAN II industrial version with galvanic isolation iPC-I XC16/PCI galvanic isolation tinCAN161 CANblue/Generic CANbridge - DIN Rail, 2 x High-Speed Bus Interface, Industrial Version CANbridge - DIN Rail, 2 x High-Speed Bus Interface (galvanic isolated), Industrial Version CANbridge - Aluminium, 2 x High-Speed Bus Interface (galvanic isolated), Automotive Version CANbridge - Aluminium, 1 x High-Speed Bus Interface (galvanic isolated) + 1 x Low-Speed Bus Interface, Automotive Version CANbridge - Aluminium, 2 x High-Speed Bus Interface (galvanic isolated), Industrial Version CAN-Repeater (2 x ISO/IS 11898-2) with galvanic isolation CAN-Repeater (ISO/IS 11898-2 to ISO/IS 11898-3) with galvanic isolation Reference 1.02.0133.00000 1.02.0166.00000 1.02.0145.00000 1.01.0087.10200 1.01.0062.11220 1.01.0047.33220 1.01.0026.00010 1.01.0125.00001 1.01.0121.11020 1.01.0121.22020 1.01.0120.22010 1.01.0120.23010 1.01.0120.22020 1.01.0064.44000 1.01.0064.46000
Contact
IXXAT Automation GmbH Liebnizstr. 15 88250 Weingarten Germany v v v v Phone: +49-7 51 / 5 61 46-10 Fax: +49-7 51 / 5 61 46-29 E-mail: info@ixxat.de Website: www.ixxat.com
6/29
Partner data sheet
Niobrara Research & Development Corporation
Gateways, bridges and protocol converters

Niobrara R&D Corporation Niobrara is a U.S. company specializing in industrial data communication products for many of Schneider Electrics product lines. Our products are sold exclusively through the Schneider Electric channels worldwide. Quantum-compatible Transparent Ready products Niobraras QUCM-OE is a bridge, router, protocol converter and data concentrator in Schneiders Quantum form factor. It has a 10BASE-T Ethernet port and two switch-selectable RS 232/RS 485 ports. The QUCM supports a long list of protocols and can appear to the Quantum processor as either I/O or an option module. For serial and Ethernet protocols not listed below, the QUCM is also a user-programmed module. The user can develop his own programs or, for a very reasonable price, Niobrara can write QUCM code to incorporate your devices into the Transparent Ready architecture.
QUCM-OE
Compact-compatible Transparent Ready products Niobrara makes several Ethernet modules for the Compact line. Each has a 10BASE-T Ethernet port. All are Schneider Electric Collaborative Automation Partner Program (CAPP) products and all are e marked: b The CNOE-211 is an Ethernet option module for the newer Compact processors. It has capabilities very similar to the original Quantum NOE-211. b The CUCM-OE is a bridge, router, protocol converter and data concentrator in Schneiders Compact form factor. It has a 10BASE-T Ethernet port and two switch-selectable RS 232/RS 485 ports. The CUCM supports a long list of protocols and can appear to the Compact processor as either I/O or an option module.
CNOE-211
CUCM-OE
Nota : For serial and Ethernet protocols not listed below, the CUCM is also a user-programmable module. The user can develop his own programs or, for a very reasonable price, Niobrara can write CUCM code to incorporate your devices into the Transparent Ready architecture.
PowerLogic compatible Transparent Ready products Niobrara was the first to make PowerLogic devices Transparent Ready. Niobraras present offering, the PEN-T, has a 10BASE-T Ethernet port and can support up to 32 PowerLogic meters and Modbus devices on its 4-wire RS 485 port. It will attach to the back of a 2000-series circuit monitor or can be used stand-alone (P/N PEN-T-SA). SY/MAX compatible Transparent Ready products Niobrara manufactures an array of communication products for Square Ds SY/MAX PLC line. Two of these products are Transparent Ready: b The MEB-RT allows Transparent Ready access to Modbus Plus devices and SY/MAX Ethernet devices as well as a host of serial devices. It has a redundant-cable Modbus Plus port, a 10BASE-T Ethernet port and two RS 485 serial ports. b The EPE5-T is an Ethernet port expander in the SY/MAX form factor. It allows SY/MAX, PowerLogic and other devices to be used in the Transparent Ready architecture. It can also bridge between Modbus TCP/IP and SY/MAX Ethernet. Niobrara Supported Protocols
Modbus RTU Master Modbus RTU Slave Modbus ASCII Master Modbus ASCII Slave Jbus Master Jbus Slave SY/MAX point-to-point SY/MAX net-to-net Dual Slave Modbus & SY/MAX - Dual Master Modbus RTU & RNIM - Modbus Plus Modbus TCP/IP HTTP FTP SNMP SY/MAX Ethernet INTERBUS LonWorks Seriplex Metasys Johnson N2 Landis P1 INCOM ASCII DNP 3.0 RNIM PNIM Plogic IDEC SEAbus SEAbus + Gateway Multidrop Peripheral Transparent Share DF1
PEN-T
MEB-RT
EPE5-T
Contacts
Kenton Foster Niobrara R&D Corporation P.O. Box 3418 Joplin, MO 64803-3418 USA 6/30 v v v v Phone: +1 417 624 8918 Fax: +1 417 624 8920 E-mail: kfoster@niobrara.com Website: www.niobrara.com
Partner data sheet

Phoenix Digital
Networking
Phoenix Digital Corporation Phoenix Digital fiber optic communication modules and cable provide complete Physical Layer Network Solutions for both Open Standard Networks and the Communication/Control Networks of every major Control System Supplier in the World. Phoenix Digital offers Fiber Optic Modules and Cable for Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and Distributed Control Systems (DCS). Our products provide fiber optic communication solution, including fault tolerant, self-healing, very long distances, and network-topology independed (daisy-chain, star, point-to-point) critical features. DIN-Rail panelmount standalone modules Fiber optic modules provide optical communication media, transparent to the communication protocol and configurable for distribution by the user in: ring, bus, star, tree, Helix or point-to-point network installations. It also provides a continuous error checking for jitter, pulsewidth distortion, carrier symmetry, and optical signal strength. All of this, together with comprehensive self-test diagnostics, optimizes the overall integrity of Ethernet, Modbus, Modbus Plus, and Modicon Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) communication networks at-large, providing high relaiable data communications for control and automation networking. Characteristics b 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, Modbus Plus, Remote I/O, Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP, RS 232/RS 485 b Fault Tolerant, self-healing communications with 1 ms recovery time b Phoenix Digitals proprietary Queuing System (PQS) to improve the network performance insuring even faster thruput for user identified network nodes b Unlimited modules for complex multi-drop networks b Real-time diagnostics b Auto-negotiation, auto-crossover b 850/1300 nm multimode, 1300/1550 nm monomode FX, ST, SC, MTRJ, and LC fiber optic connectivity, and up to 90 km inter-modular distance b Available with single or dual power supply system for a 120/240 V, c 125 V, and c 24 V b UL Class I, Division 2 Rating
Contacts
Phoenix Digital Corporation 7650 E. Evans Rd. Building A Scottsdale, AZ 85260 USA v Phone: +1 480 483-7393 v Fax: +1 480 483-7391 v E-mail: phxdigital@aol.com
6/31
Partner data sheet

ProSoft Technology
ProSoft Technology, Inc. was formally incorporated in 1990. By 1993 ProSoft had developed an extensive protocol library which helped them evolve from a single product company to a multiple product provider. Since then, ProSoft has become a major supplier of communication products for the industrial automation industry. ProSoft Technology has an extremely active product development program and customer recognition of their product quality. ProSoft serves the automation industrys communications and specialized applications needs with high quality products, application expertise, and technical support. Sales, application engineering, and support services are provided internationally by over 450 exclusive distributors served by their Regional Area Offices located in: b North America: Seven regional area managers provide coverage for our distributors across the continent b Latin America: Two full service offices; one servicing Brazil exclusively, and the other provides coverage to South America b Europe: One full service office based in France serves Europe, Middle-East and Africa b Asia Pacific: Offices in India and Malaysia servicing Asia, India, Australia and New ZealandS
Wireless Communication
2.4 GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum b Secure wireless communications with data encryption, proprietary radio protocol, and 2.4 GHz FHSS physical layer b Dual antennas for maximum performance and networking flexibility b Up to 25 km (16 miles) range with high-gain antennas (longer with repeaters) b Remote diagnostics b User-programmable over the air (after initial configuration) with easy-to-use Windows-based software b Up to 1000 addressed devices with 2000 radios and 78 repeaters per network b 32 user-selectable data channels for multiple network operation b Uses a proprietary RF protocol and 158 unique hopping patterns to prevent unwarranted interception of RadioLinx data transmission b Class 1 Div 2 rated for hazardous locations b Modems available include: Serial (RLX-FHS), Ethernet (RLX-FHE) and Ethernet with Serial Server (RLX-FHES) RadioLinx Industrial Hotspot (IEEE 802.11b) The RadioLInx Industrial Hotspot (RLX-IH) is an ultra-fast wireless solution for the most demanding industrial applications. While providing the benefits of industrial wireless Ethernet connectivity for fixed or mobile devices with 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet connections, the RLX-IH acts as a repeater and an industrial hotspot for other wireless client devices: b Four times more powerful than high-speed commercial grade radios, RLX-IH allows better coverage of the factory floor with fewer radios and outdoor links of 32 km (20 miles) (subject to country regulations) b Single unit repeater functionality; no more stringing Ethernet cable between wireless access points b Attach an Ethernet device directly to the RLX-IH b Powerful transmitter with amplifier option for long range outdoors and superior coverage with fewer radios indoors b Security you can trust with strong TKIP encryption, 802.1X and MAC ID authentication
RLX-FHp
RLX-IH
ProTalk Q in-rack interface modules

Protocol Interfaces for Modicon Quantum/Unity The ProTalk Q communication modules are Quantum/Unity backplane compatible allowing Quantum processors to easily interface with alternate networks: b Single Slot: Quantum backplane compatible b Recognized as an Options module and has access to PLC memory for data transfer b Simple text configuration file is used to setup and define the modules operation ProTalk Q applications include
C programmable DF1 DNP 3.0 DNP 3.0 over Ethernet HART Multi-drop Flow computer Ethernet/IP IEC 60870-5-101 Slave IEC 60870-5-103 Master IEC 60870-5-104 Server Profibus DP
6/32
Program
ProSoft Technology
ProLinx Communication Gateways

Stand-alone, DIN-rail mounted gateways ProLinx Communication Gateways provide protocol connectivity between two networks with over 150 connectivity options. These stand-alone, DIN-rail mounted, industrial gateways are available in two form factors: b The original ProLinx b The new ProLinx Plus extruded aluminum enclosure ProLinx Plus offers the same connectivity options as in the original gateways and include optional H or G mount capabilities. Protocol combinations include
Modbus TCP/IP to DF1 Modbus TCP/IP to Modbus Modbus TCP/IP to DNP Slave Modbus TCP/IP to DNP Master Modbus TCP/IP to IEC 60870-5-101 Slave Modbus TCP/IP to IEC 60870-5-103 Master Modbus TCP/IP to IEC 60870-5-104 Server Modbus TCP/IP to ASCII Modbus TCP/IP to DH-485 Modbus TCP/IP to Modbus Plus Modbus TCP/IP to PROFIBUS DP Slave Modbus TCP/IP to PROFIBUS DP Master Modbus TCP/IP to Remote I/O Modbus TCP/IP to EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP/IP to DNP over Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP to HART Multi-drop Modbus TCP/IP to Honeywell DE
Original ProLinx (4000 Series)
ProLinx Plus (5000 Series)
Contacts
For Quantum/Unity interfaces, wireless communication or stand-alone gateways please contact our partner: ProSoft Technology, Inc. v v v v v v Asia Pacific: +603 7724 2080 Europe: +33(0)5 34 36 87 20 Latin America: +1 281 298 9109 North America: +1 661 716 5100 E-mail: prosoft@prosoft-technology.com Website: www.prosoft-technology.com
6/33
Partner data sheet

Webdyn
Webdyn Presentation
Webdyn, a French company created in 1997, is a European leader in Internet gateways. It develops and manufactures hardware and software solutions, dedicated to the emerging embedded Internet market for industrial, audiovisual and residential equipments. Webdyn solutions are used in a wide range of industrial applications in Building Automation, Energy, Environment, Automation and Telecom. Webdyngate Easy
Slave 1
Modbus Network
Webdyngate Easy allows you to transform a serial industrial network into a TCP/IP network. Thanks to the WGEM all the functions defined within the Modbus protocol are included: serial master/slave, TCP/IP client/server. To secure the network and your industrial process, a redundancy option can be added to the gateway. By using a WGE-S version together with serial/IP Gate PC software, industrial equipment can be monitored through TCP/IP link. This gateway is particularly suited to applications dedicated to PLC supervision (ie: PL7 Pro, TwidoSoft, Crouzet Logic Software and more).
Slave 2
WGE Modbus TCP Server Serial Modbus Master
Modbus Master Application
WGE Modbus TCP Client Serial Modbus Slave
Webdyngate Power
Internet Explorer
The Webdyngate Power allows you to develop and personalize remote management and maintenance applications using standard tools (Web Browser, E-mail server) and protocols (TCP/IP, HTTP, SMTP). This gateway offers different levels of personalization. A complete portal can be developed and stored in the gateway flash disk. In order to meet specific customer requirements, dedicated Plug-in DLL in C can be added to the gateway. Thanks to the embedded Java Virtual Machine, Java applications can be executed directly on the gateway. The WGP version is compatible with the Modbus, Profibus and Uni-Te protocols. The customer can configure and manage industrial equipments with standard HTML pages using any Web Browser.
ISP
LAN
RS 485
E-mail PSTN, ISDN, ADSL
Modbus Network
Internet
Internet Explorer
A V90 or GSM/GPRS modem may be embedded in the gateway.
Contacts
Jacques Tabor, Channel Sales Manager Webdyn S.A. v v v v Phone: +33 (0)1 39 04 29 62 Fax: +33 (0)1 39 04 29 41 E-Mail: contact@webdyn.com Website: www.webdyn.com
6/34
Partner data sheet

Woodhead
Woodhead presentation
Woodhead Industries, Inc. is a global developer, manufacturer and marketer of a wide array of Automation and Electrical products engineered for superior performance in demanding, harsh, or hazardous industrial environments. Woodhead Industries "Empowers the Industrial Infrastructure" with innovative products and solutions that extend from mechanical, electrical and electronics, to communications/networking devices and diagnostic software. Woodhead Industries operates from 21 locations in 10 countries spanning North America, Europe and Asia/Pacific. Woodhead Industries' Brad lines of Automation products include such globally recognized names as applicom, Direct-Link, mPm, RJ-Lnxx and SST. The Woodhead family of Electrical products include global names such as Aero-Motive, Daniel Woodhead, Watertite and Super-Safeway.
Automation products and solutions

BradCommunications network interface cards BradCommunications network interface cards offer a range of complete communication solutions covering more than 50 industrial protocols . These include: Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus Plus, WorldFIP, Serial Links and many others. These solutions connect your PC-based applications to industrial equipment (programmable controller, I/O modules, industrial devices, etc). With over 20 years of experience and technical expertise in industrial communication, today Woodhead has over 150,000 systems installed around the world in sectors as varied as petrochemicals, automotive, food processing, technical building management, etc. BradCommunications solutions suit perfectly to end-users and system integrators that require powerful, user friendly communications, adapted to each type of industrial network. Fully Integrated package, All-in-one solution = Products + Services : b Fully Integrated package, All-in-one solution = Products + Services b SCADA, HMI and specific development applications which require huge CPU capacity b Systems with large quantity framework b Multi protocol operations b Use of multiple interface cards on one computer BradCommunications Industrial Gateways BradCommunications Gateway is more than a standard tunneling gateway. This is the first solution that allows connecting devices with a choice of more than 20 different industrial protocols -Ethernet, Serial, and Profibus - using a single hardware platform. Open on the major automation manufacturers, the Woodhead Gateway supports simultaneously up to 8 Ethernet TCP/IP protocols running in Client/Server modes; up to 4 Profibus protocols; and up to 6 Serial protocols including: Modbus Master and Slave (RTU/ASCII), and Uni-Telway. The Woodhead Gateway provides simultaneous communication through more than 16000 different combinations. Through its on-board Database (32 Kbits / 32 Kwords), the Gateway performs all communication tasks to exchange data in real-time between equipments by running automatic Read/Write cyclic functions and allows receiving unsolicited Read/Write requests. The Gateway can be configured through remote TCP/IP and it is delivered with a set of tools including configuration software, network diagnostic tools and data access utilities. Applications includes: SCADA connectivity, Machine tool industry (easy access to various PLC vendors, adaptation of serial devices), Building Automation (alarm center application, integration of legacy devices).
Contacts
Woodhead 43 rue Mazagran 76320 CAUDEBEC LES ELBEUF France v v v v Phone: +33 (0)2 32 96 04 20 Fax : +33 (0)2 32 96 04 21 E-mail : egory@woodhead.com Website : www.woodhead.com 6/35
7/0
Contents
7 - Technical information
7.1 Ethernet, system approach

b Industrial Ethernet cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 b Ethernet TCP/IP communication service v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/3 v Standard Ethernet services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/3 v Modbus communication standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4 v SOAP/XML services in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/5 v Modbus XML data access (Modbus XMLDa) Web services . . . . . . . . page 7/5 v TCP Open optional service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 v I/O Scanning service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/7 v Global data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8 v SMTP electronic mail notification service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/9 v SNMP service protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/9 v Performance of Ethernet TCP/IP network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10 b Standard ans FactoryCast Web services v Web services overview and presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/11 v Selection of Telemecanique brand Transparent Ready products . . . page 7/13 v PLC standard Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14 v FactoryCast configurable PLC Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/16 v FactoryCast HMI active Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/18
7.2 CANopen
b CAN presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22 b CANopen presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/24
7.3 AS-Interface
b Physical layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/26 b Data link layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/29 b Application layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/30 b System versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/31 b Safety at Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/33
7.4 General information

b Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/34 b Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load . . . . . . page 7/35 b Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic envirnment . . page 7/36 b Product standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/38 b Degrees of protection provided IP code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/40 b Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IK code . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/41
Index
b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/42
7/1
Technical information

System approach
Industrial Ethernet Cabling System
Office Ethernet versus Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet applications share many common features with office Ethernet, but they differ in environmental, performance, and layout requirements. Specifications for industrial Ethernet devices are not yet clearly defined different agencies and entities define industrial Ethernet specifications based on the nature of the agency and on traditional automation market requirements. b Environmental specifications for industrial Ethernet devices are defined by agencies such as UL, CSA, e. These are the same agencies define the environmental specifications for standard industrial devices. b Performance specifications are being worked on by ISO/IEC. b Physical layer specifications (connector types, distances between devices, number of devices, etc.) are defined by the IEEE 802.3, and the 11801 provides installers with the layout guidelines. When designing an industrial Ethernet network and selecting its infrastructure components, the IEEE 802.3 rules for quantities of devices and lengths.
Ethernet 802.3 specifications

The Ethernet 802.3 defines media at the physical layer. The most common ones are summarized, see page 3/47. The Ethernet 802.3 Link Layer is based on the CSMA CD collision detection mechanism. When any node on the network experiences a collision, it recognizes the collision and resends the information. When a group of Ethernet end devices is interconnected by standard Ethernet hubs or repeaters, all devices are affected by collisions. The process of resending information through these "collision domains" causes propagation delays that can affect the application. With the availability of full duplex switches, which send information only through the port to which the destination device is connected, the collision domains disappear. For industrial automation applications, we strongly recommend the use of full duplex switches to interconnect devices. 802.3 also defines distance limits and the numbers of cascaded devices:
Type Maximum segment length (1) 100 m 100 m 100 m 2000 m 412 m/2000 m Maximum segment length (offered by ConneXium devices) 100 m 100 m 100 m 3100 m (2) 4000 m with multimode, 32.500 m with monomode (3) Maximum number of Maximum number of hubs in cascade switches in cascade 4 2 11 (fiber ring) Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
10BASE-T 100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T 10BASE-FL 100BASE-FX
7
7.1
1000BASE-SX
275 m
Unlimited
(1) Based on 802.3, full duplex/half duplex. (2) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation. (3) Depends on the optical fiber budget and fiber attenuation, typical specification is 2 km for multimode and 15 km from monomode.
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/2
(continued)

System approach
Ethernet TCP/IP communication service
Presentation
Transparent Ready products support universal Ethernet communication services (such as HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, and FTP) along with a set of automation-specific communication services on a single Ethernet TCP/IP network. Automation-specific services include: b Modbus TCP/IP messaging for class 10, 20, or 30 devices b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices b Faulty device replacement (FDR) for class 10, 20 or 30 devices b Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) network administration for class 20 or 30 devices b Global Data, for class 30 devices. b Module bandwidth monitoring for class 30 devices b Network time protocol (NTP) time synchronization for class 30 devices. b E-mail notification of application events via SMTP for class 30 devices. b Optional TCP Open for class 30 devices.
Services
Network management SNMP
Time synchronization NTP
Global Data RTPS
FDR Faulty Device Replacement
Web server HTTP
E-mail
TCP Open
Message handling Modbus
Modbus I/O Scanning MIB Transparent Ready
Applications
DHCP
TFTP
FTP
SMTP
Transport
UDP
TCP
Link
IP
Physical
Ethernet 802.3 and Ethernet II
Standard Ethernet services

Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) HTTP (RCF1945) transmits Web pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990. Web servers embedded into Transparent Ready devices are used to provide easy access to devices anywhere in the world from a standard browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. BOOTP/Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) BOOTP/DHCP (RCF1531) automatically provides the devices with the IP parameters via a dedicated IP address server. Users do not need to manage the addresses of each device individually. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP that automatically assigns the configuration parameters to the device. This protocol is made up of 2 components: b One for providing the IP network address, b One for providing the IP parameters specific to the device from a DHCP server. Telemecanique devices can be: v BOOTP clients allowing automatic recovery of an IP address from a server, v BOOTP servers enabling a device to distribute IP addresses to the network stations. Telemecanique uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its FDR service. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Many systems use FTP (RCFs 959, 2228, and 2640) provides basic file-sharing elements. Many systems use FTP to exchange files between devices. Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) TFTP is a network transfer protocol that connects to a device and downloads code to it. TFTP can be used to move boot code to a diskless workstation or connect and download firmware updates to network devices.
Note: Transparent Ready devices implement FTP and TFTP for transferring certain data to or from devices, in particular when downloading firmware or user Web pages.
7
7.
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/3
(continued)

System approach
Standard Ethernet services (continued)

Network Time Protocol (NTP) NTP (RFC 1305) is used to synchronize the time of a client or server device from a time server. Depending on the network used, it provides the following time precisions based on the UTC: b Several milliseconds on a local area network (LAN). b Several tens of milliseconds on a wide area network (WAN). Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) SMTP is a transmission service for E-mail between a sender and a recipient via an SMTP E-mail server. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Internet community developed standard SNMP (RFC 0821) for managing the different components of a network through a single management system. The management system can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. The manager can view the status of the network and devices, modify their configurations, and feed back alarms in the event of failure.
Nota : Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in a network managed via SNMP.
Distributed Component Object Model (COM/DCOM) COM/DCOM and Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) are technologies used in Windows components. They enable Windows applications to communicate transparently.
Note: These technologies are used in the OFS Data server software.
Modbus communication standard

Modbus, the industrial communication standard since 1979, has been combined with Ethernet TCP/IP to supports the Internet revolution, making Modbus TCP/IP a completely open Ethernet protocol. Connections to Modbus TCP/IP require no proprietary components or licenses. Modbus TCP/IP may be easily combined with any device supporting a standard TCP/IP communication stack. Specifications can be obtained free of charge from the www.modbus-ida.org website. Openness and simplicity The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally recognized. Thousands of manufacturers are already implementing this protocol, with 9 million installed nodes. Many have already developed a Modbus TCP/IP connection and many products are currently available. The simplicity of Modbus TCP/IP enables small field devices, such as I/O modules, to communicate over Ethernet without requiring powerful micro-processors or large amounts of internal memory. High performance Because of its simplicity and high speed (100 Mbits/s), Modbus TCP/IP delivers excellent performance. It is ideally suited for real-time applications such as I/O scanning. A single standard The application protocol for Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus, and Modbus TCP/IP is identical. You can route messages from one network to another without changing protocol. Modbus is implemented above the TCP/IP layer, so you can take advantage of IP routing, which enables devices located anywhere in the world to communicate regardless of the distance between them. Schneider Electric offers an entire range of gateways for interconnecting a Modbus TCP/IP network to existing Modbus Plus and Modbus serial link networks. See product data sheets, pages 3/64 to 3/66. Modbus TCP/IP is a standard within the Internet community. The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved port TCP 502 for the Modbus protocol. A study by the ARC Advisory Group, the leading analyst firm covering automation and enterprise software, shows Modbus TCP/IP as the world's leading industrial Ethernet protocol, in terms of units shipped in 2004. Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP are recognized by IEC 61158 international standard as a fieldbus. They are also "Chinese National Standard" managed by ITEI.
7
7.1
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/4
(continued)

System approach
SOAP/XML Web services in the PLC

When the Telemecanique PLC interacts directly with computer management applications. In a market where e-manufacturing and e-business are essential facts of life, communication between platforms or applications is a necessity. Web service technology, over Intranet or Internet, represents the most successful strategy for the interoperability of heterogeneous (platform-, operating system-, and programming language-independent) software applications. The standardization of Web services is the result of joint development between Microsoft, IBM, and others. It has been validated at the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) as an open standard, and it provides all the tools, specifications, and environments needed for each platform. Key Web service standards include: b eXtensible Markup Language (XML), the universal standard for data exchange b Single Object Access Protocol (SOAP) carried via the HTTP channel b Web Services Description Language(WSDL) in XML format SOAP is considered the reference protocol in industry. It has been adopted by the main players such as Microsoft (pNET, SQL Server, Office, etc), IBM (Java, Web Sphere), Lotus, and ORACLE, among others. It becomes available in control system equipment within the FactoryCast Web server offer embedded in the Telemecanique PLCs.
Modbus XML data access (Modbus XMLDa) Web services

The Telemecanique PLC integrates the Web services standard. ModbusXMLDa is a new Transparent Ready service that offers the previously uncommon possibility of interaction between an IT/e-business application and the control system levels using the same standards. With ModbusXMLDa Web services in FactoryCast Web servers, the IT engineer can easily create applications that access the desired information directly in the PLC in real time. Data exchanges are made in XML standard format in response to SOAP protocolrequests. The implementation of Web services in control system equipment achieves vertical integration of the control level and the creation of collaborative architectures that link production systems to corporate management systems. It provides simplified access to information; reduction in training, development, and deployment costs; and increased productivity.
7
7.
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/5
(continued)

System approach
TCP Open optional service

TSX ETY 110 WS/5103 Premium Ethernet modules support a several communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard. Among these, the Modbus protocol has public specifications and a simplicity that makes it highly suitable for communication with third-party devices.
Ethernet TCP/IP profile Modbus protocol Direct Socket access (TCP Open) Modbus
TCP
IP
ISO 802.2-ISO 802.3
ISO 802.3 Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s
For certain applications, you may need to use other protocols, e.g., if you wish to integrate Modicon Premium platforms into existing architectures that use a particular communication protocol, possibly a proprietary one. To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the Telemecanique offer: b A library of basic functions that use C language to enables direct access to the socket interface on TCP. You can create your own communication functions with the easy-to-use SDKC development software. Once generated, your function blocks can be used in the application like any standard PL7 or Unity Pro function blocks. b A library of basic function blocks known as EFs that can be used directly in the application programs with PL7 Unity Pro language. These are the same as functions developed in C language seen earlier, but are designed for use by non-computer specialists. These EF function blocks cannot be modified. Functions
7
7.1
Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley socket interface enable: b b b b b b Management of 16 out of the maximum of 32 connections on the open profile Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port Switching of these sockets to "listen for a connection request from a remote client" Opening of a connection Transmitting and receiving data on these connections (8 bytes max.) Closing this connection.
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/6
(continued)

System approach
I/O Scanning service

Word table Read Write
Ethernet TCP/IP
Input words Output words of devices

INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT +
OUTPUT +
The I/O Scanning service manages the exchange of distributed I/O on the Ethernet network. A simple configuration operation is needed, with no need for special programming. The I/O is scanned transparently with read/write requests using the Modbus master/slave protocol on the TCP/IP profile. Scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any device that supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP. I/O Scanning can be used to define: b An %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs b An %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan. During operation, the module: b Manages the TCP/IP connections with each of the distributed device b Scans the devices and copies the I/Os into the configured %MW word zone b Feeds back status so that the operation of the service can be monitoredfrom the PLC application b Applies the preconfigured fallback values if there is a communication problem. For an offer of hardware and software products that enable I/O Scanning on any products connected to the Ethernet network, consult: www.modbus-ida.org. Characteristics With Unity Pro software, each station can exchange a maximum of: b 100 words for writing b 125 words for reading The maximum size in the PLC managing the service is: b 2 K words %MW (1) in inputs and 2 K words %MW (1) in outputs with manager PLC (64 stations max.) b 4 K words %MW (1) in inputs and 4 K words %MW (1) in outputs with manager PLC (128 stations max.) The Faulty Device Replacement service FDR uses the standard BOOTP/DHCP, file management, and TFTP technologies to simplify Ethernet device maintenance. It enables you to replace a faulty device with a new product and enables the system to detect, reconfigure, and automatically restart the device without manual intervention.
7
7.
(1) or 4x registers with Concept or ProWORX.
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/7
(continued)

System approach
Global Data services

Distribution group 1 Data exchange of 4 Ko max. IP multicast 239.255.255.251
Ethernet TCP/IP
IP multicast 239.255.255.250 Data exchange of 4 Ko max. Distribution group 2
The Global Data service enables data exchanges in real time between stations belonging to the same distribution group. It synchronizes remote applications and shares a common database among several distributed applications. Data exchanges are based on a standard producer/consumer protocol, so that optimal performance is achieved with minimal network load. This real-time publisher subscriber (RTPS) protocol is promoted by the Modbus-IDA organization and has been adopted as a standard by several manufacturers. Characteristics A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within the same distribution group. Each station can: b Publish one 1024-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from 1 to n periods of the Mast task of the processor b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 variables. Validity for each variable is controlled by health status bits linked to a refresh timeout configurable between 50 ms and 1 s. Variable elements cannot be accessed. The total size of the subscribed variables reaches 4 K contiguous bytes. To optimize Ethernet network performance further, Global Data can be configured with a multicast filtering option. Together with switches in the ConneXium range, this option performs data broadcasting only on Ethernet ports with a Global Data service subscriber station. If the switches are not used, Global Data is multicast on all switch ports.
7
7.1
NTP time synchronization service
Power supply
Processor Internal clock
Ethernet module NTP request (S)NTP client Ethernet network NTP response
NTP server
Premium/Quantum
The time synchronization service is based on the NTP, which is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet TCP/IP from a server or another time reference source (e.g., a radio, satellite, etc).
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/8
(continued)

System approach
SMTP electronic mail notification service

SMTP is a simple, programmed mail notification service that allows PLC applications to report the conditions it monitors by exception. The PLC automatically and dynamically creates electronic mail to alert specified users with data, alarms, and events. Recipients may be local or remote.
Nota : This service is available on the latest Premium and Quantum Ethernet modules and CPUs when they operate with Unity Pro software. A more comprehensive mail service, independent of the PLC application, is available on the FactoryCast HMI active Web server modules .
SMTP usage SMTP uses a simple yet powerful mechanism. Predefined email headers are linked with the body of the mail, which is created dynamically from the latest information in the automation application. The user logic program can trigger the message based on a predefined event or condition. Using a function block, one of 3 predefined headers is selected, and an email message with variable information and text (up to 240 bytes) is sent from the PLC. Each of the three mail headers contains these common predefined items: email recipient list, sender name, and subject. This information can be defined and updated by an authorized administrator using the configuration Web pages.
SNMP service protocol

With Simple Network Management Protocol installed on a network management station, you can monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components and deliver rapid diagnostics if a problem occurs. SNMP is used to: b Query devices such as computer stations, routers, switches, bridges or terminal devices to view their status b Obtain statistics for the network on which the devices are connected. The management software respects the traditional client/server model. However, to avoid confusion with other communication protocols using this terminology, we prefer these definitions: b IntraVUE from Network vision b Network manager for the client application running on the computer station b SNMP agent for the server application that runs on the device Transparent Ready can be managed by any SNMP network manager, including HP Openview or IBM Netview. Standard SNMP is used to access configuration and management objects included in the management information base (MIB) for the devices. MIBs must comply with certain standards to be accessed by all managers on the market. Depending on the device complexity, manufacturers can add certain objects to the private databases. The Transparent Ready private MIB includes management objects specific to the Telemecanique offer. These objects simplify installation, implementation, and maintenance for Transparent Ready products in an open environment. The Transparent Ready products support 2 SNMP network management levels: b Standard MIB II, a first level of network management, can be accessed via this interface. It lets the manager identify the devices and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of the Ethernet TCP/IP interface b MIB Transparent Ready interface. Management of the Transparent Ready devices is improved via this interface. This MIB includes a set of data that enables the network management system to supervise all the Transparent Ready services. The Transparent Ready private MIB can be downloaded from the Web server from any Ethernet Transparent Ready module in a PLC.
7
7.
48373-EN_Ver1.0.fm/9
(continued)
Ethernet in machines and Installations

System approach
Performance of Ethernet TCP/IP network
Selecting the communication architecture
When selecting an architecture, take performance into account at the earliest possible stage. You must: 1 v v v v Have a clear idea of your needs with respect to: quantity and type of devices to be interconnected volume and type of exchanges expected response times environment.
2 Compare your needs with the characteristics of the offers available and, be aware that the precise performance level between any 2 points in an architecture depends on the weakest link in the chain, which can be: v a function of the hardware v a function of the applications (size, architecture, OS, machine power, etc.); these are often poorly defined at this stage of project. 3 Select the most suitable architecture. The objective of this discussion is to provide information and guidelines to help you answer the second point. Your architecture's performance is linked to numerous parameters, and we are not delivering all information you need for a complete calculation. We concentrate the guidelines needed to evaluate the network load for the application requirement. Network load calculations require numerous parameters. We do not intend to describe the whole calculation methodology, but to deliver main guidelines.
Evaluating the network load Calculations of all the communication services for all devices connected to the network are required. In most cases the load is well below the Ethernet network limits and does not have a significant effect on the total application response time. Ethernet network transaction time is less than 10% of the total application response time. To get a low network load and avoid a huge theoretical calculation, we strongly recommend that you separate the collision domain to limit the network load, using only switched network (a tree, star, or daisy chain topology).
7
7.1
7/10
(continued)

System approach
Standard and FactoryCast Web services
Web services overview

Database Connectivity
Active Web server Class D
E-mail notification
Schneider Electric offers a wide range of Transparent Ready products integrating Web services: controllers and PLCs, safety PLCs, industrial PCs, HMI devices (2), variable speed drives, distributed I/O modules, gateways, switches, inductive identification systems, etc. These products provide different levels of Web services and communication services on Ethernet TCP/IP, according to user requirements. Among these Transparent Ready products, FactoryCast defines a range of modules and gateways with configurable Web server combining: b Real-time communication functions based on Ethernet TCP/IP. b Predefined Web pages for advanced installation diagnostics. b And the capacity to host dynamic user-defined Web pages or any document (.doc, pdf, etc) designed to assist maintenance. Web services embedded in Ethernet modules and gateways In the Transparent Ready approach, Ethernet modules and gateways integrate Ethernet TCP/IP services (Modbus TCP/IP messaging, SNMP network management functions, etc). They also offer, depending on the product, the following Web functions: b Standard Web services (predefined). b FactoryCast configurable Web services. b FactoryCast HMI active Web services. There are two ranges of configurable Web server: b FactoryCast modules with Modicon M340, TSX Micro, Premium, Quantum, Momentum automation platforms. These modules provide transparent access to system and application diagnostic information in real-time using Web technologies. b FactoryCast Gateway that integrate all the network interfaces, a router RAS function and a customizable Web server in a stand alone unit. The FactoryCast Gateway is a cost-effective response to the need to integrate serial installations (Modbus or Uni-Telway) in an existing Ethernet TCP/IP infrastructure, as well as requirements for customized remote access services including remote diagnostics, maintenance, monitoring and control using a simple Web browser.
HMI functions
User defined Web pages
Configurable Web server Class C
Graphic data monitoring
Application diagnostic
Data monitoring
Standard Web server Class B
Device diagnostic
Device configuration
Web services presentation

Standard Web services Standard Web services are integrated in the following Schneider Electric Ethernet products: PLC processors and Ethernet modules, distributed I/O modules, variable speed drives, Ethernet gateways. See selection guide page 7/12. Using a simple Web browser, the standard Web services provide the following ready-to-use: b Device configuration setup b Remote device diagnostic and maintenance b Device data monitoring (read/write variables and status). The embedded Web server is a real-time data server. All the data are presented in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed using any Web browser supports the embedded JAVA code. The standard functions provided by the Web server are supplied ready to use and therefore do not require any programming of either the PLC or device or the client PC supporting the Web browser.
7
7.
(1) In order to simplify choice and ensure their interoperability within a system, each Transparent Ready product is identified by the class of services it provides. Letter A, B, C or D (level of service for the Web server) followed by 10, 20 or 30 (level of service for Ethernet communication). See pages 3/3 to 3/5. (2) HMI = Human Machine Interface.
7/11
Technical information (continued),

System approach
Presentation of the Web services (continued)

FactoryCast configurable Web services FactoryCast configurable Web services are integrated in the following Schneider Electric Ethernet products: Modicon M340, TSX Micro, Premium and Quantum FactoryCast PLCs modules and FactoryCast Gateway modules. In addition to the predefined Web services, the configurable Web server offers the following utilities: b Graphic application diagnostics (customized graphic views created by the user) b Graphic monitoring via animated Web pages created by the user and stored in the Web server module. And depending on the products: b Management of controllers system and application alarms, with partial or total acknowledgement (ready-to-use Alarm Viewer pages) b SOAP/XML server interface (1). FactoryCast Web services can also be used to customize supervision, diagnostics and maintenance interfaces via user-defined Web pages or any other document (doc, pdf, etc) transferred to the module.
FactoryCast HMI active Web services FactoryCast active Web services are integrated in the Premium and Quantum FactoryCast HMI PLC modules. The FactoryCast HMI services provide in addition HMI functions, which are executed in the module itself: b Data acquisition with real-time HMI database management, independent of the PLC processor b Data processing (arithmetic and logical calculations) b Direct connectivity with relational databases (traceability, data login) b Recipe management (read/write) b Alarm and report notification by E-mail b Active page server, dynamic generation of animated HTML pages b SOAP/XML client/server interface(1). FactoryCast HMI is defined as an active Web server used to execute HMI functions without any effect on the PLC application program and therefore on its scan time.
7
7.1
(1) Standard protocol providing interoperability with computer management applications, see page 7/5.
7/12
(continued)

System approach
Selection of Telemecanique brand Transparent Ready products

Product Reference Embedded Web server Standard, class B10/B20 Configurable, class C20/C30 FactoryCast Active, class D10 FactoryCast HMI FactoryCast FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI With BMX RWS C016M memory card FactoryCast
Modicon Quantum platform
Processors Modules
140 CPU 651 50/60 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 140 NWM 100 00 TSX P57 2623 M TSX P57 2823 M TSX P57 3623 AM TSX P57 4823 AM TSX P57 1634 M TSX P57 2634 M TSX P57 3634 M TSX P57 4634 M TSX P57 5634 M TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 110WS TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 BMX NOE 0100 TSX ETZ 410 TSX ETZ 510 171 CCC 960 20/30 171 CCC 980 20/30 171 ENT 110 01/02
Modicon Premium platform
Processors
Modules
Modicon M340 platform
Processors Module
Modicon TSX Micro platform Modicon Momentum platform
Modules
M1E processors Modules
Advantys STB Network STB NIP 2212 distributed I/O interface Altivar ATV 71/61 Communication VW3 A3 310 variable speed drives card Inductel identification station XGK S1715503 FactoryCast Web Gateway RTU information servers W@de TSX ETG 1000/1010 TSX HEW 315ppC TSX HEW 320ppppC TSX HEW 330pp
FactoryCast
7
7.
7/13
(continued)

System approach
PLC standard Web services

Remote Web client "Thin Client" PC Web client
Intranet Magelis Smart iPC
Internet
Firewall
"Thin Client" Web client
Web server Premium
Web server Quantum
Web server
Modicon M340
The predefined diagnostic, PLC Rack Viewer, and monitoring, Data Editor, functions are supported by the following Modicon PLC plateforms (1): b Modicon M340 b TSX Micro platform b Premium platform b Quantum platform. See module references on page 7/13. These functions can be accessed using a standard Internet browser. They are ready to use and secured (password-protected). They can be used locally or remotely via: b Intranet b A modem and RAS server b Internet.
7
7.1
(1) For standard Web services integrated in the variable speed drives, please consult our catalogue Soft starters and variable speed drives.
7/14
(continued)

System approach
PLC standard Web services (continued)

PLC diagnostics function Rack Viewer The Rack Viewer function (PLC rack display) can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It displays the following in real-time: b LED status on the front panel of the PLC b The PLC version b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and words b Detailed diagnostics of all I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration.
Quantum hardware configuration
Data monitoring function Data Editor The Data Editor can be used to create animated tables for real-time read/write access to lists of PLC variables. Various animation tables can be created by the user and saved in the Web server module. In addition when using FactoryCast Web servers: b The variables can be entered and displayed by their symbol (S_Pump 234) b The write access option can be enable/desable for each variable using the Factorycast software. The write access is protected by a dedicated password b Dedicated data monitoring tool can be use on pocket PC or PDA terminal.
7
7.
7/15
(continued)
3

System approach
FactoryCast configurable PLC Web services

In addition to standard Web services, FactoryCast modules (see selection table on page 7/13) support the following functions: b Alarm Viewer b Creation and display of graphical views via an online graphic editor (Graphic Data Editor integrated) b Hosting and display of user defined Web pages created by the user b SOAP/XML server interface.
Internet Magelis Smart iPC
Remote Web client
Modem + RAS server
Firewall
Thin Client Web client Intranet
Web server Premium
Web server TSX Micro Quantum Web server
Alarm Viewer function Alarm Viewer is a ready-to-use, password-protected function. This function is used to manage the alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion) generated at PLC level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks created by the user). These alarms are store in the PLC diagnostic buffer (specific memory area used to store all diagnostic events), this function is available with the Premium/Atrium platforms (with PL7 or Unity Pro software) and the Quantum platform (with Unity Pro software). The diagnostics viewer consists in a Web page displaying a list of messages, with the following informations: b Time stamping of the appearence/disappearence of the faul. b Alarm message b Alarm status b Type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB).
7
7.1
Graphic Data Editor function This function is used to create graphical views animated by PLC variables. This graphic editor is available online ready-to-use and also offline using FactoryCast configurator software. These views are created by simple copy/paste operations, using a library of predefined graphic objects. The object parameters are set according to user requirements (colors, PLC variables, labels, etc.). List of graphic objects provided: b Analog and digital indicators b Horizontal and vertical bar charts b Dialog boxes for displaying messages and controling/displaying values b Pushbuttons b Trending charts b Tanks, valves, motors, etc. Many views created can be saved in the Web server modules. These customized graphic objects can be reused in user defined Web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages.
7/16
(continued)
3

System approach
FactoryCast configurable PLC Web server (continued)

User Web page hosting and display function FactoryCast Web modules also have an 8 Mbyte memory (1), which is accessed in the same way as a hard drive and can be used to host Web pages and all user-defined documents in Word or Acrobat Reader (for example, maintenance manuals, diagrams, etc). These Web pages can be created using any standard tool, for example Microsoft FrontPage, that enables creation and editing in HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are created using the Graphic Data Editor supplied with FactoryCast. The Web pages created can be used, for example, to: b Display and modify all PLC variables in real time b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc). This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic screens used for the following purposes: b Display, monitoring, diagnostics b Generation of realtime production reports b Maintenance help b Operator guides. SOAP/XML server interface FactoryCast modules incorporate a standard SOAP/XML data server that provides direct interoperability between automation devices and computer management applications (MES, ERP, SAP, pNet application, etc). See page 7/5. FactoryCast Web server configuration software The FactoryCast Web server configuration software is supplied on CD-ROM with every FactoryCast module (TSX ETZ 510 for TSX Micro, TSX ETY 110WS/5103 for Premium, 140 NOE 771 11 for Quantum and TSX ETG 1000/1010 gateways). This software is used for configuration and administration of the Web server embedded in these modules. It is compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. It provides the following functions: b Setting the parameters of the FactoryCast functions v Definition of access security, passwords v Importing of PLC symbol databases v Definition of access to write-enabled variables b Management of the Web site: v Management of default Web site pages v Management of user Web site pages (2) v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages v Downloading of Web pages between the PC and the module v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including animations and Java beans) b Simulation mode The application and the Web site (including the Java animations) can be set up in online mode or in simulation mode. Simulation mode is used to test the operation of the Web application without a FactoryCast module (with no physical connection to a PLC) thereby simplifying debugging. A graphics editor integrated in the configuration software can be used for easy customization of graphic objects (bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc). b Creation of user Web pages (2) User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage or similar, not supplied). User Web pages created in the FactoryCast environment are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on Web technologies (HTML and Java) they provide realtime access to PLC variables using the FactoryCast graphic object library (Java beans).
7
7.
(1) Memory not affected by power outages or reinitialization of the PLC. (2) FactoryCast includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up animations for realtime access to the PLC variables in HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects.
7/17
(continued)

System approach
FactoryCast HMI active Web services

The FactoryCast HMI Web services are integrated in PLC Web servers modules on Premium and Quantum PLC platforms. These modules have the following Ethernet and Web services: b Ethernet TCP/IP communication functions: v TCP/IP messaging service with Modbus TCP/IP and Uni-TE TCP/IP protocols v SNMP agent for standardized network management, which supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB. b FactoryCast configurable Web services: v "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics functions, see page 7/15 v Data Editor for PLC data monitoring, see page 7/15 v Alarm Viewer for PLC alarm display, see page 7/16 v Graphic Data Editor for online graphical PLC data monitoring, see page 7/16 v Hosting and displaying user defined Web pages, see page 7/17. FactoryCast HMI modules also provide the following specialized HMI Web services: b Dedicated Real-time Database managed in the module, combining PLC data acquisition and management of local internal variables b Data processing.function with arithmetic and logical calculations b Database logging function with direct connection to the SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle relational databases for data archiving or tracking b E-mail notification for alarms and reports b SOAP/XML client/server interface, see page 7/5 b Recipe management b Web based HMI interface with actives Web pages support. By simply setting parameters, the FactoryCast HMI application development software can be used to set up these functions in an intuitive and user-friendly way. A simulation mode, which is integrated in the software, can be used to test the operation of the FactoryCast HMI application without the need for a physical connection to a module and a PLC, thereby simplifying application debugging.
Architectures
FactoryCast HMI Web servers can be integrated in various architectures: b Installations that require a flexible and distributed HMI solution b Combined architectures supplementing conventional SCADA systems b Architectures where a direct link is required between automation systems and information management levels (IT link).
Relational database Thin Client
7
Ethernet TCP/IP
IPC
Flexible and distributed Web based HMI solution The use of Web-based technologies means that FactoryCast HMI can replace conventional HMI or SCADA solutions in applications where architectures require a flexible multistation HMI, thus providing a temporary "nomadic" remote control function. These architectures consist of: b Several PLCs networked on Ethernet, eqyuipped with FactoryCast HMI Web server modules .... b One or more PC terminals simply equipped with a Web browser thus providing a Thin Client interface (license free) b If necessary, a relational database in which FactoryCast HMI can archive data directly from the automation system. FactoryCast HMI modules read PLC data and execute HMI services (E-mail, interpreted calculations, connection to relational databases, updating Web pages) at source in the PLC, without affecting the PLC program or the scan time. This solution provides: b A reliable HMI application, which is executed at source in a robust PLC device. b An integrated multistation interface and remote access that is easy and cost-effective to set up ("Thin Client" terminal) b An HMI application that is easy to maintain (the application is housed in a single location on the server side) b Preventive maintenance via E-mail b Greater availability of the data archiving done directly from PLC source.
7.1
Web server
Premium
Quantum
Web server
Premium
Modicon M340
7/18
(continued)

System approach
Architectures (continued)
Nomad HMI SCADA Links with IT
Combined architectures In this type of architecture, FactoryCast HMI supplements conventional SCADA systems such as Vijeo Look or Monitor Pro .SCADA meets the requirement for centralizing information for global supervision from a central site. Combining a FactoryCast HMI solution and a conventional SCADA solution enables: b Simplification of the SCADA application by locating some of the SCADA processing function at source, at PLC level b Increased availability of the traceability function due to the direct connection between FactoryCast HMI modules and relational databases b Powerful ready to use remote diagnostics capacities b Nomadic client stations to be connected to the Intranet or Internet via Thin Client PC or PDA devices.
Intranet
Web server Premium
Web server Quantum
Nomad HMI
Links with IT
Intranet
Direct links with the information management levels In this type of architecture FactoryCast HMI eliminates the need for intermediate devices (software or hardware gateways), which are expensive to install and maintain, by establishing a direct links between the automation levels and the global information management levels (MES, ERP, etc). The PLC manages the following links which allow a "collaborative" automation system to be set up, making it: easier to share data in real time: b Directly archives information from the automation system in relational databases, which allows a collaborative automation system to be set up, making it easier to share data in real-time b Directly interacts with IT applications through SOAP/XML client/server interface. This solution results in: b Simplified architectures b Lower installation, development and maintenance costs b Increased reliability of information (the data is collected at source) b Increased interoperability with IT applcations b Greater availability of data archiving.
Web server Premium
Web server Quantum
Thin Client Relational database Magelis Smart iPC E-mail notification Database connection Active Web pages refresh
Specialized HMI services

PLC data acquisition and real_time database With an internal architecture similar to that of an HMI/SCADA system, FactoryCast HMI modules manage its own variable database in real-time, independently of the PLC program. It is this variable database that is used to execute various functions, including internal processing, archiving, alarm, E-mail, etc. Variables in this real-time database are updated using the automation system PLC data acquisition service. This service becomes operational once the following parameters have been set in the FactoryCast HMI software: b Direct import of PLC variable/symbol databases (no double entry). b Definition of the frequency of acquisition (period at which the variables are updated).
Note: A FactoryCast HMI application running in a Premium configured FactoryCast HMI module can access also the remote PLC variables in the architecture transparently on the network (X-Way/Uni-TE transparent protocols).
7
7.
Recipe management
FactoryCast HMI realtime database
Interpreted calculations
PLC data
Local data logging
Characteristics:
FactoryCast HMI modules
v Maximum number of I/O variables per application: 1000 variables from PLCs v Maximum number of internal variables per application: 100 v Acquisition frequency: 500 ms, minimum.
7/19
(continued)

System approach
(continued) Calculation functions The FactoryCast HMI server can carry out various arithmetic and logical operations on a combination of variables from the HMI database. These calculations include, for example, scaling, formatting, logic processing for event triggering, etc. This calculation function can be used for local data processing independently of the PLC CPU processor and is provided in the form of spreadsheets where the formulae are defined in cells. The spreadsheets are interpreted and processed by the server. The result of each formula is associated with a new internal variable. The processing of each spreadsheet is initiated by a trigger.
Specialized HMI services
Connection to relational databases The FactoryCast HMI module can be connected directly and completely autonomously to the following remote relational databases: b SQL Server b MySQL b Oracle This connection enables all internal or process data to be archived directly form the FactoryCast HMI module without any intermediary system (hardware of software). The data can be archived (written) periodically and/or on a specific event. These variables can either be from PLCs (I/O bits, internal bits, internal words and registers) or local to the module. The FactoryCast HMI "Roll Over" function checks the size of tables by managing the maximum number of records. This circular data archiving function automatically deletes the oldest data and can be accessed by simply setting parameters in the FactoryCast HMI software. Characteristics:
v v v v v Number of databases that can be connected: 3 Number of tables that can be written per database: 10, maximum Number of columns per table: 50, maximum Type of database supported: Oracle, SQL Server and MySQL Automatic table creation: The FactoryCast HMI server automatically creates a table in the database if one does not already exist
E-mail notification The FactoryCast HMI module can, on a specific event, send E-mail completely autonomously to a predefined list of E-mail addresses. This function is executed independently of the PLC program. The event that triggers the E-mail may be associated with the following: b A PLC variable (I/O, internal variable) b An alarm, a threshold overshoot b A machine or process state b An operator action, etc. When an E-mail is sent, it is relayed through an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server to a destination E-mail address. The E-mail service is compatible with all SMTP servers. A return address can be defined should delivery to the destination address fail. This E-mail notification is very efficient for advanced remote diagnostic, maintenance, data alarming and reporting. The text of the E-mail can contains information such as real-time process values integrated in the message of the mail useful for reporting additional live information to the end user and also hyperlinks to other Web pages or documents (maintenance guide, schematics, etc) in the module or to other Web sites to serve as a guide to the end user. Characteristics:
v Configuration of the SMTP server: Compatible with all SMTP servers v Maximum number of E-mail: 100 v Contents of E-mail messages: Free text with embedded dynamic values and hyperlinks (unlimited).
7
7.1
7/20
(continued)

System approach
Specialized HMI services (continued)

Local data logging FactoryCast HMI modules can process data into a file internally in its flash memory. This file can be either: b exported via FTP b attached to an E-Mail. This feature is particularly useful for stand alone installations or substations which are not connected to an intranet or for data storage backup. SOAP/XML client/server interface For total interoperability purpose, FactoryCast HMI implements SOAP/XML Web service as a: b Server function so that it can answer to SOAP requests generated by any client application (MES, ERP, SAP, SCADA or third party application running on pNET or Java environment) b Client function so that it can take the initiative to send SOAP requests to a SOAP server application (another FactoryCast module or an ERP, MES, IT program to exchange data. See page 7/5. Recipe management The recipe function allows FactoryCast HMI application to read Recipe files automatically on process event or operator command and apply the recipe values by writing them in a sigle shot to the PLC memory. This function brings great flexibility in operations providing capability to simply execute production changes by modifying manufacturing or process set points and parameters. Characteristics:
v Recipe files are described in XML format (SOAP/XML format) v Recipe files can be stored locally in the module or on a remote system v Recipe files contain a consistent set of values conforming a recipe template, values which are written in the PLC memory.
Web based HMI interface The memory of FactoryCast HMI Web server is open to hosting user defined Web pages in order to provide a graphical HMI interface. Its Active Web server provides a dynamic refresh of the Web pages generated by the server itself. FactoryCast HMI supports two types of Web pages: b HTML pages animated in real-time with graphical Java objects which are useful for creating graphical human machine interface (FactoryCast HMI comes with a complete graphic objects Java library). b Active Web pages dynamically generated by the server itself with integration of PLC variables values inside the HTML code (PLC tags) which can be used for reporting purpose. These active pages consisting in pure HTML code are fully compatible either with thin client terminal devices such as Pocket PC, PDA, or with any standard PC.
7
7.
FactoryCast HMI application development software

FactoryCast HMI application development software, referenced TLX CD FCHMI V1M, provides multiproject management and complete control of FactoryCast HMI applications, during both the development and the debugging phases, thanks to the online mode and simulation mode (operational when the system is offline). This software enables the intuitive and user-friendly setup of HMI functions by simply setting parameters using a tree structure of the application and can be used for complete management of the Web site: b Setting parameters for HMI functions. b Management of the Web site. b Simulation mode. See page 3/13 for consult product data sheet.
7/21

CAN presentation
CAN presentation
CANopen is an application layer protocol based on the controller area network (CAN). Bosch designed CAN for automotive applications in the early 1980s. Its use in the automotive industry has proved its suitability in difficult environments. CAN is a serial bus system based on a publisher subscriber model. In the publisher subscriber model the publisher sends a message to the subscribers. In CAN this has been implemented using a broadcast architecture. The sender (publisher) broadcasts the message together with an identifier on the bus. The receivers monitor all traffic on the bus. If the identifier matches the filtering criteria of the subscription the client reads and processes the complete message. This turns the receiver into a subscriber. Producer
request payload: 0 to 8 octets CAN data frame
Consumer(s)
indication
This is the push mode of the publisher subscriber model. CAN also supports a pull mode of the publisher subscriber model. A consumer may trigger the transmission of a message with a remote transmission request. The remote transmission request (RTR) is a CAN frame with the RTR flag set. When the producer receives such a request is transmits the associated message. Producer
request payload: 0 octets CAN data frame
Consumer(s)
indication
response
payload: 0 to 8 octets CAN data frame
confirmation(s)
A problem that normally arises with a broadcast architecture is that different network nodes may send at the same time. CAN solves this problem with two mechanisms. Firstly, a sender monitors the medium to check whether another node is already sending. If the medium is free the node starts sending. Several nodes may start sending never the less at the same time. CAN solves this with a priority scheme.
7
Idle SOF
identifier
RTR
IDE
r0
DLC
Data
FCS
ACK
EOF
IFS
Idle
7.2
A CAN frame starts with a start of frame (SOF) bit. Eleven identifier bits follow from the most significant bit to the least significant bit. The next bit is the remote transmission request (RTR) bit followed by five control bits and up to eight bytes payload. The control bits are the extended ID (IDE), a reserve bit, and three bits encoding the length of the payload in the data part (DLC) in bytes. A frame check sequence (FCS) follows after the payload of up to eight bytes. The sender transmits a recessive ACK bit, which will be overwritten with a dominant bit by the receivers that have received the frame without error at this point of time. The end of frame (EOF) bit signals the end of the message.
7/22
(continued)

CAN presentation
CAN presentation (continued)

The bus must remain in recessive state for intermission frame space (IFS) bit lengths before the next frame starts. If no node is ready to send the bus will remain idle. The bit encoding on the medium has a dominant and a recessive value. If two nodes send at the same time, a listener will only see the dominant value. In the binary encoding the value '0' is dominant and the value '1' is recessive. When a node is sending it is always listening on the bus. If it is sending a recessive value and is receiving a dominant bit it stops sending and continues listening only. This simple mechanism avoids collisions on the CAN bus. The message with the lower identifier wins the bus arbitration.
Identifier 6 5 4 1 0 0 Controlfield 3 2 1 SOF RTR Data (0...8 octets)
10 1 1 1
9 1 1 1
8 0 0 0
7 0 1 0
3 1
2 1
1 0
0 1
Node 0 Node 1 Node 2
1 1 1
0 0 0
Node 1 is listening only 1 0 1 Node 2 is listening only
CAN bus Node 1 looses arbitration Node 2 looses arbitration
Arbitration phase
Time
CAN is a carrier sense multiple access, with collision detection and arbitration on message priority, (CSMA/CD+AMP) bus system. As the collision in true sense does not occur in CAN it is often described as CMSA/CA (carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance). The CAN message frame described above is a basic message frame. For applications, which need a larger set of identifiers, the extended CAN message frame has been defined. The extended frame has 18 additional ID bits in the header after the control bits. This extends the range from 211 to 229 different identifiers. Both frame types can coexist on one bus. CAN has three different mechanisms to detect erroneous messages: b The frame check sequence (FCS) contains the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the frame. The receiver also computes the CRC of the frame and compares its own result with the FCS. If they are not equal the frame has a CRC error. b The receiver detects errors in the structure of the frame. If the frame has a faulty structure, the frame has a format error. b The receiver of a frame issues a dominant acknowledge (ACK) bit if it has received a frame without error. If the sender does not receive a dominant ACK bit, it generates an acknowledgement error. b The sender also monitors the bits on the bus. If a bit is sent and the received counterpart differs, the sender recognizes an error. b CAN uses no return to zero (NRZ) coding with bit stuffing. If the sender should transmit five equal bits in a row it introduces an additional inverted bit. This bit stuffing enables the receiver to synchronize on the bit stream. The receivers remove the stuffed bits from the transmitted frame. If more than five bits have the same value, the receiver recognizes a bit stuffing error. There are several application level protocols on top of CAN available, such as DeviceNet and CANopen, as CAN does not define an application level protocol by itself.
7.2
7/23
(continued)

CANopen presentation
CANopen defines an application layer and communication profile based on CAN. CANopen defines the following communication objects (messages): b Process data object (PDO) b Service data object (SDO) b Network management object (NMT) b Special function object (SYNC, EMCY, TIME) Properties b b b b b b Serial data transmission based on CAN Up to 1 Mbps Efficiency approx. 57 % Up to 127 nodes (devices) Multi master capable Interoperability of devices from different vendors
Object dictionary The object dictionary is the interface between the application program and the communication interface.
Communication interface
Object dictionary
Application process
7
Process data object (PDO) Process data objects are used for fast transmission of process data. A PDO can carry a payload of 8 bytes, which is the maximum payload of a CAN frame. The transmission of a PDO uses the consumer producer model of CAN extended by synchronous transfers. The synchronous transfer of PDOs relies on the transfer of SYNC messages on the CAN bus. A PDO is sent in cyclical mode after a configurable number (1 to 240) of received SYNC messages. It is also possible to wait for the availability of data from the application process and send a PDO after the next received SYNC message. This is called acyclical synchronous transfer. Service data object (SDO) Service data objects are intended for transmission of parameters. SDOs provide access to the object dictionary of remote devices. An SDO has no length restriction. If the payload does not fit into the CAN frame, it will be split over several CAN frames. Each SDO is acknowledged. SDO communication uses a peer-to-peer communication with one peer acting as server and the other acting a client.
7.2
7/24
(continued)

CANopen presentation (continued)

Network management objects (NMT) The network management objects (NMT) change the state, or monitor the status, of a CANopen device. A NMT message is a message with CAN identifier 0. This gives the NMT messages the highest possible priority. The NMT message always consists of two bytes payload in the CAN frame. The second byte contains the node ID of the addressed node. It is possible to address all devices with one NMT message with the reserved node ID 0. The first byte encodes the NMT command.
Stopped Operational
Initialization node id: boot-up Pre-operational
A CANopen device starts in the Initialization state after switching the power on. Then the device performs its initialization. When the device has completed its initialization it issues a boot-up NMT object to notify the master. The heartbeat protocol for monitoring the device status is implemented with NMT objects. Special function objects (SYNC, EMCY, TIME) CANopen may have a SYNC producer to synchronize the actions of the CANopen nodes. A SYNC producer issues (periodically) the SYNC object. The SYNC object has the CAN identifier 128. This may introduce some jitter due to the priority of this message. A device internal error may trigger an emergency (EMCY) object. The reaction of the EMCY consumers depends on the application. The CANopen standard defines several emergency codes. The EMCY object is transmitted in a single CAN frame with eight bytes. A CAN frame with the CAN ID 256 with six bytes payload can be used to transmit the time of day to several CANopen nodes. This time stamp (TIME) object contains the daytime value in the Time-Of-Day data type. Watchdog mechanisms CANopen supports two methods of monitoring the status of devices. A network manager may poll each device regularly in configurable time intervals. This is called node guarding. Node guarding is, however, bandwidth consuming. Another mechanism is that each device regularly sends a heartbeat message. This saves bandwidth compared to the node guarding protocol. Network length and bit rate The length is restricted by the bit rate due to the bit arbitration process.
Bit rate (kbps) Max length (m) 1000 20 800 40 500 100 250 250 125 500 50 1000 20 2500 10 5000
In documents about CANopen, you will find often 40 m as a maximum length at 1Mbit/s. This length is calculated without electrical isolation as used in the Schneider Electric CANopen devices. With the electrical isolation, the minimum network length calculated is 4 m at 1 Mbps. However, the experience shows that 20 m are the pratical length that could be shorten by stubs or other influences. Length limitations concerning stubs Length limitations concerning stubs have to be taken into account and are fixed by the following parameters.
Baud rate (kbps) L max. (m) (1) L max. (m) local star (2) Interval min. (m) 0,6 x L local (3) L max. (m) on all bus (4) 1000 0,3 0,6 1,5 800 3 6 3,6 15 500 5 10 6 30 250 5 10 6 60 125 5 10 6 120 50 60 120 72 300 20 150 300 180 750 10 300 600 360 1500
7.2
(1) L max.: Maximum length for one stub. (2) L max. local star: Maximum cumulative length of stubsin the same point when using a multi-port TAP creating a local star. (3) Interval min.: minimun distance between two TAPs. Value for a maximum length of derivation in the same point. Could be computed case by case for each derivation: Interval min. between two derivation is 60 % of the cumulative length of derivations at the same point. (4) L max. on all bus: Maximum cumulative length of stubs on the all bus.
7/25
Technical Information

Physical layer
AS-Interface +
AS-Interface -
Presentation
Press
Press
AS-Interface is an industrial network specially designed for the sensor/actuator level. The objective of AS-Interface is to provide a simple to use, robust protocol. The protocol can be described as most communication protocols with the help of the ISO-OSI levels 1 (physical), 2 (data link), and 7 (application). AS-Interface has two defined standard connection methods:
Physical layer
b Insulation displacement connection (IDC) b M12 connectors. The insulation displacement connection is sometimes called piercing or vampire technology. These terms describe figuratively the connection. The connector consists of two sharp and pointy pins. The pins pierce through the insulation of the cable into the fine copper threads of the wire. To ease this simple connection technology further the AS-Interface Complete Specification defines the shape of cable, like shown in the figure on the left. The flat cable allows the easiest installation of IP67 connectors in the field. The parts of the connector just have to be screwed together. The resulting pressure forces the pins into the wire. The profile of the cable avoids permutation errors during installation. AS-Interface has been designed to work without any bus termination in any topology. AS-Interface reaches the maximum length without termination with modulation based on the Manchester encoding of the telegrams. The sender modulates the current on the AS-Interface cable. Two inductors in the AS-Interface power supply convert this into voltage impulses with a sin2 waveform. This waveform allows omitting any shield on the cable.
Transmitted bit sequence Manchester encoded bit sequence
60 mA
Pause
Transmitted current
Ub+ 2V
Signals on cable
Ub Ub+ 2V
Negative pulse
Positive pulse
Reconstructed bit sequence
Pause
7.3
7/26
(continued)

Physical layer
Physical layer (continued)

The cable length is determined by the signal progression on the cable and the voltage drop of the cable. Both parameters result in maximum distance from the outmost slave to the master of 100 m. The maximum length can be extended with two types of devices on the physical layer. Repeaters regenerate the signals and allow connecting two segments of the AS-Interface bus. Each of the segments may be 100 m. At most two repeaters in a row are allowed. The maximum distance of a slave from the master is 300 m, with repeaters. Another type of devices is line termination: b Passive line termination allows in many installations to extend the segment length up to 200 m. b An active termination can extend the maximum segment length up to 300 m.
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Repeater
Repeater
Slave Up to 100 m
Power supply Up to 100 m
Slave
Slave
Up to 500 m
Master
Up to 300 m Power supply Up to 100 m Slave Slave Slave Slave
Repeater
Repeater
Slave
Slave
7.3
7/27
(continued)

Physical layer
Physical layer (continued)

The topology of AS-Interface cabling system is unrestricted: point-to-point, line, tree, ring This lack of restrictions enables the most direct connections to be made between the AS-Interface system and the various sensors and actuators in an installation. The maximum length of the AS-Interface line is 100 m (including main runs and tap-off runs). Runs of up to 300 m are possible using repeaters (signal regenerators).
Point-to-point
Line
Tree
7
Ring
7.3
7/28
(continued)

Data link layer
Data link layer

The bus arbitration is a single master protocol. The master requests information from the slaves one after another and send in his request the data to be transferred to the slave.
Start
CB
A4
A3
A2 Slave adress
A1
A0
I3
I2
I1
I0
Parity
End
Start bit always 0
Information bits (depending on the kind or request)
End bit always 1
Parity bit (even) Control bit 0: exchange of parameters, data or adresses 1: command
The slave answers with his response. The response contains the data and acts also as an acknowledgement.
Start
I3
I2
I1
I0
Parity
End
Start bit Information bits always (depending on the kind or request) 0 Control bit 0: exchange of parameters, data or adresses 1: command
End bit always 1 Parity bit (even)
AS-Interface has several highly efficient methods to safeguard the data transfer. The signal on the wire is directly checked by the receiver. If it has not the required waveform, the receiver discards the message. The parity bit in each message protects the data on a logical level in combination with the short message sizes of 14 and 7 bits. The deadline for the response (master pause) provides an acknowledgement.
Slave pause Time 14 3 to 10 7 1 to 2
Master request
Master pause
Slave response
Number of bit time units
The bit time is 6 s. This results in a raw data rate of 166.67 kbit/s. Adding up all bit times with the maximum master and slave pauses results in a maximum cycle time of 5082 s.
7.3
7/29
(continued)

Application layer
Application layer
The five address bits allow addressing 32 slaves, but the address 0 has a special function. AS-Interface supports for this reason 31 slaves in standard addressing. The address 0 signals an unaddressed slave. The master or an addressing terminal can assign an address to the slave with address 0 with a master request. This allows addressing the replacement of a faulty slave automatically by the master. This auto-addressing must be implemented and enabled in the master. If enabled, the master will assign the address of a missing slave to the slave with address 0, if the two devices have the same device profile. To extend the maximum number of slaves the standard provides the usage of extended addressing. A slave in extended addressing also uses the highest significant information bit as an address extension. A slave in extended addressing responds only, if the address in the request and the highest significant information bit match the slaves configuration. Slaves in extended addressing are only addressed in each other cycle. Therefore, the refresh time of a slave in extended addressing can be up to 10 ms. Four bits of information are not enough for some sensors/actuators. If a slave device needs more than four bits of output (three in extended addressing), the master transfers the information in several basic request response cycles according to a protocol defined in combined transactions. The master has to know the type of a slave for several reasons. He has to know the type for: v a safety check during bus initialization v auto-addressing v extended addressing v single transaction / combined transaction The type of a device is described by its profile. The device profile consists of an I/O code and up to three ID codes. Each code is a hexadecimal number represented by four bits. The I/O code describes the number of input and output bits of the slave. I/O code 0 Configuraton (1) IIII 1 IIIO 2 IIIB 3 IIOO 4 IIBB 5 IOOO 6 7 8 9 BBBB BBBB OOOO OOOI A B OOOB OOII C D OOBB OIII E OBBT
(1) I: input, B: bidirectional, O: output, T: tristate.
The following profiles exist currently for standard addressing:

Profile name Remote I/Os (X in {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, A, C, E}) Free profile for standard slaves (X in {0, , E}) Remote I/O with dual signals (X in {0, 3, 8}) Safety sensor Single sensor with extended control High speed slave profile for combined transaction type 5 Analog profile Extended analog profile Integrated analog profile Extended integrated analog profile Combi slave with support of combined transaction type 2 Safety sensor with non-safe outputs Motor control device (electromechanical) Motor control device (semiconductor) Dual actuator with feedback Single actuator with monitoring I/O code X X X 0 1 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 B D ID code 0 F 1 B 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 B D E 1 1
An ID code A describes a slave with extended addressing. The following profiles exist currently for standard addressing:
Profile name Remote I/Os (X in {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, A, C, E}) Free profile for slaves in extended addressing (X in {0, , E}) Remote I/Os with dual signals (X in {0, 3, 7, 8, B} Single sensor with extended control Combi slave with support of combined transaction type 2 4I/4O in extended addressing mode Slave profile for combined transaction type 4 (single channel) Slave profile for combined transaction type 4 (dual channel) 8I/8O in extended addressing Slave with support of combined transaction type 2 I/O code X X X 3 7 7 7 7 7 B ID code A A A A A A A A A A ID2 code 0 E 2 1 5 7 8 9 A 5
7.3
The slave profiles are often written in the following syntax: S-<I/O code>-<ID code>-<ID2 code>. The ID1 code is not defined by the AS-Interface Complete Specification V3.0. It can be set by the vendor of a device or the end user. 7/30
(continued)

System versions
AS-Interface system versions

The original version of the AS-Interface system (V1) has been followed by version V2.1, which incorporates the following enhancements: b Possibility of connecting a maximum of 62 slaves, compared with 31 previously, by means of a 2-bank addressing system (called extended or A/B addressing). b Possibility of transmitting a "peripheral fault" message to the AS-Interface master without totally inhibiting the slave (continuity of service). This means that communication faults can be separated from faults associated with the product peripherals. b Management of analogue slaves. Important: products that conform to the V2.1 specification do not necessarily include all these enhancements.
Extended or A/B addressing

ASI20MT4IE (A/B addressing) address 2A ASI20MT211OTE (A/B addressing) address 5A ASI20MT413OSE (A/B addressing) address 7A
ASILUFC5 (std addressing) address 3
ASISSLB4 (std addressing) address 4
1
Bank A
29
30
31
Bank B
XALS2001 ASI 67FFP22E (std addressing) (A/B addressing) address 1 address 2B
ASI 67FFP40E ASISAFEMON1 (A/B addressing) (std addressing) address 5B address 6
ASI20MT414OS (std addressing) address 8
AS-Interface masters developed according to the V2.1 specification have 2 addressing banks, A and B. b V2.1 slaves with extended addressing (A/B) connected to this type of master only occupy one of the 2 banks (A or B), allowing up to 62 slaves to be addressed. b V2.1 slaves with standard addressing or V1 slaves can only be addressed in bank A and bank B of the same address is no longer available. It is quite possible to mix V1, V2.1 standard addressing and V2.1 extended addressing slaves, but in this case the total number of slaves will be less than 62. Schneider Electric PLC programming software packages automatically generate the maximum number of slaves possible, according to the type of addressing of the products (standard or extended). The scan time for slaves with extended addressing will be twice that of slaves with standard addressing. Configurations with 4 inputs/4 outputs and with 4 outputs cannot be achieved with extended addressing; they are replaced by configurations with 4 inputs/3 outputs and with 3 outputs.
7.3
7/31
(continued)

System versions
AS-Interface system versions (continued)

Peripheral fault This function allows to signal any external problem on AS-Interface to the PLC and, in particular: b A short-circuit in the sensor supply. b Absence of auxiliary voltage. b Short-circuit or overload on the outputs. On V1 slaves, faults of this type result in total inhibition of the slave, which is no longer "seen" by the PLC.
Analogue
Two new profiles make it possible to use slaves with analogue inputs. The types of input available are: b Voltage 0-10 V. b Current 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA.
Compatibility between master and slave versions V1 slaves V1 masters Compatible V2.1 slaves with V2.1 slaves with standard addressing standard addressing Compatible but peripheral Not compatible faults are not signalled to the master Compatible Compatible V2.1 analogue slaves Not compatible
V2.1 masters
Compatible
Compatible
Example of machine cabled with the AS-Interface system

1
N L
24 V AS-i : 2,4 A
4 2 4 1 5 3 5
6 1 2 3 4 5 Power supplies ASI ABLppppp Master TWD NOI 10M3 Safety monitors ASI SAFEMONp IP 20 interfaces for generic products ASI 20Mppp Interfaces for TeSys model U starters: ASI LUFC5 1 2 3 4 5 6
7.3
IP 67 interfaces for generic products ASI 67FpPppp Motor starters LF1/LF2/LF7/LF8 Interface for Emergency stop ASI SSLB4 Control stations XAL S200p Illuminated indicator banks XVB C21p Tap-offs for ribbon cable: XZ CGpppp, ASI DCPpppp
7/32
(continued)

Safety at Work
Safety at Work
Standard process information and information related to safety can be transmitted on the same network with Safety at Work. Safety at Work is capable of managing safety functions up to category 4 of the standard EN-954-1. It meets the needs of the most common safety applications, such as: b Monitoring of emergency stops with instantaneous break contacts (stop category 0), b Monitoring of emergency stops with delayed break contacts (stop category 1), b Monitoring of switches with and without interlocking, b Monitoring of light curtains, etc. Safety at Work uses the standard AS-Interface protocol for the transmission of safety related data. An additional protocol is layered on top of the standard AS-Interface protocol. Each safety input slave uses the complete four input data bits to transmit one (two channel) safe input. The safe input may be for example an emergency stop button. The slave transmits a unique sequence of four bits as long as the button is not pressed. This sequence is created according to an algorithm, which guarantees that errors like retransmission of messages, short circuits between the two channels are identifiable. If the circuit of a channel is opened, the slave transmits two zero bits in the two bits representing this channel. If the emergency stop button in our example is pressed the slave will transmit four zero bits as long as the button is pressed. The safety function is implemented in an additional device, which listens only on the AS-Interface line. This device is called the safety monitor. The safety monitor reads the responses of all safety slaves and checks the four bits sequence of each safety slave. If the response is zero, it activates the safety function. If the response does not match the sequence of this slave two times in a row, the monitor will activate the safety function. This architecture requires that the safety slaves are configured in the master, even if it does not process the safety inputs. Otherwise the master would not send master requests to the safety slaves and the safety slaves would not send slave responses. The safety monitor could not listen in on the responses and therefore activate the safety function.
7.3
7/33
General
Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U cos 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.8 Breaking I U cos 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 0.8
a.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Motors Slip ring motors: starting, breaking. Squirrel cage motors: starting, breaking whilst motor running. Squirrel cage motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category AC-1 Making I U Ie Ue cos 0.95 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos 0.95
AC-2
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.65
AC-3 Ie y (1) Ie > (2) AC-4 Ie y (1) Ie > (2)
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
1 Ie 1 Ie
0.17 Ue 0.65 0.17 Ue 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.45 1.05 Ue 0.35
8 Ie 8 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.45 1.05 Ue 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
12 Ie 12 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.45 1.05 Ue 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 0.45 1.05 Ue 0.35
d.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Shunt wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Series wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category DC-1 Making I U Ie Ue Breaking L/R (ms) I U 1 Ie Ue Making Breaking L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 1
DC-3
2.5 Ie
Ue
2.5 Ie
Ue
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 2.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 2.5
DC-5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 15
4 Ie
1.05 Ue 15
Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue Breaking I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Utilisation category AC-14 AC-15 Making I U 10 Ie Ue cos 0.7 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos 0.4 cos 0.7 0.3 cos 0.7 0.3
Electromagnets y 72 VA > 72 VA
d.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets Utilisation category DC-13 Making I U Ie Ue Breaking L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) Ie Ue Making L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue Breaking L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3)
(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty. (2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty. (3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50 W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R. Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
7.4
7/34
General
Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load
3-phase 4-pole motors

Current values for power in kW
Rated operational power (1) Indicative rated operational current values at: 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Current values for power in hp

Rated operational power (2) hp 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Indicative rated operational current values at: 110 120 V A 4.4 6.4 8.4 12 13.6 19.2 30.4 44 56 84 108 136 160 208 260 200 V A 2.5 3.7 4.8 6.9 7.8 11 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 62.1 78.2 92 120 150 177 221 285 359 414 552 208 V A 2.4 3.5 4.6 6.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88 114 143 169 211 273 343 396 528 220 240 V A 2.2 3.2 4.2 6 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 604 722 828 954 1030 1180 380 415 V A 1.3 1.8 2.3 3.3 4.3 6.1 9.7 14 18 27 34 44 51 66 83 103 128 165 208 240 320 403 482 560 636 786 440 480 V A 1.1 1.6 2.1 3 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590 550 600 V A 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289 336 382 412 472
kW A A A A 0.06 0.35 0.2 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17 0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23 0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.35 0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49 0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64 0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87 0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6 1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1 2.2 8.5 4.9 3.9 2.8 3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8 4 15 8.5 6.8 4.9 5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7 7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9 11 38 22 17.6 12.8 15 51 29 23 17 18.5 61 35 28 21 22 72 41 33 24 30 96 55 44 32 37 115 66 53 39 45 140 80 64 47 55 169 97 78 57 75 230 132 106 77 90 278 160 128 93 110 340 195 156 113 132 400 230 184 134 160 487 280 224 162 200 609 350 280 203 250 748 430 344 250 315 940 540 432 313 355 1061 610 488 354 400 1200 690 552 400 500 1478 850 680 493 560 1652 950 760 551 630 1844 1060 848 615 710 2070 1190 952 690 800 2340 1346 1076 780 900 2640 1518 1214 880 1000 2910 1673 1339 970 (1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz). (2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).
Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.
7.4
7/35
General
Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment
Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is placed, Schneider Electric can offer specially adapted products to meet your requirements. In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be remembered: b the prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion, b only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be considered.
All climates treatment TC

This is the standard treatment for Telemecanique brand equipment and is suitable for the vast majority of applications. It is the equivalent of treatments described as Klimafest, Climateproof. In particular, it meets the requirements specified in the following publications: b Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at: + 40 C and 95 % relative humidity. b DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber: + 23 C and 83 % relative humidity, + 40 C and 92 % relative humidity. It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification societies: BV-LR-GL-DNV-RINA. Characteristics b Steel components are usually treated with zinc. When they have a mechanical function, they may also be painted. b Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical characteristics. b Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. some prefabricated busbar trunking components). Limits for use of TC (All climates) treatment b TC treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity: Temperature (C) Relative humidity (%)
20 40 50 95 80 50
TC treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes and in particular tropical and equatorial regions where the equipment is mounted in normally ventilated industrial premises. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is virtually non-existent. Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described above, or in equatorial regions if the equipment is mounted outdoors, or if it is placed in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), TC treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken: b The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a TH finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers). b Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC finish. b If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided (0.2 to 0.5 kW per square decimetre of enclosure), that switches on automatically when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the equipment itself during normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature difference). b Special considerations for "Operator dialog" and "Detection" products: for certain pilot devices, the use of TC treatment can be extended to outdoor use provided their enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this case, it is also essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.
7.4
7/36
General
Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment
TH treatment for hot and humid environments

This treatment is suitable for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are regularly subject to condensation, dripping water and the risk of fungi. In addition, plastic insulating components are resistant to attacks from insects such as termites and cockroaches. These properties have often led to this treatment being described as Tropical Finish, but this does not mean that all equipment installed in tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone TH treatment. On the other hand, certain operating conditions in temperate climates may well require the use of TH treated equipment (see limitations for use of TC treatment). Special characteristics of TH treatment b All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage (Standards IEC 60112, NF C 26-220, DIN 5348). b Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat. Components with TH treatment may be subject to a surcharge (1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Protective treatment selection guide

Surrounding environment Duty cycle Internal heating of enclosure when not in use Not necessary No Yes Not necessary Type of climate Protective treatment of of equipencloment sure TC TH TH TH TH
Indoors
No dripping water or condensation Presence of dripping water or condensation Unimportant Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day Continuous Unimportant TC Temperate TC Equatorial TH Unimportant TC Unimportant TC
Outdoors (sheltered)
No dripping water or dew Frequent and regular presence of dripping water or dew Unimportant Not necessary Temperate TC Equatorial TH Temperate TC Equatorial TH Unimportant TC Unimportant TC TC TH TH TH TH TH
Exposed outdoors or near the sea

Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day Continuous No Yes Not necessary
These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of guide UTE C 63-100.
Special precautions for electronic equipment

Electronic products always meet the requirements of TC treatment. A number of them are TH treated as standard. Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, flush mountable controllers CCX and flush mountable operator terminals XBT) require the use of an enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined by standards IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental conditions requiring TH treatment. These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree of protection to at least IP 20 (provided either by their own enclosure or by their installation method) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution does not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing activities, for example).
7.4
Special treatments
For particularly harsh industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) A large number of the Telemecanique brand products are TH treated as standard and are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
7/37
General
Product standards and certifications
Standardisation
Conformity to standards
Telemecanique brand products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or international (IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment). When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and correct practices, these products will allow users to build equipment, machine systems or installations that conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC 60204-1, relating to electrical equipment used on industrial machines). Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has chosen to comply with, through its quality assurance system. On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following: b a declaration of conformity, b a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG), b a homologation certificate or approval, in the countries where this procedure is required or for particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant navy. Code ANSI BS CEI DIN/VDE EN GOST IEC JIS NBN NEN NF SAA UNE Certification authority Name American National Standards Institute British Standards Institution Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov International Electrotechnical Commission Japanese Industrial Standard Institut Belge de Normalisation Nederlands Normalisatie Institut Union Technique de l'Electricit Standards Association of Australia Asociacion Espaola de Normalizacion y Certificacion Country Abbreviation ANSI USA BSI Great Britain CEI Italy VDE Germany CENELEC Europe GOST Russia IEC Worldwide JISC Japan IBN Belgium NNI Netherlands UTE France SAA Australia AENOR Spain
European EN standards
These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free Trade Association and many central and eastern European countries having member or affiliated status). Prepared in accordance with the principle of consensus, the European standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn. European standards incorporated within the French collection of standards carry the prefix NF EN. At the 'Union Technique de l'Electricit' (Technical Union of Electricity) (UTE), the French version of a corresponding European standard carries a dual number: European reference (NF EN ) and classification index (C ). Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE classification C 63-110. This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN EN 60947-4-1. Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC). With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to complying with the requirements of French NF standards, Telemecanique brand components conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries.
Regulations
European Directives
Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each of the member countries of the European Union. The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of goods within the European Union, and it must be applied in all member countries. Member countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of a technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved, referred to as "essential requirements". The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive applicable to his production. As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the Directive(s) for his product by affixing the e mark. The e mark is affixed to Telemecanique brand products concerned, in order to comply with French and European regulations. Significance of the e mark b The e mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) which concern it; this condition must be met to allow free distribution and circulation within the countries of the European Union of any product subject to one or more of the E.U. Directives. b The e mark is intended solely for national market control authorities. b The e mark must not be confused with a conformity marking.
7.4
7/38
General
Product standards and certifications
European Directives (continued)

For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high level of quality assurance. For Telemecanique brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable, depending on the product, and in particular: b the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC: the e mark relating to this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1997. b the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: the e mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1996
ASEFA-LOVAG certification
The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations d'Essais Franaise d'Appareils lectriques Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certificates of conformity and test reports. ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation committee (COFRAC). ASEFA is now a member of the European agreement group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the authorities which are members of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any of the member authorities.
Quality labels
When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes recommended that a Quality label be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity. Code Quality label Country CEBEC Comit Electrotechnique Belge Belgium KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands NF Union Technique de lElectricit France VE sterreichischer Verband fr Electrotechnik Austria SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden
Product certifications
In some countries, the certification of certain electrical components is a legal requirement. In this case, a certificate of conformity to the standard is issued by the official test authority. Each certified device must bear the relevant certification symbols when these are mandatory: Code Certification authority Country CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada UL Underwriters Laboratories USA CCC China Compulsory Certification China Note on certifications issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of approval: Recognized ( ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the Underwriters Laboratories. The component is not approved as a Product for general use because its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application possibilities are limited. A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the certification symbol. Listed (UL) The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a Product for general use and as a component in assembled equipment. A Listed component must carry the certification symbol.
Marine classification societies

Prior approval (= certification) by certain marine classification societies is generally required for electrical equipment which is intended for use on board merchant vessels. Code Classification authority Country BV Bureau Veritas France DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany LR Lloyd's Register Great Britain NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyoka Japan RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy RRS Register of Shipping Russia
7.4
Note
For further details on a specific product, please refer to the Characteristics pages in this catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Office.
7/39
Presentation
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IP code
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid bodies, water and personnel access to live parts
The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529 (2nd edition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water. This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin. Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute towards achieving the required degree of protection (example : control devices mounted on an enclosure). Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example : enclosure with an opening in the base). Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
IP ppp code
The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C). Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB). 1st characteristic numeral: 2nd characteristic numeral: Additional letter: corresponds to protection of the equipment against corresponds to protection of the equipment corresponds to protection of penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel against penetration of water with harmful effects. personnel against direct contact against direct contact with live parts. with live parts.
Protection of the equipment Protection of personnel Non-protected Protected against direct contact with the back of the hand (accidental contacts). Protected against direct finger contact.
0 1
Non-protected Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 50 mm Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 12.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 2.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter > 1 mm. Dust protected (no harmful deposits).
0 1
Non-protected Protected against vertical dripping water, (condensation).
A B
With the back of the hand.

With the finger.
15
Protected against dripping water at an angle of up to 15.
With a 2.5 mm tool.
7
4
Protected against direct contact with a 2.5 mm tool.
60
Protected against rain at an angle of up to 60.
With a 1 mm wire.
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
Protected against splashing water in all directions.
Protected against water jets in all directions.
Dust tight.
Protected against powerful jets of water and waves.
7.4
7
1m
15 cm min
Protected against the effects of temporary immersion. Protected against the effects of prolonged immersion under specified conditions.
8
m
7/40
Presentation
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IK code
Degrees of protection against mechanical impact
The European standard EN 50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system (IK code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against external mechanical impact. Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
IK pp code
The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05). 2 characteristic numerals: corresponding to a value of impact energy.
h (cm) Energy (J)
00 01 02 03 04 05
Non-protected 7.5 10 17.5 25 35 0.15 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7
0,2 kg h
06 07
0,5 kg h
20 40
1 2
08
1,7 kg h
30
7
09 10
5 kg h
20 40 10 20
7.4
7/41
Essential guide to Telemecanique products, the entire Automation and Control offering in just 250 pages
Art. 960015 - DIA1ED2040506EN
This simplified selection guide enables you to quickly select the products you need for all your applications. Divided into sections covering key Automation functions, it provides the basic product characteristics and references.
The efficiency of Telemecanique branded solutions

Used in combination, Telemecanique products provide quality solutions, meeting all your Automation and Control applications requirements.
A worldwide presence
Constantly available b More than 5 000 points of sale in 130 countries. b You can be sure to find the range of products that are right for you and which complies fully with the standards in the country where they are used. Technical assistance wherever you are b Our technicians are at your disposal to assist you in finding the optimum solution for your particular needs. b Schneider Electric provides you with all necessary technical assistance, throughout the world.
www.telemecanique.com
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

Head Office 89, bd Franklin Roosevelt 92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex France www.schneider-electric.com www.telemecanique.com
Due to evolution of standards and equipment, the characteristics indicated in texts and images of this document do not constitute a commitment on our part without confirmation. Design: Schneider Electric Photos: Schneider Electric Printed by:
ART. xxxxxx
01/ 2007
MKTED2O7011EN
Simply Smart !

Machines Installations Industrial Communications

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Machines Installations Industrial Communications

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Automation & Control Machines & Installations with industrial communications

Select the winning network

High functionality in a minimum of space b Freedom in implementation

Telemecanique, catalogues for

Motion and Drives

all Automation & Control functions

Interfaces & I/O

Networks & communication

Machines & Installations with industrial communications

1 Networks in Machines and Installations

3 Ethernet in Machines and Installations

4 CANopen in Machines and Installations

5 AS-Interface in Machines and Installations

6 Collaborative Automation Partner Program

Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/42

1 - Networks in Machines and Installations

Networks in Machines and Installations

Corporate Level Router

SCADA Plant Level

Networks in Machines and Installations

Ethernet TCP/IP - the universal communication standard

Networks in Machines and Installations

CANopen - for machines and installations

(1) Source: CAN in Automation survey 2004.

Networks in Machines and Installations

AS-Interface - simple and safe

AS-Interface in automation architectures

IP20 interface IP67 interface

Safety monitor Safety interface

Dedicated control components Dedicated dialogue components

Networks in Machines and Installations

Analysis with PICCS leads to Preferred implementation

Machine with a set of requirements

Networks in Machines and Installations

Preferred implementations (continued)

From simple to higher complex requirements

Presentation, User Guides

Networks in Machines and Installations

Test, validation and documentation

Customers confidence to finalize the solution

Set the confidence

Presentation, User Guides

Networks in Machines and Installations

Available System User Guides

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

CANopen in Machines and Installations

AS-Interface in Machines and Installations

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

What are the benefits Ethernet provides ?

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

Presentation, value, applications

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

Product finder, examples

Ethernet in Machines and Installations

CANopen in Machines and Installations

What are the benefits CANopen provides ?

CANopen gives you the transparency to Ethernet

Network Interface Network

CANopen in Machines and Installations

CANopen in Machines and Installations

CANopen: The best choice